Home

ChamSys Ltd

1. 124 14 Playback qe HH 125 14 1 Playback Display iier Lii eite eoi eerte ei erbe teet teo Rer EL ere ie 125 14 2 Activating and Releasing Playbacks eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeereneren eene rennen nennen 125 143 Fader COMMOl asco goes che tee oet cue ee eps buste qian ae i De eol et e Ebo Era Erb ede cia alee 126 14 4 Playback Buttons ite die ree EAEE Po iren Renee H dee ra etus iod pe el tells 126 14 4 1 Grand Master amp Sub Master essent rennen eren snnt nenne 126 144 2 Dead Black Out DBO deeper retten tip en e Peta ebur ern epa cet lepide oae ux pesit 127 14 4 3 Add Swap MEE 127 1444 Pase Selects tee e oni e n pene ea nec ene hansen 127 14 4 5 Current Playback eere tele bee setas trae Polk ben te elo Feeds ek Eas vue edi bete d Ede a 127 14 4 6 Playbacks across multiple Pages seen enne nre 128 14 4 7 Manual Gontrol oreet Ete etg e rede eni Dos uy sette veta seis EE E Due gleba p lutea erit 128 IE MEE digesail 129 14 4 9 Manual Split Cross fade iii ee eicit aie rete rra PH aee eo eda 129 14 4 10 Deirsbenrtigd ET 129 14 4 11 PAP COMING a c S 129 145 Playbacks Wand Ow icc sicesscti scetactadeardect ssecasdeidessiedasescchennsesiosdiasdolusens totale tisdended ENA 130 14 5 1 Vestine playDacks iien eem entrare trottoir oit aet eo rite tiiv rena t a tiia
2. nbytes sendto remote ether sock message siz sizeof remote ether message t 1 0 struct sockaddr amp name sizeof name if nbytes 0 remote ether fwdrtrt return TRUE MagicQ User Manual 288 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 33 Controlling MagicQ using the serial port The MagicQ console and MagicQ PC software supports the use of a serial port for controlling external devices such as CD or DVD players video or automation computers The serial port can also be used to remote control the MagicQ console or MagicQ PC software via a simple set of text commands A standard male 9 pin D type connector is provided on MagicQ consoles On MagicQ PC the availability of a serial port will depend on the PC Many modern laptops do not have a serial port however USB to serial converters are readily available MagicQ supports standard baud rates stop bits and parity options for serial communication Note that the use of the serial port on MagicQ PC is only enabled when it is connected to a MagicQ PC Wing 33 1 Enabling the serial port Enable the serial port in the View Settings view of the Setup Window Page down to the Port Settings Select the COM port that you wish to use on the console always select COMI Set the baud rate parity data bits and stop bits SETUP show capture shw last saved 19 mins ago Setting peudsabie 7
3. aa a 19 1 1 Which console model ia reet tree en e ede ele eie eite i decr D de 19 1 2 IDMX512 and Art Net Outputs ceo ies E Cen E SEHR E be NUTUS 20 1 3 Care of your MagicQ console eene nennen nennen nennen nnne eii ia 20 1 4 NEWS eIEITUI Em 20 DZ WONSOLECONCEPIS m 22 2 1 SHOW Nip cC L T 22 2 2 Output channels etiem ee ir beri rates diese ie Pres ba tented ee certain bep eu 22 2 2 1 HIPZLLP chaunels ioo iret es hin E EE S 23 2 3 Ou MeSH 23 DA CUE SUACKS 24 2 5 Play DACKS icc 24 26 CI eC 24 PAS E o E 24 2 8 Window layouts itcrum nia a E EE A EE A E E ETEA ES 25 2 9 Shift FUNCHONS ceesoee Rises ied nisce vase vd AEs A eE EN O oi AEE S AA EEE OA A G E EA EEES eO REET EOE aiei 25 2 10 he Prosrammet nist eiieeii i aa aae Eo rien eD E E e torpe gut deed E OERE 25 PM a a a a a a a 26 3 MlagicQ Console La yolt eei iet erste ciet ette de EDIT n a aoa e 27 3 1 COMMECH ONS EP E 27 S MED dry m 28 3 3 DMX Ero v IE le 28 3A PO Wer Up E ES 29 3 5 Powering Bou E 29 3 6 Resetting the Console isisi e E E E EE EE E E E EEE 29 3 7 Console Way OWL ss ida nn det n crier e UR C n e en EE S E 30 3 7 1 Touch Scre
4. EE EAE 88 8 1 9 FX fade times PE H 88 8 1 10 Initial spreads poene DO eR ren Ee ERR OUT eer EEE De LEA ERR ES 88 SLIL Flicker EX uote tei E AA A edi uptoa deba est pie Cast at ded rae Praec eds 88 8 1 12 Mul ple EX ince tee Rie Hi ELCHE eee bea Leo ies tee REL Used dee tu ie 89 8 1 13 Joining Spliting multiple EX esee nennen nene eene rennen nen 89 8 1 14 Modifying FX for selected Heads eessseesseseeeeeeeeeeee eene emen 89 SLIS Changing EX 1 ient re EHE EISE i EHE EXE e EE FEE Ro EE TEE RA EE E HH deg ea 90 8 1 16 PX Reorder s eS Reit een pm E eu TU ipea ee UE SER ee Tee e Fa ERES RES 90 8 1 17 Blocking EX uen terere E naisiin ieie TOR e osea sa aote epe e UR EUR Do Pk bun eed etaed 90 8 2 Generating user PX iiia eii tse eani aiea E edd ei aae AE AAEE Ee AE ECL aa Fed E SDe dod eleg 90 8 3 IzbnubaogD e 91 5 4 Palette FX Ce 91 8 5 EX using base colout 42e impetere anii a EaR a ees iiaei 91 8 6 FX Library storing and recalling programmed FX seen enne 91 8 7 Importing and Exporting the FX Library eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenen nene nennen 92 I lul cC EccL 93 MagicQ User Manual 6 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 9 1 Using Palette Pu 93 9 2 Recordin Palette I EEOAE 93 9 2 1 Recording individual attributes into a Palette esee 94
5. eee 197 19 24 Locking the Console se irit iss teinne ree huno etta eto ott Ree tton rena Pra etin 198 19 25 rro dena E R 198 19 26 Power Supply Protection eese nne rennen erster nennen 198 20 Using MagicQ on PCs and Macs ecciesie tob e etate i pese ci eee a EE ege coire reis 199 20 1 Simple Generic Console 0 2 eisein e EA E a ee OE 199 20 2 Technician Test Fixture stseene eusianeun eso os erasi aE nEn ER E TEREE EEA o NETRE e Eee dE p aac dg ntl 200 20 3 Dem Shows P 201 PIE MElundbilsm c 202 20 5 MagicQ PC Mac Restrictions neret nennen nennen entren enne 202 21 Puno EU E 203 21 1 Scheduled Bvents eis ebrietate merece Deseo esce ee Peers e esp det ees tege pet bea erba n 203 21 1 1 Dates and days of the Week eee ettet eee euge eps np etc eed aee pene endete Lage e 203 21 1 2 Sunrise Sunset astronomical eese essen enne enne en nnne enne nnns 203 21 2 Automated Start of Playbacks Executes eese eene rennen 204 21 3 ChamSys Audio Interface iei IR eed EE EE EEE EE EU Pec R 204 21 4 Keyboard InaCrOS eere en e eere cobre et sarta HD Put DE eto Eee Le dees se E eE P EQ ARE Pope Eae Ee e ERE eve 205 21 4 1 Quick Macro Toolbar essere enne ennt nnne nennen ntes enter NARREA 205 21 4 2 Keyboard Macro Timing eee oet nE
6. 135 15 9 Group Masters Inhibit Masters esses enne enne ennt en nnnt ennt nene ens 135 15 10 Intensity Masters a enm terere Leib EHE LER iRa e Ee Dee Len err pe R ape E reae ede e A 136 15 10 1 Group based Intensity Masters eese nennen ener 136 15 10 2 Channel based Intensity Masters eese eene rennen 136 15 10 3 FX Size and FX Speed Master sisirin niarra oeu en rennen en 136 15 11 Advanced activate and release options ene en rennen 136 15 12 Playback mode reet eni rna gel oie oett aet rto iot pe ette no eene ration 137 16 Cue Stack Settings T 137 16A Faders M 137 T6 1 1 Pacer activates stack lt i sce ce ete tee teen eee eee ea ei nad do aaeana Sheaves d ei een eee tet en p n 137 16 1 2 Bader releases stack in eene e etae oett hann aea tent dedvevtdsesedcadoute PU LO Res 137 16 1 3 Fader controls HTP chans 20 0 0 ceccceeesccesseceenceceeceessaeceeneeceneeeaeeseaaeceeaeeceeeeeaeceeaaeeeenees 138 16 1 4 Fader controls LTP IPCB chans cccccccecsssseceessseececeesaeeecnsaueceeseaaececseaaececseaaeeeeneaas 138 16 1 5 Mader controls EX SiZ6 1e eret tee reete ieenatadades sand E a 138 16 1 6 Padereconttols EX speed neci edente ite irte nh Dre qoi e Fere RR ee Eee ea 139 16 1 7 Fader controls manual crossfades eccceccsceesecescceeseceesceceeneecaeeeesaecseaeeceeeesaeceeaaeceee
7. R2rMedumRed j Nom cM 1 017 000001011 fon Fine je Rs3indoo j Nom MN 1 012 000001100 p2 Fine JORsI2Canaoy Nom ESSER 1 013 000001101 D13 FmgerL R3seMiddeLavend Nom Tere NN 1 014 000001110 fo Nom EM 1 016 000070000 one FmgerL JR2zMedumRed Nom FETTE 1 017 000010001 D FngerM Je R5Sindeo j Nom cM 1 018 000010010 DT8 Fine JORSI2Canay Norm SSM 1 020 000010100 020 FngerM R2zMedumRed j Nom The gel field uses gel numbers For Lee colours enter the gel number directly e g 181 for Lee 181 For Rosco colours enter the gel number preceded by dot e g 14 for Rosco 14 For no colour enter 0 If you would prefer to use colour names rather than gel numbers then simply enter the colour name To test a patched head or dimmer simply press the TEST MODE soft button soft button encode C and the head which the cursor is over will be tested For heads it locates the fixture for dimmers it sets the dimmer to 10096 Press the TEST MODE soft button again to turn test mode off MagicQ User Manual 45 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 4 8 Controlling Heads 4 8 1 Selecting Heads In order to control intelligent heads it is necessary to be able to select which heads to use The MagicQ
8. Numeric keys Used for entering values for parameters The console allows values to be entered before selecting the item to set on screen thus making configuration of parameters quick and easy Can also be used for selecting dimmers and selecting groups Used for entering gel numbers Numbers are assumed to be Lee gel numbers unless preceded by a dot in which case they are assumed to be rosco gel numbers Enter The enter key is used for selecting items and to finish off an action such as recording a window item or editing a parameter value Thru The Thru key is used to select ranges of dimmers when selecting dimmers e The key is used to specify levels for dimmers Full The full key is used to indicate 100 when setting levels for dimmers Page Left This key scrolls the active Window to the left See Cursor Control Page Right This key scrolls the active Window to the right See Cursor Control Cursor Keys MagicQ User Manual 347 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Used to move the cursor around the active Window See Cursor Control Top Soft The function of these buttons is soft i e it changes according to the active Window and the current view in that window The top soft buttons are generally used for menu items Side Soft The function of these buttons is soft i e it changes according to the active Window and the current view in that window The side soft buttons
9. having two operators will cause confusion This function is only enabled when the target system i e the one you wish to control is a MagicQ console or it is a MagicQ PC system with a MagicQ PC Wing or MagicQ USB interface attached There are no restrictions on the MagicQ system that you use to control the remote system for example this can be MagicQ PC running on a wireless tablet 30 3 iPhone iPod iPad Android Remote MagicQ systems can be used together with an Apple iPhone iPad iPod Touch or Android smart phones for remote control All MagicQ consoles support remote control On MagicQ PC systems remote control support is only unlocked when connected to a MagicQ Wing or MagicQ Interfaces not MagicDMX In order to use the remote with a MagicQ console there are two options using an external wireless access point or using a USB wireless interface Edimax EW 7711UAn directly connected to the console ton Keypad Execute Connec Focus Hd 1 pan 128 tilt 205 gt El EP tion Keypad F Connec ocus E Hd 1 cyan 1 mag 71 vel 183 gt The ChamSys Remote application can be downloaded free of charge from the Apple App Store For Android it can be downloaded free of charge from the Market Place To enable support for the remote application set Setup View Settings Multi Console Remote Control to Enabled 30 3 1 Setting up an access point In order to use a wireless access point with MagicQ you wil
10. 19 3 9 ChamSys Twin DMX Interfaces For ChamSys Twin DMX Interfaces select Cham USB Then select the module and port in the Out Uni field For example select Mod 1 Port 1 and Mod 1 Port 2 for the two outputs Any of the console Universes can be output to ChamSys DMX interfaces 19 3 10 ChamSys MagicDMX Interfaces MagicDMxX Interfaces automatically output on universe 1 when the Setup option View Settings Ports MagicDMX mode is set to DMX Out MagicQ User Manual 167 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk It is possible to set the Out type for Universe 1 to be MagicDMX this automatically sets the Setup option MagicQDMX mode to DMX Out It is not necessary to set the Out type for Universe 1 only the MagicDMX mode setting MagicDMxX devices do not need any additional drivers they use different HID drivers within the operating system Note that the MagicDMX Basic version is limited to 5 hours of continuous use When the time is close to expiring warnings will be shown On expiry the MagicDMX will send out DMX levels of 0 The MagicDMX Basic interface must then be unplugged and MagicQ software restarted to use the device again The MagicDMX Basic version only supports DMX Out The MagicDMX Full Interface supports both DMX Out and DMX In The MagicDMX interfaces do not remove the automation and remote restrictions when used with MagicQ Software this requires a MagicQ Wing or MagicQ Twin DMX Interface
11. ChamSys provides a range of Art Net to DMX convertors including a 4 Universe Ethernet to DMX interface which can be used to convert any of the 32 Art Net universes to be output on DMX512 serial For systems requiring all 32 universes on DMX512 serial multiple boxes may be purchased The provision of both Art Net and DMX512 serial allows a choice of which protocol is used to connect between console and stage The Art Net to DMX512 convertor box may be situated at the console or at the stage whichever is most appropriate For new systems it is likely to be more cost effective to run a pair of Ethernet cables rather than a much larger number of DMX512 cables The Ethernet cables support both DMX512 inputs and outputs However there is obviously a large amount of serial DMX cable already in use and thus the changeover is likely to be gradual 1 3 Care of your MagicQ console a To keep your MagicQ in best condition please observe the following recommendations a Keep liquids away from the MagicQ Drinks split over your console may cause irreparable damage Q Keep the console out of direct sunlight place the console in the shade Q Do not use the console outside its operating temperature range a Handle the console with care when moving or transporting it The console contains components that may be damaged by shock Always use a padded flight case or padded bag wherever possible Q Do not use solvents or cleansers to clean the
12. OR312 Canay jeneric Dimmer 1 007 000000111 007 FingerL 8 R356 Middle Lavend FSSC 1 008 000001000 008 FingerL GR27MedumRed SCM 1 009 1000001001 009 Finger OR3t2Canay 5 5 2 Head Numbers Head numbers are used in various displays to indicate which heads are being operated on Head numbers can also be used for selecting heads and setting intensities directly from the keypad By default the console numbers in the order that they are patched starting from 1 If you expect to be selecting heads using the keypad then we recommend you use unique head numbers for each head The console will use unique numbers by default You can modify head numbers manually so that they are more meaningful to yourrig Alternatively you can use one of the in built renumber algorithms Pressing RENUM HEAD NOS and selecting BEST FIT causes the console to use an intelligent algorithm to allocate heads starting with numbers that you can easily recall For example if you patch 4 MAC500s and 4 HPEs then when you renumber using BEST FIT it will number the MAC500s from 1 to 4 and the HPEs from 11 to 14 MagicQ User Manual 56 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk If you would rather work with DMX channel numbers then press the RENUM HEAD NOS soft button and select BY DMX This will configure the head number for all patched heads to be the DMX channel address of the head You can then select heads a
13. r3 m mm ol m O 3 m i I C r3 DE N mm UN Lee DE L L EE E NN NR TER _ EMEN I A RR mes T mme JT LESE a r ca JENNI EIE ESI lee ose Em Cocco CULO USS GIT Ie r3 r r3 i r mm ae anm oe m m r T r r Snakes enable snaking patterns on the grid Modify the mode to determine the number of snakes the randomness of the movement and whether they are white or coloured a MagicQ User Manual ETC LILIJIE a O T T O A O T E a a a a a a LCE E EEEE rcrum 235 eel ee L CC C m COC Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk Bat n Ball enables simple bat and he bats are controlled by FX Parameters 2 and 3 The game starts when one of the bats is moved Other bitmap layers can be combined with this to make a background for the playing field oomnnn EEEEEEEEE CUO NEEEEEE HENTENN EN ER COCO Vert Move Horiz Move Move moves the selected bitmap or text around the grid The bitmap will wrap around the edges thus allowing a texture to be moved across the entire surface of the grid Audio shows the selected bitmap or text from Beam Page 1 dependent on the level of the audio input A MagicQ Audio Interface module must be connected via USB in order to utilise this FX In Setup View Settings Ports A
14. Be careful to choose which type of show file you want to load the shw files are the ones you saved whilst the sbk ones are auto backups When MagicQ saves a show file it saves the show data the show settings and the console settings By default when a show is loaded only the show data and settings are loaded the console settings are not loaded so the console settings are not affected To force loading of the console settings from a show file hold SHIFT and press LOAD SHOW CON A list of Load Options is shown enabling the user to choose which console settings they wish to load Wing Settings Remote Settings Mode Settings Network Settings Media Server Settings MIDI SMPTE Settings Port Settings Multi Console Settings Hardware Settings MagicQ User Manual 157 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Selecting all the options loads the complete console settings and show settings enabling the complete cloning of a console Note that the console settings include the network settings and IP address so if 2 cloned consoles are used on the same network then the IP address should be manually set to different addresses 18 6 Erasing To erase the entire show from memory go to the Setup Window and press the NEW SHOW was ERASE SHOW soft button You will be asked to confirm by selecting YES You will then be asked for which initial mode you want the console to be set up for Normal Theatre Non Track
15. Fa J EXECUTE P P View Page Page t 1 Ter G3 Next Page ETE All CE7HE All Mac500 Ali pn i All BeamP CF1200HE Buttons m E u N mM UE I m PaA Hum far left far right far up far down left right down floor Normal TH en com f Amber Yellow Blue Pink uv Magenta Norm Ellip B2 23 Kl m K B5 er B6 87 ES B9 sy Bio cone bar n hat triple dec beam fibroid nae holes pys cirmag PYS cir blue shake E prae emo BGS MG UM eee pre md holes fibroid beam triple das barshake cone shake gobo ser gt gt gobo scd lt lt shake shake SP3 Clear Blind Close 22 1 Design View The user simply specifies a grid of buttons using the Set Grid Size soft button and then copies the relevant items from other windows For example to place a Group in the Execute Window go to the Group Window press Copy select the Group and then go to the Execute Window and select the box to place the Group Cues and Cue Stacks can be recorded directly into the Execute Window using Record and selecting a free item Multiple items can be selected for copying into the Execute Window There are two modes View Design and View Execute Use View Design to design the grid size and to place items in the grid Use View Execute for playback MagicQ User Manual 208 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk You can also assign Special Functions to items in the Execute grid These include Execute Page Up Execute
16. For RGBW fixtures use RGBA Virtual Chans Some personalities such as the Generic Scroller2chan are set up as a Virtual personality i e the channels in the personality can be patched to any location on MagicQ unlike normal personalities where the channels are sequential from the DMX start address In the View DMX view the DMX address fields are used to specify the addresses for each channel in the virtual personality up to a maximum of 5 channels For normal personalities these fields are used to specify multiple fixtures patched to one head Virtual personalities could be used for other irregular fixtures such as water jet controls Dimmer curve specifies the dimmer curve to be used for Intensity channels Fake HSI is not implemented yet 23 2 4 Multi The Multiple Heads Type and subsequent fields refer to Personalities with multiple elements see the section Personalities With Multiple Elements below 23 2 5 Media This section is used to automatically set media server options when a media server layer is patched When a personality with these settings is patched MagicQ adds a new entry in Setup View System View Media based on these parameters 23 3 Channels View This view allows the different channels of the head to be specified Note that once a head of the type has been patched it is not possible to change the number of channels of the head INSERT CHOOSE NEW HEAD HEAD VIEW MACROS
17. the property can be edited in the Head Editor By default Playbacks use the HTP LTP property to determine how channels are controlled from multiple playbacks simultaneously For HTP channels the highest level will be output for LTP channels the highest priority or latest touched playback will control the channel This operation can be modified on a per Cue Stack basis 15 2 HTP handling The console handles HTP Highest Takes Precedence channels in a very simple way the highest value from all the playbacks the programmer and the preset faders is the value that is output If the Programmer overrides HTP chans option is enabled then any HTP channels in the programmer will override channels on the playbacks Channels on preset faders still affect the output The console supports a powerful swap mode selected through the ADD SWAP button In SWAP mode when a FLASH button for a playback is pressed then the HTP channels from all other playbacks are disregarded Only playbacks with a FLASH button pressed affect the HTP output Similarly the programmer and preset faders have no effect on HTP output FX and channel values are handled independently enabling operators to program one playback with channel values and one with FX For example one playback could have an ambient level whilst another has a dimmer chase The FX is added to the highest channel value Note that if a Cue Stack on a Playback is set to All chans controlled LTP the
18. 19 12 2 Subnet Mask The sub net mask for the network interface For communicating with an Art Net convertor the the Sub net address must be set to 255 0 0 0 19 12 3 Send to applications on this PC This setting is used to send Output data internally to other applications on the same PC This can be used to connect to a Visualiser or the MagicQ Media Centre on the same PC This setting is valid for PCs and Macs only it is ignored on MagicQ consoles 19 12 4 Ethernet remote protocol Determines what protocol is used on the Ethernet communications If set to none then any data received is ignored Data can be transmitted from the Macro field of Cue steps in the Cue Stack The other protocols are ChamSys Rem rx ChamSys Rem tx amp rx ChamSys Rem tx When using playback synchronisation between consoles this setting should be set to ChamSys Rem tx amp IX See Ethernet Communications and Multiple Consoles for more details 19 12 5 Playback Sync Port It is possible to configure the port used for synchronisation of playback between multiple MagicQ consoles The default port is 6553 If this port interferes with other equipment for any reason then it is possible to change it MagicQ User Manual 188 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 12 6 Web Server This is used to enable the in built Web server which enables remote access to the console functions from other eugipment using we
19. Press the RECORD button Press the touch screen click ENTER over the item to record You can also press RECORD instead of pressing ENTER in the above sequence 3 9 8 Actions on Playbacks To select a Playback press the SELECT button for the appropriate Playback To record a Playback press RECORD then press the SELECT button for the appropriate Playback To name a Playback press SET then press the SELECT button for the Playback Enter the name using the on screen keyboard or the external keyboard To move a Playback press MOVE then press the SELECT button for the source Playback and then press the SELECT button for the destination Playback To copy a Playback press COPY then press the SELECT button for the source Playback and then press the SELECT button for the destination Playback To include the contents of a Playback into the Programmer press INCLUDE then press the SELECT button for the destination Playback To remove a Playback press REMOVE then press the SELECT button for the Playback Press the SELECT button again to confirm the remove MagicQ User Manual 37 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sua www chamsys co uk 4 Quick Start 4 1 Starting up the Console After powering up you are presented with the introductory Help Window Choose Continue Show You can revert to the Help Window by pressing the HELP button at any time The console remembers all windows that were open when the console was last used To c
20. this is either after it has completed fading when Step follows last is set to YES or immediately after the wait time has expired When Step Controlled as Chase is Yes then this setting is normally set to No so that the chase runs step to step without user interaction When Step Controlled as Chase is No then this setting is normally set to Yes so that the Cue Stack is executed step by step under user control 16 9 4 Zero old HTP from previous steps When set to Yes any HTP channels from previous Cues that are not in this Cue step are faded out In tracking modes this setting defaults to No In non tracking mode this setting defaults to Yes The Tracking flag H corresponds to the inverse of this setting MagicQ User Manual 149 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 16 9 5 Zero old FX from previous steps When set to Yes any FX on channels from previous Cues that are not controlled by a FX in this Cue step have the FX faded out In tracking modes this setting defaults to No In non tracking mode this setting defaults to Yes The Tracking flag F corresponds to the inverse of this setting 16 9 6 Release old chans When set to Yes any channels used in previous Cues but not used in this Cue step are released This setting defaults to No in all modes The Tracking flag L corresponds to the inverse of this setting 16 10 Step Times View Defaults only 16 10 1 HTP in fade HT
21. 4 EE oca Frontruss ba NGA Birdo ResTus ros pos Par es e312 Canary Rear use ARGA priscae Lavende Rear Tuse E29 Ri i EJ erre sis oloo olooto olooto ofo ala bib bib sar Tass aR a cor Tass aR a Birago ResTus Eso on r rois fis o p sar Tass 520 aR 68 cor Tass 50 a 64 Raz Conary Rear russ fso ARGA Brao es fal Show loaded R R R312 Canary Rear Tuss R R 5 CDS T o ES P87 Ej 575wash tilt In Selected Heads all the visualiser heads for the currently selected heads will be shown in the list Heads are selected as usual using groups or direct from the keypad In this view the encoders and soft buttons will apply changes to all the visualiser heads for the selected heads In Vis Heads all the visualiser heads are show in the list i e all the visualiser heads that relate to heads that make up the visualisation In this view the encoders and soft buttons will apply changes to the visualiser head under the cursor Use SHIFT CTRL and the cursor keys to apply changes to multiple heads In Attach Objects all the other non fixture objects are shown in a list In this view the encoders and soft buttons will apply changes to the object under the cursor Use SHIFT CTRL and the cursor keys to apply changes to multiple objects 40 2 3 Positioning the heads in the visualisation When you patch heads they automatically become selected so that in P
22. 9 2 2 Recording Intensity into a Palette ener nenne 94 9 3 Nain Palettes E 94 94 Updating Palettes cisneros eeren entr ers vie E en PRU Hle ere verra reo pour sb sea cesare E MER ERES 94 9 5 Copying and moving Palettes at eet ere tetro eee entr epos u bp EESE ae etre 95 9 6 Removing attributes from Palettes eese 95 9 7 Linked Palettes oeou ie e eo eder gei eie ai ae E aa i p LED depo 95 9 8 Viewing Editing Palette contents esee nennen nennen nennen nennen 95 9 0 Merging of Palettes from another show essere nennen nennen nenne 96 9 10 Modifying Palettes in the personality seen nennen 96 9 11 Grabbing Palettes from DMX input sess nennen nnne 97 9 12 Using Palettes with times aene epo bene p eet ego return peg Desepeebqa go coe pese coe dep de deer 97 PAP MEMES DAS MT C C E 97 9 13 Making Palettes into Cue Stacks uraisi sine iera E nennen nenne tenete 98 9 14 Selecting Palettes from the keypad sees eene 98 10 Programmer CE 99 10 1 What is in the programmer sssseesseseeeneeneenen nennen nennen rennen nennen nennen tenete enne 99 10 2 Clearing the programiier eerta ere Prat eroe esee ed eee Fe LESE eee ED eR DERE Pedo 99 10 3 Activation by Channel or by Head oo ec eecseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeecseecsaecsaecsaeesaeesseeseeeeseeseeeees 100 10 4 Recording 4 CU6
23. ArtNet and enable them The Visualiser field should be set to None If you are using a Visualiser specific protocol then move to the Visualiser row and select the Visualiser Type e g WYSIWYG There is no need to change the Status column to enabled as the Visualiser data feed will be automatically enabled VIEW VIEW VIEW RESET QUIT SETTINGS WINGS AMA IZ VISUAL Play Mode SETUP show ThuNov03201 9392005 sbk Universe Status Out Type Out Uni In Type In Uni Visualiser Hot takeover ArtNet Art 0 ArtNet Art ares remote No Mss ae n Fis e CE Jo Mee Ne Normal a p pns o p R Non track Set Mode If you are using the Visualiser on the same PC as MagicQ then set the Visualiser Type to same PC otherwise set it to remote When connecting to WYSIWYG using a MagicQ console always use WYSIWYG remote 41 4 Capture MagicQ supports connections to Capture visualiser www capturesweden com When you are using MagicQ PC with Capture we suggest that you run them on separate PCs linked via Ethernet for the best results MagicQ PC and Capture can be run on the same PC but best results will be achieved with a big screen resolution or multiple monitors Capture includes a demo show called A wards cpf consisting of an award ceremony band set up with various truss structures and different heads and par cans MagicQ includes a demo show called capture shw to control this set up
24. Changing the settings in View Defaults does not affect Cues and Cues Stacks that have already been recoreded The View Defaults view contains two columns one for single step Cue Stacks and one for multiple step Cue Stacks When the first Cue is first recorded on a Cue Stack the single step defaults are used When a second Cue is recorded on the Cue Stack the Cue Stack settings are modified to use the multiple step defaults 16 1 Faders 16 1 1 Fader activates stack When set to Yes raising the fader from 0 to above the activation threshold activates the Cue Stack When set to No the fader does not activate the Cue Stack The activation threshold defaults to 0 It is a global setting which is set in Setup View Settings Hardware 16 1 2 Fader releases stack MagicQ User Manual 137 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk When set to Yes lowering the fader to the activation threshold releases the Cue Stack When set to No the fader does Not release the Cue Stack The activation threshold defaults to 0 It is a global setting which is set in Setup View Settings Hardware 16 1 3 Fader controls HTP chans When set to Yes the fader will control the level of all channels that are patched as HTP channels Typically this is only Intensity channels although sometimes it is useful to patch fixtures without Intensity as HTP e g the Red Green Blue channels of LED fixtures The fader controls the levels proportiona
25. EMEC 2040 000701000 004 Maczso OWwhee nono no Nom CEE 2 053 000110101 005 Mac2s0 Owhee nono fno Nom To patch a dimmer simply press CHOOSE DIM MEDIA select Generic Dimmerer and then patch one or more dimmers as above In the Patch Window all the lighter coloured fields can be configured To modify a field first move the cursor to the field then input the new value using the keypad and keyboard and finally press ENTER In this way you can modify DMX address head number head name and gel for each of your patched heads 4 7 1 Naming and Numbering Heads Once you have patched all the heads you can then name and number them as you wish It is recommended that you name the dimmer or the head based on its location e g front wash back truss SL For dimmers you may wish to configure the gel This makes programming easier enabling the console to auto program cues for you MagicQ User Manual 44 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk Hdno Name Pin Tiny Swap Merge From 1 001 000000001 O01 ESM 1 003 000000017 003 Spos ONocol Nom ECM 1 004 000000100 004 Spts ONocol Nof Ema 1 005 000000101 DO5 FingerL amp R59Indoo Nom Reema 1 007 000000111 007 FmgerL 356 Middle Lavendd Nom IM 1 008 000001000 008 Finger je R2zMedumRed j Nom ETM 1010 000001010 fono Fine
26. Hard Buttons so that the encoders will be maintained on Position Colour or Beam even when the Group or Output Windows are opened At any time the encoders can be forced to their default settings for the Window by using SHIFT and the Window button e g SHIFT GROUP MagicQ User Manual 178 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk In addition the Intensity attribute will also appear on Encoder F in the Pos window if that encoder is not already used for position attributes When encoder mode is set to Intensity on X then when setting an intensity level from the keypad MagicQ will open the Intensity Window and the X encoder will control intensity When encoder mode is set to Pos Col Beam Int X then MagicQ performs both the above options 19 8 8 Swap pan and tilt encoders This setting swaps over the pan and tilt encoders By default the left encoder is pan and the right encoder is tilt 19 8 9 Swap Encoder direction The following options are supported Normal Swap all encoders Swap both pan and tilt encoders Swap pan encoder only 19 8 10 Swap Palette amp Cursor Page Buttons Enables the Cursor Page buttons Page Left Home Page Up Page Right End Page Down to be used as Palette buttons Group Int Fx Pos Col Beam This makes it easier to select Palettes using the keypad When this mode is enabled the Palette Buttons become the Cursor Page buttons It is strongly recommended that you
27. Lamp on selected heads Lamp off selected heads Reset selected heads e Setting Intensities Set head 1 to 100 Set head 1 to 50 MagicQ User Manual MACRO lt Lamp on all gt MACRO lt Lamp off all gt SHIFT LOCATE CTRL SHIFT LOCATE CTRL LOCATE lt select head gt lt select head gt lt select head 1 FULL Also 1 FULL 1 50 ENTER 332 www chamsys co uk Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Set heads 1 to 4 to 100 Set head 1 10 Set head 1 1 Set head 1 to 5046 time 3 secs ChamSys www chamsys co uk 1 THRU 4 FULL 1 10 ENTER 1 01 ENTER 1 50 3 ENTER Heads 1 to 10 100 split delays 4s to 1s 1s fade PC Keyboard THRU gt FULL e FX Add FX Convert chase to FX Force Cue to have no FX e Playback Step through Cue Stack Step back up Cue Stack Go to next step without time Go back a step without time Reassert Playback Take manual control of Playback Change chase FX speed live Go to Cue ID 2 Release Playback with 3 sec time Release all Playbacks 1 10 FULL 4 gt 0 1 SE Select heads FX ADD FX CUE STK SHIFT Make FX Select heads Add FX 0 Size gt ll also SHIFT gt gt gt lt lt lt lt S gt FLASH button gt lt S move manual fader gt lt S turn encoder X gt lt S gt 2 ENTER S 3 REL SHIFT 4 RELEASE Release all test Playbacks Cues Cue Stacks CTRL RELEASE Enter exit Blind with 3 s
28. Mee o o pese b p p p b p fp p o jo Disabled o fo bree C peses jO Disabled Disabled a 0 Disabled 9 Disabled Set the IP address of the media server This will be used to locate the media server on the network and to retrieve thumbnails and live previews The IP address should be in the format of 2 x x x Move to the IP address box are set the IP address If you have only 1 media server on the network and it is running and the network is connected then pressing enter should detect its IP address 4 Local Area Connection Status General Support Connection status 2 Address Type Manually Configured IP Address 2 9 200 78 Subnet Mask 255 0 0 0 Default Gateway To determine the IP address of the media server on Windows XP machines load the Control Panel and open the Network Connections screen Double click on the network connection choose the support tab and the IP Address is displayed MagicQ User Manual 244 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk Lay For other Windows machines choose Start Run type in cmd and type enter Enter ipconfig into the C Documents and Settings magicqg gt ipconf ig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection 3 Connection specific DNS Suffix home IP Address 192 168 1 5 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection s
29. Pos5 50 Pos6 51 Pan 4 Tilt 5 Col4 27 Col3 26 Col2 7 Coll 6 Rotate2 11 Rotate1 10 Gobo2 9 Gobol 8 Rotate4 31 Rotate3 30 Gobo4 29 Gobo3 28 FX8 39 FX7 38 FX6 37 FX5 36 Cont8 45 Cont7 44 Cont6 43 Cont5 42 32 Controlling MagicQ over Ethernet www chamsys co uk The MagicQ console and MagicQ PC software supports the use of an Ethernet protocol for controlling external devices such as media servers video or automation computers MagicQ User Manual 283 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Chany www chamsys co uk The protocol can also be used to remote control the MagicQ console or MagicQ PC software via a simple set of text commands Note that the use of the ChamSys Remote Ethernet Protocol on MagicQ PC is only enabled when it is connected to a MagicQ Wing or Interface not MagicDMX On MagicQ commands are placed in the Macro field of the Cue Stack and are transmitted when the Cue starts to execute In addition MagicQ will accept commands received according to a pre defined protocol 32 1 ChamSys Remote Ethernet Protocol Enable ChamSys Remote Ethernet Protocol in the View Settings view of the Setup Window ChamSys Remote Ethernet Protocol is an Open Protocol i e you do not need permission to use it for your own purposes It is a UDP IP based protocol using port 6553 in broadcast mode The structure of the UDP IP packets are long32 chamsys word16 ver
30. Segments alternates forward backward for each segment MagicQ User Manual 86 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Inverts change the polarity of the FX waveform rather than reversing the direction For simple FX Waveforms of 1 or 2 steps the resulting FX will be identical For FX waveforms with more than 2 steps they will be different MagicQ User Manual 87 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Consider a pulse 2 steps on 4 heads spread 0 Forward T ANNA Invert AANA Invert Odd Even NS m Invert Even Odd A E Invert Left Right EAD m Invert Right Left NE e a Consider a pulse 4 step FX Waveform on 4 heads Forward 7 MAN A A Backward oh ES nvert AA AN A AA AANA For FX waveforms that have more than one attribute the invert is applied only to first attribute of the FX waveform This ensures a simple mirror of movement FX such as circles etc 8 1 8 Pulse Width The pulse ramp dimmer chase and iris chase have Pulse Width on Encoder C This enables the width of the FX to be altered without having to select different FX e g pulse 2 step pulse 3 step etc When set to 50 it is equivalent to a pulse 2 step When set to close to 0 the pulse or ramp is very narrow whilst at close to 100 the pulse or ramp is very wide 8 1 9 FX fade times FX can be configured to fade in and out rather than snapping in and out The fade times are configured in the View Times view of
31. The fully featured MagicQ PC enables shows to be pre programmed on a PC Windows Mac or Linux thus enabling Lighting Designers to design and program their shows in advance Transfer of show data between the PC and the console uses standard high capacity USB memory sticks or a direct network connection MagicQ User Manual 19 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk MagicQ PC supports the same functionality and user interface as the physical consoles making it easy to move between the two products MagicQ PC can also be used to run complete shows either as a back up to the main console or as console in its own right Connecting the MagicQ PC Wing to MagicQ PC gives the playback and programming control of the MagicQ consoles faders encoders and buttons but with a small lightweight 6KG solution that can easily be carried onto an aeroplane as hang luggage All MagicQ console products are built upon the mission critical Linux operating system MagicQ PC can run under Windows Linux or on Apple Macs 1 2 DMX512 and Art Net outputs The console supports both DMX512 serial and Art Net and Pathport options A LAN connector on the rear panel provides an Ethernet interface for up to 32 universes of Art Net ArtNet II Pathport or ACN This enables the console to be connected directly to Art Net or Pathport based installations DMXS512 serial outputs are available directly from the MagicQ Expert Pro and Pro 2010 series of consoles
32. This is useful in some environments such as night clubs where the operator wishes to continually play back new functions without having to turn off the older functions There is a choice of Stomping LTP or both LTP and HTP When set to just LTP then playbacks that contain HTP channels are never released stomped as they may still be affecting the output When set to LTP and HTP then playbacks are stomped if all of the LTP channels have been overridden by another playback and the HTP channels are at the same or higher level in another playback When using the Playback Stomping option it is possible to allow some playbacks to be marked as non stomping This enables certain playbacks to be bumped in without stomping over the original playback 15 9 Group Masters Inhibit Masters Playbacks can be used to control groups of channels you can assign a playback to be a master for intensities FX size or FX speed for a specified set of heads Using Intensity Masters you can make an Inhibit Master to give overall control for the levels of a group of channels Group Masters are activated and released in the same way as normal Cue Stacks When you set Cue Stacks to be Intensity Masters FX Speed or FX Size Masters it is not necessary to set Fader Activates Stack to No and Fader Releases Stack to No MagicQ will ignore these settings and always activate only using the GO button and release using the RELEASE button MagicQ User Manual 135
33. To copy or move onto the end of the Stack select End as the destination Cues can be copied onto other Cue Stacks that are assigned to playbacks Select the Cues in the Cue Stack window and then select a playback fader as the destination By default when copying Cues the console does not create new Cues it simply makes another link to the existing Cue To force the console to create a new Cue press SHIFT and COPY 13 10 Linked Cues Cues that are used more than once in a Cue Stack or that are used in more than one Cue Stack are called Linked Cues If you edit a linked cue it will affect all places where the Cue is used The Cue Store Window shows where each cue is used In Cue Stacks linked Cues are shown with a L in the Cue field It is possible to unlink a Cue by moving to the Cue in the Cue Stack and pressing SHIFT and UNLINK CUE If you wish to avoid creating linked Cues then when copying Cues and Cue Stacks use SHIFT COPY copy unlinked rather than COPY 13 11 Removing Cues and Cue Stacks Cues can be removed from a Cue Stack by opening the Cue Stack window then pressing REMOVE and selecting the Cue you wish to remove by pressing in the Status or Cue Id field MagicQ User Manual 122 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk It is also possible to remove a specific Cue from a Cue Stack using the keypad Type a Cue Id on the keypad then press REMOVE and select the S button of the Playback you wish to re
34. You can also use a standalone Capture executable file which can be downloaded from our website www chamsys co uk This allows the Capture show to run on a PC free of charge and without Capture installed There are two protocols for communication between MagicQ and Capture ArtNet and CITP ArtNet is a standard protocol used to carry DMX over Ethernet and enables control of the lighting CITP is an open protocol specific to Capture which enables both control of lighting and the transfer of the show patch between MagicQ and Capture ChamSys provides executable files for both protocols MagicQ User Manual 322 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk To communicate using ArtNet simply set the required universes to Output Type of ArtNet in Setup View DMX I O and enable the universes To use CITP simply set the Visualiser field for all required universes to Capture 41 4 1 Running Capture The easiest way to run MagicQ with Capture is to use the standalone executable version of Capture Using this means you do not have to download and install the full version of Capture and you are not bound by the demo time restrictions There are two versions of the standalone Capture demo available from our website awardscitp exe connects to MagicQ using the CITP protocol awardsartnet exe connects to MagicQ using the ArtNet protocol Simply copy the file onto your PC and run it On MagicQ load the Capture show and raise the fader on p
35. and setting level of other Cue Stacks Macros are typed into the Macro field in the Cue Stack window scroll to the right Macros can affect multiple Cue Stacks on different Playbacks enabling complete shows to be driven from one master Cue Stack Cue Stack macros take the following format A lt Playback no gt Activate playback B lt Macro no gt Run macro R lt Playback no gt Release playback 0 release this playback T lt Playback no gt Test playback activate with level 100 U lt Playback no gt Un test playback release with level 0 G lt Playback no gt Go on playback G Playback no gt lt Cueid gt Go to Cue id on playback H lt Type gt 1 Lamp on all heads 2 reset all heads 3 lamp off all heads 4 cancel screen save H Type zone Type is 5 for enable zone 6 for disable zone S Playback no Stop playback C Playback no Choose playback K Level Set level of last Cue Stack to be activated e g with an A command L Level Set level of current playback M Level Set level of the playback that is running the macro J Cue Id Jump to Cue Id on current playback E Cue Stack 1d Activates Cue Stack in Stack Store E Cue Stack is gt lt level gt Activate Cue Stack at level F Cue Stack 1d Releases Cue Stack in Stack Store I Time code Set internal time code O Time code Set current received time code MagicQ User Manual 123 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys ww
36. as accessed through the Intensities Preset View Alternatively it may be configured to control only the level of programmer data or it may control both In each of these configurations it does not control playbacks or add swap levels When set as a Grand Master it controls Playbacks and the Programmer 19 11 2 Sub Master function The Sub Master can be configured to control either playback faders only or add swap buttons only or both the default It can also be set as a programmer master a preset master or both MagicQ User Manual 185 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 11 38 Manual Cross Fade Master The Cross fade master can be configured in several different ways Manual cross fade default Rate Master Global Rate Master Busking Rate Master Cue Stack Rate Master Cue Stack Global Rate Master See manual control rate master and busking rate master for more details 19 11 4 Split Cross fade PB9 PB10 When enabled from the Setup Window playbacks faders 9 and 10 become Cross Masters for manual Fade In and Fade Out Pressing the Pause button on either playback 9 or 10 brings the current playback under manual control The two faders can then be used to fade in each new Cue with separate control for fade in and fade out Pressing the Go button on either Playback 9 or 10 returns the current playback to normal Cue execution When enabled playbacks faders 9 and 10 can not be used as no
37. click ENTER over the source item Press the touch screen click ENTER over the destination item To copy multiple items highlight it is often easier to highlight the items before pressing COPY If you press COPY immediately after highlighting multiple items then the console will assume that these are the source items and will only prompt for the destination You can also copy multiple items by pressing and holding COPY then selecting the multiple items releasing COPY and then selecting the destination You can also press COPY instead of pressing ENTER in the above sequence When copying Cues Cue Stacks or Pages the console by default does not make individual copies of the Cues the Cue Stacks link to the same Cues To copy unlinked i e to create new Cues then press SHIFT and COPY in the above sequence 3 9 6 Removing items MagicQ User Manual 36 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Press the REMOVE button Press the touch screen click ENTER over the item to remove To remove multiple items highlight it is often easier to highlight the items before pressing REMOVE If you press REMOVE immediately after highlighting multiple items then the console will assume that you wish to remove the highlighted items You can also press REMOVE instead of pressing ENTER in the above sequence 3 9 7 Recording items In boxes style windows it is possible to record an item e g in the Group Window to record a group
38. disabling of a Zone Special items in the Execute Window to enable easy control of zones including enabling and disabling zones and setting and clearing hot takeover in a zone This allows complete control of a multi room system directly from the Execute Window without users needing to access the Setup Window MagicQ User Manual 265 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 28 9 Inter Console Messaging It is possible to trigger message boxes from Cues in a Cue Stack Simply add a comment field to the Cue in the Cue Stack starting with a When this Cue executes the message box will be shown In Setup View Settings View Windows there is a new option Message Window This specifies where the message box is shown main screen external screen 1 external screen 2 and whether a network message is sent to other consoles Setting Net Only results in messages only being sent over the network not shown on the console where the Cue executed By default the message box shows immediately for 5 seconds and then closes The delay before the message box shows and the time it stays visible can be set using parameters inbetween the lt delay gt lt show length 10 Hello World Delay for 10 seconds before showing message 110 20 Hello World Delay for 10 seconds and show message box for 20 seconds 10 0 Hello World Show message and do not close message box If the comment starts with a instead of a then the
39. eese eene rennen 256 28 Networking of MagicQ Consoles eese eene nennen rennen innen 257 28 1 Network addresses and host names sees nennen ener 257 28 2 Checking IP addresses Ping Test sese rennen 258 28 3 Checking consoles on the network essent nete rennen 258 m Euuriczojce E 259 2841 Hot Takeover MOode enne tert eret ont e reto kae N EEEE T RE ENERE E INE 259 28 4 2 Configuring Hot take over prior to v1 4 4 5 ssesssssssseseseeeeeeeenren ene 261 284 3 Hottake oVer types auos dr eere nne ise e reser E Ee e pagi e Dub ad esee Erato ages 261 28 4 4 Swapping control between multiple consoles eene 262 28 5 Playback synchronisation between consoles eese eene 263 28 5 1 Configuration MagicQ software v1 3 6 4 and above ssssssseeeee 263 28 5 2 Configuration MagicQ software v1 3 6 3 and before sse 264 28 5 3 Configuring which consoles Playback sync to which consoles sess 264 28 6 Grabbing shows from other consoles eeeeesseeeeeeeeee eene rennen 265 28 7 Automatic backing up of shows from other consoles esee 265 PE IME LO DIC 265 25 0 Inter Console Messaging nucis ee entere ttr te dep et e pede tige encode eel peso pode pa de agus eaa 266 29 Multi Console Programming iiie rre ipee oe
40. eic deo ette el eter tbe e epe eter reta epe eminem deeds 100 ICM PS eC 101 IOAZ TINE serene ieia EE Eae eE EE Eee Eea iee a EE aera O EE 101 IUE D E 101 10 5 Split Cue limes oui eem inei eee de EI eoe ETE ee FUHR dE HE RES 101 WOSE View Simple tenendi deett diese cie duge nite ete LUE He UR eR ae ge eee aed 101 10 5 2 Vie W ACV ANC incerti de cott ciere pea busto e e ae doa esti eb e Pe Era Slade 102 106 Fade bu ME 102 10 7 Recording to a specific Cue Id 5 ensem ente tereti retire en EREE inl 103 10 8 Record RO c 103 IE MM void ce u 104 UP P AMEMIEC SUDAN a a E E E E E 104 108 3 Ono EEET 104 I MP oti dorea ipee EAR E AAE AOO E AEI E E GEE EEEE A RE 105 10 10 Removing channels from the Programmer essere rennen nennen 105 10 10 1 Removing channels using the REMOVE button eese 105 10 10 2 Removing channels using the Programmer Window eee 105 10 11 Copy betweer heads incest eerte E HE E ER REPE SEX EL EDU EE eeepc iuba 106 10 12 Blind programming esee iereee rentre rante t oe eth retard then aA a ET e do severe dea ee 106 10 13 Parking freezing channels eese eene enne nete rennen 106 11 SR AN 108 11i Heads Vi W E n 108 11 2 Intensity VIEW ien een oi eter eere rera qo sire deg esie v ope LOT EUR HIER e eR Age a ge Re
41. focus test etc Items from the Group Position Colour Beam Cue Stack Store Cue Store Playback and Macro windows can all be copied into the Execute Window for immediate access from the remote device On the MagicQ console press the Execute Window and then press SET GRID SIZE to create grid 1 We recommend a grid size 5 5 for the iPhone Android phones For iPad 10 10 or 12 12 is good Copy items from the Group Pos Colour Beam windows into the Execute Window You can copy multiple items in one go by using SHIFT and the cursor keys in the source window to select multiple items Press COPY If it says select source then press COPY again When it says select destination change to the Execute Window and select the place in the grid to copy to MagicQ User Manual 276 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 30 4 Remote control using Pocket PC or Phone with wireless device MagicQ includes an in built web server for enabling access to MagicQ from web browsers on external computers pocket PCs and mobile phones with web browsers The web server includes web pages for monitoring of the status of the MagicQ a remote control and access to the MagicQ windows such as the Patch window for downloading complete patch lists cue sheets By default the web server is disabled on MagicQ enable it in Setup Network Settings The default port is 8080 although this can be changed in the Network Settings To browse to the conso
42. range e g set the console to IP addres 2 0 0 1 netmask 255 0 0 0 and the laptop to 2 0 0 2 netmask 255 0 0 0 Connect the console and the PC Mac with an inverted network cable Start MagicVis and in File Settings choose the network adapter IP address of the network port that connects to the MagicQ console MagicQ User Manual 311 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk E File View Options Reports www magicvis com The View Vis tab in the Patch Window will now become visible Initially the title bar in MagicVis will show Waiting con Once a connection has been made with the console then it will change to say waiting sync Once the show data has been transferred over the connection from the console to the MagicQ vis application then it will change to say synced Choose which network adapter to use in MagicVis by clicking on File Settings If the system continues to say waiting con then check IP address are correct and check firewalls are disabled In some systems you may need to disable other network adapters such as the wireless adaptor Once synced then whenever you load a new show on the console or change the visualiser patch then the changes will automatically appear in the visualiser When MagicVis starts it assumes that it will receive DMX data on ArtNet starting from ArtNet Universe 0 0 As soon as MagicVis has a connection with a console it then starts using the DMX protocols and universes in us
43. so that any FX running on the channel on Playbacks is ignored If the channel has a FX in the programmer then the FX will run as expected This for example enables the user to take control of a moving light and place it in a fixed position 8 2 Generating user FX It is possible to generate user FX by programming a chase and then converting it into a FX The FX can then be applied to any head with the required attributes For example to create a new movement FX create a position chase by recording the pan and tilt values for one or more heads Set the chase speed to the speed that you wish the FX to default to If you wish the FX to snap not fade then set the chase contrast to 0 Convert the chase into a FX by opening the Cue Stack window and pressing SHIFT and MAKE FX If the chase only contains 1 attribute then you will be asked whether you wish the FX to always apply to the specified attribute or to allow it to be applied to any attribute If the Cue Stack has more than 1 attribute in it then the user is prompted to choose which attributes to use in the Waveform FX If multiple heads are used in the chase then multiple heads will be generated in the FX this enables different heads in the FX to do completely different FX For example you could record a FX where 2 heads do a tilt and 2 heads do a pan To record a FX that can be applied to any attribute choose 1 attribute only e g dimmer and create the chase using this attribut
44. were selected using a group then the first head will be the first head that was selected when the group was recorded Single mode is indicated by a LED lit on the SINGLE button In Single mode changes made by the encoders or through selecting Palettes only affect the one head that is being controlled The head is indicated by a by the head number Once in Single mode the NEXT HEAD and PREV HEAD buttons are used to transfer control between the selected heads Pressing the ALL button returns the head control area to the default mode whereby all selected heads are controlled In Single mode Locate only affects the one head that is being controlled 7 11 2 Odd Even Odd Even mode is similar to Single mode except that instead of only a single head being controlled half of the heads are controlled Odd Even mode is indicated by a LED lit on the ODD EVEN button Pressing ODD EVEN selects the odd heads Pressing NEXT HEAD or PREV HEAD toggles between the odd and even heads Pressing the ALL button returns the head control area to the default mode whereby all selected heads are controlled Holding the ODD EVEN button brings up the Odd Even toolbar for quick selection of odd even or 3s 4s 5s On MagicQ PC pressing SHIFT Odd Even also opens the toolbar Odd Even type ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk Press SHIFT ODD EVEN to increase the mode to 3s or more 7 11 3 All The ALL button is used to return the head control area to
45. 1 and the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 The default gateway address can generally be left blank Click ok Older Windows systems will request a restart select restart now To check communication between two PCs go to one of the PCs and click Start Run and a text entry box will bedisplayed Type in ping a b c d where a b c d is the IP address of the other PC e g 192 9 200 2 The PC will try to ping send a test IP packet to the other machine If all goes well you will see a message saying Reply from a b c d Check communication from both ends use the IP address of the other PC at each end 41 2 Configuring MagicQ 41 2 1 Setting the IP address on MagicQ When using MagicQ and a Visualiser on different PCs it is important to ensure that MagicQ PC knows the IP address of the network port it will to use to communicate with the Visualiser In the Setup View Settings Network set the IP Address to be the same as the IP address of your network port for example if you PC has a network address of 2 9 200 77 then set the value in the Setup Window to 2 9 200 77 MagicQ User Manual 321 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 41 3 Enabling Universes for the Visualiser Now you need to configure the outputs Go to the Setup View DMX I O window You will see a list of the 32 universes and their current configuration If you wish to use ArtNet protocol to communicate with the Visualiser then set the required universes to
46. 1 Auto Groups The auto groups function in the Outputs Window Plan View now has an option to generate groups for each of the multi head fixtures in the chosen grid These groups can then be use in a grid of groups to perform intensity and colour chases across all the multi heads By using the first layer for the grid of heads and the second layer for a grid of groups with colour mode set to multiply the FX on the individual multi heads and the FX on the complete heads can be mixed together 25 5 Making grids of Groups Sometimes it is useful to make a grid of groups rather than a grid of individual heads for example you may have a large amount of LED broken down into panels which you have then programmed as groups Grids of groups enable multiple heads to be allocated to one box in the grid When Bitmaps Text or internal FX are played back on the grid then all heads in a group will take the colour level associated with a particular box in the grid MagicQ User Manual 238 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 25 6 Using the MagicQ Matrix Viewer The MagicQ PC software package includes the MagicQ Media Centre application formerly the MagicQ Matrix Viewer which makes pre programming of LED FX simple It can also be used as a useful monitor in situations where the Matrix display is remote from the MagicQ console The MagicQ Media Centre monitors Art Net traffic on the network from a MagicQ console or from a PC running Ma
47. 130 14 5 2 Naming playbacks oca eee erm tibt eere b ETC H e eee LRL ed RT ia 130 14 5 3 Copying and moving playbacks eene eren nennen nen 131 145 4 Removing playbacks 5 eiecit tutte ti ste i oa eoe icti Ee Et Ee Retenir ee aes 131 145 5 Playback R te iei ee ee ire tree reete irn EL ree H der ra etui ode edited 131 146 Wing Playbacks Pages Lean Dedi ente ta reto REE ETE DE A EEES EEEE ERER oes 131 J47 Deta lt Cue NILUM tieira otee ei na Sa iaee Eene a AROR ASAE EE 132 14 8 Synchronising Pl ybacks 5 iiie terme eerte terea eoe rr bee Ee a e a 132 E aEccdiclee m 132 15 Advanced Playback Cue Stack Options esses ener 133 15 1 Interaction of HTP and LTP channels between PlaybacksS eee eeseeeseceseceseceseceeeeeeeeesneeees 133 152 HDPihandlime uice rhe e rer ere tenait lee tuy sette vetu EE E a A puel E 133 15 3 HTP always active Use HTP option eseesseeeeeeeeeeenne enne ener nennen nennen 133 154 EM E dien lin DERE 134 15 5 Interaction of FX between Playbacks esses rene rennen nennen nennen 134 15 6 Playback Priority o eset eerte ei E iA R rao b ege te Altadena eee Ee p ka are E OE aia AiR 135 15 7 Playbacks ignore masters levels eese enne nre nre 135 MagicQ User Manual 8 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk IRE MEE Eden eI mi DP
48. 19 3 11 Using the MagicQ wing DMX512 outputs To utilise the DMX512 outputs on the PC wing configure Universes 1 and 2 to be MQ Wing and enable the two universes The PC Wing outputs can be assigned to any of the supported universes the first two Universes set to PC Wing will be output to the PC Wing For MagicQ MaxiWing you can configure up to four universes whilst for MagicQ MiniWing you can configure only one universe If the Setup option View Settings Ports MagicQ USB Wings amp Interfaces is set to Yes auto DMX then MagicQ will automatically output DMX on the Wings starting from Universe 1 provided that none of the Universes have been explicitly set to MQ Wing Note that it is also possible to use the MagicQ PC Wing direct DMX outputs with a MagicQ console simply connect the MagicQ PC Wing to the MagicQ console using a USB cable and set the outputs as above 19 3 12 Hot take over The console supports hot take over to enable a second console or MagicQ PC to take over running the show if the first console has a problem In hot take over mode the second console has it s universes disabled but set to hot take over The second console monitors the Ethernet for input data on the universe and if data is not present for a defined period seconds then it automatically enables the universe thus giving control to the second console For how to use hot take over see Using Multiple Consoles 19 3 13 Testing Output Univ
49. 19 6 4 Latitude This is used for astronomical scheduled events Enter the latitude in degrees 19 6 5 Longitude This is used for astronomical scheduled events Enter the longitude in degrees 19 6 6 Disable Programming This setting allows recording of show data to be disabled This prevents show data from being recorded moved copied or updated Use this option to prevent show data being changed MagicQ User Manual 173 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk When this setting is set to disable recording parameters of Cue Stacks and Cues such as Chase Speed Shape Size and times may still be modified To prevent all modification use Disable Modifications in addition to Disable Programming 19 6 7 Disable Modifications This setting prevents Cue Stack and Cue data from being modified Use this setting to ensure that programmed Cues and Cue Stacks are played back exactly as they were programmed 19 6 8 Disable Test Mode This setting prevents the user from testing Cues Cue Stack Playbacks and Patched Heads from the respective Windows Use this setting to avoid accidental operation of these features 19 6 9 Disable Macros This setting prevents Macros running This is useful in cases where macros have been erroneously assigned to keys 19 6 10 Auto Backup This setting enables automatic back ups It can be set to No Yes and On Changes By default it is set to On Changes For playback of shows you may wish
50. 2 5 lt S gt COPY source lt S gt dest lt S gt lt SHIFT COPY gt source lt S gt dest lt S gt Select heads REC select item Select heads REC select item Type name SET SET SET type name sel item Select heads INC select item make changes UPD 3 select item 3 select item 0 THRU 3 select item 0 THRU 3 1 select item lt SHIFT cursor gt to select Palettes COPY lt S gt 334 www chamsys co uk Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd e Information Windows Additional Output Windows Programmer Info Window Cue Stack Info Window e Wing Keypad short cuts Select position palette Select colour palette Select beam palette Select position palette 4 Select colour palette 5 Select position 4 time 5 secs Select position 4 time 5 secs fan Default intensity attribs Make active intensity attribs Remove intensity attribs e Console Start up Shut down Soft reset Calibrate touch screen Hard reset Hard power off Lock unlock console Console lights on off Enter exit test mode e Cue Stack Macros Activate Playback Run Keyboard Macro Release Playback Activate Playback 100 Release Playback 0 Go Playback Stop Playback Choose Playback Set level last Cue Stack activated Set level current Playback Set level of this Playback Jump to Cue id current Playback Activates Cue Stack Stack Store Releases Cue Stack Stack Store Change Page Open view window layout Set received t
51. ARRANGE VIS MagicQ will prompt you for the positioning within the visualisation For each of the heads in the grid a visualiser head will be will be inserted into the visualiser The positioning will be set according to the position in the grid For example if you select Top then MagicQ will treat the grid as if it is a top view and all the visualiser heads will be positioned at the top of the room at the same height MagicQ User Manual 317 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk 40 3 Known Features and Limitations The following are known features in 1 5 7 5 Fixture prisms are not currently supported Random strobes and pulse are not currently supported Reports rotated trusses will not appear correctly in the individual truss plots Reports some text overlays other text Occasionally the physically form of the first fixture is not rendered correctly When fixtures are positioned directly downwards the intensity of the projected beam may be dimmer than when slightly offset 40 3 1 MagicVis On start up the Visualiser stage layout may not be updated until the show is reloaded or fixture physical position is moved in View Vis on the console 40 3 2 MagicQ with combined Visualiser App The MagicQ with Visualiser combined app is a beta version for testing only It should not be used for important shows only for visualisation 40 3 3 X Future features Option to make fixtures show beams or
52. Add Swap mode SPACE Manual GO Manual STOP Next page Prev page Release PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 PB10 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF J ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT SELECT PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 PB10 REL PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 PB10 NEXT PREV GO GO GO GO GO GO GO GO GO GO PAGE PAGE PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 PB10 MAN STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP STOP PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 PB8 PB9 PB10 SWAP SWAP SWAP SWAP SWAP SWAP SWAP SWAP SWAP SWAP Note that in playback shortcuts mode many programming options will not work as expected because the keyboard keys are used for busking MagicQ User Manual 181 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 8 12 Map Keys to THRU FULL This setting allows the THRU and FULL keys to be mapped to different keys on the keyboard This is useful in some countries where the normal mappings gt and are not easy to select To set this setting simply press the 3 keys you wish for the functions followed by ENTER 19 8 13 Enable Mouse to control pan tilt This setting enables a mouse or track ball to control pan and tilt See mouse controls pan tilt This setting is only supported on MagicQ consoles and on MagicQ PC systems with a MagicQ PC Wing or Maxi
53. Cue Note that if you plan to over ride attributes of head during playback then you are likely to require Activate Chans otherwise all attributes of the head will be over riden MagicQ also supports IPCB IPC and Col These group similar parameters together so for example if you touch a colour attribute or the colour attributes are loaded into the programmer IPCB means all Intensity Position Colour and Beam attributes work in this way whereas IPC only works on Intensity Position and Colour attributes not Beam attributes 19 7 2 Tracking This setting turns tracking on and off This affects new Cues that are recorded to Cue Stacks It does not modify Cues or Cue Stacks that have been previously recorded Users should be aware that playback of Cue Stacks also depends on the Track settings on each Cue in the Cue Stack there are the three options Track HTP Track FX and Track LTP In software prior to v1 3 6 4 these options were named Zero old HTP Zero old FX Rel unused chans and were the inverse of the above options For software versions prior to v1 3 4 6 users who wish to use tracking should should turn off the Zero old HTP and Zero old FX in all Cue Stack steps The defaults for these options can be changed in the Cue Stack View Defaults window 19 7 83 Unused Chans return to defaults This setting determines what happens to LTP channels that are not controlled by any playbacks or the progr
54. Cue In the console Normal Mode the LTP channels are tracked but HTP channels Intensities are not MagicQ User Manual 117 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk However some other consoles utilise a tracking mode to reduce show storage whereby only the changes made since the last Cue was recorded are stored into a Cue This is often very confusing since if you jump around in Cue Stacks they may not playback as they were programmed Busking live shows can be particularly difficult as it can be more difficult to predict what is going to happen The MagicQ has a significant amount of in built memory and a multi Gigabyte disk so show size is not a major concern The MagicQ also has powerful editing modes that enable changes to be made to multiple Cues simultaneously thus overcoming any benefits tracking mode might have for storing Cues in separate parts The MagicQ supports a tracking mode which can be turned on through View Settings in the Setup Window We recommend that all but die hard tracking mode users utilise the console in its default non tracking mode 13 4 1 Tracking on the MagicQ The easiest way to change between tracking and non tracking is to change the Programming Mode by pressing the B soft button in the Setup Window and choosing one of the modes Normal Theatre Non Tracking Theatre Tracking or Hog II Warp Changing the Programming Mode affects the Programmer Tracking op
55. DEF CUE soft buttons The Cue is indicated as Default or Locate by a D or L after the Q number RETEST CUE CLEAR DEF CUE CLEAR LOCCUE CUE STORE Q6 not used in any Cue Stacks Q1 52 0 Q2 520 3 520 04 Q5 D 520f96 5201G7 Q8 Qs G10 Vox Gits Drums My Default My Locate G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 Q17 18 Q18 Q20 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk Only one Cue can be the Default Cue and only one Cue can be the Locate Cue however one cue can be both the Default Cue and the Locate Cue A D and a L are used to indicate the settings respectively It is not necessary to program all the different attributes into the Locate Cue or the Default Cue simply program the values that you want to be different from the Locate vals in the Personality For instance to record a default position with all heads positioned towards FOH position simply record a Cue with the FOH position data and press the SET DEF CUE soft button If you wish to change the Locate Cue or the Default Cue then simply re record the Cue If you update Palettes used in the Cue or modify the Cue directly from the Cue Window then you may need to reset the Cue in the Cue Store before the change takes place Press the CLEAR DEF CUE and SET DEF CUE for the desired Cue 5 25 Theatre Patch syntax MagicQ supports a Theatre Patch option which changes the syntax used for patching to simplify patching and re patching of large numbers of dimmers Th
56. E ee SEEE 150 16 11 1 Default Speed E 150 16 11 2 Default im fade oso eiie ese rt a E RED prae lg e Debe ede eee EE RE ness 150 16 11 3 D fault ott LAS EET 150 17 Live Programming Busking eese eene en trennen rennen 152 17 1 Adding individual channels using preset faders eee 152 17 2 Override take OVer eet geste tere tat ente pet e bea bug ace Peta iaee ai a aa a TE 152 173 Viewing Cues and Cue Stacks eie terme tete epa eser PH EE E Hle reae Ue eL HE Dc ie 152 17 4 Modifying chase speed contrast esses eene rennen eren eren eene 152 17 5 Modifying FX parameters eese enne enne eterne enne nennen nnne 153 17 6 Stop Starting Cue Stacks sessi enne enr anaia nre testen nenne 153 17 7 Jumping to a Cue na Cue Stack uisa cedente teg sebte een tnis ctl pice ieshigasbaessiett agat 153 17 8 Over riding using the programmer esseesseeeeeeeeeeeenee ener neret eren en teen tenn nene 153 17 9 Adding im new EX neiconateeitlettentrer toco Ce terea eee Ee Po ear evt UU HER dee ee edet ke 154 17 10 Applying palettes With time eese nennen rennen eren nter 154 17 11 Releasing Clearing with time eese nennen nennen rennen nennen 154 17 12 Buskimp Master eniti rr terere tele n e tras rte Do Eee Y DO ee Hotel Lassus dodi bre ede td 155 17 13 Programmer Masten T 155 18 System Mana
57. FX Spread is the maximum offset between heads within the FX FX Spread values greater than 100 are allowed The offsetting of the FX over heads can be further enhanced using FX Parts and FX Segments FX parts and FX Segments have no effect if FX Spread is 0 The spread can be viewed in the Outputs Window View Chans View DMX View Move window This shows a 2D representation of the pan and tilt values of each of the heads OUTPUTS OH51 OH52 Ou73 OH54 OH53 8 1 5 FX Parts This enables the FX cycle to be repeated across a number of heads When FX parts is 0 the FX is offset across the total umber of heads selected in the FX Using Parts the FX can be offset so that for example the FX can be offset with FX parts 3 such that the FX is offset other the first 3 heads and then the next 3 heads the next 3 heads and so on The FX part can have the values none 2s 3s etc For example when set to 3s the FX will be played back spread over the first 3 heads and then this will repeat over the remaining selected heads i e heads 1 4 7 10 will do the same thing heads 2 5 8 11 will do the same thing When a FX part is selected the spread determines how the FX is spread across the 3 heads MagicQ User Manual 85 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 8 1 6 FX Segments FX segments work together with FX Parts to enable easy control of the relative offsets of different heads within
58. Feeds Text Page Beam 2 Control of Text 2 separate text engines real time editing of text string FX Page Beam 3 Control of FX lines spots snakes rainbows audio triggers circles squares 25 3 2 Media Priority FX Text and Media interact according to the following priorities with FX having the highest priority and Media the lowest FX Page If FX Type is greater than 0 then FX has highest Priority Text Page If Text 1 is greater than 0 or Text 2 is greater than 0 then Text has priority over media Media Page Media has the lowest priority In the Media Window the Media Page encoder Y is used to select the media that is played on the grid The Media pages are as follows Inbuilt Inbuilt patterns and colours Pies 1 User bitmaps bmp or jpeg Pies 1 User bitmaps bmp or jpeg Pies 1 User bitmaps bmp or jpeg Pies 1 User bitmaps bmp or jpeg Movies 1 User movies cmv use MagicQ Media centre to convert from mpeg avi mov etc Movies 2 User movies cmv use MagicQ Media centre to convert from mpeg avi mov etc Movies 3 User movies cmv use MagicQ Media centre to convert from mpeg avi mov etc Movies 4 User movies cmv use MagicQ Media centre to convert from mpeg avi mov etc Timers Date Time Up counters Down counters end of year counters Live Feed Live capture from a PC screen Gobos Access to all the gobo colours and image libraries MagicQ User Manual 228 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSy
59. If channels are not at their correct levels then check Are the Grand Master and Playback Master faders up Are Playback faders raised Is there channel data recorded in the Cues on the playbacks Is BLIND mode on Heads and dimmers are patched to the correct universe If the Outputs Window shows correct values then check the Outputs are configured and enabled correctly in the View DMX I O view of the Setup Window If you are using an Ethernet convertor box check that it is receiving data correctly Check Outputs are configured correctly Outputs are enabled Is test mode active in DMX IO TCP IP address and network address are configured correctly Ethernet box is powered up and connected to the console correctly Ethernet box is configured correctly 45 2 Console not responding Is the time changing in the Status Display if so then the console is running o k Check Master faders up Correct playback pages selected Playback has a Cue stored on it The console is not locked CTRL top left soft button Is button test mode on hold top left SHIFT button and press top right SHIFT button 45 3 Strange key presses unexpected window changes Enter board test mode to determine the cause of the fault hold top left SHIFT button and press top right SHIFT button Check a button has not become stuck down Check nothing no one is leaning on the keyboard or other buttons MagicQ User Manual 337 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www
60. MagicQ supports the ChamSys Audio Interface a USB interface module that takes in 2 different audio signals and processes the signals Audio is not currently supported on the audio connectors on the rear panel of MagicQ consoles In the ChamSys Audio Interface each signal is analysed into 7 different frequency bands consisting of 63Hz 160Hz 400Hz 1 KHz 2 5KHz 6 2KHz 16KHz 63Hz The levels for each channel can be used on MagicQ to set the level of Playbacks to step through cue stacks and to set the speed of chases The ChamSys Audio interface is enabled by setting the Audio Input option in the Setup Window to ChamSys audio interface When connected a graphic equaliser display is shown in the Status Display showing the current levels of the inputs Audio trigger level should be set to 0 In the Cue Stack options there are 4 possible audio modes Audio Controls fader level Audio bumps go Audio sets BPM Audio jumps Cue Stack Audio modes are not active until the Cue Stack is activated by raising the fader or pressing the GO button Double click on the Audio channel to select the channel to respond to Audio level audio parameter 1 and audio parameter 2 should be set to 0 Audio Controls fader level enables the level of the fader to be controlled by the received audio level on the chosen channel In this way you can control all sorts of different functions depending on how you set the Fader options for example you
61. No No Fwd desi ee i005 255 No No Fwd ES When viewing and editing multiple FX in the Programmer Window or Cue Window the encoders A B C D X and Y affect only the FX that the cursor is placed over Prior to v1 3 2 4 they always affected all FX in the Programmer Cue When a new FX is added the encoders automatically default to controlling the parameters of the new FX If the cursor is placed in the All FX row at the top of the Window then these encoders affect all FX as per previous behaviour The E encoder can still be used to modify the individual parameter at the cursor location 8 1 13 Joining Spliting multiple FX There is a function to split some heads out of a FX or to join similar FX together in the Programmer use SHIFT and the JOIN FX and SPLIT FX soft buttons When Split FX is pressed the currently selected heads are moved out of the FX that they are in into a separate FX If the selected heads are the only heads in the FX then no change is made to the FX When Join FX is pressed MagicQ analyses all the FX in the programmer and joins any similar FX of the same type together The speeds sizes offsets are retained until the enlarged FX are modified 8 1 14 Modifying FX for selected Heads It is possible to change FX for a specific set of heads by first selecting the heads and then modifying the parameters in the FX Window instead of in the Programmer Window In the FX Window there are FX MagicQ User Ma
62. No toggle Select multiple groups No Multiple Multiple Multiple Recording to Palettes Selected Selected Selected All heads Setup Keypad Encoders Select heads on keypad intensity set Yes Yes Yes Yes Select heads and palettes from keypad No Yes Yes Yes Keypad always selects heads No No No Yes Maintain encoders as Pos Col Beam No No No Yes Keypad Syntax Theatre Patch No Yes Yes No Setup Windows Always Show Record Options No No No Yes Cue Stack Defaults Fader Fader activates Yes No No No Fader releases Yes No No No Cue Stack Defaults Flash Flash activates Yes No No No Flash releases Yes No No No Cue Stack Defaults Step Multi Cue Controlled as chase Yes No No No Multi Cue Step halts before executing No Yes Yes Yes Multi Cue Zero Old HTP Yes Yes No No Multi Cue Zero Old FX Yes Yes No No Track L L HLF HLF Cue Stack Defaults Step Times HTP in HTP out Pos times Os 3s 3s 3s Changed to Yes in v1 4 8 2 For changing between tracking and non tracking mode simply change the Programmer Tracking option in the Setup Window Prog tab This automatically sets the Default Cue Stack options Recalculate state on jumps Zero old HTP Zero old FX correctly For software versions prior to v1 3 4 6 the user should change mode or set the options manually 19 2 Playback Mode The playback mode determines how the console plays back cues The options are Normal and Safe In Normal mode the us
63. Playback to transfer followed by the S button of the destination Transfer is only possible when a Playback is active Once a transfer has occurred the original Playback can be used to run a Playback from a different page When the transferred Playback is released then it returns to its original Playback 14 4 7 Manual Control To the right of the 10 playbacks is the manual control section consisting of a Manual Fader four buttons STOP GO FWD BKWD and an extra large GO button below the fader This section controls the current playback that is the playback whose SELECT button is illuminated Pressing the SELECT button associated with a playback causes that playback to become the current playback and hence to be controlled by the manual section When a playback is controlled by the manual section the playbacks fader and buttons continue to function as normal so that the HTP level can be set using the fader and the playback can be bumped using the FLASH button The manual section simply provides extra control features above those available on each of the playbacks The GO and STOP buttons in the manual section have the same function as the GO and STOP buttons on each playback The FWD and BKWD buttons move through the Cue stack without fading The extra large GO button below the Manual Fader is designed for theatre style playback and has the same function as the GO button on each playback If multiple SELECT buttons are held down then
64. Sa sae T EUER 115 13 3 Cue Dining eee Eee eem nase nace vases Ent HE eSI E bae eb E a le cess PRU eKO ka uper v oun UARRA 116 13 3 1 Cue Iuming Exar ple reete tete E E ere aeta epa cet epi tub de pate detegit 116 13 3 2 The Halt held iieetretet reciente trot toe ett aet eto ott Re itera rea Pra etie 117 13 3 3 Cue Delay and Pade times unten ecdit et e dte p er deerit LRL ede nie 117 Er Mc MM 117 13 4 1 Tracking on the MagicQ eie Recette tton ste ioa eoi etti Ee Et Ee Retenir ee rea 118 13 4 2 Viewing Cue Data and Tracking Data seen 119 13 4 3 Copying Cues in tracking mode esee ener nennen 119 13 4 4 Blocking Unblocking Cues eese nre erem enne nennen 120 ES EE ISLAM 120 13 6 UE eum 120 13 7 The Cue Store and Cue Stack Store esee eere nnne entrent 121 13 8 Assigning Cues and Cue Stacks esses enne ener enne nennen nennen 122 13 9 Copying and Moving GUES iieri pete ep e acit g eos Den up sette sen tne AEE v AORERE EEEE ES 122 13 10 Linked Cues i e ue Ert tope Leere Litora Ee Eee kl eer e EDU Ere ed eee ditched 122 13 11 Removing Cues and Cue Stacks enemies 122 13 12 CuesStack Detaults n oi e tenti ere eter rete es ty Dp ed eee cbr 123 13 13 Cue Stack Ma 6rosS oie eee fo iren E iactu reca Eel aix st e Eee s EL RENE UR ERR E e ERE se 123 ES MEE
65. Serial stop bits es Serial input protocol om poon 0 8 0 1 Hardware settings Hysterisis on fader encoder moves 33 2 Writing to the serial port Commands are transmitted from the serial port by placing the command in the Macro field of the Cue Stack window The format of serial commands is X followed by the data To send serial data the X command must be the only macro command in the macro field The X command is followed by ASCII data contained within or or by decimal values separated by commas For example to send Hello World followed by a carriage return X Hello World 10 13 MagicQ User Manual 289 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk To send the binary data stream 00 01 02 03 04 X0 1 2 3 4 To send text only X abcedf To send several lines of text X Hello 10 13 World 10 13 33 3 Reading from the serial port By default data received on the serial port is ignored This can be changed to make MagicQ accept remote commands received on the serial port In the View Settings view of the Setup Window set the serial input type to ChamSys Serial Remote ChamSys Serial Remote protocol consists of simple commands consisting of a list parameter values separated by commas and ending in a character A to Z or a to z Commands can contain spaces tabs and carriage returns they are all ignored See the section on ChamSys Remote Protocol for further details Magi
66. Settings Hide Cue Store Ids Qxxx When this option is set the Cue Stack window and Cue Window only either show the Cue Ids from within the Cue Stack they do not show the Q ids from the Cue Store 13 8 Assigning Cues and Cue Stacks Cues and Cue Stacks can be assigned to Playbacks at any time To assign a Cue open the Cue Store Window press the MOVE button select a Cue and then select a playback to assign the Cue to You can assign to real playbacks or to playbacks in the Playbacks Window You can assign to a specific Cue Id in a Cue Stack on a playback by keying in a Cue Id before you select the playback To assign a Cue Stack open the Cue Stack Store Window press the MOVE button select a Cue Stack and then select an empty playback to assign the Cue to You can assign to real playbacks or to playbacks in the Playbacks Window Multiple Cues and Cue Stacks can be assigned at a time by using SHIFT or CTRL and the cursor keys to select multiple Cues and Cue Stacks in the appropriate window 13 9 Copying and Moving Cues Cues can be copied and moved within a Cue stack using the standard move and copy procedures For example to move a cue press COPY select the source then select the destination To copy multiple cues press and hold COPY select multiple entries release COPY and select the destination When copying or moving within a Cue Stack Cues the Cues are moved or copied before the destination Cue that you select
67. Stack 13 4 2 Viewing Cue Data and Tracking Data The Cue Window shows the Cue data for the current Cue on the selected Playback The Cue Window has 3 views View Levels View Times and View FX just like the Programmer Window When looking at a Cue Stack in the Cue Stack Window it is possible to go directly to the Cue Window by placing the cursor on the required Cue and pressing the View Cue soft button If the field the cursor is on is a timing field then the Cue Window will open to show View Times otherwise it will open to show View Levels It is possible to view Cue data for different Cues in a Cue Stack by pressing the PREV CUE and NEXT CUE soft buttons When a Cue is examined that is not the current Cue on the selected Playback the Cue Window becomes locked to that Cue Press the UNLOCK WINDOW soft button to return to viewing the current Cue The Cue Window can also be used to preview Cues when in tracking modes there is a View Tracking soft button When this option is on the Window shows all of the values that are tracking from previous Cues as well as the data in the selected Cue The tracked data is shown in dark colour whereas the data from the selected Cue is shown in active colours When running a Cue Stack it is possible to determine which values have been tracked through the Cue Stack by selecting View Cue Ids in the Outputs Window This shows which playback and which Cue on that playback is controlling the outputs Thus
68. Stats WINDOW OPE 160 18 12 WAU ST CAS eet ettet e entis bes Puy vedere xerox Ree puerto pex uote 160 18 13 Backup Archiv s nine bote URL epe ep EOD HE eH ee ee PR Ce PEARL eU ALPE E Doh eg 161 18 14 Using shows on different MagicQ products and show VerSiONS ceseeseceseceeeeeeeeeeneeees 161 18 14 1 Configuring number of Universes eese nennen rennen 161 18 15 MagicQ profiles nse sibs cud vate dass a ie e cova ba cxes a ae eare iie nia 162 18 16 Changing MagicQ Console Software esses ene rennen nennen 162 18 17 Resetting a MagicQ console to factory defaults esee 162 19 N nip E 163 19 1 Programminp Tode eno eene ERE re HER Y ope LOT EUR HIVER e eR Me a ge tege eed eU hyenas 163 192 Playback Uh PPM 164 19 3 Output Settings sensia 164 19 3 1 Configuring Output Universes eee ceeceseceseeeseeeseeeeseeeaeesacecaaecaecsaecsaeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 165 193 2 Usine Art Neti ices nies iceedttesaussstdcsedesdeaecevebterycshtughioacadebegesSazvessbisedy E ROEE e 166 19 3 3 Installing USB drivers for MagicQ PC sees nennen nennen 166 19 3 4 Installing USB drivers for Mac and Linux eere nennen 167 19 3 5 ChamSys Ethernet Interface eseeseessesseeseeeeeeee enne en eren enne 167 19 3 6 MQ50 Direct Console Outputs eese e
69. To send text only Y abcedf To send several lines of text Y Hello 10 13 World 10 13 On the Ethernet the data above is encapsulated in the data field of ChamSys Ethernet Remote Protocol in the UDP packet Note that commas are not allowed within the ASCII data inside or If you wish to send then you must send it as its hexadecimal ASCII code MagicQ User Manual 285 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 32 3 Reading from the Ethernet By default data received on the Ethernet is ignored This can be changed to make MagicQ accept remote commands received on the Ethernet port In the View Settings view of the Setup Window set the Ethernet Remote Protocol to ChamSys Rem rx ChamSys Remote Protocol consists of simple commands consisting of a list parameter values separated by commas and ending in a character A to Z or a to z Commands can contain spaces tabs and carriage returns they are all ignored See the section on ChamSys Remote Protocol for further details 32 4 Sample code fragments The code fragments below show you could connect to MagicQ using simple C programming ChamSys Ethernet remote protocol define REMOTE ETHER PORT 0x1999 define MAX CREP MSG 1000 typedef struct long32 chamsys wordl6 version byte seq_fwd byte seq_bkwd wordl16 length byte data remote_ether_message_t int remote_ether_sock 0 wordl6 re
70. When set to Yes the Flash button acts as a toggle rather than a bump Pressing the button the first time activates the Playback Pressing the button again releases the Playback When this option is set and the playback is active the LED in the Flash button Flashes to indicate the toggle mode is latched When set to Yes the settings Flash activates Stack and Flash releases Stack are ignored 16 2 7 Flash acts like fader When set to Yes the Flash button has the same effect as if the fader has temporarily been raised to 100 This is useful for enabling the FLASH button to control attributes other Intensity For example if the fader is set to control FX size then pressing the Flash button would act like the fader being fully raised so 100 FX size MagicQ User Manual 140 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 16 2 8 Go jumps out of loop This setting affects Cues that are set to Chase Timing which are in a loop When set to Yes pressing Go will exit the loop jumping to the step after the Cue that loops back to an earlier Cue When set to No pressing Go will step one step within the chase 16 2 9 Go exits loop after end This setting has no effect 16 2 10 Go stop starts When set to Yes then pressing GO stops a Cue that is already running or starts a Cue that is stopped When set to No then pressing GO starts the next Cue 16 2 41 Stop swaps When set to Yes the Back Stop button acts as
71. a real playback After pressing RECORD instead of selecting a playback SELECT button just press the appropriate button in the Playbacks Window 14 5 1 Testing playbacks Any playback can be tested by pressing the appropriate button in the Playbacks Window This has the same effect as raising the physical fader from zero to full Pressing the button again sets the fader back to zero We will refer to this as a virtual playback You can use physical playbacks and virtual playbacks simultaneously however if you activate a virtual playback for an active physical playback then the result will depend on whether the physical playback and the virtual playback are on the same page If they are then the effect will be that the playback will be activated and set to the highest level of the physical playback and the virtual playback If not then the physical playback will not be affected and the virtual playback will be ignored This is because only one Cue Stack can be run on a playback Use the View Faders soft button to change the view in the Playbacks Window into faders rather than buttons Faders can then be moved up and down using the touch screen mouse This enables full control of virtual playbacks The GO PAUSE and RELEASE soft buttons enable immediate control of virtual playbacks You can select a virtual playback as the currently selected playback by pressing the SELECT button and then pressing the required virtual playback in the Playback
72. address 2 9 200 6 subnet mask 255 0 0 0 Connect to the file system Under Windows this can be achieved by selecting Network Neighbourhood in Windows Explorer The console should appear as a computer if this does not happen immediately then you may need to wait a few minutes for Windows to catch up You can force Windows to find the console by using Search and searching for a computer enter the IP address of the console Log in as user magicq with password magicq On some Windows systems you may need to create a user account magicq with password magicq to enable Windows to connect to the console You can then transfer files between the host and the console Show files personality files FX files and Patch files can all be transferred in this way If you have problems putting files onto the console then try pressing the Set Rem Access soft button in the File Manager window 18 11 Status Window There is a status window in the Setup Window View System This shows data associated with the console and with the currently loaded show This includes show size data used last saved times The status window also shows all the MagicQ consoles on the network and all the Art Net devices on the network 18 12 Editing Heads The console includes a fully featured Head Editor From the Patch Window press the Edit Head soft button The Head Editor allows you generate personalities for new heads You can either start from a blank head file
73. agree o etes eere e e apte e eeg aee lee diene 266 29 1 Multi programming iiie erae aces fert ee eoe et e cit eee ehe ENE uae dp be Roe disnei 266 PASE Cr iulii 268 29 2 Selective channel control eee eene ener ettet enne 269 29 2 1 Configurations EE 270 29 2 2 Selecting which console controls which channels eee 270 30 Remote control of MagicQ consoles esses eene ener nre en nennen 272 30 1 Remote control from MagicQ PC sesssssesseeseeeee eee nennen rennen eren eterne nenne 272 30 2 Remote control from a MagicQ console eese rennen nre 272 30 3 iPhone iPod iPad Android Remote eese rennen nennen 273 30 3 1 Setting up an access point conet trinh xat tote ee ie n de ot d ree Peng Pea edu sid 273 30 3 2 MagicQ Pro 2010 Console with USB to Wireless interface 274 30 4 Remote control using Pocket PC or Phone with wireless device eese 277 30 4 1 Custom Web Server pages eecsssesssessessseeesecesnecesesencecaeeeceeccaecseesseesseesseeenseeeseeesneeees 279 31 ChamSys Remote Protocol Commandis eese eren nre 281 31 1 Remote Playback Commands eese enne eene enr ennr ener emeret 281 31 1 1 Remote programming commandis essere eene ener nre nest nenne 282 31 12 Attribute n mbets nonien n pee ie lions tte ea er pe DUREE prede ede ek dae 283 32 Controllin
74. allowed to stomp other playbacks 16 5 8 External timecode This setting affects any steps in this Cue Stack that have their Halt field are set to Timecode When set to Yes this Cue Stack is controlled by external timecode When set to No then this Cue Stack is controlled by internal timecode activating the Playback starts the timecode from 0 16 5 9 Send playback state to other consoles When set to Yes then the state of this Playback is sent to other MagicQ consoles on the network If the Setup Multi Console setting Send Playback state to other consoles is set to Yes then the state of all Playbacks is sent to other consoles regardless of this Cue Stack setting This setting requires Setup Network Ethernet Remote Protocol to be set to ChamSys TX or ChamSys TX and RX 16 6 Chase Options 16 6 1 Skip first times When this setting is set to Yes then when the Cue Stack is activated the fade times for the first step are ignored and the levels bumped straight in This only affects Cue steps set to Chase Timing 16 6 2 Speed This controls the speed of any Cue Steps in the Cue Stack set to Chase Timing This setting can also be controlled via encoder X in the Cue Stack view 16 6 3 Xfade This controls the crossfade of any Cue Steps in the Cue Stack set to Chase Timing This setting can also be controlled via the Y encoder in the Cue Stack view 16 6 4 Direction This controls the direc
75. also known as radio buttons so that a group of buttons programmed as Cues or Cue Stacks can be set so that only one of the group is active at a time Use soft button E to select Solo MagicQ User Manual 209 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The group consists of all adjacent buttons in a horizontal row that have their Item Type set to Solo Solo buttons must be immediately adjacent Empty items or items that are not set to Solo will end the group 22 5 Button appearance Soft button B has been renamed Appearance and it is now possible to select Boxes or Coloured for the appearance of the buttons and faders Names for buttons and faders now use a bold font It is possible to set custom pictures for the buttons in the Execute Window Move the cursor to the button you wish to set a custom bitmap on and then press the BUTTON BITMAP button and select the picture file bmp or jpeg If you wish to have separate button images for a button when it is inactive and active then create 2 image files named with up and dn as the last 2 characters of the filename before the file extension for example mybuttonup bmp mybuttondn bmp When selecting the file choose the up file MagicQ will automatically substitute the dn file when the button is active Use SHIFT CLEAR BITMAP to remove the bitmap 22 6 Wallpaper It is possible to set a background wa
76. an IP address on the same same network The access point can be set up with DHCP to provide a range of IP addresses to wireless devices this removes the need to set the IP address manually on the remote device For example you could set up your wireless access point to give out IP addresses in the range 2 9 200 100 to 2 9 200 150 Security settings should be set up on your access point to avoid unauthorised control of the console When using a wireless acess point the wireless settings in MagicQ are not used these are only used when using a USB Wireless device directly connected to a MagicQ console USB port Ensure that Setup View Settings Network Wireless Mode is set to Disabled 30 3 2 MagicQ Pro 2010 Console with USB to Wireless interface It is possible to use a USB to wireless interface directly from a MagicQ Pro 2010 console The currently supported interface is the Edimax EW 7711UAn On MagicQ the Console Wireless settings should be set to Ad hoc with an IP address of 169 254 1 20 and a subnet mask of 255 255 0 0 SETUP show pixelmapdemo sbk last saved 52 mins ago Mode Prog Keypad Windows Cue Play Ports MIDI Multi Hardware All Encoders Storage Back Timecode Console Parameter Setting IP address 2 9 200 65 Sub net address Send to Applications on this PC Eihemet remote protocol Playback sync port defaul eb server enabled Yes eb server port ti Windows ontrol net IP address ol net sub net
77. another text string to be scrolled in the opposite direction 25 3 9 Text display modes It is also possible to use the single modes to display a single character a single word or a single phrase from the text string at a time on the screen By using the position and size parameters in the Position Window the character can be placed anywhere in the grid or made to fill the entire grid LIIFIIFLITITITIIIIIITIJIIII LIIFIILITIITLTIIIIIIIIITII ee rr CEON r NEENENEN EE ER ERU mmmmmmm mmm mm um um m m mm m m um m m m um T mm m um um TJ m um mm m Lj m m m m um um mm m MagicQ User Manual 232 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk When the mode is set to single words then MagicQ displays each word in turn Each word must be separated by a single space in the text string When the mode is set to chunks single chunks then MagicQ displays each chunk in turn Each chunk must be separated by a single underscore _ character in the text string Space characters are displayed normally 25 3 10 Manipulating bitmaps and text Use the Position attributes of the bitmap layer to make changes to the position of the bitmap text set the X or Y position the X or Y size and the rotation You can play back standard FX on the bitmap layer attributes just like you would on a moving head For example to scroll a bitmap form left to right first set the X position to centre X pos i
78. are all based on 32 by 32 pixels but they can be sized in the Position Window to fill the required grid size 25 3 6 Movie support MagicQ supports playback of movies as well as bitmaps MagicQ supports up to 1024 different movie files Movies are accessed through the Media Page there are 4 ranges on the Media Page encoder Movie 1 Movie 2 Movie 3 Movie 4 These ranges are after the Inbuilt Page and Pics Pages MagicQ User Manual 229 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk User pictures and movies can be loaded into the internal pixel mapper directly from the Media Window using the LOAD PIC LOAD MOVIE soft button available when the Pixel Mapper server is selected Movies are stored in the movies folder show movies in a similar way that bitmaps are stored in the bitmaps folders Movie files are stored in a special ChamSys movie format which compresses the data to the required grid resolution The files are named movie001 001 cmv movie001 002 cmv etc ChamSys movie files are created using Tools in the MagicQ MediaCentre application this now incorporates the MagicQ Matrix Viewer which is installed when you install MagicQ PC MagicQ MediaCentre uses the free software VirtualDub under the GPL licence to perform the movie conversion to new the new resolution VirtualDub is installed in the VirtualDub folder under the MagicQ PC folder When converting movie files we recommend you choose the same movie re
79. are closely associated with the encoders adjacent to them For example in the Beam Window on of the encoder controls the gobo attribute of intelligent heads Pressing the soft button bumps the gobo wheel onto the next gobo Pressing SHIFT and the soft button bumps the gobo wheel back to the previous gobo MagicQ User Manual 348 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 47 Licensing The console runs under the Debian Linux operating system except for the PC version www debian org The software also utilises the MicroWindows library www microwindows org Linux and MicroWindows are subject to the GNU Public License GPL MagicQ User Manual 349 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd 48 Glossary Lay Active Function of loading all parameters for selected heads into the programmer Art Net A protocol for transporting DMX over Ethernet LAN Attributes Intelligent heads support a number of different functions that can be controlled via DMX typically pan tilt colour gobo etc Each of these functions that can be controlled by a separate DMX channel is referred to as an attribute Attribute Bank In the Attributes Window attributes of an intelligent head are divided up into Attribute Banks with two attributes each Attribute Type Attributes of intelligent heads are categorised into one of four types Intensity Position Colour Beam Battery Back up The console supports battery back up as an option If
80. are set to use IP addresses in the ArtNet IP address range 2 0 0 0 to 2 255 255 255 For example the MagicQ PC could be 2 0 0 1 and the Capture PC 2 0 0 2 41 1 2 Using a Single PC You can use one PC and run both MagicQ PC and the Visualiser on the same PC To get the best results from this setup we recommend you use a high screen resolution or two monitors In order to use one PC you must set MagicQ to send to applications on this PC Doing this defaults MagicQ to broadcast data on IP address 127 0 0 1 which is the local loopback IP This enables the data to be transmitted and received back on the same PC To set this option start up MagicQ go to SETUP VIEW SETTINGS and under the Interface Settings set Send to Applications on this PC to YES 41 1 3 Setting IP addresses Changing IP addresses may stop you from connecting to an existing LAN if you are not sure then check with the owner of the LAN If you are simply connecting two of your own PCs together then this should not be a problem Save all existing work and shutdown any open applications In Windows the way you set the IP address of your network connection depends on the variant of Windows However once you have found the right dialog box it is fairly simple In XP click Start Control Panel Network Connections Then select the LAN connection most people only have one and choose Internet Protocol TCP IP MagicQ User Manual 319 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua ww
81. are shown horizontally Or vertically The VIEW NAMES soft button allows names to be shown Deselect this option if you wish to maximise the number of heads shown in this window or you wish to have a more traditional theatre channel list view OUTPUTS j No Int No in No Int No Int No It No Int No Int No Int No Int No Int No Int No Int E G 1 i D iy 07 11 3 DMX channels view The DMX channels view shows the actual values that are being output on the DMX or on the network Press the VIEW CHANS VIEW DMX and VIEW CHANS soft buttons Note that these values are the real output values if the output is enabled then these values will be the values transmitted on the wire Inversions merging and all other modifications are made to the values before they are displayed in this Window Intensity channels are shown in red position in green colour in purple and beam in yellow Channels that are not patched are shown in grey Use the VIEW INPUTS VIEW OUTPUTS soft buttons to view the DMX network values that are being received rather than the ones being transmitted When viewing the Inputs it is possible to select the VIEW MIN MAX soft button to show the maximum values received Deselecting the VIEW MIN MAX resets the view 11 4 Movement view OUTPUTS The movement view shows the relative positions of heads in terms of pan and tilt range on a 2D map It also shows the current colour of the heads This enables previewing of FX and
82. base level for the controlled channels instead of adding to the base level 25 3 13 Colour Mixing The Colour Page of attributes allows the levels of the red green and blue attributes to be set independently The default values are 128 128 128 Each colour can be boosted or cut The Colour Type attribute allows the overall colour to be adjusted including inverts mapping of colours black and white and other colour effects 25 3 14 Apply Type Added new apply type to the Pixel Mapper of use int and fit use int When these apply types are used the Pixel Mapper applies to the intensity channel of the fixtures in the grid instead of to the RGB channels If the fixtures in the grid have no intensity channel then no pixel mapping is MagicQ User Manual 237 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk applied to the fixture This is useful for example to use the pixelmapper on the intensity channel of moving lights or on strobes 25 4 Multi Element Heads From v1 5 1 0 it is now possible to play back patterns specifically on multi element heads such as Chromlech Jarags 5x5 dimmers or other LED tile squares If the Pos FX is set to Mult head then any media text or FX on that layer will apply to the individual multi element heads rather than across the entire grid The same image will be placed on all the multi head elements For best results the grid should be made of same size fixtures with equal spacing 25 4
83. be modified individually The Attribute Window is also used to run head macros Pressing and holding the Attribute button causes the Attribute Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Pos This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Pos Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened MagicQ User Manual 342 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The Pos Window is used to set the pan and tilt attributes of intelligent heads using the Attribute Type method The Pos Window also displays and allows selection of Palette entries from the Position Palette It also supports the Flip function for moving heads Pressing and holding the Pos button causes the Pos Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Colour This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Colour Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Colour Window is used to set the colour attributes of intelligent heads using the Attribute Type method The Colour Window also displays and allows selection of Palette entries from the Colour Palette Pressing and holding the Colour button causes the Colour Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Beam This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Beam Window the active window If the win
84. by pressing SET entering the value on the keypad and then pressing the soft button for attribute in the Intensity Position Colour and Beam windows 7 11 Selecting individual Heads When programming it is often useful to be able to control one head out of a group of heads for instance in order to set up it s position on the stage Alternatively you may wish to apply an effect to all the heads such as fanning the position The head control buttons situated to the right of the touch screen enable the individual head to be selected quickly Once a number of heads have been selected for programming the head control buttons controls how changes are applied to those heads By default changes are applied to all the selected heads On MagicQ you first select the overall selection of heads you want to control using Groups or keypad selection then you use the head control buttons to sub select within that overall selection The title bar of the Group Position Colour and Beam Windows show the currently selected heads GROUP Mac250 46 47 48 49 50 J ER NI G1 45 G3 5 c4 12 6 All Dimmer All CF7HE Dim R59 7 11 1 Single Mode Pressing NEXT HEAD PREV HEAD or SINGLE enters Single mode whereby only one head from the selected heads is operated on at a time When Single mode is first entered control is given to the first selected head i e the first head the user selected after no heads were selected Note that if the heads
85. case you require the repeat function to be on and manual playlist advance to be on For other single shot sound effects or music tracks you would only wish for them to play once and not continue to the next track MagicQ User Manual 304 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Chany www chamsys co uk 37 Using the remote input on MagicQ The MagicQ PC Wing MagicQ MaxiWing and MagicQ consoles support a remote input on the rear panel which can be used to trigger functions in MagicQ from an external control device or switch The remote trigger can be used to trigger Cues in Cues Stacks to flash playbacks as a master GO button or as a ADD SWAP selector 37 1 Connection PC Wing On the PC Wing the remote input is provided on a standard 5 pin 180 degree DIN connector The connections are in the sequence they appear physically on the connector 3 OV and equipment ground 5 Opto isolated input positive 2 Power supply positive 5 Volt current limited 4 Opto isolated input negative 1 OV and equipment ground same as pin 3 The remote input can be used to receive an external signal on the opto isolated inputs or it can be wired to an external switch To receive an external signal wire the signal to pin 5 and the signal to pin 4 When used as external optically isolated input the maximum continuous voltage rating is 24V DC When wiring to an external switch links pins 4 and 1 Then connect the external switch between pins 2 and 5 Magic
86. causes the Outputs Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Type the number 2 to 4 before pressing OUT to open additional Output Windows Setup MagicQ User Manual 339 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Setup Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Setup Window is used to perform major operations on show data such as loading saving and erasing shows It is also used to configure console settings and preferences The Setup Window has three views SETTINGS SYSTEM and DMX I O Pressing and holding the Control button causes the Setup Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Patch This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Patch Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Patch Window is used to patch dimmers and intelligent heads onto the console channels It has two different views DMX for examining individual DMX channels and HEADS for configuring dimmers and intelligent heads See Patching for more details Pressing and holding the Patch button causes the Patch Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Macro This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Macro Window the active window If the window was not op
87. chamsys co uk 19 13 14 Parallel Port Address For use with the Artistic License parallel port dongle 19 13 15 Monitor Settings The Monitor settings have been moved to Setup View System View Monitors 19 14 MIDI Timecode Settings 19 14 1 Timecode frame type The timecode type can be set to EBU 25 SMPTE30 NTSC30 and Film 24 When a ChamSys MIDI SMPTE module is fitted the Status Display will show the current time code being received from the module 19 14 2 Timecode continue frames When MagicQ is set to external timecode and the external timecode source is termporarily lost MagicQ automatically continues to increment the timecode This parameter specifies how long MagicQ continues generating for before it stops After this time the time code will be frozen until a signal is received again 19 14 3 Timecode jump detect frames The timecode jump detect parameter is the number of frames that MagicQ waits before performing a jump This allows spurious timecode values to be ignored The MIDI Show Control type specifies how MagicQ treats MIDI show control commands 19 14 4 Timecode in type The options are None LTC MIDI Art Net and Winamp When this option is set then timecode generation should be set to None 19 14 5 Timecode generation The options are None LTC MIDI and Art Net retransmit Art Net retransmit causes any LTC or MIDI timecode received from the ChamSys MIDI SMPTE interface to be retransmitted on the n
88. chamsys co uk 46 Button Functions Shift The shift buttons are used to select alternative functions for buttons and faders There are three shift buttons on the console one at the top of each side of the touch screen The third is in the row of action buttons above the keypad The shift keys on external keyboards also have the same function Ctrl The ctrl buttons are used to select alternative functions for buttons and faders There are two shift buttons on the console at the top corners of the touchscreen Alternative functions include selecting views and making adjustments to the display and console light brightness The ctrl keys on external keyboards also have the same function Min Used to minimise a window Windows appear in the windows section of the screen Max Used to maximise a window Windows appear in the windows section of the screen A maximised window is sized to the complete main window area The buttons around the edge of the screen and the status screen continue to be displayed Close Used to close a window Windows appear in the windows section of the screen Pressing SHIFT and CLOSE causes all open windows to be closed Next Win This button allows the user to select the active window from the currently open windows The order of window selection is fixed so that windows appear in a memorable sequence regardless of the order the windows were opened Each press of the Next Win butt
89. chosen a head then the Head Editor will be empty You can choose the head to edit from within the Head Editor by pressing the Choose Head button This has the same effect as the Choose Head button in the Patch Window i e you are presented with a list of heads to choose from Once you have made modifications to the personality you can save the changes to disc by pressing the SAVE HEAD soft button If you wish to start a new personality from scratch you can press the New Head soft button whilst if you wish to copy an existing personality you can use the Save As soft button At any time you can choose a new head however if you have made changes which you have not saved to disc then you will be prompted whether you really wish to continue Continuing will mean that the changes will be lost unless you already have patched heads of that type in which case the patched heads in the show will keep the changes In either case personalities on the disc will not keep the changes Press the Patch button to leave the Head Editor and return to the Patch Window 23 1 How Heads are stored in MagicQ MagicQ stores personalities in the show heads folder on the hard disc in the MagicQ console or on MagicQ PC When you choose a head to use in a show it loads the personality from the disc and stores it in memory When you save your show MagicQ writes a copy of the personality into the show file thus ensuring that your show will work even if it is loaded
90. co uk 38 Sound to light audio input Sound to light can be achieved on both MagicQ consoles and MagicQ PC via the ChamSys Audio Interface module which performs 7 band hardware analysis of dual audio channels Sound to light can be used in two ways to bump a Cue Stack from step to step and to set the virtual level of the playback fader Configure the Audio Controls Fader Level and the Audio bumps GO in the View Options view of the Cue Stack window When used to control the fader level the fader can be configured to control HTP level LTP level FX size or FX speed thus giving many possible sound activated FX MagicQ PC does not support audio input through the PC sound card The audio connectors on the rear of MagicQ consoles are not currently supported 39 Using MagicQ to control remote video switchers and mixers MagicQ can now be used to control remote video switchers and mixers such as the Kramer VS series of video switchers Extron Switchers Folsom Switchers and Panasonic MX50 video mixer These devices are connected to a PC system running MagicQ Media Centre using RS232 and then remote controlled from the console using ArtNet In MagicQ Media Centre select Devices DMX devices and then configure the Type Universe Channel and COM port Kramer VS808 1 Video Out 1 2 Video Out 2 3 Video Out 3 4 Video Out 4 5 Video Out 5 6 Video Out 6 7 Video Out 7 8 Video Out 8 9 Spare 10 Spare 11 Spare 12
91. co uk ChamSy 40 2 4 Attach Objects Is magicQ PC Demo Mode a loj xj CTRL VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW FIT TO AUTO INSERT MOVE CTR Norm Touch Simple Maxi SHFT HEADS CHANS DMX VIS OBJECT ARRANGE SELECTED AS zs SHI Cur Heads Length Width Height XPos YPos ZPos jer Tee m 0 50 E jen pese lan s s p E fos me eects hecna eo bso pm fo e me pena Mina hm ee bee p ii Eri Cur Heads Pos Y 7 290 da Cur Heads PosX 75 Add 4A 2 P83 1 PB4 1 PB5 PB6 1 PB7 1 PB8 PBS 3 PB10 profiles 1200spot static 575wash static 1200spot cirde 575wash tilt wn E 5 Mm SERRE TE il ETEEL TN PADAO eee LLELE iUELETEL E T GN JB B EF I LL silii THESES eT LEEEEEE UK Pe I Mia VE EE na III va In View Attach you can insert truss pipe wall or room objects The Form people and furniture objects are not currently supported The model specifies how the object looks Currently supported models are truss pipe and invisible Invisible can be used for grouping a number of fixtures for example on the floor Enter values in the window for length width and height Adding a after the number enters the dimension in feet rather than metres so for 10 feet enter 10 Position the truss or pipe as required Enter a name in the window for the truss or pipe After you insert a truss or pipe then subsequent heads that are patched will be attached to tha
92. consoles 19 16 Hardware Settings 19 16 1 Level above 0 to activate LTP In some circumstances Playbacks may get triggered erroneously even when the fader has not been raised above 0 In these circumstances setting this level to a level above 0 e g 5 may remove the erroneous triggers 19 16 2 Hysterisis on fader encoder moves In some circumstances faders or encoders may become faulty and generate excess noise in these circumstances setting this level to a level above 0 e g 5 may remove the effect of the fault 19 16 38 Encoder Damping Use this option on a MagicQ PC Wing to improve the performance of the encoder wheels This option does not have any effect on MagicQ consoles 19 16 4 Touch Screen The touch screen can be disabled with this setting in case it has gone faulty and is causing problems MagicQ User Manual 194 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 19 16 5 Encoders The encoders can be disabled in case they have gone faulty and are causing problems 19 16 6 Faulty Faders Mask The faders can be disabled in case they have gone faulty and are causing problems This setting should normally be set to 0 The following values can be used Set to 1 to disable the main faders Set to 2 to disable Wing 1 lower faders Set to 4 to disable Wing 1 upper faders Set to 8 to disable Wing 2 lower faders Set to 10 to disable Wing 2 upper faders 19 16 7 Power Fail Detection This setting dis
93. data changes this reduces USB data traffic When the data is constantly changing there will be no difference The RX data LED on MagicQ Wings amp Interfaces shows the level of DMX traffic when DMX data is not changing this LED will flicker a few times a second instead of being on constantly MagicQ User Manual 195 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChawSys www chamsys co uk Some older DMX equipment is not able to work at full DMX speed Use this option to reduce the DMX refresh rate note that this option reduces the rate of data MagicQ sends ve rthe network or via USB to the interface It may not affect the actual DMX rate as this may be under control of the interface itself Some Ethernet Interfaces and network hubs are unable to handle high levels of Ethernet traffic for example all 32 MagicQ universes output simultaneously On these devices set this option to Mixed Changes this sends the Ethernet data at the same rate but in alternating order thus ensuring that the Ethernet Interface can pick up the data Note that MagicQ will always send data on ArtNet and Visualiser at least once every second regardless of whether data has changed 19 16 10 Movie Buffer frames MagicQ uses buffering for Movie clips By default when this settting is set to 0 MagicQ uses a buffer size of 128 frames MagicQ will always use a minimum of 128 frames regardless of this setting Note that on Pro 2010 consoles MagicQ uses a solid state disc so on
94. do not change the physical key caps of these buttons since this may cause irreparable damage to the front panel board 19 8 11 MagicQ PC keyboard mode This mode sets the function of the keyboard 1 Normal the keyboard is used for naming items and selecting heads 2 Programming shortcuts the keyboard is set up for shortcuts to programming keys 3 Playback shortcuts the keyboard is set up for shortcuts for playback keys Programming shortcuts MagicQ User Manual 179 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk NEXT PREV ODD PREV THRU REM SIN HIGH LOC FULL OVE GLE LIGHT ATE SHIFT CLEAR COPY BLIND MOVE NEXT SHIFT HEAD CTRL SEM SPACE DH Le Windows are opened using CTRL and the alphanumeric keys CTRL A CTRL B Beam CTRL C Colour CTRL D CTRL E Execute CTRL F Fx CTRL G Group CTRL H Help CTRL I Intensity CTRL J CTRL K CTRLL Cue Stack CTRL M Media CTRL N Macro CTRL O Outputs CTRLP Position CTRL Q Cue CTRLR Programmer CTRLS Setup CTRL T Patch CTRL U Page CTRL V Playback CTRL W Cue Stack Store CTRL X Cue Store CTRL Y CTRL Z MagicQ User Manual 180 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk EXEC PROG PATCH am PAGE f an ul BN COL PLAY BEAM MACRO MEDIA BACK Playback shortcuts F1 to F10 toggle playbacks 1 to10 on off 1 toO select playbacks 1 to 10 Q to P GO button playbacks 1 to 10 A to STOP button playbacks 1 to 10 MO Swap to this playback on
95. each Window selectable using the top left soft buttons In addition the console stores complete Window Layouts comprising the details of Window position and sizes These can be recalled using CTRL and the top soft buttons Waveform FX The core waveform FX contained on the console such as Circle RGB Sine Pulse etc The waveform FX contains value information for up to 3 attributes and 1 or more heads Wing As an option extra fader wings can be added to the MagicQ Each fader supports 24 playbacks and associated buttons Up to 8 wings can be supported giving 202 physical playbacks MagicQ User Manual 352 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ACN 19 20 165 Add FX 134 Artistic License Interface 165 193 Art Net 19 20 41 160 162 165 166 167 169 188 239 242 248 350 Art Net II 19 165 166 Audio Interface 204 236 308 Bitmap FX 65 110 Calibrate touch screen 335 Clone 19 61 Cloning Heads 19 61 Creating FX from chases 90 Cue Stack Macros 123 335 Cue Storage 120 122 123 163 184 Cues 23 24 36 47 52 53 61 62 70 91 92 94 97 98 100 101 103 104 105 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 130 131 134 148 152 154 158 170 171 174 177 184 203 205 208 209 218 222 230 298 299 300 305 329 333 334 337 342 345 347 350 351 352 Default Values 64 DMX4ALL Interface 165 DMX512 19 20 22 27 41 168 351 Enttec I
96. expansion modules From MagicQ software version 1 3 4 5 the four DMX outputs on the rear panel automatically output universes 1 to 4 unless they are configured otherwise The DMX will be output regardless of the Status enabled or disabled in the Setup window On Pro consoles there is a green LED on the rear panel that indicates when DMX is being output If you wish to choose alternative universes to be output to the four DMX outputs on the rear panel or you have software prior to version 1 3 4 5 then you will need to configure the outputs manually For each of the Universes you wish to output on the rear panel select Out Type as MagicQ Direct and Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 On Software prior to version 1 3 5 0 select Cham USB instead of MagicQ Direct and select Out Uni to Mod 1 Port 1 Mod 1 Port 2 Mod 1 Port 3 Mod 1 Port 4 respectively Enable the Universes MagicQ User Manual 40 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sua www chamsys co uk Uni Status Out Type Out Uni In Type In Uni Visualiser Hot takeover Test Copy Enabled MQ Direct Port 1 ArtNet Merete aoee eos awe f2 Eres Wo Drect Pots Jer ara Nose ame lana ae fara ArtNet 4 4 2 Using ArtNet and ArtNet to DMX interfaces To output ArtNet on a Universe enable it and ensure that the output type is set to ArtNet Choose which ArtNet Universe you wish to Output the MagicQ Universe on MagicQ defaults to outputing MagicQ un
97. head name and gel colour Pressing the ALL TO ZERO and ALL TO FULL soft buttons only affects the faders that match the selected filter So for example in order to set all the red lamps to full page through the gel type till you reach RED and then press ALL TO FULL Remember that although you only view the gel type that you have requested there may be other gel types that have been previously activated in the programmer Press CLEAR before starting programming a new scene 6 6 Setting levels whilst running a show The Intensities Window supports two views the Programmer View and the Presets View The faders in each of these views behave differently In the Programmer View the faders control values within the programmer whilst in the Presets View the faders act like individual preset faders Intensity channels are generally configured to be HTP so the level of a particular channel will be a combination of the faders in the two views the highest of the two faders It is important to understand the distinction preset faders do not affect the contents of the programmer and therefore can not be used for programming Cues When programming a show you should always use the Programmer View When playing back a show you may wish to use the Presets View this has the advantage that since it is not part of the programmer fader values are not affected by actions on the Programmer such as CLEAR You could for example add in some face lighting from so
98. hold down CTRL and select one of the top soft buttons To name the Window layout press SET and then hold down CTRL and select one of the top soft buttons Enter a name for the layout 4 19 Saving Your Show The MagicQ utilises a large hard disk to enable storage of a virtually infinite number of shows When you are programming a show the show is stored in memory In order to store your show on the disk you need to press the SAVE SHOW soft button in the Setup Window Whilst programming you should regularly save your show so that if the unexpected happens and the power fails your show data is not lost You can chose any filename the console will automatically set the file extension to shw By default the console periodically saves a backup of your show to disk It uses the same show name but with the file extension sbk It is a good idea to save your show to different file names so that you have various points you can back track to if things go wrong For example save the show as myshow patch shw after you have patched and then as myshow final shw after you have finished programming When you shut down the console through the QUIT soft button in the Setup Window the console automatically saves a backup copy of your show with a sbk extension When you subsequently restart the console this file will be re loaded This ensures that the console starts up as it was when the QUIT soft button was pressed 4 20 Playing Back Your Show
99. input on MagicQ ssesssseeseesseeeeeeeeeen eene een rennen eren neen nennen 305 37 1 Connection PC Wing erderen ieaiai E eode hen enero la esu den eeve t Saves a petes toedabedeatedexees 305 37 2 Connection MagicQ Consoles and MagicQ MaxiWing sese 306 37 3 Enabling the remote input in MagicQ oo ceeceseeeseeseceeeeeeeaeeeaeecaeecaaecaecsaecsaeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 307 38 Sound to light audio input eese sees enne nne ennr eterne trente senes 308 39 Using MagicQ to control remote video switchers and mixers eeeeeeeeeee 308 40 IMagic BARDEM ET M 310 40 1 Starting MaglcVis indie PU Rer ee dive Eee gs cee PRA EOR LEER EE REP REPE ERR RAD 311 40 1 1 Using MagicQ inc Vis combined Visualiser app eene 311 40 1 2 Connecting MagicVis app to a console 0 cee ceeeceseceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeecseeeaaecsaecaesnaeenaeees 311 40 2 Using MaglcVIs uere teh leds vies nr reden te E E Suc et vases cava aep kt oncuepsuibcwsseeacgetacevsendes ot 312 40 2 Patching fixtures in the Visualiser nene rennen 313 40 2 2 MagicQ View VIS VIEW citieiieti beber literie decere n runna e raa eer AEE Md led b Leda de dg adt 313 40 2 3 Positioning the heads in the visualisation eee rene 314 40 2 4 _ Attach Objects etri eee ene Hr E Pn Der Ia e los Ea Desc ge lige Dep eese EE RE DR EN 316 40 2 5 Attaching heads to Attach Objects
100. is included as part of the standard FX library When the FX is created the base level of the colour channel will be used to determine the colour that the FX will use When the FX is played back the base level is used in the FX itself rather than the FX adding to the base To create a new FX based on base colour in the FX Edit Window View General set Use Col Base Yes 8 6 FX Library storing and recalling programmed FX FX can be recorded for re use in multiple Cues when programming or when busking live to quickly apply a complete FX over multiple heads The FX Window enables the storage of FX and combinations of FX that are used regularly The FX Window is opened by pressing the FX button formerly the ATTR button EDIT ADD ADD SAVE LOAD REMOVE FX FX FX 0 SIZE FX LIB FX LIB ALL FX Record FX into the FX Window in the normal way set up the FX in the programmer and then press RECORD All of the different FX currently in the programmer are stored including all of the size speed and offset information In addition any base levels for the channels that are controlled by the FX are also stored To recall the FX simply select some heads and then select the FX from the FX Window FX can be named moved and copied just like any windows items FX can be played back on any head that supports the programmed attributes not just the heads the FX was recorded with MagicQ User Manual 91 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www cham
101. just surfaces for LEDs etc MagicQ User Manual 318 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 41 Using MagicQ with other Visualisers MagicQ supports connection with other Visualisers via Ethernet protocols MagicQ also supports transfer of patch and fixture selection information to and from Visualisers The protocol used to communicate between MagicQ and the Visualiser depends on the particular Visualiser The simplest way to connect is using the ArtNet protocol in the same way as you would connect to ArtNet to DMX interfaces most Visualisers now support it ArtNet does not support transfer of patch or fixture selection information so for this you will need to use a Visualiser specific protocol It is possible to run MagicQ PC on the same PC that is running the Visualiser however we suggest that you run them on separate PCs linked via Ethernet for the best results If you choose to run MagicQ PC and the Visualiser on the same PC then best results will be achieved with a big screen resolution or multiple monitors 41 1 Connecting the systems 41 1 1 Using two separate PCs Connect the two PCs via an Ethernet LAN This can be a single reverse cable or a LAN setup with routers and hubs The IP addresses of the two PCs must be configured so that the two PCs can communicate if you can ping one PC from the other then you should be ok For Visualisers that communicate using ArtNet protocol you need to ensure that both PCs
102. large numbers of universes are being carried over Ethernet it may also be necessary to configure the Art Net subnet ids Enter subnet ids using the syntax 1 0 for subnet 1 universe 0 The subnet ids default to 0 In MagicQ software prior to v1 4 4 1 the sub net ids were set in columns to the right in the View DMX IO view Prior to v1 3 2 0 there was a single option in Setup window View Settings this set the Art Net subnet globally A by a Universe indicates a clash whereby more than one Universe is being output on the same network Universes 19 3 2 Using Art Net II To use Art Net II simply configure the Output Universe type to Art Net and then set the following options Each Universe on MagicQ can be set to Unicast to a specific IP address rather than broadcast as in Art Net I The IP addresses of Art Net compliant devices on the network can be viewed in Setup Window View System View Status Art Net nodes For shows programmed prior to v1 4 1 8 to be fully Art Net II compliant the Setup option Hardware Reduced Rate DMX should be set to Mixed Changes 19 3 3 Installing USB drivers for MagicQ PC MagicQ USB interfaces MagicQ Wings or 3 party USB interfaces like the Enttec dongle use a USB chipset made by FTDI which requires the installation of the correct drivers MagicDMX devices do not need any additional drivers they use different HID drivers within the operating system There are two types of drivers f
103. master console sends ChamSys Remote Protocol commands to the slave consoles Synchronisation on MagicQ PC is only available when connected to a MagicQ Wing or MagicQ Interface 28 5 1 Configuration MagicQ software v1 3 6 4 and above From v1 3 6 4 configuration of multi networking is simplified On all units set Remote Ethernet Protocol to Chamsys Rem tx and rx Note this is not required from v1 4 8 6 SETUP show capture sbk Mode Windows Cue Storage Parameter Setting 2 0 0 1 255 0 0 0 E Pois MIDI Muti Hardware Al Back Timecode Console No Cham Sys Rem tix n 8080 No Extemal Windows On all units that will be master units set the Playback Sync type option SETUP show FriDec30232202010 sbk Mode Prog Keypad Windows Cue Play Network Ports MIDI Hardware All Encoders Storage Back Timecode Show data sync None data sync IP 2 9 200 52 The Setup option Playback Sync Type has six options None No synchronisation information is sent Swap DBO Swap DBO info only Page Page changes only Enhanced Playback Enhanced sync protocol recommended Slave Slave receive sync only Wings Wing data only no data is sent for PB1 to PB10 Obsolete was Pb Obsolete Playback info only mode Obsolete was PB Swap DBO Obsolete Playback Swap DBO mode MagicQ User Manual 263 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk We strongly recommend you use Enhanced as this
104. on MagicQ Media Centre only MagicQ User Manual 231 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 25 3 8 Using text strings Two text strings can be played back on each layer The text strings can be positioned at the top middle or bottom of the grid and can be made to scroll in either horizontal or vertical directions Text strings can be edited live for real time message applications Control text strings from the Text Page Beam Page 2 Each of the two text strings has a Text Page a Text a Text speed and a Text mode Using the Text Page and Text encoders select a string that has not been programmed e g Text Page 1 Text 0 Type in new text on the keyboard press SET and press the soft button associated with the Text attribute The Input Display will report text stored The Text mode determines how the text is displayed horizontally vertically top bottom or middle The Text speed determines the speed that the text scrolls across the screen Note that Text mode values less than 128 cause the text to be scrolled across the screen with no gap between the start and end of the text Text mode values greater than 128 cause the text to be scrolled with a gap between the end of the text and the starting of the text again Two different fonts can be selected using the text mode values The two sets of text controls enable one text string to be scrolled in one direction and
105. on Playback Record Cue ID 2 5 Record Cue to current Playback Record to Playback 2 Record to Cue ID 2 5 Playback 2 Record sel heads only Record sel attribs Record merge Record remove Record entire state of programmer Record Merge current Cue Record Merge current Cue Record Cue Only Record Snapshot e Editing Cues Edit in Programmer Record merge Rec merge all Cue Stack Rec remove all Cue Stack Remove Cue Stack Remove Cue ID 2 5 Copy Playback Copy Playback unlinked e Palettes Record Palette Re record Palette Name Palette Name Palette no keyboard Edit Palette Play Palette with 3 secs Play Palette with 3 secs fanned Play Palette fan fade 0 to 3s Play fan delay 0 to 3s 1s fade Copy Palettes to Playback MagicQ User Manual CLEAR 3 CLEAR Select heads SHIFT CLEAR CTRL CLEAR lt REM turn encoder gt lt soft button REM gt lt POS REM gt lt COLOR REM gt lt BEAM REM gt lt INT REM gt lt REM gt REC lt S gt 2 5 REC lt S gt REC ENTER REC 2 ENTER REC 2 2 5 ENTER lt SHIFT REC gt lt Sel Only gt lt S gt lt SHIFT REC select attribs lt S gt lt REC gt lt S gt lt REC gt lt S gt ALL REC lt S gt REC REC UPD REC REC INC S make change UPDATE Change vals in Prog lt lt S gt REC lt SHIFT REC gt lt Record Merge gt lt S gt lt SHIFT REC gt lt Record Remove gt lt S gt REM lt S gt REM
106. over ride the programmed effect in the playbacks by using the programmer For instance assume that you are running a yellow circle on your MAC500s You wish to change the colour to Red Select the MAC500s from the Group Window In the Colour Window select the Red palette entry If you wish to remove the over ride then you can either clear all off the programmer by pressing CLEAR Alternatively you can remove only certain attributes or certain heads by selecting the items with the cursor in the Prog Window and pressing the REMOVE soft button When you press CLEAR or remove selected heads from the programmer the programming will be immediately removed and the heads will be controlled by the playbacks as if the programming had not MagicQ User Manual 153 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk been applied This is different to some other consoles where clearing the programmer has non deterministic effects Note that in order to over ride individual attributes of an intelligent head you need to be in SELECT BY CHAN rather than SELECT BY HEAD mode If you are in SELECT BY HEAD mode then all of the head attributes will be set to what is in the programmer 17 9 Adding in new FX Since the MagicQ does not make a distinction between programming and run modes it is always possible to busk new FX For instance assume that you have an active playback which has the MAC500s statically focused on the centre vocals position You now w
107. recall using the keypad and a name for identification However to save time the console will automatically allocate numbers and names according to fixture types 5 2 Getting started with patching The console supports comprehensive patching facilities for allocating dimmers and intelligent heads to DMX channels Patching can be carried out at any time and has an immediate effect Press the PATCH button to open the Patch Window The Patch Window has two possible views VIEW HEADS and VIEW CHANS VIEW HEADS is used to manage heads and dimmers such as naming setting head numbers and gel colour VIEW CHANS is used to carry out operations on individual DMX channels such as testing the channel and setting inverts 5 3 Testing channels To test channels in VIEW CHANS press the TEST CHANS soft button to enter test mode In this mode the channel which the cursor is on is set to the level configured on the TEST CHANS encoder Use the cursor keys to move through different channels Test mode remains active until the TEST CHANS soft button is pressed again Channel testing works for both patched and unpatched channels Note that for channels patched as LTP the level of the Grand Master does not affect the channel level and after test is turned off the channel remains at the test level LTP channels can be set to zero by pressing CTRL CLEAR You can also test channels by moving to the appropriate channel and pressing the TEST SELECT CHANS soft butt
108. relative positions without the lighting rig Press the VIEW CHANS VIEW DMX VIEW MOVE soft buttons MagicQ User Manual 109 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 11 5 Plan View Plan View enables 2D plans of the stage rig constructed and viewed It also enables grids of LED or dimmers to be created for use with the in built pixel mapping Bitmap FX engine Press the VIEW PLAN soft button 11 5 1 Creating rig plans It is possible to create a rig plan in the Outputs window so that you can easily identify the levels and colours of your moving lights based on their position in the lighting rig The model of the rig in MagicQ consists of a grid each cell can be assigned to a particular head number Grids can also be used to monitor LED arrays and other colour blocks OUTPUTS Outputs In the Outputs Window select View Plan and View Hd Nos Press Grid Size and enter a matrix size for your lighting rig e g 30 20 gives a 30 by 20 grid A grid is now displayed In each of the boxes enter the head number of the head that you wish to be represented in this box You can use SHIFT and the cursor keys to set a sequence of head numbers Alternatively you can use the INSERT HEADS button to insert all patched heads into the matrix The heads are placed in order of head number In order to make use of this feature all heads should have unique numbers Note that it is not necessary to have a head number assigned to every c
109. selection press 4 ENTER The console generates groups for each head as they are patched In addition the console can generate auto groups based on gel colour and head name 7 2 1 Recording a Group Select the heads you want in a group in the VIEW HEADS view of the Group Window Change to the VIEW GROUPS view Press RECORD and then select the group you wish to record either by pressing the touch screen or by using the cursor keys and then pressing ENTER 7 2 2 Naming a Group When recording a group if you key in a name before pressing the touch screen or pressing ENTER then the group will be named at the same time as it is recorded You can name a group at any time by keying in the name pressing SET and pressing the touch screen If you do not have a keyboard then press SET and select the group to name by pressing the touch screen or using cursor keys and ENTER A keyboard window will be displayed for you to enter the name on screen 7 3 Selecting Heads using the keypad Heads can be selected based on the head numbers of your dimmers moving lights if you intend to use this method then you should set up the head numbers of your lamps when patching Itis easy to do the console can automatically renumber them or they can be set to be the same as the DMX start address of the dimmer head See the section on patching By default on MagicQ the keypad is used for many functions including selecting heads settings times editing fi
110. sese 246 26 5 ALIVE DBEevieWSusasde icio nt m cet t EO re nb ieget EPOR e Fortes EE Pa EUR et dove eec ER 246 26 6 Media Window View ineiiieteteseste tere t eet i eid entes Heated ea EN E eE O EAA ES 247 26 7 Using MagicQ and Media Server software on the same PC sse 247 26 7 1 Using the loopback IP address rennen 247 26 7 2 Using Microsoft Loopback Adapter essent eene rennen 247 26 8 DroubleshOOLUP erreneren ena eate n dre re Dr IR ee PEE eee n E Ee OC E ERR e EE He T ER 247 26 0 Notes for specific Media Severs sess nee ne enne rene nen 248 26 9 1 Using MagicQ with Arkaos eeeeseeseeeeeeeeee neret nenne entren enne 248 26 9 2 Using MagicQ with Catalyst eese eene eene nnne nnne ener rennen enne 248 26 9 3 Using MagicQ with Coolux Pandoras Box eeseeeeseeeeeeeneen eene 249 26 9 4 Using MagicQ with Hippotizers ssesseeseeeseeereeeeen eene nennen nennen enne enne 251 26 9 5 Using Mbox EXtreme with MagicQ sess rennen enne 254 ined di EIu NE 255 2711 MQMode MQY Net iiciieceiie ete siesta teet bee eur ere ete that t Les Due Eo de tte Edge ete Pedale Lee ep red bue ELTE en 255 MagicQ User Manual 15 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 27 2 Non MQ Mode Art Net ACN Buffer esses eene rennen rennen 256 27 3 Upgrading ChamSys 4 Universe Interfaces
111. shake B ES PB B p B13 Pc B14 geo E15 R Pce tnd holes dec beam tiple shake fan hat shake ida shake shake Biel Pe e17 pr hm bar shake cone Shake pr hm scil gt gt gobo em The highlighted window enables controls the soft buttons and rotary encoders In each of the Windows the X and Y encoders control the most important attributes Pan and Tilt in Position Window Col Wheel 1 and Col Wheel 2 in the Colour Window and Gobo Wheel 1 and Gobo Wheel 2 in the Beam Window In the Beam Window there are more than eight attributes to be controlled these are accessed using multiple pages of encoders by pressing the NEXT PAGE soft button MagicQ User Manual 48 Version 1 5 7 5 www chamsys co uk ChamSys Ltd B33 thin bars i B34 grid ball i B35 grid ball r B36 thin bars r VIEW PALETTE Shutter Asya UVM Gres ONS E teed 04 Pes cle sje sep eles elem sles7Q Bless s sem e bari fani thin bars i qrid ball i grid ballr thin bars r fanr barr triangle r dots open B p42EA BJB B B44 B B45 s B B46 B bricks cloud machine bamboo threads pling shake B499 Besos B threads bamboo shake shake B es26 B ps3E B B54 ejes ejes s p7EH BJ B ess BEBE E Rotatet 100 machine cloud shake bricks lotus shake dots shake Dots G1 Dots2 G2 Tila Cir G4 Star G2 shake shake O B6 EB BE2AN elecz B BE4 wide Swi G
112. sje sj ss siess sek P Eg ESSE OE wae e e oL LLL l Swirl G3 Ti GA gobo esed Prism 5 rotation Gobo Chris PC Thu Nov 20 03 35 18 2008 Ver 1 3 8 3 Page 1 Add Master E Palette entries that contain data for the currently selected heads are shown in white Palette entries that do not have any data for the currently selected heads are shown in grey 9 2 Hecording Palettes To record a palette entry select the heads you wish to apply the change to Then open the required palette by selecting one of the Colour Beam or Position Windows MagicQ User Manual 93 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Modify the attributes of the heads until you are happy with them Then record the palette entry by pressing RECORD and then selecting the palette entry in the window When you record a palette entry that has already been used in programming of Cues and Cue Stacks then the Cues and Cue Stacks will be updated to reflect the changes This is useful for example for touring shows that play many different venues If the Cues use positions from the Position palette then each day it is only necessary to change the palette entries rather than having to re record all the Cues When palettes are recorded only the attributes appropriate to the palette are recorded So when recording to the colour palette only colour attributes are stored By default the console records all the attributes appropriate to the palette regardless o
113. test the Cue first clear the programmer by pressing CLEAR then raise the Playback fader or press the Playback FLASH button When a Cue is recorded it is automatically added to the Cue Store which is a list of all Cues stored on the console The Cue will be given a unique Cue Number e g Q1 This enables the Cue to be re used in future programming MagicQ User Manual 100 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk To view a recorded Cue press the SELECT button for the Playback and then press CUE to open the Cue Window The Cue Window is very similar to the Programmer Window it has the same views for Levels Timing and FX 10 4 1 Levels All active channels in the programmer are transferred into the Cue Thus if Activation by Head is in use then all the attributes of activated heads will be stored If the channel level was set using a Palette then that is also recorded so that the Cue can keep track of changes to the Palette When you subsequently change the Palette the changes will be reflected in the Cue 10 4 2 Timing The timing information in the programmer is copied into the Cue Cue timing can be set up before or after the Cue is recorded Timing information for channels consists of two types General Times stored for each type of attribute Int In Int Out Position Colour Beam Individual Times stored on an individual channel basis All Cues have General Times whereas Individual Times are opti
114. the 48 channels will be automatically output on the 1 output There are 10 Playback Faders labelled PB1 to PB10 Depending on your screen resolution you may have a S gt and Il button for each fader Pressing in the box labelled PB1 to PB10 is the same as pressing the appropriate S button To record a Cue set the faders as required Then press REC and press the S button of the Playback fader you wish to record it to Press CLEAR to clear the Programmer and retrun the faders to their defaults To record a chase record multiple Cues to a Playback fader simply record more than one cue to a Playback fader To remove the Cues from a fader press REM and press the S button of the Playback fader you wish to remove Cues from To name a fader press SET and press the S button of the Playback fader you wish to name You will be shown a text entry box Type the name followed by RETURN Multiple pages of faders are supported through the Next Page Previous Page buttons It is possible to interchange between the Normal and Simple views of the console by pressing the Norm and Simple buttons in the top right corner of the Application 20 2 Technician Test Fixture The Techincian Test Fixture mode enables technicians to test a moving light or other fixture in a very simple way Simply press the TEST SHOW soft button and select a fixture and a mode A new show will be created using that fixture patched at DMX address 1 on the first Universe The 4
115. the Cue Stack options CUE STACK C523 Option All chans controlled LTP ignore FX from other playbacks Masters do not affect level Highest playback priority Move when dark Maintain state on jumps Dont stomp other playbacks Extemal timecode Rend payback sats oer conse SN Cues can be set to time code by changing the Halt field in the Cue Stack window double click on it or press SHIFT ENTER CUE STACK C523 ES Status Cue id Cue text Hem Halt vend Fade Cue Next cue E Track a D mp per b ee ee ae AR del ed sail ll m mec SO 7 a Oe a ee m pop PI When a Cue Stack that contains time code cues is activated the time code takes control of the Cue Stack and each Cue executes at the time code specified For Internally generated time code activating the Cue Stack starts the time code at 0 0 0 For external time code the time code will be read from the external module 35 1 1 Emabling Disabling Timecode It is possible to turn timecode on and off for a Cue Stack using soft button A in the Cue Stack Window When timecode is turned off the Cue Stack will not execute timecode Cues When turned on it will execute timecode Cues according to the Internal External setting Press SHIFT soft button A to avoid the confirmation request It is also possible to change the Cue Stack from Internal to External timecode using the soft button C Press SHIFT soft button C to avoid the confirmatio
116. the Go Back Fast Forward and Fast Back buttons in the manual control section can be used to control multiple Playbacks simultaneously The Manual Fader is unlike all the other faders in that it controls the progress of the current CUE rather than the HTP level of the Cue Stack This enables a Cue to be manually faded the level of the Manual Fader representing the of the fade that is complete from 0 to 100 The Manual Fader enables you to in a Cue Stack To start a manual cross fade hold the SELECT button for the playback and move the cross fader The display window will show pickup until the cross fader MagicQ User Manual 128 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk level matches the current position in the fade it will then change to manual You can also start a manual cross fade on the currently selected playback by holding SHIFT and moving the cross fader As the fader reaches the limits the Cue Stack moves to the next Cue 14 4 8 Goto The GO buttons in the manual section can also be used to jump to different Cue id in a Cue Stack enter the Cue ID in the Cue Stack and press the Go button in the manual section It is also possible to perform a Goto and a Preload of the next step to got to in the Cue Stack Window 14 4 9 Manual Split Cross fade Two faders may be assigned as theatre style split cross fade masters When enabled from the Setup Window playbacks faders 9 and 10 become Xfade Masters for m
117. the Programmer Window and the Cue Window In older versions of software they were available in the View FX view of these windows use the PAGE RIGHT button to move to the appropriate columns 8 1 10 Initial spreads If you are running multiple FX from within a Cue then you may wish to select an initial spread between the different FX Configure this from the Programmer Window and the Cue Window use the PAGE RIGHT button to move to the appropriate columns Both a coarse and a fine spread can be configured 8 1 11 Flicker FX MagicQ User Manual 88 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sua www chamsys co uk MagicQ includes a number of FX designed to simulate flickers these can be used to simulate fires candles and lightning FX speed size and spread can be used to generate different effects The flicker FX available are Flicker Random flicker above and below base level Flicker up Random flicker above the base level Flicker down Random flicker below the base level Flicker sync Random flicker all heads in the FX synchronised together Flicker crossfade Random flicker with random levels and random crossfades 8 1 12 Multiple FX It is possible to have multiple different FX on a head e g a circle on pan and tilt and a red green blue colour mix on the colour mix attributes PROG CF7HE 51 52 53 54 a 4 Head name Head type Hd No Attrib Speed Made Size Stop OSize Dir Spread Parts Segment Add Fade in Fade ls pe e MD 100 255
118. the console A Cue stores level timing and FX information for a single look Cue Stack A sequence of Cues that can be played in order Cue Store A list of all the Cues stored on the console Cue Stack Store A list of all the Cues Stacks stored on the console DBO Dead Black Out The DBO button when pressed causes all HTP channels to be set to zero On release all HTP channels are returned to their previous values Console Lamp Low voltage lamp which connects into the rear panel Used to light up the console surface The console supports 2 or more console lamps depending on the number of attached wings MagicQ User Manual 350 www chamsys co uk Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk DMX DMX512 protocol Encoder Rotary dial used for easy control of parameters Ethernet A method of connecting data equipment together in the form of a Local Area Network LAN Fan Method of modifying parameters using encoders whereby different changes are applied to the selected heads such that the parameter is fanned across the heads File Manager A Window used for organising show data stored on the MagicQ internal disc and on external USB sticks Flip For moving heads with 360 degree pan movement there is more than one setting for the pan and tilt attributes for each physical position Flip modifies the pan and tilt a
119. the macro has been recorded however if external time code timing is required then this should be selected before the macro is recorded This enables the console to record the key and button presses according to the received time code signal Times can be modified in the View Data view of the Macro Window using the keypad and Encoder E Multiple items in the macro can be changed at one time using SHIFT and the cursor keys to select the items When using time code timing the and operators can be used to offset the timing of a sequence of items 21 4 3 X Recording Playback faders Macros support fader moves and encoder changes as well as button presses This enables complete recording and playback of macro segments Macro timing and playback uses a high resolution internal clock enabling accurate playback of recorded sequences MagicQ optimises fader moves to remove redundant steps 21 4 4 In built Macros MagicQ supports a number of in built macros which carry out common programming key sequences including quite a few that would normally require multiple key presses or simulataneous pressing of more than one key The In built Macros can be useful on touch systems where it is not possible to touch 2 keys at one time Press the In built Macro soft button and choose the macro to assign to the current item in the Macro Window 21 5 MagicQ Automation Window MagicQ supports an automation system to enable it to automatically respond t
120. the slave consoles It is possible to force a show slave to resynchronise by holding the left and right cursor keys and pressing SET It is also possible to resync by restarting or soft resetting the show slave console There are hot keys on the slave consoles to enable and disable the show sync as set up in Setup View Settings Multi Console Hold the left and right cursor keys and press to enable the show sync and hold left and right cursor keys and press to disable the show sync To turn off show synchronisation on the master console simply set the Show Data Sync Type to None 29 2 Selective channel control When multiple consoles are synced they still operate as separate console in terms of the DMX I O settings so for example if you were to enable the universes on each of the consoles then there would be a fight between the consoles MagicQ has selective channel control which enables the master console to output all the channels and choose which consoles control which channels With selective channel control the slave consoles send their output data to the show master and then the show master merges the data from all the slaves onto its outputs Outputs enabled network and direct DMX Slave Master Slave Slave consoles send their output data using internal ChamSys protocol to the show Slave consoles normally have their master which then merges the channels outputs set to Disabled to avoid according
121. these systems changing this parameter should not make significant difference 19 16 11 Standard Logging This option allows logging to be disabled This option should always be enabled except when directed by ChamSys support 19 16 12 Extended Logging This option allows extended logging to be enabled ChamSys support may request that Extended Logging is enabled in order to try to solve problems 19 17 General Settings 19 17 1 Splash screen image Users can now add their own splash screen by copying their splash image named usersplash bmp into the MagicQ folder This will be used in favour of the default splash bmp 19 18 Individual Playback Settings Settings for individual Playbacks Cue Stacks are configured from the View Options and View Defaults views in the Cue Stacks Window See Playbacks 19 19 Re calibrating the touch screen If the touch screen does not respond accurately to the position that you are pressing on the screen then you may need to re calibrate the touch screen Don t be afraid this is a painless exercise In the Setup Window press the Cal Touch button use the physical button rather than the pressing the touch screen This puts the screen into calibration mode To calibrate the touch screen simply press the MagicQ User Manual 196 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk screen in the bottom left corner of the screen and then the top right corner of the screen Press the screen on the corners
122. this setting is set to Yes MagicQ attempts to derive the setting Cue settings from the previous Cue in the Cue Stack If the Cue is the first in the Cue Stack then MagicQ uses the default Step and Step Times 19 10 6 Hide Cue Store Ids Qids MagicQ supports two different ids for Cues the Cue Id of the Cue within the specific Cue Stack and the Qld of the Cue within the Cue Store Many users record Cues directly to Cue Stacks on Playbacks and do not need to use the Cue Store These users are only concerned with the Cue Id in the Cue Stack When this setting is set to Yes MagicQ hides the QId from the Cue Store from the Cue Stack Windows and Cue Windows 19 10 7 Expand palettes to same head type This setting allows palettes to be automatically expanded to heads of the same type This enables palettes to be built up on a single head and then expanded to all of the patched heads of that type It is possible to choose just Colours and Beams to be expanded or all Palettes Palettes are expanded when patching a new head and when recording palettes 19 10 8 Heads moved aside are unpatched This setting determines that heads are unpatched rather than moved aside when repatching and morphing When set to Yes when repatching any heads that need to be moved aside to make room for new heads are unpatched 19 11 Playback Settings 19 11 1 Grand Master function The Grand Master can be configured to control only the level of preset faders
123. to change it to Copy and then set the From Chan column 5 19 Morphing heads Changing fixture type It is possible to morph one head type into another head type The system will copy the programming from the old head type to the new head type The system takes into account the different pan and tilt ranges of the heads when copying pan and tilt data As no two heads are exactly the same the programming will be unlikely to create exactly the same looks as with the original heads A closer representation will be obtained by morphing a spot into a spot as opposed to a spot into a wash light If the new head types have more channels than the original head types then MagicQ morphs the heads but leaves them unpatched the user must then repatch the heads at a suitable location In the Patch Window choose the new head type then move the cursor to the head to change or select a block of heads using SHIFT and the cursor keys Press the MORPH HEAD soft button and confirm that the action is what is required CONFIRM Morph head s into Clay Paky ASHPE1200 std YES CANCEL After morphing heads your groups palettes and cues will be updated to reflect the new head types 5 19 1 Morphing Multi Part Heads From v1 5 1 0 MagicQ supports full morphing between multi part heads from single part heads to multi part heads and from multi part heads to single part heads MagicQ User Manual 62 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www ch
124. to press ENTER after you have entered a 2 digit level The console knows that you are setting an intensity due to the key Valid levels are 0 to 100 On MagicQ PC you can use gt to indicate THRU and to indicate FULL 6 3 1 Setting fade times from the keypad Fade times for intensity channels can be entered from the keypad Ensure that Auto Enter on Keypad Intensity Set is set to No for this to function correctly This can be done when setting levels e g to set heads 1 to 4 at 80 with fade time of 5 seconds 124 80 5 Or without changing the level 1 gt 4 5 To set a delay time and a fade time e g delay 2 seconds fade 5 seconds MagicQ User Manual 68 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 1 gt 4 2 5 Split fade times can be set from the keypad 1 gt 10 e FULL 3 Heads 1 to 10 at 100 split times over 3s 1 10 e FULL 0 5 Heads 1 to 10 at 100 split fades Os to 5s 1 10 FULL 0 gt 4 1 Heads 1 to 10 at 100 split delays Os to 4s 1s fade 1 gt 10 FULL 0 gt 5 0 gt 4 Heads 1 to 10 at 100 split delays and fades When using split fade times it is possible to enter max gt min as well as min gt max 1 gt 10 e FULL 4 gt 0 1 Heads 1 to 10 at 100 split delays 4s to 1s 1s fade 6 4 Using Selected Heads When you use the keypad to modify heads by default this does not modify which heads are selected This ensures that you can be busking moving heads whilst modifying in
125. to the current channel control flict t t MagicQ User Manual map 269 sce Male a ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 29 2 1 Configuration When consoles are set up for multi programming by setting Show data sync to Master Prog and Slave Prog then selective channel control is automatically enabled Selective channel control can also be used without multi programming This gives slave consoles access to control part of a lighting rig e g for a technician to test some lights but does not give them the ability to change any of the stored show data To configure this mode set Show data sync type on the master to Master Control and on the slaves to Slave Control 29 2 2 Selecting which console controls which channels MagicQ enables several different ways of selecting which channels are controlled from which console on the network selected channels active channels groups of channels universes and zones MagicQ defaults to the show master having control of all the channels Slaves request control of channels using the Setup View DMX I O Multi Prog Select soft button SELECT E Control of channels on master console One Selected Active Group Zones Universes All Head CANCEL The options allow control of a single head One Head all the way through the whole rig All by this show slave None The show slave does not control any channels One Head Show slave controls the first selected head only If Next
126. to the next free address the title bar shows the next free address that a head of the chosen type can be patched If you wish to patch multiple heads at fixed offsets e g four Martin Mac500s at DMX channels 1 21 41 61 then enter 4 20 Enter number uni chan offset e g 5 2 1 20 gt 592 1 To patch a head at a specific address use 9 For example to patch 10 dimmers at DMX address 20 key in 10 20 To patch to the 2 universe use 102 20 To patch at the first free address on a universe other than the first universe use e g for the second universe use 10 2 1 If this is the first patch you have patched then MagicQ will prompt you whether to add the head into the visualiser Pressing yes will create a visualiser head within the show file so that you can see the head in the MagicQ visualiser To patch more heads just repeat the above process To patch a dimmer simply press CHOOSE DIM MEDIA select Generic Dimmer and then patch one or more dimmers as above In the Patch Window all the fields coloured yellow can be configured To modify a field first move the cursor to the field then input the new value using the keypad and keyboard and finally press ENTER MagicQ User Manual 55 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sua www chamsys co uk In this way you can modify DMX address head number head name and gel for each of your patched heads 5 5 Head names and numbers Press the VIEW HEADS soft button to check the heads you have
127. uses 2036 generic 3 channel leds all 12 universes fully utilised and can be downloaded from www chamsys co uk MagicQ User Manual 240 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 25 7 Programming LED using standard FX To program LED fixtures using standard FX rather then the bitmap layers just select the fixtures and program them like moving lights Select the group of LED fixtures e g All Pixeline set the master intensities using the encoders or by pressing the DIM FULL soft button in the group window You can select standard in built FX for LED fixtures in the Beam window To program colour chases across all patched RGB pixels select all the RGB heads and then in the Colour Window select your base colour e g Red at 128 Green at 128 Blue at 128 Then play back an FX on the head such as rgb cmy or pulse4steps Speed and size are controlled as normal 25 8 Making groups out of LED pixels To get the best out of a large array of pixel heads it is best to make groups Select all the RGB pixels for a particular fixture and record it as a group The order in which you select the heads determines the order that FX are played back on them You can reverse the selection of an entire group by pressing the top right soft button in the Group Window If you have set up a Grid in the Plan View then you can easily select the pixel heads from this View before recording the group in the Group Window Use Auto Groups to generate g
128. where the displayed graphics starts ends It does not matter which order you press the screen in If you feel you have pressed the wrong bit of the screen just press the screen again in the correct position When you are satisfied you have pressed the correct position then press Cal Touch button to leave the calibration mode Make sure you use the physical button rather than pressing the touch screen as pressing the touch screen messes up the calibration You should now find that the touch screen is more accurate If you continue to have problems then try pressing the screen with a small blunt object but don t use a sharp object as it may damage the touch screen When calibrating external touch screens calibrate only 1 touch screen at a time Pressing in more than one screen will cause unpredictable results 19 20 Displays brightness and contrast To modify the brightness of the main display press CTRL and adjust the bottom right encoder To modify the brightness of the LCD displays on the wing press CTRL and adjust the next encoder up on the right To turn all the displays off press CTRL and the button associated with the bottom right encoder To turn off the all the lights on the console i e the displays the console lights and the LEDs press CTRL and the All Lights off button To modify the contrast of Playback wings use the Wing Contrast encoder When multiple Playback wings are connected press CTRL and the Next Page button of t
129. will affect all cues with circle It also affects the FX stored on the console so all changes will affect new shows made on the console MagicQ will not allow you to directly edit the inbuilt FX you must SAVE AS to create a new FX before you make any changes in the FX Editor From v1 4 0 3 MagicQ FX supports any number of attributes in a Waveform FX previous versions supported a maximum of 3 different attributes Note that shows that use Waveform FX with more than 3 attributes will not run correctly on software prior to v1 4 0 3 A MagicQ FX can store data for more than head so that for instance you can make a FX with some heads perform circles in whilst others perform squares In the FX Editor Window FX Window Edit FX it is now possible to extract the user FX from a show file to the console Press the EXTRACT USER FX soft button It is possible to remove all user Waveform FX from a console Press SHIFT REMOVE USER FX 24 1 View General In View General you can configure properties for the FX For FX that only use 1 attribute setting the Apply to any attribute enables the FX to be used on any attribute rather than being tied to a specific attribute such as dimmer Defaults can be set up for speed size spread and contrast Setting contrast to snap forces the contrast for the FX to default to 0 i e snap rather than fade The contrast of a FX can be changed at any time during programming or playback The add m
130. z e a ff RIA Ar era orf a 347 367 ser mro 0o 49 129 149 229 249 289 309 328 349 3 368 388 VERRE ERE mmm gy ui 121 hsi 171 271 311 331 En eee eee 33 113 133 153 173 213 233 253 273 293 313 333 H s ss z4 as 114 134 154 174 194 ia ow os ara on oa aaa a ra 294 3s s ss 5 235 255 275 295 315 335 355 375 395 He se se ve se 116 135 156 hz x se zz Jaz 17 ww hse nv hi gp pe oe ee es pe e e 298 318 338 fasa aza zas s ees e p trig fag na DR ps EHEHE m i20 ao eo so i00 120 140 iggleLapXP Tue May 20 16 04 29 2008 Ver 1 3 6 0 Page 2 Add To insert all the patched heads into the grid in horizontal rows use the INSERT HEADS H soft button Press SHIFT and INSERT HEADS V to insert in vertical rows Note that it is not necessary to allocate a head number to every position in the grid so if your LED fixtures are placed at weird angles you can make a grid with the LED placed as you would see it Multiple grids can contain the same head numbers so it is possible to have one grid with the LED tightly packed and anther representing how they are really spaced out MagicQ User Manual Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Once the grid is configured you can then see the Output by pressing the View Colours soft button and the View Grid soft button For instance below you can see the Output when all 400
131. 0 movements FX 15 5 Interaction of FX between Playbacks By default the FX and levels on MagicQ operate independently so it is possible to have a FX running on one Playback and the level base values that the FX is applying to coming from a separate Playback Only one FX is ever active on a particular channel so the FX from the last touched playback will over ride any FX for that channel from other playbacks If a Playback has a Cue with both a FX and a level for a channel then that will Playback controls then the output will be the level plus the FX from that Playback If a Playback has a Cue with only a level for a channel i e no FX then a FX may be added to that level from another active Playback It is possible to set the Cue Stack option Ignore FX from other Playbacks so that when the Playback is the last touched Playback any FX from other Playbacks are ignored regardless of whether this Playback has FX for these channels It is also possible to set the Cue Option Block FX to block other Playbacks with FX from affecting the levels in a particular Cue Note that when the option Programmer overrides FX is active e g in Hog II Warp mode then Cues are automatically recorded with the Block FX option set The Cue option Block FX can be viewed and changed in the Cue Stack Window page right An alternative way to block FX from other Playbacks is to use Add FX Zero Size in Cues where you wish to bl
132. 01101000 008 1 040 MagicQ User Manual 63 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk You can set up multiple dimmer channels very quickly using the cursor keys to select multiple entries in the Copy From column Use to specify an offset For example to copy the dummy dimmer channel from five VL5 heads at 1 1 9 channels each to dimmers at 2 1 use the cursors to select the five dimmers in the Copy From column and enter 1 1 9 5 23 Merging with DMX input The console supports comprehensive merging of data from each of the 18 input and output universes Any output channel can be set to output data from any received input channel or to merge the two In addition channels can be configured so that they are passed through transparently unless the console is controlling the channel from the programmer or a playback This provides a powerful over ride mode To set a channel to output data received as input from another channel set the Merge field to Input and the From field to the channel number you wish to get the data from You can easily set up a large number of channels by using SHIFT and the cursor keys to select multiple channels You can also set up a channel so that it outputs data from an input channel except when that channel is being controlled by a playback or the programmer Set the Merge field to Over To HTP merge the console output with the received input use the Merge option The Mult option enab
133. 19 20 165 166 PC Wing 20 77 166 168 169 194 209 273 284 289 305 Pixel Mapping 19 225 Playback Synchronisation 202 Playback Wing 41 42 169 170 187 Record Merge 98 113 176 331 334 352 Record Remove 91 334 352 Remote control 272 277 Safety Information 20 Setup Window 29 38 39 40 41 53 64 72 77 80 100 108 118 128 129 131 135 152 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 166 168 169 170 173 176 186 196 204 205 209 218 220 227 243 246 247 257 260 261 265 272 284 286 289 290 291 292 293 307 321 325 328 329 330 337 340 345 Show Storage 22 Shut down 335 SMPTE 157 163 193 291 293 298 299 301 Update 92 95 113 114 176 282 345 Version 1 5 7 5
134. 19 8 8 Swap pan and tilt encoders e eeeeeeseeseeseeee eene ennt nne on seak ns teen nne nnne 179 19 8 9 Swap Encoder direction caetero ien reges ere eese da ente deg eR eenas iei 179 19 8 10 Swap Palette amp Cursor Page Buttons esee eren 179 19 8 11 MagicQ PC keyboard mode sees rennen 179 19 8 12 Map Keys to THRU FULL eerte nnne nennen ennemi 182 19 8 13 Enable Mouse to control pan tilt eese ener rennen 182 Ir MN IN CLE SS T 182 19 9 1 Colour Scheme enceinte ie oper ie eene e Lega eere EDU E Erde e eder diese 182 19 9 2 Bip Text Mode norint eerte eerie pe een p eR revue eo Hp HE dee eo eve a 182 MEN i ER 182 1994 gt Speed PIU EPOR 182 19 9 Attribute Display eene tpe beri siiin Enne ane a reni epa ce epp marr uedaeved 182 19 9 6 Column Hiding bete t tede ier lied Hilo ie Hee REAL sbadeoons 182 19 9 7 Auto Row Ordering tite terna cile tae Ere bre ETE eee PH R eH LRL HET ne 182 19 9 8 Confirmation requests neenon rd e tpe este i Ee sen el ep ea ea ge ene estela ie en ba 183 19 9 97 Scroll Dars UR LE a A A AA EEEE Ea EE 183 19 9 10 Layout buttons always active sese neenne enr en nennen 183 19 9 11 Don t display help at start p eeeicn s epe ringtone oir te etaient eese cin nin 183 19 9 12 Always show Record Options eseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeen nenn
135. 2 6 G13 12 G14 12 G15 12 Dim R356 All Finger All Finger M All Finger R md aes fibroid Bie ceri oe ee sha E31 g piz w s p8 Bibs bar shake cone shake gobo scd gt gt gobo scd lt lt PBI 4 1 PB3 1 PB4 1 PB5 1 PB6 0 PB7 1 PBS Es chase ac profiles mac250 circles cf7 pan sbeam figg mac500 triangle sscancross cf1200 col chge E E le k w VELLET it OT 83 BN ek IEEELEEIG TG Te CA Oe LG A EENHNENNENF E k IENNENENEF Eik CERNANA AMENER Wn LE Yi LU LU 20 4 Touch View The Touch View is designed for use with touch screens with buttons that are sized bigger so that it is easier to select functions Select Touch View by pressing Touch or Touch2 in the top right corner of the Application 20 5 MagicQ PC Mac Restrictions When MagicQ PC Windows Linux or Mac is not connected to a MagicQ USB interface or MagicQ USB Wing then a small number of remote and automation features are restricted and Demo Mode is shown in the titlebar This does not affect show programming or playback The restricted features that are not supported without connection to MagicQ USB interface or MagicQ Wing are Execute Window full screen Scheduled Events Remote Control Protocol serial or network Web Server editing viewing is supported Autostarting Playbacks Playback Synchronisation Multi Programming Triggering of playbacks using DMX input Mouse control of pan tilt only s
136. 2 Remote control from a MagicQ console VIEW VIEW VIEW VIEW REMOTE REMOTE RELOAD QUIT WINGS MEDIA STATUS CONTROL MULTI W MULTI W SETUP show capture sbk Window Status Fitted Left Width e bs EEEENU JJ bus EA b p p pP Play Mode Normal Safe Normal Prog Mode m The remote control function is accessed through the new View Remote option in the View System view of the Setup Window To control another MagicQ press the Remote Control soft button MagicQ then presents a list of all the other MagicQ consoles MagicQ PC systems it can find on the network and you can choose which one you wish to control Select console to control CANCEL You can tell which system you are controlling by looking at the system name in the Status Display above PB1 to PB5 When MagicQ is remote controlling another console it indicates REM at the start of this status line MagicQ User Manual 272 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk To end remote control of another system press CTRL 1 on the keyboard of the controlling system Alternatively press QUIT or CTRL CLOSE on the controlling system The status line will change back to be the normal line without REM When a remote system is under remote control it is still possible to control the system locally the normal system interface is still fully operational We recommend that you only use one interface at a time
137. 26 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 3 MagicQ Console Layout 3 1 Connections The picture below shows the connections on a MQ100 Pro 2010 console The MQ200 Pro 2010 and MQ300 Pro 2010 have the same connectors with the addition of extra console lamp sockets The expansion module slots can be fitted with MagicQ expansion modules such as the twin DMX512 output module and other future expansion modules MQ100 Expansion Remote Network USB port USB module trigger ports m under arm rest Console lamp ports Expansion module Console lamp Mouse ort port port Power socket DMX USB Audio Reset Serial Keyboard Monitor p 110 240Vac ports port ports butto port MagicQ User Manual 27 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sua www chamsys co uk The original MQ100 MQ100 Expert has the following connections ad Expansion Expansion Remote Network USB port p Console lamp module trigger port u under arm rest module Console lamp Power switch Serial Keyboard Monitor Mouse Power socket Reset Audio USB port port port port 110 240Vac butto ports port 3 2 Plugging Up e Connect the power lead to the power socket labelled LINE INPUT e Put the console lamps into the console lamp sockets e Connect the keyboard to the socket on the back panel marked KEYBOARD It is not necessary to connect the mouse The mouse is only required if the touch screen becomes damaged The Pro 2010 consoles supp
138. 3 Tilas e oboe narrow triangle i Prism 000 7 w prism off iggleLapxP Sun Jan 20 19 03 19 2008 Ver 1 3 4 6 ana Pagel Add gt iin For indexed attributes such as colour wheels and gobo wheels the button associated with each encoder can be used to bump the attribute value to the next range Pressing SHIFT and the button bumps back to the previous range In addition the window enables selection of palette values for the attribute type using the touch screen When heads are recorded the system automatically generates palettes for each attribute type You can record new palette entries or modify existing ones as you see fit In the Colour Window pressing the COL MIX COL ATTRIBS button changes to the colour picker Press COL TYPE to select standard colours Lee colours Rosco colours or HIS model 6 Sienna 8 Firebrick 9 Crimson COL TYPE 2 Mix 7 Brown COL ATTRIBS 0 No col 1 Wheel 3 4 5 Maroon SaddleBrowy DarkRed COLOUR MIXS STD CF7HE 51 52 53 54 Cold 0 1 2 No col Wheel Mix Magenta Cyan Col3 MagicQ User Manual 49 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk MagicQ User Manual 50 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 4 14 Recording a Palette To record a favourite combination of attributes into a palette e g a rotating triangle with a prism on a MAC500 first modify the attribute
139. 33 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk LTP channels will be activated in the normal way i e by pressing GO or if the Fader activates option is set by moving the fader upwards If the Flash activates option is set then pressing the FLASH button will also activate the channels When one of the main faders has HTP levels active then it is coloured orange Only once the playback is activated fully will it be coloured red Note that this option affects all channels that are patched as HTP channels normally only Intensity but potentially other attributes if desired 15 4 LTP handling The MagicQ console provides powerful handling of LTP Latest Takes Precedence channels allowing new effects to be bumped onto intelligent heads for a period of time before reverting to the previous effect Note that several other consoles handle LTP channels in a less intuitive way when the last active playback is returned to zero then the values on that playback still control the channel rather than reverting to the previous raised playback that is still active The programmer always over rides playbacks If a LTP channel is active in the programmer then playbacks will be disregarded for this channel FX and channel values are handled independently enabling operators to program one playback with channel values and one with FX For example one playback could have MAC500 positions channels whilst another has MAC50
140. 4 5 Current Playback The current playback is the one that has its SELECT button illuminated The current playback is used by the Cue and Cue Stack windows to determine the Cue and Cue Stack to view modify MagicQ User Manual 127 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk You can change the current playback at any time by pressing the SELECT button for the playback you want to make the current playback Sometimes you may wish that the currently selected fader changes to follow the last fader that was raised This behaviour can be enables from the Setup Window by setting the Current Playback follows last touched option to YES Press the SELECT button of a Playback twice in quick succession to select the Playback and automatically open the Cue Stack Window so that you can view change the contents of the Cue Stack Press the SELECT button of a Playback three times in quick succession to select the Playback and automatically open the Cue Stack Window in the Options View 14 4 6 Playbacks across multiple Pages Multiple Playbacks can be active at one time from different pages However a particular Playback can only be active on one Page it is not possible to activate Playback 1 on Page 1 and Playback 1 on Page 2 at the same time It is possible to temporarily transfer a Playback that is active to a different Playback in order to unblock a Playback Press SHIFT SEL to action the transfer and then select the S button of the
141. 4 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 28 6 Grabbing shows from other consoles It is possible to grab a show that is running on another console onto the current console Press the Grab Show soft button in the View DMX I O view of the Setup Window Choose which console you wish to grab a show from The show is copied from the other console to the show folder on this console and the show is loaded into memory Grabbing shows from other consoles requires Enable remote access in the Setup View Settings Network Settings to be enabled on the consoles you are grabbing the show from When using MagicQ PC to connect to other MagicQ consoles MagicQ PC systems with software prior to v1 3 4 9 it was necessary first to connect to the consoles using Windows Explorer With Windows Explorer enter the appropriate usernames and passwords otherwise connection can not be made to the other systems 28 7 Automatic backing up of shows from other consoles It is possible to set a MagicQ console or a MagicQ PC to automatically back up show files from one or more other consoles on the network Optionally this console can be made to automatically run one of the shows This option should only be used if you fully understand the implications If this option is configured incorrectly then your show files could get accidentally overwritten Always back up your show files to external media computer systems In the Setup Window View Settin
142. 44 71 29 28 71 29 44 72 30 28 72 30 44 73 31 28 73 31 44 74 32 28 74 32 44 75 33 28 75 33u 44 76 34t 28 76 34u c H rt cd amp ct cd c ct Cie ict It is possible to test how MagicQ responds to Midi commands by typing in the Midi message on the keyboard This is only supported when connected to a MagicQ Wing or Interface For example to test the command 144 36 127 Note On note 36 velocity 127 Type testmidi followed by the message on the keyboard with no spaces between the MIDI values testmidi 144 36 127 MagicQ User Manual 295 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 34 1 5 Remote commands For the latest list of remote commands check the section on ChamSys Remote Protocol Commands 34 1 6 MIDI problems The ChamSys MIDI interface can be easily tested using the test show midilooptest show This show simply runs a 2 step chase on Playback 1 which sends out MIDI commands corresponding to activation and release of Playback2 Connect the MIDI interface to MagicQ Connect a MIDI cable from the Out to the In on the Interface Set MIDI In Type to Any chan Set MIDI Out Type to Any chan Load the midilooptest shw Raise Playback 1 If MIDI is working then Playback 2 should activate and release every 1 second If the loopback test works but connection to external equipment is failing then try to insert active splitters or IN THRU links into the system Note that we hav
143. 8 faders show up to 48 channels of the fixture Each fader is named with the attribute name and the values are set to their default values The picture below shows a Martin Mac2000PF in 16bit mode MagicQ User Manual 200 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk MagicQ PC Demo Mode PLAYBACKS jow test_Martin eel 16bit shw ated test show Page 1 PBI W Paz JI n CNN aD A ai Cham 74 ot Macro lrisFocusZoom www chamsys co uk IT E imm Ks 5 J Focus OUTPUTS E amp WEE Wea PT hy xu amp un Pitta REC REL LEE GN Ce daos FTTTTTTI AULA Itt The Playback faders are automatically set up with some useful functions including Macros for Lamp On Reset and Lamp Off Locate and Movement Colour Gobo and Strobe tests If a MagicQ Wing MagicQ Twin DMX Interface or MagicDMxX interface is connected to MagicQ then the fixture will be controlled on the 1 output The preset faders can be used to change the values of individual attributes Use SHIFT and the faders to make a fine adjustment 20 3 Demo Shows The start up Window gives also gives a choice of a standard Lighting demo show or a PixelMapping demo show Additional demo shows for other fixture types media servers and visualisers can be found by going to Setup View Settings Load Show MagicQ User Manual 201 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk G7 c8 9 c9 12 610 AllStgScan Al CF1200HE Dim No col Dim R27 Dim T G1
144. ACKUP IMPORT QUIT SYSTEM DMXI 0 MANAGER TOUSE SETTINGS SETTINGS Note that just removing the power cord to the console will not have the desired effect since the internal UPS continues to provide power If for some reason you are unable to power off the console then you may need to reset it as below 3 6 Resetting the Console Under rare circumstance it may be necessary to reset the console To reset the console press SETUP to go to the Setup Window and press SHIFT and QUIT This performs an immediate soft reset of the console the MagicQ application will be running the show again within about 2 3 seconds If for some reason the console does not respond to button presses then try pressing CTRL BREAK on the external keyboard hold CTRL whilst pressing BREAK If this has no effect then a hard reset may be required Hard resets should be avoided as they bypass the operating system shutdown procedures and may cause problems with the file system To perform a hard reset press and hold the reset button on the back panel for 5 seconds To force the console to power off completely press and hold the reset button on the back panel until it powers off approximately 10 seconds MagicQ User Manual 29 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 3 7 Console Layout All MagicQ consoles are very similar they differ only in the number of playback faders The programming interface is consistent across the entire range of
145. B1 to PB10 and is only enabled when a MagicQ Wing or MagicQ USB Interface is connected This feature allows synchronisation of MagicQ with other consoles Configure an unused wing to be DMX In and select a range of channels for it to respond to Note that the universe that contains these channels must have input enabled in the View DMX I O view In order to allow use of FLASH buttons on the external DMX console MagicQ uses the top 5 of the channel range as an indication that a FLASH button has been pressed On the external console the playback master fader should be configured at a maximum of 95 with the flash master set to 100 If it is not possible to set the master levels independently on the external DMX console then set the grand maser on it to 95 19 5 Monitor Settings 19 5 1 Pro 2010 ProX Operating System On MagicQ consoles running the Pro 2010 operating system there is support for 2 external monitors with resolution up to 1440x900 These monitors can be touch screens MagicQ User Manual 171 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Set the required resolution in the Resolution column and enable it When using USB touch screens go to Setup View System View Status Touchscreens to determine which touch screen is Touch 1 and which is Touch 2 Monitor 3 and Monitor 4 are not used 19 5 2 Pro non Pro 2010 Operating System On the Pro Operating System Monitor output 1 is a duplicate of the on board scre
146. ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 13 Cue Stacks The console stores sequence of Cues as Cue Stacks Cue Stacks keep track of the order of the cues and the options for how they are played back A Cue Stack may have only one Cue associated with it or may have a whole list of Cues When you record a Cue onto a Playback the console automatically generates a Cue Stack The console adds the Cue Stack to the Stack Store The Stack Store is a list of all Cue Stacks stored on the console The Cue Stack will be given a unique Cue Stack Number e g CS1 This enables the Cue Stack to be re used in future programming If a Playback already has a Cue Stack stored on it then by default the new Cue will be added to the end of the Cue Stack However if you key in a Cue Id before pressing RECORD then the Cue will be inserted into the Cue Stack in the appropriate place To view a Cue Stack press the SELECT button of the Playback and then CUE STACK to open the Cue Stack Window Alternatively double click the SELECT button of the Playback 13 1 Cue Stack Window The Cue Stack Window shows details of all the Cues in the Cue Stack including their names numbers and timing information The fields can be edited in a similar way to the Prog Window and Patch Windows VIEW VIEW CHOOSE VIEW GOTO PRELOAD MARK CHASE CUE RENUM REMOVE OPTIONS DEFAULTS CUE STACK CUE CUE CUE CUE TIMING TIMING CUE IDS CUE m cu 2 n Hat Delay Fade Cue Next ci ie Track Zerool
147. ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk MagicQ User Manual Patching Programming and Playback of shows using Generic Lighting Moving Lighting LED and Media Servers MagicQ User Manual 1 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Chany www chamsys co uk MagicQ User Manual VERSION 1 5 7 5 This manual is designed for operators of the MagicQ lighting console to help them quickly and effectively learn how to use the console It has been written by lighting designers for lighting designers The reader is assumed to have a basic familiarity with the concepts of lights and lighting control systems The manual starts with an introduction to the MagicQ lighting console its features functions and concepts It then moves into detailed descriptions of patching programming and playback For advanced subjects such as pixel mapping media servers connections to Visualisers networking multiple consoles and connection to external equipment please refer to the Advanced User Manual Readers who are tight for time and just want to find out how to quickly program a working show should turn straight to the Quick Start section The main chapters include Introduction Console Concepts MagicQ Console Layout Patching Setting Dimmer Levels Controlling Intelligent Heads Palettes Programmer Cue Stacks Playback File Handling Settings The MagicQ at a glance Button Functions MagicQ User Manual 2 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd C
148. Cue Stack The console searches for an unused playback from the last playback down to test the Cue on Pressing the Cue or Cue Stack again removes the Cue or Cue Stack from the playback You can restart a Cue or Cue Stack that is being tested by pressing the Retest soft button Holding CTRL and selecting a Cue or Cue Stack also restarts the Cue Cue Stack You can view the contents of a programmed Cue by moving he cursor to the required Cue in the Cue Store Window and pressing the View Cue soft button This opens the Cue Window locked to the specified Cue Pressing the Unlock Cue button returns the Cue Window to monitoring the current Cue on the currently selected playback You can view the contents of a programmed Cue Stack by moving he cursor to the required Cue Stack in the Cue Stack Store Window and pressing the View Stack soft button This opens the Cue Stack Window locked to the specified Cue Stack Pressing the Unlock Stack button returns the Cue Stack Window to monitoring the Cue Stack on the currently selected playback Note that the Cue Id used as a sequence number in the Cue Stack e g 1 00 is different to the QId used in the Cue Store e g Q5 The Cue Id is the sequence number within the Cue Stack wheras the Qld is the reference number in the Cue Store MagicQ User Manual 121 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Some users prefer to hide the QId and only use and view Cue Ids use the Setup Cue Storage
149. Dimmer R27 Medium Red no no no 5 21 Exporting heads The patched heads can be exported using the same file format as used for import This file can then be read by a standard spread sheet or word processor Patch lists can then be printed 5 22 VL5 type channels split personalities 5 The console supports heads such as the Vari lite VL5 where the head functionality is split between different non contiguous DMX addresses The personality for the main channels in the head includes the extra channels The extra channels are then patched separately and set to have their levels copied from the main channels For example for a VL5 patch the VL5 to the required DMX address for the main fixture This will include a dummy dimmer channel Then patch a Dimmer Channel for the real dimmer and set the Merge field to Copy and the From field to the channel number of the dummy dimmer channel PATCH Generic Dimmer Dimmer Generic Dimmer hed free 1 053 Head type DMX 2565 1 Hdno Name Gel Piv Tinv Swap Merge From 1 001 000000001 001 VL5 O Mix no no no 1014 000001110 t2 vs OMx toro fmo Nom 1 027 000011011 3 w5 JOMx to n fmo Nom 1 040 000101000 o vi5 OMx fro fo fo Nom 1 107 001100101 005 Dimmer ONoco J Copy 1001 1 102 001100110 o06 Dimmer LJ T 07 Dmmer JONocu A coy 1227 Dimmer LI I1 Fe 1 104 0
150. E TAKE RELEASE GRAB RESET SYSTEM UNIVERSES CONTROL CONTROL SHOW VISUAL SETUP show capture sbk Status Out Type Out Uni In Type Enabled ArtNet Play Mode In Uni Visualiser Hot takeover Test d Normal Eier ie pe Jie ei use tse sii ulead net pez qe ez em Sutton Note that the TAKE CONTROL and RELEASE CONTROL are only active when one or more universes are set to Hot take over When universes on MagicQ consoles are set to hot takeover then the current Master Slave status is shown in the Status Display underneath the date and time Note that a MagicQ console is considered a Master if any of the universes that are configured as a hot takeover universe are currently enabled and hence outputting to the network A MagicQ console is considered a Slave if all universes that are configured as hot takeover universes are currently disabled the console is not outputting to the network on these universes MagicQ User Manual 262 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 28 5 Playback synchronisation between consoles It is possible to carry out basic synchronisation of two or more consoles during playback by using the ChamSys Remote protocol either via serial or Ethernet Synchronisation can be set for individual playbacks or for all 10 main playbacks When the playbacks faders are raised playbacks Go Back or Jump are pressed the
151. ECndMbm 143 16 3 5 Cue stack is a Programmer Master esseesseeseseseeeeeeeene ener enne nennen 143 16 4 Ac vate Release25 enixe te rete totae hte ee E boire ve pal eere tes Eae e eau Move eese t sivas ub TEETE EEE 143 16 4 1 Halt at last step uiae aue tope Gee me ea lise e Leg eere EDU Erde eed ed diese 143 16 4 2 Release after last step ocurre tea eerie tede p et revera PH de scab edet e 143 1604 3 Release resets to First step uini ertet erect ott t eoi d Heec pre eere bd 143 16 4 4 Releasessteps 1 step iue eser irerteri te reote erba to dees PH ER p tuta O aia P inet ee 143 164 3 Rel ase LMG cocdes carves cavevsteoceand bd cnecend jonsuandeaseceok auvanes coenddcebaveesnadiusede Sha deyel adteswicetowebdentedvanees 143 16 4 6 Acti vate on page Change cpsccs cisceescscrassssscedesssasoncesoasstangnacdecsbassedesbauswszseadtoserpaasassens coated 144 16 4 7 Release on page change eee erm tiber e eri be ee eo t bee eaii 144 16 4 8 HTP always active Use HTP 00 c cc eeccecssccesseeceseeeesaeceeaeeceeeeesaeeesaaecseaeeseeeeeaeeseaaeceeees 144 IT ME ru 144 16 5 1 All chans controlled LTP ccc ecccccsceeseceeseeceeeeessaeceeaeeceeneessaeceeaaecseaeeceaeeeesaeeseaaeennees 144 16 5 2 Block FX from other playbacks sese rennen nennen nennen 144 16 5 3 Masters affect levels eie e taereste eter tenerte ena petes eee Lopes e eden vacavl t
152. Finger L R59 Indigo Norm Generic Dimmer 1 006 000000110 006 Finger L R312 Canary Norm Generic Dimmer 1 007 000000111 007 Finger L_ R356 Middle Lavender Norm Generic Dimmer 1 008 000001000 008 FingerL R27 Medium Red Norm Generic Dimmer 1 009 000001001 009 FingerL R312 Canary Norm Generic Dimmer 1 010 000001010 010 FingerL R27 Medium Red Norm Generic Dimmer 1 011 000001011 011 Finger L R59 Indigo Norm Generic Dimmer 1 012 000001100 012 Finger L R312 Canary Nom Generic Dimmer 1 013 000001101 013 FingerL R356 Middle Lavender Norm Generic Dimmer 1 014 000001110 014 Finger L R27 Medium Red Norm Generic Dimmer 1 015 000001111 015 Finger L R312 Canary Norm Generic Dimmer 1 016 000010000 016 Finger L R27 Medium Red Norm The Network page shows all the MagicQ consoles and PC systems on the networks and enables easy selection of particular consoles for remote control The Remote and Execute functions are only enabled when connected to a MagicQ console or a MagicQ PC System that is itself connected to a MagicQ wing or MagicQ interface 30 4 1 Custom Web Server pages There is now support for user HTML pages These pages should be stored in the web folder and their name should start with user e g user html user2 html The MagicQ remote commands can be sent from the HTML using the button input types to submit html lt head gt lt META NAME HandheldFriendly content True gt l
153. H PB10 GO PB10 FLASH AUDIO BUMP The remote trigger can be used on a per Cue Stack basis by setting the Halt field of Cue step in the Cue Stack to Remote This is independent of any global action specified by the Remote trigger action setting Audio bump simulates audio received at full level 19 13 12 Audio input The type of audio input the options are None Energy only ChamSys audio ChamSys audio interface and ChamSys audio left only Audio input is supported via the ChamSys USB Audio Interface Note that audio is not currently supported on the audio connectors on the rear panel of MagicQ consoles The ChamSys audio interface option enables control from different frequencies whilst the Energy only option takes an average of all the audio channels received When set to ChamSys audio left only any signals received on the left channel are automatically duplicated onto the right channel This is useful in situations where only a mono audio feed is available Note that energy detection through PC audio card is no longer supported 19 13 13 Audio Min Max Level The levels of the audio input level The minimum is used to adjust for noise whilst the maximum can be set of the audio signal is particularly weak When set to non zero values any levels below the minimum or above the maximum are ignored and the levels are scaled appropriately MagicQ User Manual 192 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www
154. HOW sees nennen nnne rennen rennen 70 6 7 Viewing Intensities in the Outputs WindOow sese 71 Controlling intelligent he ds reet tr terere prre Let repetita Eres tereti HER eo e pb bct Eee 72 7 1 Selectmpg Heads ette toni diee PUE Leer eene clesie hee eb desi eid cii ies sepia de DR BUR 72 4 2 JUsmp Groups ae ertet sparen beso vou SEM theta PRU A vec T E 72 7 2 1 ReCordin ga Group Lm 73 7 2 2 Naming a Grop E eases 73 7 3 Selecting Heads using the keypad eese ener ener 73 7 3 1 Selecting Heads on the keypad using Q2 73 7 3 2 Selecting heads on the keypad without 9 ssssssseseseeeeneeennee 74 7 3 3 Remove Dimmer Rem Dim Function eessesesesesesee esee eee nnnss 74 7 4 Selecting heads using the rig plan view ener 74 7 5 Head EE 75 4 6 Locating beads pi one a Hug Hla erae Uc ee EL EE e EE PR EPA PRESE U Pei do 75 7 1 Moditying Attributes ccrte toit eroe E ERR A De ERO S SERRE NER S 75 7 7 1 Using Attribute Eypes eene etre etti Ere ri tenen a tea e tue tela pere Forero ode eea 75 7 7 2 Using Attribute Banks eed stc TE nee eee td edet pee d et penso et esp aub deir Ugo 76 7 8 Using a mouse or track ball to control pan and tilt seeeeeeeee TI MEME Dio s HQ 77 7 10 Setting attribute values using the keypad eese nennen TI TAL Select
155. Head is used to sub select heads then the first sub selected head is controlled Selected Show slave controls the currently selected heads When no heads are selected none are controlled Active Show slave controls all channels that are active in the programmer Last Active Show master and show slave both control channels the last one to change a channel in the programmer controls the channel Group Show slave controls the group that was selected when this option was chosen Zones Show slave controls selected zones as set up in DMX I O Universes Show slave controls selected universes All Show slave controls all channels MagicQ User Manual 270 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Cham www chamsys co uk When multiple slaves are in use then OMe ave Ontrol different channels on the rigs If the same channel is requested by multiple slaves then the latest selection will take precedence The show slave shows the multiple control method in the status bar e g for selected heads it shows CC Sel ris PC Sun Oct 18 14 25 06 2009 Ver 1 4 3 7 Build 129 Page 8 EVERY ME Add Sync CC Sel When the slave has no channels under control it Shows CC None Chris PC Sun Oct 18 14 26 07 2009 Ver 1 4 3 7 Build 129 Page 8 EVERY ME Add Sync CC None The show master can request all channels at all time using the Setup View DMX I O Multi Prog Select button When the show master is controlling all channels then it shows MCC in the st
156. In the VIEW OPTIONS view set the Flash Button Swaps option to YES The Flash acts like fader option enables the FLASH button to act as if the fader was raised to full This is useful if the fader controls LTP IPCB channels FX size or FX speed or if the Fader is a master for intensity size or speed 14 4 4 Page Select Above the Sub Master are NEXT PAGE and a PREV PAGE buttons These control which playback page is active and hence which Cue Stacks the physical playback faders and buttons control The current page number and name is displayed in the Status Display on the touch screen The current page can also be changed from the Page Window by selecting a new page or by pressing PAGE and entering the page number on the keypad Changing the current page whilst playbacks are active does not affect the output of these playbacks the playbacks are held over until the playback is released It is possible to set up Cue Stacks to be activated and released on a page change in the Cue Stack options The next Page can be preloaded in the Page Window by moving the cursor to the required item in the Page Window and pressing the PRELOAD PAGE soft button The preloaded page will be indicated in the Status Display above PB1 to PB5 Pressing NEXT PAGE goes to the preloaded page The preloaded page can also be loaded using the keypad syntax lt Page gt lt number gt So PAGE 34 preloads page 34 Pressing NEXT PAGE goes to page 34 14
157. Including of Cues is an easy way to edit Cues You can also use the Record Options to specify that only part of the Cue should be included into the programmer for example only selected heads or only certain attributes Press SHIFT and INCLUDE to get the options Masking can be selected quickly by holding Intensity Position Beam or Colour and pressing INCLUDE for including only the selected attributes By default only the data recorded into the specified Cue is included into the programmer Use the Entire State option when including Cues into the programmer to include the whole tracking state of a Cue The short cue ALL INCLUDE can be used to select Entire State When Cues are included into the Programmer then the channels from the Cue are automatically selected if the Setup option Select Heads on Include is set At any time CTRL ALL selects all heads in the programmer 12 1 1 Including Cues at a specified level By default Include loads the Cue into the programmer at 100 It is possible to modify this action using the keypad to use selected levels To include a Playback or Cue at a particular level e g 40 press INCLUDE type 40 and select the Playback or Cue to include To include a playback at its current level press INCLUDE type and press the Select button of the playback 12 1 2 Snapshot The Snapshot function enables the complete current output to be loaded into the programmer and hence recorded into a Cue Th
158. Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk Other Media Servers MagicQ supports the MSEX Media Server Exchange protocol which enables it to communicate with any media servers that support this protocol Select MSEX Arkaos and set the version number to 0 MagicQ also supports a generic protocol based on accessing the media folder of a media server and a generic csv index file to determine the mapping of thumbnails files to DMX values Select Generic and set the version number to 0 26 4 Thumbnail view MagicQ retrieves thumbnails from the media server and shows them on the screen for easy selection of media banks and media images The media server must be enabled in the Setup Window Media View for it to retrieve thumbnails MagicQ can handle different media on each media server thus making it easy to program larger configurations of media servers Thumbnail support is available when using Arkaos Coolux Pandoras Box Catalyst Hippotizer Mbox Maxcedia and any other media servers that support the MSEX or generic protocols 26 4 1 Manual retrieval of thumbnails If Autothumbs is set to No you can manually reload thumbnails as and when required by pressing the Reload Thumbs soft button in the media window We recommend you leave this set to No since you will normally know when you have changed the media on the media server and can then request an update There is a GET THUMBS soft button in Setup View System View Media This enables all
159. MX addresses you have set up for the layers in Catalyst MagicQ User Manual 248 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk PATCH high end cat4 Pin Tiny Swap Merge From Hdno Name 1 001 ENSE i Mix honec M Cat4 OMiR c B 1 081 001010001 003 Ca Min no no fno Nom ESET 121 0071100 ou e o pe e no pm Le 1 161 010100001 aos cata Mix toronto Nom high end cat4 1 201 011001001 ooe Catd OMi no no no Nom E 9 9 9 9 9 9 26 9 3 Using MagicQ with Coolux Pandoras Box MagicQ supports Coolux Pandoras Box V1 V4 each version having different heads The personality files can be found under the coolux folder Each Coolux Pandoras Box exists out of a number of video layers a number of graphic layers and 1 or 2 camera s depending on the of the configuration of the Coolux Pandoras Box 26 9 3 1 Coolux Media Player Three different personality files are required for Coolux Media Player differing in type The Media Player consists of video layers graphic layers and an ouput camera The table below shows how to patch 2 Mediaplayers There are 2 types of Mediaplayer in v4 1 e Mediaplayer STD 2 video layers 4 graphic layers and 1 camera layer that controls the output e Mediaplayer PRO 4 video layers 8 graphic layers and 1 camera layer that controls the output eh playerstdgraphv4hea 1 66 EE coo
160. MagicQ console via USB In the Setup Window View System View Wings set the first Wing to be type USB Wing By default the Playback Wings are set so that the Wings change page when the Next Page Prev Page button are pressed on the MagicQ console It is possible to make the Wings operate completely independently of the main MagicQ console by changing the Lower Bank Tie and Upper Bank Tie MagicQ User Manual 41 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk To use multiple Playback Wings simply connect them and change the type to USB wing 4 5 1 Setting Playback Wing IDs When using MagicQ consoles with multiple Playback Extra Wings or multiple Execute Wings it is now possible to set a Wing ID for each Wing The required wing ID can then be set in Setup View Wings to ensure that the Wings are identified correctly and control the correct Playbacks Previously Wings could swap over if one was reset or they were powered on in a different sequence Note that the Wing ID is only supported on new Wings with blue LCDs and the most recent Wing firmware The Wing ID is set by holding the reset button under the armrest of the Wing whilst holding the lower most Page UP and Page Down buttons 4 6 Connecting External Monitors MagicQ has VGA connectors on the rear panel for connecting external monitors These monitors can be touch screen monitors VIEW V REMOTE REMOTE RELOAD SETTINGS h EI CONTROL MULTI W MULTI W SE
161. Now you have Cues and Cue Stacks recorded you can play back your show using the Playback faders and buttons You can control how each Cue Stack is played back using the Cue Stack options for example you can set the fader to control LTP fades or FX size and speed Make sure the master faders are raised Note that if you have a large show file you may wish to turn auto backups off during playback Remember to turn them back on when you are programming If you get stuck at any point just press the HELP button MagicQ User Manual 53 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 5 Patching 5 1 Patching on the MagicQ Conventional lighting consoles are often limited in the number of DMX channels they can control independently typically 24 48 or 96 channels These channels typically correspond to the number of faders on the console Some consoles offer a patching facility to allow multiple DMX channels to be patched onto one fader but these DMX channels can then not be controlled independently The MagicQ console allows access to all DMX channels on all the DMX universes supported on the console Each channel can be controlled and programmed independently giving superior flexibility Consequentially the console does not make a distinction between DMX channels and console channels and therefore there is no need for complex patching to be carried out before the console can be used Each head can be allocated a head number for
162. ORHSNEMVC CUL nes 213 23 9 Ohannels View Kt 213 23 4 Ratiges View T 215 2341 Importing Ranges aiia eie den e Dee n Ee OG ER EUCH E EUER HE ERA 216 2342 Capture Ranges eene etre etie bee elena o te te iE eer Le eden ete ep rdi b eae eL Ede er 216 2343 Attribute 68st 5 e Gra cese pest tiep eR HD Eg Dese REEF SUE SEES dese Let emet d ge ee EIS ark ca 216 PAPE VIDISSE 216 235 1 Importing Palettes nnne e Gen ier evi Le RU RD Ee iE RALPH DUE EG 217 23 5 2 Capturing Palettes ses iceciccisccpeissenssvseid eee ee reti et de tates ie eue Te pe Erud eL dp e Rod Ede ee 217 23 513 Attibute Testi ie ten pete LR DEL RO RR ERE RD R ER EL NEU GE eecvE ae DUEYPR 217 23 0 Macros lo i e caseivsccvescs ta oases v cucscaobaassun sgneaeds its dees vate E EK AE EE EENE AEREA EEEE OESAU AREFE 217 23 7 NCOMS TEC 218 MagicQ User Manual 14 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 24 25 26 27 238 WSOP ICONS m C 218 23 9 Personalities with multiple elements esee eene 218 23 10 Loading new personalities into MagicQ essent 220 23 11 Modifying existing fIXtUEeS icscci tie et eise e eet et eee th eee ob Eee uae eda eate siena nha 220 23 11 1 Removing old personalities eese i eren 220 ID TLE PER 222 QA A Vi
163. P out fade Position fade Colour fade Beam fade The default fade times used when new Cues are recorded in a Cue Stack Used by Cues in the Cue Stack set to Cue Timing Once Cues have been recorded then the times for Specific Cues are edited in the Cue Window View Times 16 10 2 HTP in delay HTP out delay Position delay Colour delay Beam delay The default delay times used when new Cues are recorded in a Cue Stack Used by Cues in the Cue Stack set to Cue Timing Once Cues have been recorded then the times for Specific Cues are edited in the Cue Window View Times 16 11 FX View Defaults Only 16 11 1 Default speed This is the default FX speed used when creating new Waveform FX in the FX Editor Window 16 11 2 Default in fade This is the default FX fade in used when setting a specific FX fade in time Note that by default FX are faded in using the fade times of the Cue step 16 11 38 Default out fade MagicQ User Manual 150 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk This is the default FX fade in used when setting a specific FX fade out time Note that by default FX are faded out using the fade times of the Cue step MagicQ User Manual 151 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 17 Live Programming Busking 17 1 Adding individual channels using preset faders Individual channels can be added into the show as required using the Intensities Windows Channels can be added using the
164. PUIS c 337 45 2 Console not responding iiie nire tabe Rc etl scares eret aia t dee oen eee RR 337 45 3 Strange key presses unexpected window changes essere 337 46 Button BUtictlolls 2 eeesee ccrte tee e tetas rete eee eee beer te aet Ena E A ee d oeue Eae edd ete enne rape vt ee Ree pa 338 47 Breuer E 349 48 LET t qe M 350 MagicQ User Manual 18 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 1 Introduction The MagicQ console supports an extensive array of functionality to enable lighting designers to quickly and easily realise their innovative and imaginative designs Thirty two full 512 channel universes 16384 channels Up to 202 playbacks DMX512 Art Net Art Net II Pathport ACN and many 3 party DMX dongles Extensive personality library In built personality editor Colour mixing library including Lee and Rosco colours Flexible control of both heads and generic lighting Cloning and Morphing of heads Thousands of cues and cue stacks Naming of all items Virtually unlimited internal show storage amp show merging FX generator with extensive FX library Immediate control of any chase FX parameter Advanced Media Server control In built Pixel Mapping Powerful over ride mode Fully featured and enabled PC version Network connection for remote operation Export and import of patch data to spreadsheets databases DMX input over riding merging and testin
165. Page Down Change to Exec Page Close Blind Clear Lamp On Lamp Off Reset Key Lock Press the ASSIGN SPECIAL soft button There are also Special Functions for controlling zones enabling disabling and setting the hot takeover state These enable complete control of complex DMX routing from a simple interface It is possible to set the execute buttons to be of type Ellipse By default the buttons are now coloured according to their function When that function is active the button appears brighter 22 2 Full Screen View The Execute Window can be run in full screen mode thus allowing the whole of the screen to be customised Selecting the Run in Execute Window option in the Setup Window ensures that the console MagicQ PC will start up in the Execute Window Note that on MagicQ PC the buttons on the full screen Execute Window will only work when a MagicQ PC Wing is connected The size of the full screen Execute Window can be set via the Set Win Size button this defaults to 1024 by 768 for MagicQ PC and 800 by 600 for the console It is possible to protect the Execute Window such that operators only see the Execute Window and can not use the main MagicQ application windows From the Execute Window set up a password using the Set Password soft button If an operator tries to close the window then they have the choice of shutting down or entering the password to re enter the main MagicQ application windows For security reasons th
166. Playback Wing sees nennen nennen 41 4 5 1 Setting Playback Wing IDS sees ener nhe nne tnter 42 4 6 Connecting External Monitors eeeseessesseeeeeeeeeeee eee rennen rennen nennen nennen 42 4 6 1 Pro 2010 Operating System enit peer peer es HEP Rde EE Re ELE ETE PA LEE RAE ES ai 42 4 6 2 Pro Operating Systeimn eer ota ecce eie ete a eb esp e be eec RU eG 42 4 7 irn 43 4 7 1 Naming and Numbering Heads essssssesesseseeeeeeeene enne enne eene nn trennen 44 MagicQ User Manual 4 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 4 8 Controlling Hed ds loci feces reese eee edere aod ttd ern ee repro Eee be Dust reed beoe es esq ta Eee ete dde Ege 46 4 8 1 Senate 46 4 8 2 Selecting heads from the Group Heads Window esee 46 4 8 3 Recording a OrOUD iere ee cnet ee biete eere ela PEEL Flo eee t E HER e Ee Dp agb detenido 46 4 9 Naming GTOUD i schiera te P Hie PH X REP eed EE ARDEN PERDE Eo HEURE eee dug sa pe Oe eds 46 4 10 Recalling Group eerte erm terere eret coi rine Ee eA Mie ee Renee R AAE ae Uia 47 4lIl Setting Levels for DITHImelrs en tpe rente eter beside pedo Ursa S sesta ese 47 412 JLocatng Heads uote eren et trennt at eae Hn bed eene ra be bal de Rad omae ees 48 4 13 Modifying Attributes eet eere i pP UC REL ede edo ee rne bed e pL RE EE eda 48 4 14 Recording a Palette it ERE ni E SS DEED eR cu E eg iU
167. Q User Manual 305 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 37 2 Connection MagicQ Consoles and MagicQ MaxiWing On the MagicQ consoles the remote input is provided on a standard 4 pin mini DIN connector e ew Viewed from 9 3 le e Solder Side EM of Plug The connections are in the sequence they appear physically on the connector 2 4 3 1 OV and equipment ground Opto isolated input negative Opto isolated input positive Power supply positive 5 Volt current limited The remote input can be used to receive an external signal on the opto isolated inputs or it can be wired to an external switch To receive an external signal wire the signal to pin 3 and the signal to pin 4 When used as external optically isolated input the maximum continuous voltage rating is 24V DC When wiring to an external switch links pins 2 and 4 Then connect the external switch between pins 3 and 1 On MagicQ consoles shipped prior to 22 November 2006 it is necessary to make a modification to the BIOS setup on the console to enable the remote switch Connect the keyboard to the console then on start up press and hold DELETE for 10 seconds this should reveal the BIOS setup window Select Peripheral interfaces and change parallel port to ECP EPP Then select Save and Exit MagicQ User Manual 306 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 37 3 Enabling the remote input in Ma
168. Q waits for the user to press GO before executing the next Cue It can also be use to setup Cue triggers from the remote interface Scheduled events or timecode Pressing ENTER only toggles between Yes and No To get the advanced options such as Timecode Scheduled or Remote either double click the field or press SHIFT ENTER 13 8 8 Cue Delay and Fade times The Delay and Fade times shown in the Cue Stack Window are properties of the Cue whilst the Wait time is a property of the Cue Stack Modifying the Delay and Fade times of the Cue may affect other Cue Stacks that use the Cue The Delay and Fade time fields show the maximum delay and fade times used by any channel within the Cue so giving a summary of the maximum delay and fade of the Cue To view the actual times of the Cue move the cursor to the Delay or Fade field and press the View Cue soft button This opens the Cue Window for the selected Cue automatically showing the Cue Times Delay and fade times can be entered directly in the Cue Stack Window note however that this will set the times for all attributes If you wish to change just the times for Position Beam or Colour then these should be set up in the Cue Window Simple View for general times or Cue Window Advanced View for channel specific times Split intensity in out times can be entered into the Cue Stack Window in the Delay and Fade fields using For example 2 3 entered in the Fade field will produce an in fade
169. Remote programming commands enable simple programming actions to be carried out from a remote terminal Remote programming commands consist of the program command number followed by parameters and completed with an H The commands are 01 start head end head gt H Select one or more heads 02 start head end head gt H Deselect one or more heads lt 03 gt H Deselect all heads lt 04 gt lt group number gt H Select group lt 05 gt lt level gt lt time gt H Set intensity of selected heads lt 06 gt attribute number value lt time gt H Set attribute value of selected heads lt 07 gt attribute number value lt 16bit gt H Increase attribute of selected heads lt 08 gt attribute number value lt 16bit gt H Decrease attribute of selected heads lt 09 gt H Clear programmer lt 10 gt lt palette id gt H Include position palette 11 palette id H Include colour palette 12 palette id H Include beam palette lt 13 gt cue id H Include cue lt 19 gt H Update lt 20 gt lt palette id gt H Record position palette lt 21 gt lt palette id gt H Record colour palette lt 22 gt lt palette id gt H Record beam palette lt 23 gt lt cue id gt H Record cue lt 30 gt H Next head lt 31 gt H Previous head lt 32 gt H All heads lt 40 gt H Locate lt 41 gt H Lamp on lt 42 gt H Lamp off lt 43 gt H
170. Reset lt 71 gt lt state gt H Remote trigger 80 cue id H Test Cue 81 cue id H Untest Cue 82 cue stack id H Test Cue Stack 83 cue stack id H Untest Cue Stack lt 90 gt showfile id H Save show showXXXX shw 91 showfile id H Load show showXXXX shw indicates an optional parameter level is an integer between 0 and 100 palette id is an integer between 1 and 1024 cue id is an integer between 1 and 5000 16 bit is a flag 0 for change in 8 bit resolution 1 for change in 16 bit resolution time is an integer time in seconds group number is an integer between 1 and 200 start head and end head are integers between 1 and 6145 showfile id is a four digit decimal number between 0000 and 9999 state is 0 or 1 states or 2 is toggle current state MagicQ User Manual 282 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd 31 1 2 Attribute numbers Intensity attributes I1 Position attributes P1 Pos 46 Pos2 47 Pos3 48 Pos4 49 Colour attributes C1 Cyan 16 Magenta 17 Yellow 18 Col mix 19 Beam attributes page 1 B1 Shutter 2 Iris 3 Focus 12 FX1 14 Beam attributes page 2 B2 Frost1 32 Frost2 33 Zoom 13 FX2 15 Beam attributes page 3 B3 Macrol 22 Macro2 23 FX3 34 FX4 35 Beam attributes page 4 B4 Cont1 20 Cont2 21 Cont3 40 Cont4 41 Intensity 0
171. Sort option specified in the Patch Window 19 9 8 Confirmation requests This setting sets the default for confirm boxes It can be set to Confirm default no Confirm default yes and no confirm The Confirm default no is the default option Use the no confirm option with great care 19 9 9 Scroll bars This setting allows a choice of scroll bars from none normal and wide 19 9 10 Layout buttons always active This setting splits the function of the top soft buttons above the screen The physical buttons are changed so that they always select layouts The menu buttons associated with each window are then available using the touch screen This option is useful on larger shows when you need to often switch between layout views 19 9 11 Don t display help at start up This setting is for testing purposes only This setting should always be set to No except when directed by ChamSys support 19 9 12 Always show Record Options When this setting is set to Yes MagicQ always shows a Record Options toolbar when the Record button is pressed An Include Options toolbar is shown when Include is pressed 19 9 43 Force Window on External Monitor 2 This setting determines how windows are shown on the Externa Monitor It is possible to force a particular Window to be displayed on the External Monitor regardless of other Windows moved onto the Monitor Options are None Outputs Info Programmer Info Cue
172. Spare 0 31 Video In 1 32 63 Video In 2 64 95 Video In 3 96 127 Video In 4 128 159 Video In 5 160 191 Video In 6 192 223 Video In 7 224 255 Video In 8 Panasonic MX50 1 A Bus 0 64 Source 1 65 128 Source 2 129 192 Source 3 193 255 Source 4 2 B Bus 0 64 Source 1 65 128 Source 2 129 192 Source 3 193 255 Source 4 MagicQ User Manual 308 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 3 Take gt 0 value is time 4 Take immediate when value changes greater or less than 128 5 T bar 6 12 Spare ChamSys will add support for alternative video switchers and mixers on request MagicQ User Manual 309 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk 40 MagicQ Visualiser ChamSys has developed a visualiser for MagicQ called MagicVis MagicVis is currently available for Windows PCs and Macs A Linux version will be available shortly File View Options Reports File View Options Reports LN SS MagicVis is available in two versions Firstly a stand alone MagicVis application which can be run on a laptop connected via network to a MagicQ console Secondly a new version of MagicQ that has the visualiser combined into it for use on PCs and Macs The MagicVis application enables Lighting Designers to add visualisation to their MagicQ console simply by connecting a network cable and starting the MagicVis application The graphics and processor intensive visualisation is performed on the attached co
173. Stack Info Group and Exec There are also options to set the sizing number of columns on the external monitors to be the same as on the internal touch screen You can choose the additional options Normal same res and Normal 10 cols Normal same res makes the external monitor use the same number of rows and columns as when the window is on the internal monitor Normal 10 cols Makes the external monitor always use 10 columns regardless of what size the window is 19 9 14 Plan Intensity type MagicQ User Manual 183 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Option for how the Plan View in the Outputs Window shows intensities either using glass fill or colour grading 19 9 15 Message Window This specifies where the message box is shown main screen external screen 1 external screen 2 and whether a network message is sent to other consoles Setting Net Only results in messages only being sent over the network not shown on the console where the Cue executed 19 10 Cue Storage Settings 19 10 1 Delete Cues when delete Cue Stacks With this setting you can force Cues to be deleted when the Cue Stack that uses them is deleted Cues are only deleted if they are not used in other Cue Stacks This option defaults to No 19 10 2 Delete Cue Stacks on remove Playbacks With this setting you can force Cue Stacks to be deleted when the Playback is deleted Cue Stacks are only deleted if they are no
174. Sys USB interfaces to be connected The options are No Yes and Yes auto DMX This option affects MagicQ Wings Mini PC Maxi Extra Playback Execute and USB Interfaces Twin DMX Audio SMPTE When set to Yes auto DMX then MagicQ automatically outputs DMX on the Wings starting from Universe 1 provided that none of the Universes have been explicitly set to MQ Wing 19 13 2 MagicDMX mode The options are None DMX Out or DMX In This option defaults to DMX Out MagicQ User Manual 190 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Setting the Out Type of Universe 1 in Setup DMX I O to MagicDMX will automatically set this option to DMX Out Note that DMX In is not available on the MagicDMX Basic version 19 13 3 Serial COM port MagicQ supports one serial port for remote connections On MagicQ consoles select COMI On MagicQ PC select a COM port from COMI to COMS depending on which COM port you wish to use 19 13 4 Serial baud rate MagicQ consoles support baud rates from 300 to 57600 Baud rates supported on MagicQ PC will depend on the PC 19 13 5 Serial parity MagicQ PC supports None Odd Even Mark and Space MagicQ consoles only support None Odd Even 19 13 6 Serial data bits Data bit sizes of 4 5 6 7 and 8 are supported 19 13 7 Serial stop bits MagicQ PC Supports 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits MagicQ consoles support 1 or 2 stop bits 19 13 8 Serial remote protocol Determines what pro
175. TUP show bitmapfx2 20by20 sbk Window Status Fitted Resolution Touchno Touchtype Left ie Width aoe Play Mode oed 1024x768 1024 bu peau pear es ex ps sss NU e EE m pem pe ooo Jo P E o ioe ec o o b Prog Mode 4 6 1 Pro 2010 Operating System On MagicQ consoles running the Pro 2010 operating system there is support for 2 external monitors with resolution up to 1440x900 These monitors can be touch screens there is a list of supported touch screens on the ChamSys download site External monitors must be powered and connected when the console powers up in order to be detected correctly Set the required resolution in the Resolution column and enable it When using USB touch screens go to Setup View System View Status Touchscreens to determine which touch screen is Touch 1 and which is Touch 2 4 6 2 Pro Operating System On the Pro Operating System Monitor output 1 is a duplicate of the on board screen This enables the console to continue to be used should there be a problem with the on board screen Monitor output 1 always duplicates the on board screen Monitor output 2 can be used for showing extra windows To enable windows to be moved onto Monitor output 2 enable it in Setup View System View Monitors by setting the resolution on Monitor 2 to 1024x768 or 800x600 MagicQ User Manual 42 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Before turning on the 2
176. The active window is on the top of the screen and is easily identified as the window with the highlighted title bar at the top It is also the window with the cursor in it An item in a window can be selected either a By pressing the touch screen over the appropriate part of the window b By moving the cursor to the appropriate position and pressing the ENTER button c By moving the mouse to the position and pressing the left mouse button The cursor can be moved around the active window using the cursor keys in the Editor area of the console or via the cursor keys on the keyboard PG UP PG DN PG LEFT and PG RIGHT can be used to scroll the window in the appropriate direction HOME and END can be used to get to the start and end of the window respectively MagicQ User Manual 32 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk Towards the bottom of the touch screen are two small windows the Status Display and the Input Display The Status Display shows the current date and time the ADD SWAP status of the console and other relevant status information iggleLapsP Sun Jan 20 18 40 38 2008 Ver 1 3 4 5 Pagel Add The Input Display shows the data that has been currently entered through the keypad and the keyboard Note that text is not entered into the main Windows until ENTER is pressed This allows the user to choose whether the keyboard data is SET into fields in the windows or onto Playbacks After a command has been entered
177. Theatre Tracking or Hog II Warp If in doubt select Normal Erasing a show clears all patching all programming and all palettes It does not clear console specific options such as the configuration of the DMX outputs or the calibration of the touch screen 18 7 Import and Export of Show Data and Show Merging MagicQ supports advanced features for merging shows together taking selections from particular shows and adding them to other shows A selection of Heads Cues Cue Stacks or Pages can be exported from a show file to a new file Only the show data that uses those selected Heads Cues Cue Stacks or Pages is present in the new show file The new show file can then be merged into other show files with MagicQ repatching the data as required 18 7 1 Exporting Shows Press SHIFT and SAVE SHOW EXPORT SHOW to export part of the current show Only the currently selected heads are exported All groups palettes cues and cue stacks that contain one or more of the selected heads are exported but only with the data from the selected heads If no heads are selected then MagicQ looks for items that are selected in the Page Stack Store and Cue Store windows Use SHIFT the cursor keys to select items in these windows Thus complete pages can be exported using the Page Window complete Cue Stacks including the Cues they use from the Cue Stack Store or individual Cues from the Cue Store 18 7 2 Merging Importing Shows Merging of S
178. VIEW GENERAL HEAD EDITOR Martin Mac250md4 hed 16bit coarse 16bit fine Instant Slow enc Invert Attrib no Locate Default Highlight B1A Shutter 2 035 035 035 be fro fo fw fe xm 9 ss por p po emn xo ooo ooo Channels can be added using the Insert soft button and deleted using the Remove Button press twice to Remove 16bit channels are indicated by setting the 16bit coarse and 16bit fine field for the appropriate channels For normal 8bit channels both fields should be set to no The 16bit fine and coarse attributes of a moving light do not have to be on adjacent channel numbers MagicQ User Manual 213 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The Instant field specifies whether a channel by default snaps immediately to new values rather than fading this is useful for colour wheels and gobo wheels where you want immediate changes The Slow Encoder field makes the encoder works more slowly than normal This is good for attributes where every possible DMX value represents a different function and therefore only very small turns of the encoder are required to change function The Attrib no field indicates to the console what the function of the channel is and is used in masking morphing and cloning No two channels should have the same Attrib no except for the two channels comprising a 16bit parameter Double click on the attrib field or press Enter to step through the possible
179. Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk When editing the channels in a Group Masters you should ensure that the fader is released before you make the edit Note that the channel levels times and FX information in the Cue that is used as the Group Master are ignored and hence do not affect the output in any way 15 10 Intensity Masters 15 10 1 Group based Intensity Masters To make an Intensity Master based on a Group simply clear the programmer then select the Group and record to a Playback Make sure that there are no active channels in the programmer MagicQ will automatically create a Group Master setting the Cue Stack Options Function Intensity Master 2 Yes and setting the Cue Stack Options Function Group Id to the selected Group If required the group associated with an Intenity Master can be changed in Cue Stack Options Function When a group number other than 0 is set in the Cue Stack Options Function menu then MagicQ automatically edits and generates the Cue assigned to the first step in that Cue Stack Ensure you set the group id on the correct Cue Stack You can have multiple Group Masters that control one channel they will work together 15 10 2 Channel based Intensity Masters Record a cue with the channels that you wish to control the level of the channels can be any level as long as the channel is in the programmer Then set the Cue Stack option Fader is an Intensity Master Activate the
180. Window select VIEW SYSTEM VIEW WINGS For each wing section you can specify which page buttons the section is tied to To operate a section independently of any other page buttons set the tie to be itself For example to operate the upper section of Wing 1 independently set the upper bank tie to Wing 1 upper You can also tie multiple wing banks together to use one set of page buttons Thus if you want both sections of a wing to operate off 1 set of buttons then you can configure the ties to do this MagicQ User Manual 131 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk When any NEXT PAGE or PREV PAGE buttons are pressed the LCD displays temporarily change to indicate the current page number You can jump to a Wing Playback Page by entering a page number then holding the Wing NEXT PAGE button and pressing the Wing PREV PAGE button 14 7 Default Cue Stacks Cue Stacks can be made to appear on all pages of a Playback To use this feature record a Cue Stack on Page 1 and then in the Playbacks Window set Default Cue Stack to On for the selected Playback The Cue Stack on Page 1 then appears on any Pages which do not have a Cue Stack assigned 14 8 Synchronising Playbacks It is possible to sychronise the Cue Stacks on two or more Playbacks Set the Sync next playback to this one option MagicQ matches the Cue Ids in the Cue Stack so it is possible to have different numbers of Cues in the Stacks If there is no Cue Id ma
181. Windows on CONSOLES ccccecessseceeeeneeceeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeneaaes 329 42 4 Multiple Windows on MagicQ PC systems 0000 0 cee ceeceseceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeesaecaaecaeenaesnaeenaeens 330 42 5 Monitors on Linux PC systems aine eee ente retentu in Bosnae aped e Logan e deg eoa epe uasa da pe aaa a ta 330 43 lEurygsln e 331 44 MagicQ Short Cuts T 332 SAVINGS Loading eet ei tec pn Ete eae eve Shia lv dus bad MER h a CEE Pe EE ege 332 HIE 01 332 LEM SGlect Heads E PM 332 Lamp On Lamp Off Reset esses eene nnne entren inrer 332 Setting Intensities M M 332 LIPS CR 333 LIEN 71777 333 Loading Values into the Programmer essere ener enne nnne 333 e Removing Values from the Programmer sessi ener 334 Recording CUeS ie eee eme e aeaa ore EAE PO Ses va veda ci e Den EEEE Oa Sua dra rta 334 Edilio CUES RD 334 20110 PE 334 o Information Windows sees eee entente enne nnet nene nh tenant sitne eras erre en reines rennen 335 Wing Keypad short cuts esses ense enn rene ennee nre ennee nre nnnnes 335 AREE CONSOLE 335 gt Cue Stack Macross et er eter a eene haie to Reg re tee orb Eae be FP uh heo e REY eH EXER dS 335 45 bcllo ntium 337 ADL NO OUt
182. Wing connected 19 9 Windows Settings 19 9 1 Colour Scheme There are options for the default colour scheme Grey high brightness yellow colour scheme high contrast or Grey black text colour scheme The Grey black text is useful on some TFT LCD screens The MKII schemes provide improved graphics 19 9 2 Big Text Mode This setting shows all text in CAPITALS regardless of how it is programmed in the show There is also an option to capitalise only the first letter of names 19 9 3 Icons This setting turns icons on or off and selects the size of the icons Note that on older MagicQ consoles it is necessary to load the icons file onto the console 19 9 4 Speed Display Choose how speed is displayed for chases and FX seconds BPM or frames 19 9 5 Attribute Display This determines how attributes values are displayed for Encoders normal 16bit or pan and tilt in 19 9 6 Column Hiding When set to Yes MagicQ hides columns that are unused e g attributes that the patched moving lights do not support When set to No all columns are shown regardless of whether they are used 19 9 7 Auto Row Ordering MagicQ User Manual 182 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk When set to Yes MagicQ automatically orders the rows in the Outputs Windows Programmer Windows and Cue Windows The currently selected heads appear at the top of the window When set to No the rows are ordered according to the
183. X can subtract ssesssesssesseseeeeeeeee ener nnne nnne nnne 186 19 11 8 Go reasserts channels eeseeseeseeeeeeee eene entente nnne nnne trennen innen 186 19 11 9 Fader off zero reasserts channels eese ener 187 19 11 10 Next Page changes to next used sessessesseeeeeeeeeeeeer ener 187 19 11 11 Current Playback follows last touched eene 187 19 11 12 Wing Playbacks SEL GO BACRK eene eene nre 187 19 11 13 Activate playback on start ener enne 187 19 11 14 Run in Execute WindOwW eese nennen enne enr en eren erstens trennen 187 MagicQ User Manual 12 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 12 Network Settings 28 Mii deesscccaecasdenaschectcnssivt ceesabssaeasanstenasietybeideandecevestedutenusdyiasnsdyoeatbana dixon ted 188 19 12 1 ID Adesso eter tee set tette tete tte ebore rds Miti S Litter en crees 188 19 12 2 Subnet Mask TRI 188 19 12 3 Send to applications on this PC rennen eren 188 19 12 4 Ethernet remote protocol sees nennen enini 188 19 12 5 Playback Syne Pontosest nnne neie eei eti eo vesbeenusbpudenassoead ea oigo eed 188 19 12 6 WED DS CIV m 189 19 12 7 NI Ados RR 189 19 12 8 Multi WindOws 4 detener ene tegere che hg ecie eden c ai ieee aii ash 189 19 12 9 Control net IP Address E R 189 19 12 10 Contro
184. _ an1___ E ue Ssefoml N Diestied amne fanz Ae farz None No ese ue c jue Jes ee JN Pro ode mpl ictiea Arner ui uer ana Nove JN ai E e Amer ans Jae Jans Nere Te 3 Non track Set Mode If you are using WYWISYG on the same PC as MagicQ then set the Visualiser to WYSIWYG same PC otherwise set it to WYSIWYG remote When connecting to WYSIWYG using a MagicQ console always use WYSIWYG remote When using WYSIWYG and MagicQ on different PCs it is important to ensure that MagicQ PC knows the IP address to use to communicate with WYSIWYG In the Setup View Settings Window set the IP Address to be the same as the IP address of your network port for example if you PC has a network address of 2 9 200 77 then set the value in the Setup Window to 2 9 200 77 SETUP show ThuNov032019392005 sbk Parameter Setting Interface settings Sub net address 255000 Parallel port address ait Net 7 Pathport sub net Media server mount path fedia server index path Loo 255 0 0 0 it pi Y edia server IP address Yes External windows Multi Windows Port settings Serial input protacal Remote trigger type MagicQ User Manual 325 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 41 6 1 Running WYSIWYG Start up WYSIWYG Select the magicqwysiwyg wyg show In order to get WYSIWYG to respond to data received yo
185. a FX FX Segments are the number of adjacent heads that have the same offset So for example consider 12 heads With 100 FX spread then without FX parts or FX Segments you get 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 8 16 25 33 41 50 58 66 7596 83 91 With FX Segments 2 s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 0 16 16 33 33 50 50 66 66 83 83 With FX Segments 3 s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 0 0 25 25 25 50 50 50 7596 7596 7596 With FX Parts 2 s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 With FX Parts 2 s Segments 3 s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 0 0 50 50 50 0 0 0 50 50 50 8 1 7 FX Direction amp Inversion The FX direction can be set to the following options Forward Backward Odd Even Even Odd Left Right Right Left Segments Invert Invert Odd Even Invert Even Odd Invert Left Right Invert Right Left Invert Segments Forward and Backward affect the direction of the FX Odd Even automatically makes the odd heads go forward and the even heads go backwards Left Right splits the heads in two with the first half going forward and the second half going backwards
186. a Flash button in Swap mode Pressing the Back button the Playback will be set to 10046 and the Intensity of all other active Playbacks will be set to 0 When the button is released the other Playbacks will be restored to their previous level This setting enables a Playback to have both an Add button and a Swap button 16 3 Function 16 3 1 Cue Stack is an Intensity Master When this setting is set to Yes then the Cue Stack behaves as an Intensity Master The Cue Stack normal Cue execution behaviour is disabled If the Group Id settings is non zero then the channels stored in the Group specified by the Group Id specify the channels that are under control of the Intensity Master Updating the channels stored within a Group updates the channels under control of the Intensity Master If there is no Group recorded for the Group Id then the Cue Stack has no effect If the Group Id setting is set to O then the channels stored in the first Cue are used to determine which channels are under control of the Intensity Master The actual levels of the channels in the first Cue is not important only that the Channels have some level in the Cue In order for the Intensity Master to be activated the Go button must be pressed To release the Intensity Master the Playback must be selected and the REL button pressed The Button settings Flash activates Stack and Flash releases Stack are ignored In order to avoid sudden changes in output level the fad
187. a ders 58 5 10 Pan and Tilt Offset ee tete Ht iit nen teret EE eie SR oe e PE lasers evel edes RUE Dose 58 5 11 Minimum and maximum levels esee nennen een rennen rennen 58 XILL Leamitts anid OFISet nete de oet eene trente egeo Dese bb ee dist erae eee de pu 58 5 11 2 Delia values COPMSEtS csiecseicinsasiacsdeneassieeatiaaedesiaiestaataadedsvenseivenstadadevsssedenssiansdsvessedvenssaaeeve Rd 58 512 Didone EET 59 5 13 Changing the DMX channels of dimmers and heads eee 59 5 14 Patching a head to multiple DMX addresses eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeenre nennen 60 5 15 Unpatching a head from a DMX address esessssseeeeeeeeee eene eene 60 5 16 Patching scroller ien ice een Gee ltr La era e epe e Ee Ee Pe Lee Pa erus e PET La 60 5 17 Editing Head personality iiie tenter oti eter erae pe etae p ede URP Ee edd 61 5 18 Cloning Adding extra heads dimmers to a programmed show eese 61 5 18 1 Copy Head Programming 000 eee eseessecnseceseceseceseeeseeeseeeseeeseeecaeecaeeesaeeaaecaaecaaecaeenaeeaeen 62 D 18 2 Patch Channel Copy eee nter Sd eradestadeiiostlaseiadtolaseietscveteedockntentsoteuoedin 62 5 19 Morphing heads Changing fixture type nennen eene rennen 62 5 19 1 Morphing Multi Part Heads eee entran ttae tease bo ed ehe eder aeo o cael 62 25 20 Importing heads ee IEEE ER Lage oen ee O T SEEN GE Cube Le
188. a for each of the different types of intelligent head available This data determines how the different attributes of an intelligent head are controlled by the console Personalities are provided for most intelligent heads Where a personality is not available one can easily be written using the in built Head Editor DMX configuration data is generally available from the manufacturer of the intelligent head MagicQ User Manual 22 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 2 2 1 HTP LTP channels The console supports two types of channels highest takes precedence HTP and latest takes precedence LTP Generally HTP channels are used for channels controlling dimmers and for the dimmer channel of intelligent heads LTP channels are used for the attributes of intelligent heads such as pan tilt colour gobo etc For HTP channels the value that is output onto the DMX line is the highest value of that channel on all of the active playbacks and the programmer The console can be configured so that if a HTP channel is in the programmer it always overrides any active playbacks For LTP channels the value output is the value from the last active playback unless that channel is active in the programmer in which case the value output is the value stored in the programmer The last active playback is the last playback to be raised above zero which is still above zero Playbacks that are bumped in using ADD or SWAP buttons automaticall
189. ables power fail detection for the current seesion in case the power fail detection circuitry has gone faulty and is continually reporting power fail This setting is not stored over a reset power on 19 16 8 Screen Save This setting disables screen save for the current session This setting is not stored over a reset power on 19 16 9 Reduced rate Output By default MagicQ sets the reduced rate Output to Mixed Changes only This reduces the amount of network usb traffic when DMX values are not changing It also interleaves the ArtNet frames so that ArtNet devices with small buffers will still be able to decode the correct ArtNet universes on heavily loaded networks Consoles and PC installations that have been programmed on older versions of MagicQ software will automatically have this option turned to Mixed Changes only when the system is first started after the upgrade Users can change the setting back to the previous setting if required The previous setting Normal has been renamed Continuous We recommend using the Mixed Changes only option as your normal setting particularly when using wireless networking Data packets sent to WWIWYG and Capture are sent only when the data changes thus significantly reducing network traffic when data is not changing The reduced rate DMX options do not affect the WYSIWYG or Capture data The DMX data sent to MagicQ Wings and Interfaces is only sent when the
190. ack It provides Go functionality for playbacks that do not have Go buttons Manual Pause This Pause button is part of the manual control section and controls the current playback It has the same functionality as the Pause button associated with a playback It provides Pause functionality for playbacks that do not have Pause buttons Big Go This Go button is part of the manual control section and controls the current playback It has the same functionality as the Go button associated with a playback It is designed to be use for theatre style operation where one big GO button is important for cueing a show MagicQ User Manual 346 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Fast Forward The Fast Forward button is part of the manual control section and controls the current playback It is used to bump a Cue Stack to the next step immediately without fading It is particularly useful when editing a Cue Stack to bump through Cues to find the one to edit Fast Back The Fast Back button is part of the manual control section and controls the current playback It is used to bump a Cue Stack to the previous step immediately without fading It is particularly useful when editing a Cue Stack to bump through Cues to find the one to edit Add Swap The Add Swap buttons controls the function of flash buttons See also the Add Swap overview DBO The Console Blackout Button used for suprisingly black outs
191. ack PB functions F1 is the Playback number For Stack functions F1 is the Stack number For Cue functions F1 is the Cue number For Page functions F1 is the Page Number and F2 specifies a Playback to be activated on the Page Change 0 none PB a r level PB level PB activate PB release PB act FULL PB go PB back PB ffwd PB fbck PB jump Stack activate Stack release Stack level Cue activate Cue release Cue level Run macro Change layout Change page Change page release main Change page release all 21 5 1 MIDI events If you add MIDI events then these override the miditable txt file the file is completely ignored MagicQ User Manual 207 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Cham www chamsys co uk 21 5 2 Serial Port events If you add serial port events then these override the normal ChamSys serial remote protocol functions MagicQ matches the serial data received to the string you specify in the P2 field using the same format as in the Cue Stack Macros but without the X So if you set the P2 field in the Autom to 1 2 3 it will match the serial data received 1 2 3 22 Execute Window The Execute Window is a special window designed to allow the user to customise the look and feel of the MagicQ This layout of the window is configurable by the user and can contain Groups Palettes Macros Cues and Cue Stacks VIEW VIEW VIEW ASSIGN SET WALL SET GRID SET WIN SET PASS BSc EXECUTE MAX SPECIAL PAPER SIZE SIZE WORD
192. ack Commands The commands are lt playback number gt A Activate playback lt playback number gt R Release playback lt playback number gt T Test playback activate with level 100 lt playback number gt U Un test playback release with level 0 lt playback number gt G Go on playback lt playback number gt S Stop go back on playback lt playback number gt B Fast back on playback no fade lt playback number gt F Fast forward on playback no fade lt playback number gt lt level gt L Set playback fader level playback number cue id cue id dec gt J Jump to Cue Id on playback page number P Change page channel number level I Set intensity channel to level program command number H Remote programming command The following parameter values are supported playback number is a number between 1 and 10 level is an integer between 0 and 100 page number is an integer between 0 and 100 channel number is an integer between 1 and 6144 cue id is an integer between 1 and 65536 cue id dec is an integer between 0 and 99 Note that for Cue ID 1 5 cue id dec is 50 So for example to set dimmer channel 4 to 50 you would use 4 50I To jump to Cue id 2 5 on playback 8 you would use 8 2 50J Commands can be sent back to back e g 1A2A1S2G3 4I MagicQ User Manual 281 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 31 1 1 Remote programming commands
193. ad then when one attribute of a head is changed all the attributes of the head are activated For LTP channels the values of the attributes in the programmer are set to the current output value HTP channels will remain at zero MagicQ also supports IPCB IPC and Col These group similar parameters together so for example if you touch a colour attribute or the colour attributes are loaded into the programmer IPCB means all Intensity Position Colour and Beam attributes work in this way whereas IPC only works on Intensity Position and Colour attributes not Beam attributes Performing a LOCATE activates all parameters At any time all of the attributes of the selected heads can be forced into the programmer by opening the Programmer Window holding SHIFT and pressing ACTIVE 10 4 Recording a Cue The basic unit of storage on the console is the Cue which stores Level information Timing information FX information This corresponds to the information in the programmer recording a Cue is simply a matter of transferring what is in the programmer into the Cue To record a Cue first set up the look then press RECORD and press the SELECT button of the Playback to record the Cue onto To name the Cue key in the name before pressing RECORD You can name a Cue that has already been recorded by keying in the name pressing SET and pressing the Select button for the Playback that the Cue was recorded onto To
194. address ireless mode ireless IP address Wireless sub net address ireless channe o Extemal Windows 0 0 0 0 0 0 diMax USB Ad hoc 69 254 1 20 255 255 0 0 ireless SSID ireless encryption ireless key mynetwork Em o o gt co E S o ce The Wireless channel defaults to 0 indicating that the Edimax device will automatically pick a channel If you wish to force use of a particular channel enter a number between 1 and 11 MagicQ User Manual 274 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Enter a name for the Wireless SSID this will be the how the WIFI appears on the remote device on iPhone go to Settings Wi Fi to select connection to the network The iPhone should be set to an IP address on the same same network e g 169 254 1 1 Some iPhones iPods use 169 254 1 1 automatically as their default address On iPhone 4 and iPad 2 it is often necessary to set up a static IP address on the iPhone iPad In addition on the iPhone iPad set up the router IP to the IP address of the console So for example if the MagicQ console is set with Wireless IP address 169 254 1 20 Wireless subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Try the following settings on your iPod iPhone iPad IP address 169 254 1 30 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Router IP 169 254 1 20 Choose the encryption type For secure encryption use WPA or WEP and set the passphrase in the Wireless Encrpytion field When you try to connect to the network the remote
195. ader level ccc esiti cnecnetter etie ed ether ta e dcr de eic echt ed eL nie 147 16 5 2 Audio b mps GO cnt ee os epe be eO A ce ee end 148 16 83 Audio sets BPM i6 eet UO reci tese neo educta lia ee doa eo ri eb e Ee Ea eM a ale 148 16 8 4 Audio jumps to Cue Step sesssssesseeseeeeeeee enne enr seeriana entente 148 168 5 A di CANNED P 148 16 8 6 Audio level Audio parameter 1 Audio parameter 2 149 16 9 Step View Defaults only iie tcest lieta eren eetee eae eere ene eH HEC Ep ba pae Ele dL endo ae 149 16 9 1 Step controlled as ch se ceci enn teneis ee tere peti e dere RR eee eer Doa 149 16 9 2 StepTollows last erster eee eres tree oaae aie detener E AREE 149 16 9 3 Step halts before executing rennen nre nennen nennen 149 16 9 4 Zero old HTP from previous steps eene ener eren nenne 149 16 9 5 Zero old FX from previous steps cee ceeceeeeseeeseeeeceeeseeeseeeseecsaecsaecsaecsseeeeeseeeeseesseeeees 150 169 6 Releaseold Chansonnier ninina ende Pede b ex ertet Ha He ae ede e edet ha 150 16 10 Step Times View Defaults only seen rennen nennen nnn 150 16 10 1 HTP in fade HTP out fade Position fade Colour fade Beam fade 150 16 10 2 HTP in delay HTP out delay Position delay Colour delay Beam delay 150 16 11 EX View Defaults Only decetero tisse batte eo besar eo ee SEEK Hed Reb PE RS
196. affected You will be asked to confirm by selecting YES Select programming mode if unsure select Normal Theatre Theatre Hogll non track tracking warp There is a choice of four modes e Normal faders activate Cue Stacks When recording all data in the programmer is stored in recorded cues e Theatre non track faders operate levels only When recording all data in the programmer is stored in recorded cues e Theatre tracking faders operate levels only When recording only data in the programmer that has changed since the last record is stored in recorded cues e Hog II warp like Theatre Tracking but with some extra features to make the programming more familiar to Hog II users In Theatre modes fixtures return to their default values when under control of a playback or the programmer The keypad is set up to enable selection of Palettes using Palette numbers and Cue Stack timing defaults to being stepped timing rather than chase timing The mode can be changed at any time by using the Programming Mode soft button in the Setup Window In addition each individual option default value can be customised by the user and saved as their personal settings file Starting a show clears all patching all programming and all palettes It does not clear console specific options such as the configuration of the DMX outputs or the calibration of the touch screen MagicQ User Manual 39 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys
197. ality file the console takes the first selected head and copies the data associated with the palette entry you selected into the personality file If the palette entry is already in the personality file i e there is a palette entry with the same name as the one you selected then that palette entry is replaced Otherwise a new palette entry is created in the file You can examine the personality file by going into the Patch Window and pressing the Edit Head soft button Then press the Select Head button to choose the personality to examine MagicQ User Manual 96 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 9 11 Grabbing Palettes from DMX input You can program palettes by capturing real DMX data from another consoles This provides a handy way of converting show data from one console type to another or to back up data from one console on another To capture real DMX data first select the heads you are interested in Then change to the appropriate Palette Window Intensity Position Colour or Beam Press CTRL and RECORD then select a Palette entry this will load the DMX input data for the selected heads into the programmer and record it into the specified Palette entry Alternatively use Include to get the data into the programmer and record the Palette entry in the normal way for recording palette entries Press CTRL and INCLUDE and then ENTER This will include the DMX input data for the selected heads into the programmer T
198. am Page 3 sse 234 25 3 12 Mixing between pixel mapping layers enne rennen 237 25 3 13 Colour MIXINE psio reet Pre ree bee Erie age ride a E REY pae age Dub el esee E ERE ens 237 25 3 14 PAP DLY Type i ite ceret det p oec c eb optare de UR Ee oe fepe rte eue Meg Pto EUM et dove de RR 237 25 4 Multi Element Heads inre e dass etin rater Lire eee a ae E EAEE 238 PATENS VIE ID EP 238 25 5 Making orids 0f OtOups uiti ere epe Peter ine cp egre ere eode eds eeu eie ce eene eda uro na 238 25 6 Using the MagicQ Matrix Viewer eee ener entren enne 239 25 6 1 Automatic grabbing of show file sessi 239 25 6 2 Manual Copy 239 25 7 Programming LED using standard FX sess 241 25 8 Making groups out of LED pixels eese nennen rennen 241 25 9 Making new LED personalities on MagicQ seen rennen 241 Controlling Media Servers with MagicQ sessi nennen nennen 242 26 1 Connect the Media Server over LAN ssesseeseeseeseeeeee eene nennen enne enr enin 242 26 2 Patching the Media Server on MagicQ ssesesseseeeeeeeeeneene ener rennen 243 26 3 Configuring a Media Server ssseseseeeeeeeeeee eene eene 243 26 4 Thumbnail Va PR 246 26 4 Manual retrieval of thumbnails eese nete enemies 246 26 4 2 Automated retrieval of thumbnails
199. ammer By default only the selected heads are stored into Palettes when a Palette is recorded 19 7 10 Record merge does not override times By default when the Programmer is merged into a Cue using Record Merge the times in the Cue are overwritten with the times in the Programmer This setting enables this to be changed so that the times in the Cure are not overwritten 19 7 11 Update Clears Programmer By default the Programmer is not cleared when the Update button is pressed MagicQ User Manual 176 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 8 Keypad Encoder Settings 19 8 1 Auto enter on keypad intensity set This setting determines whether when entering keypad intensity settings an ENTER is required If set then an auto enter is processed when 2 digits have been keyed in after or immediately after FULL 1 THRU 4 50 or 1 THRU 4 FULL 19 8 2 Select heads on keypad intensity set This setting determines whether the current head selection is modified when you set intensities using the keypad If this option is not set then intensities are set without modifying the head selection If set then the intensities are set and then the head selection is modified for example 1 THRU 4 50 ENTER sets heads 1 to 4 at 50 intensity and selects heads 1 to 4 5 FULL sets head 5 to 100 intensity and adds head 5 to the current selection 19 8 8 Select Heads and Palettes from keypad This setting was renamed
200. ammer When enabled channels default to the Default values specified in the personality When disabled channels hold their last value 19 7 4 Programmer overrides HTP values This setting determines whether the programmer overrides HTP values on playbacks When set to Yes any HTP channels in the programmer are no longer affected by the levels of those channels on playbacks When set to No the highest value of the channel from the Playbacks and the Programmer is output 19 7 5 Programmer overrides FX This setting determines whether the programmer overrides FX on active playbacks When set to Yes any channels that have base levels in the programmer ignore FX for those channels from any active playbacks Cues are automatically recorded with the Cue Option Block FX this ensures that when the Cues are played back other FX from other Playbacks are blocked When set to No FX active on playbacks add to the base levels in the Programmer 19 7 6 Highlight mode This setting determines the highlight mode The options are Normal Advanced highlights lowlight Advanced Highlight only and Advanced no reset MagicQ User Manual 175 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk In Normal mode the intensities of the selected heads are reduced except for the one or ones in Odd Even mode that are being controlled Highlighting of the controlled head s makes programming of positions much easier In Advan
201. ample by a technician to test some lights on the rig from a slave console whilst programming is carried out on the master console 29 1 Multi programming MagicQ User Manual 266 Version 1 5 7 5 www chamsys co uk ChamSys Ltd ChamSys Show data sent to slave consoles Slave Prog Console Slave Prog Console Master Prog Console Master Prog console has the master show file Slaves synchronise to the master on start up after resets or after a manual resync request MagicQ User Manual 267 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Cham www chamsys co uk MagicQ supports show file synchronise A K Une console is designated as the Master Prog console which will keep the master show file The synchronisation of show data is separate to synchronisation of show playback state and hot takeover Regardless of which console is actually controlling the universes the Master Prog console will remain in control of the master show file When a Slave Prog console starts or is reset it makes a connection to the Master Prog console and tries to synchronise to the show master data This consists of automatically grabbing the show data file from the show master and loading that show data file into the show slave Users can also request a resynchronise at any time 29 1 1 Configuration Configure the master console by setting the multi console setting Show data sync type to Master Prog SETUP show FriDec30232202010 sbk Show d
202. amsys co uk When morphing between multi part heads if the new head has less parts than the original head then the excess parts in the original heads will be ignored If the new head has more parts than the original head then the excess parts in the new head will be a repeat of the parts from the original head This also enables easy changing of mode of multi part heads which was not previously possible e g when changing a Thomas Pixeline from 18 pixel to 9 pixel mode or when changing a Chromalec Jarag from 25 to 31 channel mode 5 20 Importing heads A quick way of patching heads is to import the heads from a file This enables the patch list to be drawn up on a standard spread sheet or word processor The console supports comma separated variable files csv which can be generated from most spread sheets and word processors The first row of the file indicates which columns are present in the file The next rows of the file contain the data for each head Headno Headname Dmxno Headt ype Gel Pinv Tinv Swap 0001 Spots 1 001 Generic Dimmer No col no no no 0002 Spots 1 002 Generic Dimmer No col no no no 0003 Spots 1 003 Generic Dimmer No col no no no 0004 Spots 1 004 Generic Dimmer No col no no no 0005 Finger 1 005 Generic Dimmer R59 Indigo no no no 0006 Finger 0007 Finger 0008 Finger L L 1 006 Generic Dimmer R312 Canary no no no Lip L 1 007 Generic Dimmer R356 Middle Lavender no no no 1 008 Generic
203. an be connected to a MagicQ console to enable extra DMX outputs from the console Note that they duplicate the Main Playbacks 1 10 they do not enable extra Playbacks 19 4 1 Connecting a Mini Wing PC Wing or Maxi Wing Before you can use the MagicQ PC Wing the driver software must be installed on the PC instructions for installation are supplied with the MagicQ PC Wing To enable the MagicQ PC open the Setup Window and choose the View Settings view Select the View Ports tab and cursor down until you reach the MagicQ Wings amp Interfaces option and press ENTER to change it from disabled to enabled The following short cuts make programming on MagicQ PC Wing easier The short cuts also work on MagicQ console Hold ALL and press a playback Select Selects groups 1 to 10 Hold POS and press a playback Select Selects position palette entry Hold COL and press a playback Select Selects colour palette entry Hold BEAM and press a playback Select Selects beam page or beam palette entry Hold ALL and press Next Head Selects next group MagicQ User Manual 169 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Hold ALL and press Prev Head Selects previous group Hold POS COL or BEAM and press Next Selects next range for last encoder changed Head Hold POS COL or BEAM and press Prev Selects previous range for last encoder changed Head To connect a Mini PC or Maxi Wing to a conso
204. and removed Cue timings and settings can also be configured Also see recording of Cue Stacks Pressing and holding the Cue Stack button causes the Cue Stack Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Stack Store This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Stack Store Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Stack Store Window is used to view all of the Cue Stacks stored on the console Cue Stacks can be recorded named removed moved and copied Pressing and holding the Stack Store button causes the Stack Store Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released MagicQ User Manual 341 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Cue Store This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Cue Store Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Cue Store Window is used to view all of the Cues stored on the console Cues can be recorded named removed moved and copied Pressing and holding the Cue Store button causes the Cue Store Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Group This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Group Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Group Window is used to select heads Selected heads can then be mo
205. anise you show files using the File Manager in the Setup Window File Manager supports renaming moving copying and deleting of files All show files are located in the show directory The show directory has sub directories for fx heads and icons File manager can operate on both the internal hard disk and external USB memory sticks To copy a file to the USB stick Select HARD DRIVE soft button MagicQ User Manual 159 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Press COPY and then select the file you wish to copy Select USB DRIVE soft button Select the entry Moving is done in a similar way using the MOVE action button Renaming and deleting use the NAME and REMOVE action buttons respectively It is also possible to load shows settings icons and new software by clicking on items in the File Manager window 18 10 Transferring files over Ethernet The console supports remote file system access over Ethernet Files can be accessed whilst the console is running and outputting Art Net thus allowing for instance users to set up automatic show back ups to an external server Connect the console to the host system typically a PC either using a direct Ethernet crossover cable or via Ethernet hubs Configure the IP addresses of the host system and the console so that they are on the same sub net For instance if the console is set to IP address 2 9 200 5 subnet mask 255 0 0 0 then set the host system to IP
206. anual Fade In and Fade Out Pressing the Pause button on either playback 9 or 10 brings the current playback under manual control The two faders can then be used to fade in each new Cue with separate control for fade in and fade out Pressing the Go button on either Playback 9 or 10 returns the current playback to normal Cue execution When enabled playbacks faders 9 and 10 can not be used as normal playbacks 14 4 10 Rate sub master It is possible in the Setup Window to set the function of manual cross fade fader to be a rate sub master to control the execution rate of the current playback or the global execution rate of all playbacks The rate is shown in the bottom right of the Status Display from 0 to infinity The fader should be set to 50 for normal execution rate The options are Rate Master Global Rate Master Cue Stack Rate Master Cue Stack Global Rate Master Tested Stacks Rate Master The Rate Master and Global Master affect both the Cue Stack times FX times and Pixel FX times The Cue Stack Rate Master and Cue Stack Global Rate Master control just the rate of the Cue Stack not the FX in it Tested Stacks Rate Master only tested Cue Stacks from the Execute Window or externally triggered are affected by rate changes 14 4 41 Tap to time Itis possible to change the chase speed or FX speed using Tap to Time Holding the S button of the playback and then pressing soft button Y 2 soft button up on right side of t
207. are used to manage sequences of Cues Cue Stacks keep track of the order of the Cues and the options for how they are played back A Cue Stack may have only one Cue associated with it or may have a whole list of Cues The Cue Stack stores a Cue Id and a textual field for each Cue so that the different steps in the stack can be labelled The Cue Id and textual field are shown on the playback display when the stack is played back which enables operators to keep track of the current position in the show Cue Stacks can be configured to run as a chase rather than as a simple list of Cues The difference is that as a chase each the timing of cue is determined by the chase speed and chase contrast rather than by the individual delay and fade times for each cue Each Cue Stack has a number e g CS1 and an optional name 2 5 Playbacks The console enables playing of recorded show data through Playbacks Playbacks are associated with physical faders and buttons each Playback can have one cue stack assigned to it The console supports 202 Playback 10 main Playbacks situated below the touch screen and up to 8 extension wings each with 24 Playbacks On models where less than 8 wings are fitted the not fitted playbacks can be utilised through the touch screen and associated buttons 2 6 Pages The console supports multiple pages of Playbacks enabling Playback faders to have different functions depending on the current page Typically one page
208. art of the MSEX protocol specification Enable the Live Preview option in the Media View of the Setup Window The live preview is shown in the large window on the left of the Media Window Choose using the top soft buttons whether the preview shows the output or the currently selected layer When connected to media servers that do not yet support live previews the preview window will show the image thumbnail from the 1 layer that has its intensity channel above zero 26 6 Media Window View It is possible to configure the View in the Media Window View Servers defaults View Groups and View Libraries View Groups is useful when using a large number of media servers and controlling using groups of media servers rather than individual servers The number of layers shown in the Media Window can be increased from 8 to 20 in Setup View Settings Windows Extended Media Window This helps when using media servers with large numbers of layers 26 7Using MagicQ and Media Server software on the same PC 26 7 1 Using the loopback IP address It is possible to use MagicQ and Media Server software e g ArKaos on the same PC by altering some of the settings given above In the Media View of the Setup Window set the IP address of the media server to 127 0 0 1 This is the local loopback IP address and will allow the PC to talk to itself to retrieve thumbnails and live previews In the Settings View of the Setup Window scroll down to Interface S
209. as 5 pages Note that prior to v1 4 1 0 the Attrib field included the Enc field so it was not possible in these versions to choose an attribute function separate from its encoder assignment The Default field defines what value the channel is set to by default on start up When the Setup Programming option Unused chans return to default is set then channels also return to theses values when they are no longer controlled by Playbacks or the Programmer The Locate field defines what value the channel is set to when a Locate is performed on the head it is also used as the default value for a channel if no default values is specified The Default and Locate should specify the normal defaults for the fixture the exact values used in a particular show can be overriden by making a Default Cue or Locate Cue in the Cue Store The Highlight and Lowlight values are used when the Setup Programming option Highlight mode is set to Advanced This enables the user to configure custom highlight lowlight settings for each type of personality 23 4 Ranges View INSERT IMPORT CAPTURE CHOOSE RANGES RANGE HEAD HEAD EDITOR Robe_Spoti200_Mode 1 Speed hed ERRORS Zoom Types L Chan Max Auto Pal Icon Dep Chan MagicQ User Manual 215 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk This view defines the ranges for channels that utilise specific values to access functions such as colour and gobo wheels shutter channels and control chann
210. as a back up All the universes on the console are set to Hot take over Whenever there is no ArtNet traffic on the network for a particular universe the back up console starts sending data for that universe As soon as data reappears the back up console stops sending data A Only outputs ArtNet if no Always outputs H ArtNet received from ArtNet i Main Console l Main Console Preferred Mode Backup Console In Equal mode all consoles on the network are set to Hot take over At any one time one of the consoles will run as the master with all universes enabled If that console fails one of the others will take over Itis recommended that you set the Hot take over detect time to different values on each of the consoles to avoid conflict conditions First console to start is the Master and outputs ArtNet The other console becomes the Slave Console 1 Equal Mode Console 2 28 4 1 Hot Takeover Mode Hot Takeover Mode is set in Setup View Settings Multi Console The options are Pref Master Console will always be Master Pref Slave Console will only be Master if another console is not detected Equal Both consoles have same priority MagicQ User Manual 259 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Split Universes controlled independently default For all modes it is still necessary to set up Setup View DMX I O so that all universes that you wish to use as Hot Takeover have their Out
211. as been moved When dimmer curve is set to Offset then the minimum value specifies the offset to be applied When a channel value exceed 255 then it wraps back to 0 5 11 2 Delta values offsets MagicQ supports a quick method of applying an offset to channels such as a pan or tilt offset or an offset on a colour scroll To apply an offset playback the Cues and then override only the parameters you wish to offset in the programmer Then press the Update button The Update options have been modified to include an extra option Patch Offset Selecting this option applies a permanent offset to the channel in the Patch rather than modifying the individual Palettes and Cues To remove the offset go to Patch View Chans and remove the offset from the appropriate channels Offsets apply only to LTP channels not to HTP Intensity channels The Outputs window shows channels with offsets in green colour The Patch window shows offsets applied to Pan and Tilt in the Pan Offset and Tilt Offset field MagicQ User Manual 58 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 5 12 Dimmer curves MagicQ supports 10 user dimmer curves that can be selected in the Patch Window View Chans view User dimmer curves are specified in files of format csv comma separated variable with filename dimmercurveuser1 csv dimercurveuser2 csv etc stored in the show heads folder The files consist of 256 lines each with a value between 0 and 255 These fi
212. ata sync Show data sync IP 0 0 0 0 On each of the slave consoles set the Show data sync type option to Slave Prog and set the Show data sync IP to the IP address of the master show console SETUP show FriDec30232202010 sbk Parameter Setting Enable remote control No Enable remote access Show data sync Show data sync IP 2 0 0 1 The status of the slave synchronisation is shown in the status bar Initially the status window will show NoCon Chris PC Sun Oct 18 12 29 36 2009 Ver 1 4 3 7 Build 129 Page 8 EVERY ME Add NoCon CC None Once the show slave has a connection to the show master over the network but not yet synchronised it will show NoSync MagicQ User Manual 268 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk ris PC Sun Oct 18 12 30 58 2009 Ver 1 4 3 7 Build 129 Page 8 EVERY ME Add NoSync CC None Once synchronised it will show Sync ris PC Sun Oct 18 12 28 30 2009 Ver 1 4 3 7 Build 125 ynced to master show file Page 8 EVERY ME Add Sync CC None gt When synchronised the consoles will have the same show data however they still operate as separate consoles with a separate programmer and separate playback faders Recording and updating of Groups Palettes FX Cues Cue Stacks Macros and Grids will be synchronised between the consoles Note however that changes to the Patch must be made on the master console and they will clear any programmer information on
213. atch View Vis View Selected you will have direct control of the positioning and orientation of the head using the encoder wheels and soft buttons Encoders X Y and F are used for X Y and Z positioning Pressing the soft buttons X Y and F increases the position by 1 metre on that axis Pressing SHIFT the soft button decreases the position by 1 metre on that axis Use fan to spread the position apart on the X Y or Z position wheels MagicQ User Manual 314 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk Ell MagicQ PC Demo Mode 3 time line SS puces ean s o po po po mee Frocttuss pa 26 sos po po po LIEONENCICONNEKTNE Frottss pe 536 eo po po bo Sel Heads Rot Y 0 00 head high ligh 4f50 Sel Heads fan ps Qe Sa 6 80 www chamsys co uk f 1200spotcirde 575wash tilt x 2 oO m GRAND TAPPA OE SEED RE Encoders B C and D are used for rotation around the X Y and Z axis Pressing the soft buttons B C and D rotates the heads by 90 degrees around that axis Pressing SHIFT the soft button rotates the heads by 90 degrees around that axis You can also enter values directly into the spreadsheet view of the Patch View Vis window You can change multiple values at a time by using SHIFT CTRL and the cursor keys Use THRU to enter a spread of values e g 5 THRU 5 to spread the X position between 5 and 5 metres MagicQ User Manual 315 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys
214. attributes or enter the attribute number from the tables below Intensity attributes 11 Intensity 0 Position attributes P1 Pos 46 Pos5 50 Pos2 47 Pos6 51 Pos3 48 Pan 4 Pos4 49 Tilt 5 Colour attributes C1 Cyan 16 Col4 27 Magenta 17 Col3 26 Yellow 18 Col2 7 Col mix 19 Coll 6 Beam attributes page 1 B1 Shutter 2 Rotate2 11 Iris 3 Rotate1 10 Focus 12 Gobo2 9 Zoom 13 Gobol 8 Beam attributes page 2 B2 Frost1 32 Rotate4 31 Frost2 33 Rotate3 30 FX1 14 Gobo4 29 FX2 15 Gobo3 28 Beam attributes page 3 B3 Macrol 22 FX8 39 Macro2 23 FX7 38 FX3 34 FX6 37 FX4 35 FX5 36 Beam attributes page 4 B4 MagicQ User Manual 214 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Cont 20 Cont8 45 Cont2 21 Cont 44 Cont3 40 Cont6 43 Cont4 41 Cont5 42 Beam attributes page 5 B5 Framel 52 Frame8 59 Frame2 53 Frame7 58 Frame3 54 Frame6 57 Frame4 55 Frame5 56 When making new personalities it is best to match the attributes as closely as possible to the attributes in the above table The Enc field determines whether the attribute is classed as Intensity Position Colour or Beam and which of the eight encoders it is assigned to Encoder A Encoder E Encoder B Encoder F Encoder C Encoder Y Encoder D Encoder X There are single pages for Intensity Colour and Position Beam h
215. atus bar When some channels are under control by a slave console then it shows SCC MagicQ User Manual 271 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 30 Remote control of MagicQ consoles MagicQ supports the remote control of other MagicQ consoles and PC systems Any MagicQ console or any MagicQ PC system can be controlled from any other MagicQ console or MagicQ PC system on the network This enables complete remote management of any system from any other system The remote system appears exactly as if it were running on the local system Remote Control must be enabled on the console that is to be controlled by default it is disabled It can be enabled in Setup View Settings Multiple Console settings Enable Remote Control 30 1 Remote control from MagicQ PC When you install MagicQ PC there is a Remote icon on the desktop and an application under the ChamSys menu that enable MagicQ PC to run in remote mode In remote mode MagicQ acts only as a remote control system it does not send transmit any ArtNet or any other network traffic except for the control of the remote MagicQ system When you start up MagicQ in remote mode it will scan for MagicQ consoles on the network and give a list of the available consoles to select from To stop remote control of a MagicQ console click on Quit Select yes to quit from MagicQ or no to return to the list of MagicQ consoles to control another console 30
216. audio inputs left and right Selecting the option Energy uses all frequency bands mixed together MagicQ User Manual 148 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 16 8 6 Audio level Audio parameter 1 Audio parameter 2 When Audio controls fader level is set to Yes then the settings Audio parameter 1 and Audio Parameter 2 can be set to control the response Audio P1 20 Normal direct trigger from level Audio P121 Decayed decays by Audio P2 each sample Audio P1 22 Pulse triggers at Audio Level Audio P2 is duration of pulse Audio P1 23 Pulse decay triggers at Audio Level decays by Audio P2 each sample Audio P1 24 Switch triggers to on off at Audio Level Audio P125 Slow increases decreases by Audio P2 each sample These parameters are ignored for the settings Audio Bumps Go and Audio sets BPM and Audio jumps to Cue Step 16 9 Step View Defaults only 16 9 1 Step controlled as a chase When set to Yes the step defaults to Chase timing When set to No the step defaults to Cue timing 16 9 2 X Step follows last When set to Yes the step executes after the completion of the previous step When set to No the step executes after the wait time specified in the Cue step 16 9 3 Step halts before executing When set to Yes the step halts and waits for the user to pres GO before executing the Cue step When set to No the step executes immediately after the previous step has completed
217. b browsers 19 12 7 Web Server Port The default web server port is 8080 19 12 8 Multi Windows This option is used to support multiple monitors on a MagicQ PC system or to connect a PC to a MagicQ console to add additional monitor capability When used on MagicQ PC to utilise multiple monitors set it to Multiwindows same PC Then go to Setup View System View Monitors to reload the monitor setup Reload Multi Win When used on a MagicQ console to add additional monitor capability to a MagicQ console then set it to MultieWindows remote and on the PC run the MagicQ MultiWindow PC application 19 12 9 Control net IP address For future use 19 12 10 Control net subnet address For future use 19 12 11 Wireless Mode Choice of wireless mode when using a USB to Wireless interface with the MagicQ Pro 2010 console Options are Disabled Managed or Ad Hoc When using an external wireless access point this option should be set to Disabled 19 12 12 Wireless IP address IP address when using a USB to Wireless interface with the MagicQ Pro 2010 console For ad hoc connection to an iPhone or iPod Touch use 192 168 1 20 19 12 13 Wireless subnet address Sub net address when using a USB to Wireless interface with the MagicQ Pro 2010 console For ad hoc connection to an iPhone or iPod Touch use 255 255 255 0 MagicQ User Manual 189 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 19 12 14 Wireless c
218. back for taking control of Cue Stacks The cross fade section contains a GO STOP FWD BCK buttons a cross fader and a master GO button The cross fade section controls the current playback selected with the S button MagicQ User Manual 34 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 3 8 Keyboard Keypad Select amp Confirm Windows MagicQ has a set of on additional on screen Windows that can be used to enter text select items and confirm actions You can choose whether you use the physical keyboard keypad to navigate around these items or whether you use the mouse touch To open the Keyboard Window at any time press SET SET To open the icon selector press SHIFT SET Confirm Windows are shown when you carry out important actions that may overwrite or delete show data You can confirm an action by pressing 1 on the keypad To cancel the action press 0 on the keypad 3 9 Common Actions The MagicQ utilises many common actions for carrying out programming functions All the actions use similar button presses Once you understand the action in one Window you will understand how it is done in another Window We strongly recommend you make yourself familiar with these actions they will save you valuable programming time 3 9 1 Items Actions in Windows can be carried out on individual items or on multiple items For actions on a single item use the cursor keys to move around the Window so that the cursor is over the
219. backs free All attributes in the palette are faded regardless of whether they are marked as instant or fading in the personality file If you apply a palette with time whilst in FAN mode then the times will be fanned across the different heads in the order that the heads have been selected See using palettes with time 17 11 Releasing Clearing with time Release times can be set on a per Cue Stack basis in the Cue Stack Options Default release times can be set up in the Cue Stack Defaults view including times for Cue Stacks with single Cues and Cue Stacks with multiple Cues MagicQ User Manual 154 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk It is also possible to release a Playback with time by typing a number and then pressing REL For example 3 REL releases the currently selected playback over 3 seconds In addition it is possible to clear the programmer and to enter and exit blind mode with times Press 5 CLEAR to clear the programmer over 5 seconds Press 10 BLIND to enter blind mode over 10 seconds 17 12 Busking Master It is possible in the Setup Window to set the manual cross fade fader to be a busking rate sub master from 0 seconds to 10 seconds The rate is shown in the bottom right of the Status Display The time is applied to selection of palettes and intensities When FAN mode is selected the change is applied in turn across each of the selected heads 17 13 Programmer Master It is possible to
220. be relayed to the programmer in the console MagicQ User Manual 327 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 41 6 6 Troubleshooting Problem WYSIWYG does not receive any data Solution Check that you have installed the MagicQ WYSIWYG driver on the WYSIWYG PC Check that the connection is connected in WYSIWYG device manager Check that you have configured the correct MagicQ universes to use WYSIWYG as their Vsualiser Problem WYSIWYG will not connect on the same PC as MagicQ Solution Check that you have configured the Visualiser to be WYSIWYG same PC in the Setup Window Problem WYSIWYG will not connect between two separate PCs Solution Check that the network ports on the two PCs are configured to the same IP subnet that they are enabled and that you have configured MagicQ to use the correct network port Setup View Settings IP address Problem WYSIWYG connects but no control of the lamps Solution Check the MagicQ Universe in WYSIWYG is bound to the MagicQ device 41 7 ESP Vision ESP vision supports ArtNet control Simply set the required universes to Out Type of ArtNet and enable them The Visualiser field should be set to None MagicQ User Manual 328 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 42 Multiple Monitors on MagicQ 42 1 MagicQ Pro and Pro 2010 consoles MagicQ Pro and Pro 2010 consoles support external monitors directly from the console rear panel Please see configurin
221. between the programmed data and a DMX address The programmed data for the head is maintained and the head can subsequently be patched to a new DMX address To P aH a head move the cursor to the first DMX field in View DMX view and press REMOVE or type u 5 16 Patching scrollers There are two ways to patch scrollers the first method is to patch the dimmer and scroller separately then the dimmer and scroller will operate independently Use the generic dimmer personality for the dimmer and the generic scroller personality for the scroller MagicQ has enhanced support for scrollers so that the colour scroll channel can be tied up with the dimmer channel in one head MagicQ User Manual 60 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd SPs uk CHOOSE DIMMER To use this support patch a Generic Scroller With Dim This will appear in the View Heads with the DMX address marked as virtual and any DMX address you specified when you patched it will be ignored Change to the View DMX view and specify in the appropriate DMX columns the DMX address of the dimmer and the scroller The Generic Scroller With Dim is set up as a Virtual personality i e the channels in the personality can be patched to any location on MagicQ unlike normal personalities where the channels are sequential from the DMX start address In the View DMX view the DMX address fields are used to specify the addresses for each channel in the virtual perso
222. but they may be moved onto higher Playbacks e g Playback wings on the same page This allows for examples two different shows created on a MQ100 to be merged onto a single MQ200 18 7 3 Merging different versions of the same show To merge two versions of a show together select Advanced and Merge Heads MagicQ will merge in Cues and Cue Stacks from the selected show file that are different to the Cues and Cue Stacks in the original show Note that for this to work you should ensure that the Cues and Cue Stacks that are different in the two show files have different names 18 7 4 USITT ASCII file import MagicQ supports import of dimmer patch group cue level and timing information from USITT ASCII files In the Patch Window View Chans Import USITT MagicQ does not currently support import of non dimmer parameters or more complex fixtures as this is manufacturer specific and not specified in the USITT ASCII format We will be happy to investigate whether we can add fixture import from the format of your console 18 8 Saving and Loading Settings You can save your favourite show settings to a file Settings include the options from the Setup Window the defaults from the Cue Stack Window and the Views that you have set up Once you have become familiar with the console it is a good idea to save your preferred settings to a file so that then when you start a new show you can load your settings in 18 9 File Manager You can org
223. by pressing the LOCK MASK soft button in the Record Options Window 9 2 2 Recording Intensity into a Palette To record intensity into a Palette hold SHIFT and press RECORD to open the Record Options Window as above and select the REC INT soft button 9 3 Naming Palettes A palette can be named when it is recorded by keying in the name before selecting the palette entry to record A palette can be named at any time by keying in the name pressing SET and selecting the palette entry If you are not using an external keyboard the select the palette entry press SET and enter the name on the on screen keyboard 9 4 Updating Palettes A palette can be updated simply be selecting some heads applying the palette and then re recording the palette Only the heads that are selected when you re record the palette will be modified in the palette other heads recorded in the palette will not be changed MagicQ User Manual 94 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk A complete palette can be edited using Include and Update Press Include and then select the Palette entry to include the entire palette into the programmer The console automatically selects all the heads that are in the Palette entry Modifications can then be made in the programmer and when complete pressing Update stores the changes back to the Palette 9 5 Copying and moving Palettes Palette entries can be moved and copied just like any other window item When a
224. cQ User Manual 290 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 34 Using MIDI SMPTE on MagicQ The MagicQ console and MagicQ PC software supports the use of MIDI SMPTE via the MagicQ MIDI SMPTE interface Note that the only MagicQ support is through the MagicQ MIDI SMPTE interface MIDI SMPTE directly through PC MIDI interfaces or through the phone rca interfaces on the consoles is not supported 34 1 MIDI Support MagicQ supports MIDI via the MagicQ MIDI SMPTE interface MagicQ can generate and receive MIDI commands MIDI is configured in the Setup Window View ee view MIDI Timecode tab SETUP on eae last soved 4t au ago 41 mins Mode Keypad Windows Cue Network Ports Multi Hardware Encoders Storage ane Console 34 1 1 MIDI Transmit To transmit a MIDI command first set the MIDI Out Type in the Setup Window You can choose between None Any chan and Requested Chan When set to Requested Chan the requested channel is configured in the MIDI Out Chan field When set to Any chan MagicQ will send out any MIDI commands specified in the Cue Stack macro field regardless of the channel specified When set to Requested Chan MagicQ will always change the MIDI commands before transmission to be sent on the requested MIDI channel MagicQ User Manual 291 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk MIDI commands are entered in decimal in the Macro field of the Cue Stac
225. cece ceseceseceseceseceseeeeeeeceeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaaecaecaeenaeenaeen 316 40 2 6 Removing visualiser heads and objects rennen 317 40 2 7 Changing the size of the room sees eene trs i ore enint en 317 40 2 8 Converting an existing MagicQ show file sees emen 317 40 2 9 Converting a MagicQ grid into a visualisation esee eene 317 40 3 Known Features and Limitations eese nennen eene enemies 318 403 MEBETSOA M 318 40 3 2 MagicQ with combined Visualiser App eene rennen 318 40 3 3 But re features c oed et b etn tege bp DRE EE EEA oe a d eel Dese Eve qase thao 318 41 Using MagicQ with other Visualisers eese enne ener enne nren nennen nnne 319 41 1 Connecting the Systems a d etre De tiende eee EEE PL EES ede be gt Roe dde eo 319 413 1 Using tworsepatate PCS Het e cler SO EH Er Phe ceret TD 319 41 1 2 Usinga Single PG ILI tet rte eterno veda dees ee eere ior eR MEER ERE ot 319 4113 Setting IP addresses ceci rete ter tre DE E Hei Lodel ed tasevasdeaibeassecdegese 319 Al2 Contieunn Magic m 321 41 2 1 Setting the IP address on MagicQ oo eeseesecssecesecsseceeeceseeeseeeeneeeaeeeaeesaeesaaecsaeesaeceaeenaeens 321 41 3 Enabling Universes for the Visualiser cesceseceseceseceseceseeeseeeeeeseeeecaeeeaeecaaecaaecaessaeeeaeenatens 322 zu Mec cc E 322 414 1 Running Capture eie eie ree t rettet e i
226. ced highlight lowlight mode all the attributes of the heads that are being controlled are set to the highlight values from the Personality If Single mode or Odd Even mode is in operation then only the subset of the selected heads 1s highlighted the rest are lowlighted Advanced Highlight Only is the same as above but no lowlighting occurs Advanced no reset is the same as Advanced highlight lowlight but is not cleared when you press CLEAR Press Highlight again to reset it 19 7 7 Fan Mode This setting determines the fan mode The options are Normal or No Toggle When set to Normal fan mode can be entered and exited by pressing the FAN button With No toggle fan mode is only entered when the FAN button is held down 19 7 8 Select Multiple Groups This setting enables multiple to be selected without pressing SHIFT To deselect all groups press the DESELECT ALL soft button in the Group Window The options are No Multiple in one Go and Multiple always Whens set to No only one Group can be selected at one time selecting a second group releases the first group Pressing SHIFT and multiple groups allows multiple groups to be selected Multiple in one Go allows multiple groups to be selected until a head attribute is changed then it starts with a new selection of groups 19 7 9 Recording to Palettes The options are Only selected heads and All heads in Progr
227. ch of the source heads is used in turn to copy data to the destination heads 10 12 Blind programming A show can be programmed without affecting the state of the outputs using blind programming mode In this mode the programmer will operate as normal with the current levels being displayed in the Prog Window but the contents of the programmer will not be output Enter and exit blind mode by pressing the BLIND button The button illuminates to indicate blind mode is active and BLIND is indicated in the status display Blind mode is also useful during playback for busking in FX For example you might wish to set up a FX on some moving heads using blind mode configuring the speed and size before you make it live You can enter and exit blind mode with times For example press 10 BLIND to enter blind mode over 10 seconds 10 13 Parking freezing channels It is possible to park freeze channels using the PARK soft button in the Group Window Press SHIFT PARK to unpark channels All attributes of selected heads that are in the programmer are parked unparked To make all the attributes of the selected heads active go to the Programmer Window and press SHIFT and ACTIVE MagicQ User Manual 106 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Parking persists over console shutdowns and resets Parking information is stored in the show file Parking forces HTP values to the parked value regardless of other playbacks In Grou
228. console Do not rub firmly on the metal or plastic surfaces this may cause the paint or lettering to be removed Gently use a damp cloth to clean the panels 1 4 Safety Information MagicQ User Manual 20 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Q Do not open the front rear or lower panels of the console unless you have electrical expertise The console contains components with voltages that may shock a Do not use the console if the power cables are damaged in any way a Repairs should only be undertaken by authorised service representatives a Ifliquids are spilt over the console then remove power immediately and seek advice from your authorised service representative MagicQ User Manual 21 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 2 Console Concepts A system diagram of the console is shown in the diagram below PROGRAMING WINDOWS PROGRAMMER OUTPUT 32 UNIVERSES ENGINE PLAYBACES 32 UNIVERSES standard 32 universes except MQ50 and MQ100 Expert 6 MQ Pro 18 2 1 Show Storage The console utilises a hard drive to store show data thus providing virtually unlimited show space many different shows can be stored on the console and recalled at the touch of a button Favourite shows personalities and FX patterns can be utilised in building new shows thus simplifying and speeding up show programming The console utilises USB memory sticks for transferring of show data to an
229. console keeps track of the currently selected heads to enable it to determine which heads to apply changes to The operator can select head individually or can use groups to recall configurations of heads that are used frequently In Hog Warp mode or when the Setup option Keypad always selects head is set you can select heads from the keypad for instance to select heads 1 through 4 1 THRU 4 ENTER In other modes you can select the heads using 1 THRU 4 4 8 2 Selecting heads from the Group Heads Window The console automatically generates a group for all the heads of a particular head type In addition new groups can easily be recorded The Group Window has two views VIEW GROUPS enables selection of heads using groups whilst VIEW HEADS enables individual selection of heads In VIEW GROUPS pressing the touch screen for a particular group selects all the heads associated with that group All other heads are deselected To select multiple groups press SHIFT and a group to toggle the group in and out of selection In VIEW HEADS individual heads are selected deselected by pressing the touch screen Use PG UP and PG DN to scroll through the heads 4 8 3 Recording a Group Select the heads you want in a group using keypad selection or in the VIEW HEADS view of the Group Window Change to the VIEW GROUPS view Press RECORD and then select the group you wish to record either by pressing the touch screen or by using the curso
230. console does an alert as well as showing the message The alert flashes the main screen intensity and the console lamps to try to get the operators attention Messages can be sent directly from the keyboard by entering text starting with a or a 29 Multi Console Programming MagicQ supports programming of one show from multiple MagicQ consoles MagicQ PC systems on a network Multi console programming is made up of two functions Firstly multi programming enables multiple consoles to access one show file held on the master console with all consoles being able to make changes to that show file MagicQ ensures that the slave consoles are synchronised to the master console show data Updates from any console are synchronised across the network Multi programming must not be used in the USA Consoles set up for use in the USA have this feature restricted Anyone using multi programming in the USA regardless of where they purchased MagicQ may be subject to legal action against them DO NOT use show file synchronisation in the USA Secondly selective channel control enables different consoles to select and control different channels on the master consoles outputs This allows any console on the network to take control of a set of channels in the lighting rig Selective channel control can be used independently of multi programming to allow multiple consoles to control a lighting rig without multi programming capability This could be used for ex
231. consoles ETI s Window select 4 ES en buttons LECTUS m mer Aa A E Touch screen amp encoders Head control Hm section Editor nbuttons Keypad section BEEN Playback section of yt I Hr THU HH a a F 4 MagicQ User Manual 30 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sa www chamsys co uk 3 7 1 Touch Screen amp Encoders There are 24 buttons and 8 rotary encoders placed around the touch screen The buttons are referred to as soft buttons since their function changes according to the active window on the touch screen The current function of a soft button is displayed on the touch screen adjacent to the button To select the function you can either press the screen or the soft button itself The function of the rotary encoders also changes according to the active window with the current function being displayed adjacent to the encoder At the top left and top right of the touch screen there are SHIFT and CTRL buttons Pressing theses buttons selects alternate functions for the soft buttons and encoders MagicQ User Manual 31 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 3 7 2 Windows The area in the centre of the screen is the windows section in which the various control windows are displayed There are two main types of windows boxes style windows which have large boxes such as the Group Window and spreadsheet style ed
232. control of the parameters used in the Marked Cue from other Cue Stacks even though the Cue is not yet executed Previously if other Cue Stacks were using these parameters and they had not yet been used in this Cue Stack then the other Cue Stacks would retain control until the Cue using the parameters was executed 13 7 The Cue Store and Cue Stack Store The console stores Cues and Cue Stacks in the Cue Store and Cue Stack Store respectively Since you can program Cues and Cue Stacks directly onto playbacks it is possible to program complete shows without referring to the Cue Store or the Cue Stack Store However sometimes you may wish to build up a library of Cues or Cue Stacks that are not assigned to playbacks You might then assign them to playbacks later e g during a technical rehearsal To record a Cue into the Cue Store simply set up the required look in the programmer open the Cue Store Window press RECORD and press an empty Cue in the Cue Store Window To record a Cue into a Cue Stack in the Cue Stack Store Window set up the look as above open the Cue Store Window press RECORD and press the Cue Stack you wish to record the Cue into If the Cue stack is empty then a new Cue Stack will be generated Otherwise the Cue will be added to the existing Cue Stack either at the specified Cue Id or at the end of the Cue Stack You can test programmed Cues and Cue Stacks in the Cue Store and Cue Stack Store by pressing the appropriate Cue or
233. could control the iris opening of a moving light by also setting the Fader controls LTP PCB chans option or you could control a Master Intensity fader When using this mode then Audio P1 and Audio P2 can be set to control the response Audio P1 20 Normal direct trigger from level Audio P121 Decayed decays by Audio P2 each sample Audio P1 22 Pulse triggers at Audio Level Audio P2 is duration of pulse Audio P1 23 Pulse decay triggers at Audio Level decays by Audio P2 each sample Audio P1 24 Switch triggers to on off at Audio Level MagicQ User Manual 204 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Audio P125 Slow increases decreases by Audio P2 each sample Audio bumps go causes the Cue Stack to bump to the next step every time a peak in the audio is detected on the specified channel This enables a Cue Stack to follow the beat of the music This is best used with the Cue Stack set to Cue Timing instead of Chase Timing Audio parameter 1 is used as a divider set it between 2 and 16 to divide the received beat frequency by a value between 2 and 16 times Audio sets BPM causes a Cue Stack set as a chase to automatically set the chase speed to the timing of the peaks on the specified channel The Cue Stack should be set to Chase Timing Audio jumps Cue Stack enables the level of the specified channel to determine which step in the Cue Stack is executed for example if you have a Cue Stack with 10 steps
234. current playback For a Cue Stack with a single Cue recorded on it then the Cue Stack window will not be of much interest In this case the Cue can be monitored and adjusted using the Cue Window For a Cue Stack with multiple Cues the Cue Stack window can be used to watch the progress of the Cue Stack The position within the Cue Stack can be changed along with the timing information You can make the Cue Stack window follow the Cue currently executing on the selected playback set the Display Current Cue option to YES in the Cue Stack Window 17 4 Modifying chase speed contrast To modify the speed or contrast of a Cue Stack that is running with Chase Timing press the SELECT button for the playback and then adjust the encoders in the Cue Stack Window The chase direction and chase type Normal Bounce Random can also be selected Pressing and holding the SELECT button of a Playback with a chase on it automatically opens the Cue Stack Window Use the top right encoder to modify individual attributes Position Beam Colour Intensity In and Intensity Out soft button selects the different attributes Once the speed of an attribute is changed it is no MagicQ User Manual 152 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk longer controlled by the master chase speed Modifying the attribute so that it is the same as the master chase speed brings it back under control of the master chase speed Modifications are retained even a
235. cut for use on the console keypad enter three dots and then the IP address no space 2 0 0 3 Entering just will ping the last tried IP address 28 3 Checking consoles on the network It is possible to check which MagicQ consoles are on the network by going to Setup View System View Status and selecting the Network tab VIEW SETTINGS VIEW WINGS VIEW MEDIA VIEW SAVE LOG CHANGE MONITORS TO USB SOFTWARE QUIT SETUP show bitmapfx2 20by20 sbk last saved 31 mins ago Play Mod iiid System Show Show Interfaces Comms USB Art Net Touch All Nina File Data Links Nodes Screens e Parameter Status T Safe Nomal Set Hostname mq 100 2 0 0 111 0003 7s show WedAug261 ichamsys121 2 9 200 87 0003 7s show captun Prog Mode Normal Scroll Window Live Set Mode MagicQ User Manual 258 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sua www chamsys co uk SETUP show capture sbk r Uni Status Out Type Out Uni In Type In Uni Visualiser Hottakeover Test Copy Enabled ArtNet At 0 Disabled Deabied E Niasklad fet hint fa C Net lat A C 28 4 Hot take over Hot take over allows the use of multiple consoles in case a console stops working Hot take over can be used in two ways depending on what you wish to happen when the main console becomes available again In Preferred mode only one of the consoles or MagicQ PCs on the network is designated
236. d HTP ZerooldFX Reloldchans Block FX Cue Only Macro Yes 0 00 0s je Ye ee e T mp p rr Display Scroll Current Cue Window The status field indicates the current status of the Cue in the Cue Stack If the Cue is active i e it is in the process of execution then the field indicates a complete and the entire cue is coloured red Each Cue within a Cue Stack has a Cue Id e g 1 0 This value is specific to the Cue Stack and is used for tying up Cues with a script in theatre style playback It is distinct from the Cue Number e g Q1 used to identify the Cue in the Cue Store Each Cue also has some text associated with it This text enables easy recognition of the contents of the Cue when the Cue Stack is played back This text is displayed above the main Playbacks It can also be displayed on the displays above the Wing Playbacks Soft button A can be used to select different views The different view modes show the columns in different orders View modes include Default Info Macro and Tracking 13 2 Chase timing When you record more than one Cue onto a Cue Stack the Cue Stack behaviour kicks in to control the transition from one Cue to another By default the Cue Stack operates like a chase i e each Cue is executed in turn with timing being handled by a Chase Speed for the whole Cue Stack MagicQ User Manual 115 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Chany www chamsys co uk The timing mode can be changed so that the Cues pla
237. d above zero the Intensity channels will affect the Output The highest level from this Cue Stack and any other Playbacks will determine the Output level for each channel This setting overrides the Advanced Setting All Channels controlled LTP This setting is similar to the Use HTP setting on some other consoles 16 5 Advanced 16 5 1 All chans controlled LTP When set to Yes all HTP channels under control of the Playback act as if they were LTP channels When the Playback with this Cue Stack is the latest activated and highest priority Playback then the Playback has complete control of all HTP channels regardless of whether they are active on other faders HTP channels that are active on higher priority Playbacks will be under control of the higher priority Playback and will ignore this setting HTP channels that are active on other Playbacks with the same priority but which were activated reasserted more recently than this Playback will be under control of the other Playbacks 16 5 2 Block FX from other playbacks When set to Yes then any channels controlled by this Playback block FX on those channels from other Playbacks Channels controlled by this Playback that have levels but no FX are not affected by FX on other Playbacks In effect an implicit zero FX is added to these channels to block the other Playbacks When set to No then channels controlled by this Playback that have levels but no FX are affected by FX on those chan
238. d from PCs and for back up purposes USB memory sticks are ideal for this function small and easily portable they can fit on a key ring or lanyard data for many different shows can be quickly and reliably transferred to them USB memory sticks are universally supported by PCs and other computers unlike custom memory cards traditionally used in lighting consoles Furthermore the Ethernet interface on the console can be utilised to access show files remotely over a network This for example enables lighting designers to connect their laptops directly to the console 2 2 Output channels The console supports up to thrity two DMX512 universes output over Ethernet This allows up to 16 384 channels of lighting to be controlled Interface boxes are utilised to convert from Ethernet to serial DM X512 as appropriate Lighting consoles are often limited in the number of DMX channels or the number of intelligent heads they can control independently typically 24 48 or 96 channels These channels typically correspond to the number of faders on the console Some consoles offer a patching facility to allow multiple DMX channels to be patched onto one fader but these DMX channels can then not be controlled independently The MagicQ console allows control of all DMX channels individually whilst utilising grouping and programming functions to enable control of multiple heads or dimmers together The console provides a library of personalities dat
239. d the In Uni for Universe 1 to 0 for Universe 2 to 1 and Universe 3 to 2 19 3 6 MQ50 Direct Console Outputs On MagicQ 50 consoles there are 4 direct DMX outputs To use these outputs set up Universes 1 to 4 to MQ Wing 19 3 7 MQ Consoles Direct Outputs On original MagicQ consoles MQ100 MQ200 MQ300 with twin DMX modules fitted in the rear panel then from software v1 3 3 0 these direct outputs default to outputting universes 1 to 4 from the console providing none of the Outputs are set to Cham USB If you wish to patch the direct outputs to other than the first 4 universes then set the required universes to Cham USB and select module Mod 1 Port 1 and Mod 1 Port 2 for the first interface and Mod 2 Port 1 and Mod 2 Port 2 for the second interface 19 3 8 MQ PRO Consoles Direct Outputs On MagicQ PRO consoles there are 4 direct DMX outputs on the rear panel From software v1 3 3 0 these direct outputs default to outputting universes 1 to 4 from the console providing none of the Outputs are set to MQ Direct or Cham USB If you wish to patch the direct outputs to other than the first 4 universes then set the required universes to MQ Direct and set Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 or Port 4 On software prior to v1 3 4 9 you will need to select CHAM USB and select module Mod 1 Port 1 Mod 1 Port 2 Mod 1 Port 3 and Mod 1 Port 4 In software v1 3 4 9 setting to MQ Direct is the same as setting to Cham USB
240. d to heads by selecting the heads in the appropriate order at any time you can invert the order using the Selection soft button in the Group Window Whenever a Palette is selected with a time the times are stored in the programmer This makes it very easy to build up Cues with times Simply select the Palettes you want with the required times and Record the Cue The Cue will playback with the required times 9 12 1 Using FAN You can set both delay and fade times in FAN mode by entering delay fade For example to move all your heads onto a position in turn type 2 2 before selecting the position Minimum fade times can be applied using the operator for example to perform a fade of between 2 and 6 seconds to a new position on a group of heads enter FAN mode type 2 4 and select the new position The first head will fade over 2 seconds whilst the last will fade over 6 seconds MagicQ User Manual 97 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk To use both minimum delay and fade times type for example 2 4 3 5 This gives delay times of between 2 and 6 and fade times of between 3 and 8 seconds 9 13 Making Palettes into Cue Stacks You can copy one or more palettes from the Position Colour or Beam windows to a Playback use SHIFT cursor keys to select multiple items This enables quick generation of Cue Stacks based on your palettes The Cue Stack will include one Cue for every Palette selected The Cues will contain va
241. device will request a passphrase The MQ encryption keeps the wireless open so anyone can connect to the wireless device but puts a password on the iPhone application so only people who know the password can control the console The MagicQ console will be hidden no connection shown until the correct password is entered on the iPhone Note that MagicQ versions 1 5 4 0 to 1 5 6 0 had problems with the Edimx interface 1 5 6 2 supports it ok but it is necessary to upgrade the kernel first to kernel version 3 9 2 0 Note that before updating the kernel you must set the Wireless mode to None 30 3 2 1 Making a connection to MagicQ e Turn on your remote device and select the required wireless network to connect to the network name SSID of your access point or of your Edimax USB interface e Check the WiFi settings for the remote device to ensure that it has automatically received a correct IP address If it has not automatically received an IP address then enter a static IP address manually see above sections for how to configure the IP address Subnet Mask and Router IP e On the iPhone iPad click on Settings select WiFi and then click the gt to the right of the required network e Once you have a wireless connection with correct IP address start the MagicQ remote application e In the remote application go to the connection tab You should see a list of all the available MagicQ consoles Select the required console so that it
242. dified in the Intensity Position Colour and Beam Windows The Window supports selecting of heads individually or by group Pressing and holding the Group button causes the Group Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Intensity This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Intensity Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Intensity Window is used to set the level of dimmer channels and the intensity attributes of intelligent heads The Window supports two views Programmer and Preset Pressing and holding the Intensity button causes the Intensity Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released FX was ATTR This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the FX window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened In older versions of software this button was named the ATTR button and opened the Attribute Window The Attribute Window can still be opened using the CTRL and ATTR The FX window enables FX to be applied to the currently selected heads If no heads are currently selected then the Group Window is opened to enable selection of heads The Attribute Window is used to set the attributes of intelligent heads using the Attribute Bank method as opposed to using the Attribute Type Intensity Pos Colour Beam method With attribute banks each attribute can
243. dividual dimmer levels at the same time However at any time you can set the levels of the intensities of the currently selected heads using the keypad To set the selected heads to 70 key in 70 This method also supports standard key entry syntax such as and for relative changes You can change which heads are selected at any time through the Group Window see Selecting Heads In the Intensities Window you can change which heads are selected by moving the cursor to a fader and pressing ENTER You can also select deselect heads by holding down SHIFT and selecting faders When faders are shown with a thick stem they are selected Holding SHIFT and pressing the fader toggles the selection of the fader In the Intensities Window press SELECT ACTIVE or SHIFT and SELECT NON ZERO to select the heads you have modified this can be useful for creating groups 6 5 Utilising gel colours in the Intensity Window Programming time is significantly improved by making use of the gel colour facility built into the console Assigning a colour to each dimmer is quick and easy and then enables the programming of scenes based on colours In the Intensity Window the dimmers can be selected on a per colour basis thus easily enabling the operator to identify the colour and position of the lamps to program into each scene First ensure that each Dimmer has been given a name and a gel colour This can be carried out either from the Patch Window or fro
244. dow was not open then the window is opened The Beam Window is used to set the colour attributes of intelligent heads using the Attribute Type method The Beam Window also displays and allows selection of Palette entries from the Beam Palette Pressing and holding the Beam button causes the Beam Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Next Head Used to select the next head from the currently selected heads See selecting individual heads Prev Head Used to select the previous head from the currently selected heads See selecting individual heads Locate Pressing LOCATE locates all the selected heads Fan Used to enter Fan Mode Fan mode enables adjustments to a number of selected heads to be applied in a non linear fashion Pressing and holding Fan enables Fan mode to be entered temporarily Make your changes and then release the Fan button Highlight MagicQ User Manual 343 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk Used to enter Highlight Mode Highlight mode enables adjustments to individual heads from the currently selected heads The individual head is highlighted whilst the others are made less bright Single Used to enter Single Mode Single mode enables adjustments to individual heads from the currently selected heads Similar to Highlight Mode but the head under adjustment is not highlighted All Used to return control to all selected heads Press
245. ds should be unique to the moving light If you make a new personality for a fixture based on one of the standard ones then you should make sure you change the mode to a name of your choice The Short Name and Mode are used in display windows where there is not much space You should ensure that these names are as short as possible and do not contain any spaces preferably less than 8 characters The Head Description contains details of the type of head and is used for informational purposes The WYSIWYG and Capture patch information names indicate the names of this fixture in WYSIWYG and Capture to enable patch transfer from these visualisers 23 2 2 Params Moving Head can be Mirror or Yoke press ENTER to swap Max Pan and Max Tilt are used in visualisation and by the FLIP function Num Of Chans sets the number of channels for the head DMX Min DMX Max and DMX Offset specify constraints on where the Head can be patched within the 512 DMX channels 23 2 3 Options Colour Mix controls the colour mixing channels the options are CMY RGB HSI RGBA and RGBAW MagicQ User Manual 212 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The default configuration is for heads that do CMY i e the when the Cyan channel is at 100 and the Magenta and Yellow channels are at 0 you get Cyan If your head uses RGB colour mixing i e the above combination gives Red then set the CMY Invert option HSI is not used at the moment
246. e When you press MAKE FX then select the Make FX apply to any attribute option MagicQ User Manual 90 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk From software v1 4 0 3 waveform FX supports any number of attributes It is recommended that only a small number of attributes are stored in Waveform FX e g just position colour mix or intensity For more complex FX store the FX in the FX Window and save to a FX Library Note that EX in software prior to v1 4 0 3 only three attributes were supported in Waveform FX the first three attributes programmed in the chase were used in the FX Use Record Remove to remove unwanted attributes from entire Cue Stack 6 3 Editing user FX MagicQ includes a EX Editor which can be used to edit the Waveform FX Note that changing the Waveform FX makes a permanent change to the FX on the MagicQ system including all FX of that type used in the current show and on any new shows made on that console If users wish to edit the inbuilt Waveform FX then they should use Save As to save the FX as a different FX name before editing 8 4 Palette FX Itis now possible to make Waveform FX that use Palette values rather than absolute values This enables FX to be built up quickly from existing Palettes The FX are updated each time the Palette is changed 8 5 FX using base colour It is now possible to create FX that use any chosen colour rather than just primary colours a new example Colpulse wve
247. e Playback PB then when MagicQ starts PB1 is activated This can then be used to activate other playbacks and potentially run a complete show without user intervention When set to Last active then after a power up or a reset MagicQ will reactivate Cue Stacks that were running when the console was powered down or reset MagicQ will start the Cue Stacks from the step that they were previously on Note that all the options except for the PB1 option are only available on MagicQ consoles or on MagicQ PC systems with MagicQ Wings or Interfaces attached 19 11 14 Run in Execute Window This setting starts the console MagicQ PC up in the Execute Window MagicQ User Manual 187 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 19 12 Network Settings 19 12 1 IP Address The console stores the TCP IP address and subnet mask for the network interface The addresses are stored as part of the console configuration rather than as part of the show data Thus erasing show data does not affect their configuration For communicating with an Art Net convertor the TCP IP address must be set to a number in the range 2 x x x e g 2 9 200 1 and the Sub net address must be set to 255 0 0 0 Note that on the MagicQ PC the TCP IP address of the PC system is configured through Windows rather than through the MagicQ PC software However the MagicQ PC software must also be told the TCP IP address so that it knows which network interface to use
248. e and also any FX that are tracking from previous Cues in the Cue Stack When the fader is at 100 then the FX is the size that was recorded in the Cue lowering the fader reduces the size until there is No size No FX at 0 Fader controls size affects FX on any attribute When set to Yes then the other Fader controls settings other than Fader controls speed settings should generally be set to No MagicQ User Manual 138 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 16 1 6 Fader controls FX speed When this setting is set to Yes the fader controls the speed of any FX that are running in the Cue Stack this includes FX from the current Cue and also any FX that are tracking from previous Cues in the Cue Stack When the fader is at 100 then the FX runs at the speed that was recorded in the Cue lowering the fader reduces the speed until it stops at 0 Fader controls speed affects FX on any attribute When set to Yes then the other Fader controls settings other than Fader controls size settings should generally be set to No 16 1 7 Fader controls manual crossfades When set to Yes then the other Fader controls settings should generally be set to No 16 2 Buttons 16 2 1 Flash activates stack When set to Yes pressing the Flash button activates the Cue Stack and sets the level of the Playback to 100 When set to No pressing the Flash button sets the level of the Playback to 100 but does n
249. e being controlled Highlighting of the controlled head s makes programming of positions much easier In Advanced highlight lowlight mode all the attributes of the heads that are being controlled are set to the highlight values from the Personality If Single mode or Odd Even mode is in operation then only the subset of the selected heads is highlighted the rest are lowlighted Advanced Highlight Only is the same as above but no lowlighting occurs Advanced no reset is the same as Advanced highlight lowlight but is not cleared when you press CLEAR Press Highlight again to reset it When in Highlight mode the LED on the HIGHLIGHT button is lit pressing the HIGHLIGHT button again or the ALL button returns the head control area back to the default mode 7 13 Lowlight function A lowlight function is accessed by pressing SHIFT and HIGHLIGHT When active the selected head is lowlighted to the value in the personality This allows each head in the current selection to be temporarily lowlighted to try to find a particular head without making a massive change to the current lighting state Highlight mode must be set to Advanced highlight lowlight 7 14 Reselecting heads using Palettes and Intensities Active Palette and Intensity To reselect all heads using a particular palette hold ALL and press the palette entry Hold ALL Green Or use the keypad Hold ALL COL 5 ENTER To reselect all heads at
250. e button associated with the top left encoder to lock unlock the console The console will not accept any button presses while it is unlocked A more advanced password system will be included in future software releases 19 25 Button test mode The console supports a button test mode for checking suspect buttons and faders To enter button test mode press the two SHIFT buttons either side of the touch screen together i e hold one down and press the other In button test mode the buttons do not have their usual function instead when pressed a message will be displayed in the status display indicating which button has been pressed Faders and encoders also can be tested in a similar way In button test mode the Window shows a map of all the buttons encoders and faders When a button is pressed the map turns green to indicate that the button has been pressed and released o k For encoders it turns green when the encoder has been turned both ways For faders it turns green when the fader has been lowered to 0 and raised to full To test LEDs enter button test mode and then press CTRL 1 and CTRL 2 to test the different colour LEDs Press CTRL 0 to go back to normal state of the LEDs Button test mode is exited in the same way that it is entered On MagicQ PC to enter button test mode type test on the keyboard then hold SHIFT and CONTOL Hold SHIFT and press CONTROL to exit button test mode 19 26 Power Supply Protection Some version
251. e code receive and time code transmit Cue Stacks can be set up to run Cues according to timecode signals received from External sources via SMPTE or MIDI timecode They can also be set up to use an Internal timecode source which is activated from 0 0 0 when the Cue Stack is activated 35 1 Timecode Receive MagicQ supports receipt of both linear time code and MIDI time code SETUP on gnam live 530pm thursday T Mode Keypad Windows Cue etwork Ports Multi Hardware Encoders Storage ie Console MIDI Timecode Enable timecode receive in the Timecode In Type field and choose between SMPTE and MIDI Timecode The time code type can be set to EBU 25 SMPTE30 NTSC30 and Film 24 When a ChamSys MIDI SMPTE module is fitted the Status Display will show the current time code being received from the module The time code continue frames is the number of frames to continue internal regeneration of the time code signal when itislost After this time the time code will be frozen until a signal is received again Chris PC Sun Jul 13 11 28 54 2008 Ver 1 3 6 5 Build 32 Page 3 Add TC lt 0 00 11 12 gt MagicQ User Manual 298 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChawSys www chamsys co uk Time code can be triggered from an external SMPTE time code source using the optional ChamSys MIDI SMPTE module or it can run from the internal time code source To control a Cue Stack using external time code set the External time code option in
252. e contents of the programmer The Window supports three different views channel levels timings and FX Pressing and holding the Programmer button causes the Programmer Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Outputs This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Outputs Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Outputs Window enables the user to view the output channels in many different ways including level data intensities movement plan and colour display It also allows input channels to be viewed In View Heads the outputs are viewed by head enabling the operator to easily see the levels of different parameters In View Chans there are two further options View Int and View DMX View Int shows all the intensity levels of patched channels and their current level in percentage i e a traditional theatre output screen View DMX shows the actual data being transmitted out or received into the console In View DMX patched channels are shown in Red HTP or yellow LTP Page Up and Page Down can be used to find the required channels alternatively use the Universe soft button to jump back or forwards an entire universe In View Plan a plan of the lighting rig can be created and then used to easily identify the levels of different lamps according to their position in the lighting rig Pressing and holding the Outputs button
253. e ea za ass s iot ao o aaa ps se e7 241 240 239 238 237 1405 406 407 561 560 joo s9 fes f242 243 244 245 246 410 409 408 Eel 251 250 249 248 247 411 412 413 571 570 569 las o4 252 1253 1254 255 1256 6 415 1414 IAE i di ddginadadd Ic y no R EBREREREREBEEE gt 3230303 E 133355 3314 33333 132344 ee EEPEE PEELE PREBEEERE EERE RERPERRERE EEBERERE x Bb 172 EZ MagicQ User Manual 219 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk It is possible to swap the repeated elements of a multiple element head around using the Swap field in the View Heads view This is very useful if for instance a LED batten has been rigged upside down When a personality containing multiple elements is patched a different head number will be allocated to each element This enables each individual element to be controlled from the keypad and from the grid views For heads that consist of a general element and repeated elements the general element will be allocated the base head number and the repeated elements will have increasing head numbers from the base element Morphing between different multi element personalities is not currently supported 23 10 Loading new personalities into MagicQ To update MagicQ with all the latest personalities download the latest personalities files heads all and icons all from the ChamSys web site www chamsys co uk Copy the heads all fi
254. e edet evel ene 296 34 1 8 MIDI Show Control Command Format esee ener 297 35 HiME COMES UPPOM M 298 354 Timecode Receive sce isis cider ieia eee iE E ia Po koe FL ee Rd Lassus olde Ede etd 298 MagicQ User Manual 16 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 35 1 1 Emabling Disabling Timecode esee rennen nennen 299 35 L2 Using External timecode senenin neetna ereere ER Peru Eri aR ioa pode iuge tud 300 35 1 3 Timecode Simulator niic n peer eee ene Ee EE a Lea ere pe ED Rap E EE eee eR HE Reo e 300 35 2 Learn Timing eene ient eren tse o ra Ee Led pe EL eR rey ue Hp He ede e dee evene 300 35 3 Dm code generation no nU Ia etel Rente ep eod rote epe oy pego HH RU Hoan EN 301 35 4 imecode re transmit oie e ete rt Dir ee RED bee atop cete a Do eh PUER Dg bu tup ela aig eb bd 301 36 Synchronisation with Audio playback Winamp eese 302 36 1 Winamp personality 5e teeth eret dt events tee Lk aet exeo ied R N EER EIERENS 302 36 2 Separate PC running Winarmnp 5 uicit entente etis bdo er as ete edo tbe eder Hae E ee nae erret eee ae 303 36 3 MagicQ and Winamp on the same PC eeceeceseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaeecseecaaecaecaecnaeenaeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 303 36 4 Winamp Programming senice ier ie nte buta A se i sp Fes i etie Ea ENEA ci rea eee 303 36 5 Winamp Settings MEE 304 37 Using the remote
255. e eed y Rage reped 51 45 Adding In EX edocet i Gere rete beer ERE RE ep bu t ert iur EEE ra ee ones 51 LONE eol EE 51 4 17 Recording a Cue Stack Chase or Theatre Stack sess 52 4 18 Selecting and recording complete window layouts eese enne enn 53 4 19 Saving Your SHOW o 53 4 20 Playing Back Your Show iiie ee ee rre eire HUE SERE EER ENE E 53 3 CIUS 54 5 1 Patching on the MagiCcQ eene ursa ctete rh ursi es bete Era sro espera penso eg ee ee Fa ebd adeb Use 54 5 2 Getting started With patching 4 iiia ite entes eec dee e e terere det s EEE pese ipa e dre inae Pe etr ene 54 5 3 Testing channels 1 Iren ate EL nde eee p op a ees Debe eed Le dee LESE eee ERE Pedo 54 5 4 Patcbing a head or dimmi essei erre ra buie epo aai p ed UP Eee Ed 55 5 5 Head names nd n rbers iier rece rie Ite eE E EE HEU EERE E E 56 5 5 1 Head Names EE 56 5 5 2 Head NUMDETS EE ieee Er nE sE OEE aA OE EEE E ON EEE OS 56 36 Gelnam and number 22 eodeni beri oe ripeto aE bebes ip NEEE E EENDE a ades etus 57 5 7 Generating auto grOUpS 2 uerit etie tere tbe era trag etbo ex Prep ee edere Eee a eoe vec eleva di de iiai 57 5 8 huhrlinisl ans nale 57 5 9 Imvertin and S Wapplig ccrte rete rh tente iet ere ee ria sean ES Eee de Reed o e
256. e experienced some problems with the signal level transmitted from low cost PC MIDI dongles operating at 3 3V From July 08 our interfaces have been improved to boost the signal received from these devices 34 1 7 MIDI Show Control MagicQ supports MIDI show control when connected to a ChamSys 2010 MIDI SMPTE Interface MagicQ responds to the GO STOP RESUME and TIMED GO commands The effect of the MIDI show control commands is determined by the MIDI show control type This is configured in Setup Window View Settings MIDI Timecode Show Control Type The options are Normal Cue Stack 1 and Playback 1 This is useful for integration with e g Strand consoles which only have 1 Cue Stack and which do not allow the show Control commands to be configured When set to Normal then MIDI show control commands trigger Cues in the Cue Store or Cue Stacks in the Cue Stack Store MSC commands with two parameters Q number Q list will trigger Cue Stacks in the Cue Stack Store MSC commands with one parameter Q number will trigger Cues in the Cue Store When set to Cue Stack 1 or Playback 1 then the commands will affect Cue Stack 1 or the Cue Stack stored on Playback 1 respectively MagicQ ignores the times in the TIMED GO command and uses the programmed times GO and RESUME have the same effect ChamSys MIDI SMPTE interfaces manufactured prior to October 2009 must be upgraded to latest firmware by ChamSys to support MIDI show control messages Plea
257. e is executed in turn with timing being handled by a Chase Speed for the whole Cue Stack PRELOAD CHASE TIMING CUE TIMING RENUM CUE IDS REMOVE CUE CUE STACK CS1 pars chase Cueid Cue text Wait Halt Delay Fade Chase Chase Position Speed 1 80s Chase Chase PE Next Attrib N iu ae Display Scroll Current Cue Window In Theatre Modes the default timing is Cue Timing individual Fade times on each step with GO stepping from one step to the next CUE STACK CS34 mac250 cues Cueid Cue text il Halt Delay Fade Cue Next cue Timing 0 00s 3 00s The timing mode can be changed so that the Cues play back in a theatre style using the GO STOP buttons Select the VIEW OPTIONS view and press the CUE TIMING and CHASE TIMING soft buttons to modify the timing mode CONFIRM Set all Cue Stack steps to individual cue timing MagicQ User Manual 52 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 4 18 Selecting and recording complete window layouts The console enables complete window layouts to be recorded and selected The console incorporates several standard window layouts including Palettes and Cue Stacks To select a Window layout hold down CTRL and select one of the top soft buttons To record a Window layout first close all windows SHIFT CLOSE Then open the required Windows and size them appropriately Press RECORD and then
258. e of the heads Clicking on a blank space at the bottom edge of the grid will select the whole column regardless of the current state of selection of the heads Clicking on a blank space at the right edge of the grid will deselect the whole row regardless of the current state of selection of the heads Clicking within the grid on a blank space that is adjacent to a head will have the same effect as above but only for all the heads directly adjacent to each other As it is possible that the blank space that is clicked on may have more than one adjacent head the priority is left top right bottom For other plans where head numbers are packed into the grid with no blank spaces e g LED arrays it is still possible to use this method but the grid must have blank spaces around the edges of the grid MagicQ User Manual 111 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 12 Editing Cues 12 1 Including Cues into the Programmer A programmed Cue can be included back into the Programmer so that the information can be used to program further Cues When a Cue is included all the level timing and FX information is loaded The only exception is if the Programmer already contains FX information for the heads in this case the FX information from the Cue is ignored Cues can be included directly from Playbacks the current Cue in the Cue Stack is included Cues can also be included from the Cue Stack Cue and Cue Store Windows
259. e on that console for each of the patched universes If the universes are not enabled on the console then the console will send the DMX data directly to the MagicVis using its own MagicVis protocol This enables Magic Vis to be used on a system where the outputs are not enabled Note that even when MagicVis says waiting connection or waiting sync it will visualise according to received ArtNet ArtNet is sent separately to the connection for show data transfer It is also possible to load a show file directly into MagicQ Vis from the File Load Show menu in this mode there is no sync MagicVis just looks at the incoming ArtNet data for rendering the beams but does not sync the patch This is useful when converting your show to work with another lighting rig 40 2 Using MagicVis The demos folder LOAD SHOW and select demos includes demo show files with fixtures patched into the visualiser MagicVis currently provides five views Perspective Top Side Front and Free The view can be changed either by clicking View in the MagicVis window or in MagicQ in the Patch window using Soft Button E In Free view you can rotate the room by moving the mouse whilst holding down the left and right mouse buttons The lighting level of the room can be changed by clicking on View and selecting Dark MagicQ User Manual 312 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 40 2 1 Patching fixtures in the Visualiser When you patch t
260. e option is enabled in Setup View Settings Keypad Keypad Syntax Theatre Patch When this option is set to yes the keypad can be used to patch a dimmer or moving light directly to a DMX address and head number e g 10 2 5 will patch head number 10 to Universe 2 channel 5 5 26 LED virtual dimmer channels MagicQ enables LED and other fixtures with colour mixing but no dimmer channel to have an associated virtual dimmer This allows the LED fixtures to be used as simple RGB fixtures with a dimmer This development does not affect the internal pixel mapping Bitmap FX which already has a virtual dimmer To add a virtual dimmer channel for a LED fixture i e a fixture without a dimmer simply patch a generic dimmer and set the head number to the same head number as the LED fixture The generic dimmer will then be shown with a v after the head number to indicate the association with the LED fixture The LED fixture will then appear with a dimmer in the Intensity Group Outputs and Programmer windows Note that virtual dimmers will only work if there are only 2 fixtures with the same head number if there are more than 2 fixtures with the same head number then each head will be treated as a separate head When MagicQ assigns a virtual dimmer in this way in the Cue Engine it takes the value of the RGB CMY attributes from the playbacks and programmer and then scales these values according to the value of the virtual dimme
261. e pressing the S button for the Playback 12 4 Making changes to multiple Cues Changes can be made to multiple Cues using the REC MERGE and REC REMOVE record options to specify a change in the programmer which is then merged with or removed from a number of Cues There are some short cuts for selecting RECORD MERGE and RECORD REMOVE Hold and press REC for REC MERGE Hold and press REC for REC REMOVE 12 4 1 Changes to multiple Cues using keypad MagicQ supports record merging record removing to a range of cues using the keypad for example to merge into Cue ids 2 through 4 RECORD MERGE 2 THRU 4 S This function also works for the shortcuts e g holding S and then typing a range of Cue Ids before pressing RECORD Both the THRU and the and operators are supported 12 4 Changes to multiple Cues using Cue Stack window To remove all the pan and tilt information for a group of heads from all the Cues in a Cue Stack on a particular playback Clear the programmer Select the heads and modify the pan and tilt attributes Open the Cue Stack Window and select the playback with the Cue Stack to modify In the Cue Window use cursor keys to select all the Cues PG LEFT HOME SHIFT END MagicQ User Manual 113 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Press SHIFT RECORD and select REC REMOVE record option Press ENTER 12 5 Editing using Update MagicQ supports a function for easy updatin
262. e set on encoder Y 0 is snap whilst 100 is complete crossfade The soft button can be used to tap to time the speed of the FX The FX Size can be modified on the encoder wheel D from 096 to 10096 Pressing SHIFT and turning the encoder wheel allows the size to be oversized up to 800 Pressing the soft button swaps between the chosen size and zero size This allows an FX to be temporarily taken out 8 1 2 FX base values By default FX are added to the current channel values therefore it is important to ensure that the channel values are set correctly For example to run a circle in the centre of a MAC500s pan and tilt range it is necessary to set both pan and tilt to the centre position 128 before adding the FX Changing the channel values changes the point around which the FX is centred Similarly in order to run a 096 to 10096 dimmer chase on HTP channels the channels should be set to 5096 intensity and the FX added Channel values and FX values do not have to be recorded onto the same playback One playback can be used to set the centre position of the FX and another to control the FX itself The centre position can itself be part of a multi Cue Cue Stack or a chase thus a particular FX can itself be moved around If you wish to have a particular playback move heads to a particular position without a FX then record both the position and a zero size FX on the playback Recording a zero FX ensures any other playback running an FX for
263. ec time Make Cue Stack default all pages 3 lt BLIND gt Change to Page 1 PLAYBACK lt Default Cue Stack gt e Loading Values into the Programmer Default all attribs Default position attribs Default colour attribs Default beam attribs Default intensity attribs Make active all atttribs Make active pos attribs Make active colour attribs Make active beam attribs Make active int attribs Load Cue from Playback Load Cue ID 2 Load Cue at 40 Load Cue at current level Load entire state of Cue Stack Load selected heads Load from DMX Snapshot output cues MagicQ User Manual Select heads LOCATE Select heads lt POS LOCATE gt Select heads lt COLOR LOCATE gt Select heads lt BEAM LOCATE gt Select heads lt INT LOCATE gt Select heads lt SET gt Select heads lt POS SET gt Select heads lt COLOR SET gt Select heads lt BEAM SET gt Select heads lt INT SET gt INC lt S gt 2 INC lt S gt 40 INC lt S gt INC lt S gt ALL INCLUDE lt SHIFT INC gt lt Selected Only gt lt S gt Select heads lt CTRL INC gt ENTER PROG lt Snapshot gt 333 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd La e Removing Values from the Programmer Clear all values Clear with 3 sec time Clear selected heads Clear to O vals Remove attrib Remove attrib Remove position attribs Remove colour attribs Remove beam attribs Remove intensity attribs Remove all attribs e Recording Cues Record Cue
264. ecode Show data sync None Show data sync IP 2 9 200 52 In manual mode when MagicQ determines that it should take over a universe it will load a snapshot of the last data from that universe into its Programmer Thus the universe will be completely controlled from within the Programmer and not from the Playbacks The operator can then set up the playbacks as they wish and then clear the programmer to change to this new look Clearing the programmer with time enables the operator to specify a fade time to the new look In automatic mode MagicQ loads the snapshot of the last data from that universe into the Programmer and then automatically clears the programmer using the hot takeover fade time MagicQ User Manual 261 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Since both options use the programm standby console ded that the programmer is kept clear on the 28 4 4 Swapping control between multiple consoles In Equal Mode a console that is set to Hot take over can be forced to control all universes using the TAKE CONTROL soft button This will force an immediate change of control from one console to the other Similarly control can be given to another console using the RELEASE CONTROL soft button This will force the other console to take control and depending on the hot take over options will enable a controlled fade to the new console outputs VIEW SETTINGS VIEW SET ZON
265. ed a setting for External Monitor Setting USB Touch and USB Touch type 19 5 4 1 External Montor 2 Set to 1024x768 to use the external monitor on a Pro system Set to None when not using the external monitor 19 5 4 2 USB Touch Determines which monitor on the MagicQ system has a touch screen connected a USB port On a Pro console with a USB touch screen connected to the 2 Monitor port select Monitor 2 For a duplicate monitor for the on board screen select Monitor 1 duplicate On a MQ50 select Monitor 1 19 5 4 3 USB Touch Type Enables the touch screen to be specified normal or X Y swapped MagicQ User Manual 172 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 6 Mode amp Security settings The Settings View of the Setup Window uses tabs to group similar settings together SETUP Eom sbk Keypad Windows Cue Network Ports MIDI Multi Hardware Encoders Storage iik Timecode Console 19 6 1 Product Type The product type determines the Product that is running The options are currently MQ100 and MQ50 Use MQ100 for all products except MQ50 19 6 2 Country The country setting determines the Country Currently the country setting only has the options UK or US for all countries except US select UK MagicQ restricts some options including multi console programming on the US version 19 6 3 Time Zone This is used for astronomical scheduled events Enter the time zone from 23 to 23
266. ed for heads with attributes that change their function depending on the value of another attribute such as FX parameters that depend on the particular FX chosen The range is only valid when the dependent channel Dep Chan is set to the range specified in the dependent value Dep val 23 4 1 Importing Ranges Ranges can be imported from a csv format file using the Import Ranges button The data should be organised in the csv file in the same column order as the fields in MagicQ lt chan gt lt name gt lt min gt lt max gt lt auto pal gt lt icon gt lt dep chan gt lt dep val 23 4 2 Capturing Ranges To capture the minimum and maximum values from the programmer you must first insert a new range and select the channel number you are interested in Then using the Group Position Colour Beam windows in the usual way set the minimum value for the attribute Back in the Ranges View move the cursor to the minimum field and then press the Capture Range soft button In a similar way set up the maximum value in the programmer move to the maximum field in the Ranges View and then press the Capture Range soft button 23 4 3 Attribute Test The Attr test mode enables the range to be tested on any patched heads of this type In this mode moving up down outputs the Range to all patched heads of this type The value output is the middle point between the minimum and maximum except when the cursor is placed in the minimum or maxim
267. ed palette by selecting one of the Colour Beam or Position Windows From within the window select a palette entry That palette entry will be applied to all the selected heads The first 10 palette entries displayed in each Palette window are automatically available on the buttons above the touch screen For playing back shows this enables the palettes to be bumped using real buttons rather than the touch screen You an use the CURSOR UP and CURSOR down buttons to adjust which palette entries are at the top of the window hence which ones are available on the buttons In the Beam Window the first 4 soft buttons above the touch screen are used for selecting the Beam Page 1 to 4 the rest of the soft buttons are used for selecting the palette entries PAGE PAGE PAGE B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 VIEW 3 open gobo cone fan hat triple dec beam fibroid PALETTE BEAM Mac250 46 47 48 49 50 sime he e eles R ejes EH pies 5 eje EM sles EG les E ejes open gobo lf Rotate2 dec beam fibroid md holes pys cir mag blue E Bjerg sje su Beis Eg ejesi eleife sles sies B ae B md holes fibroid dec beam tiple shake fan hat bar shake cone shake gobo sci gt gt gobo ser lt lt shake shake shake shake iis B21 B as a B23 d B B24 ed B ems B B27 B B28 B B28 Rotate Rev Spin Spin Stop Fwd Hi fic e H Sow B p 2EW s s330M sjef ejes fA ejm ejm alesse sje e E e ruxxd sr SIEHE IE Sc c Focus ud i REGE bab Gobo2 shake a m Bjess amp
268. ees 139 16 2 S EO REED T M m 139 16 2 1 Flash activates stack sccsssscsssssssnsssssrsscsssssensscssrsssssrsscessessnensoossssesncesuacesonecsssessseanees 139 T6 2 2 lash releases stack erre He eate te eL e UR Pre e REC EET DRE Eg 139 16 2 3 Flash always SWapS nucon teer tse naien geo p eR rev tete ep PH aedi eve e 139 16 2 4 Plashacts as Go Back aon ie eti nie eo t ote y tee i d Haee otra 140 16 2 5 Flash acts as Flash Go sess enne nennen entente tnnt nn nennen 140 16 2 6 Plast toggleS erede Deere sete sescndsretsih Sbpustdees idet eveniet epp tu de pole NE 140 16 2 7 JPlash acts like fader iiie et ro tt tbt ater san ccgzasagiatenssscdedanaadvaenaad 140 16 2 8 Gogjumps eut of loop ecce eere e Eres br be ETE ehe RUE eei LRL Hd ETE nia 141 16 2 9 lt Go exits loop altet end siete tie o e tege ete ee ite et yep aea ge tege et eee da tens 141 16 2 10 GO SLOP Starts ice eres tip ton fete orte ooo oec c eb op bad re de UR ERR ap fepe rte bue Me Pto EUM et dove deo vein 141 16 2 11 SLOP SWAPS AT teen 141 16 3 Se endene ee en Ere AS E EAEN QT 141 16 3 1 Cue Stack is an Intensity Master seessssseseeseessesessesscsseesesstercrseessesesssseserseesossesssereesseeseso 141 16 3 2 Cue stacks a Size Master uie ie tope pe aea LEE EER HL EE FER HEC a a 142 16 3 3 Cue Stack is a Speed Master eeeesesssseeseeseeseeee senate teen ntn 142 Im
269. eete eren teer i REE 192 19 13 11 Remote trigger dctiOD iuu nier nk ottenere ni EI On NER OE EEEREN 192 191312 Audio Mmp t sessast bereiten na i aree Fede dus vertente Deren eder ei 192 19 13 13 Audio Min Max Level iidem repe eser e EC debe aee RUe esL PEE ca ie 192 19 13 14 Parallel Port Address a n cci ee tt Eee ir e he oa Ee ee EE Een I n 193 19 13 15 Monitor Settings eeeeseeeieesiseseseseete senis thee thee ienaiiino 193 19 14 MIDI Timecode Settings eese enne E rennen en eren enne 193 19 14 1 TIMECODE frame type ee rere ett riter euge epe e ting eec edge pese Dye depo de beg Uode 193 19 14 2 Timecode Comtinue frames er n eret bees tI eI Fete s eL REL P eer eee TREE ER ER Up ReS 193 19 14 3 Timecode jump detect frames esses nnne 193 19 14 4 AME COME in type soricina esee e bi t Re RE ERE ED EE ELE NEU RE R 193 19 14 5 Timecode generation RO 193 19 14 6 MIDI In Type MIDI In Channel esee 193 19 14 7 MIDI Out Type Midi Out Channel seen enne 194 19 14 8 MIDI Show Control Type iret reis ride tret tte ee steep be redo beige r Rod aa 194 19 15 Multiple Console Settings etie ette tired arenae E ERR e be etr eig erui esee EE bee gard 194 19 16 Hardware Setttigs oorr itn reete butt eae eth ode i te eor ette Ebo Ea Golde 194 19 16 1 Level above 0 to activate LTP eee cecccccesceesneceeeeceeeeecsaeeeeaaeceeaeeceeeeeseaeeseaaeeneaeee
270. ege er a bun eae een fepe dee nain 145 165 4 Playback priority nie eee epe Lotta Ee epe EE Fr PR HEC FEE eH bn eae Ie LEE Ec pha 145 1655 Move when dark etse a gen Fee ed Eye nea eH ER A OO Fee aE RR Enn 145 16 5 6 Recalculate state on jumps seeseeesseeeeeeeneennennnnnne ener ennt eren eren eren neen trennen 145 16 5 7 Stomp other playbacks eeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeene nennen entren ener en eren ini 145 16 5 8 External umecode ect terreat tes ees vedcnsssduatecuensevoastsue rosae ed pese tus ARP Re pee e Ne ONU EE 146 16 5 9 Send playback state to other consoles esee 146 16 6 Chase CRTUUETERRR cmm 146 16 6 1 Skip frst UMCS isere e aene etel eredi ete ep eod otro ty Dee d Reese o tcm 146 IPM EE mr 146 Io MED cc EE 146 MagicQ User Manual 9 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 16 6 44 DIPECHO Misi sees Sa eee ttes te tenet den sent beta e sa E dienes 146 IM JU cdag c 147 10 6 6 Number of repeats nier o pee e Lene Ee LR a eb erre ED ape E cedo e deed HE Ecco De 147 16 6 7 unn 147 16 7 Chase Vite ER 147 16 7 1 HTP in fade HTP out fade Position fade Colour fade Beam fade ss 147 16 7 2 HTP in delay HTP out delay Position delay Colour delay Beam delay 147 16 8 DC 147 16 8 1 Audio controls f
271. el with the playbacks and the head control buttons This enables you to play back shows or program looks without requiring a full screen If you have the capability to run multiple monitors many lap tops allow a separate monitor output as well as the lap top screen then extend your desktop across multiple monitors with MagicQ PC on one and WYSIWYG on the other 41 6 4 Auto Patch MagicQ supports the WYSIWYG Auto Patch protocol Selecting Auto Patch on WYSIWYG transfers the patch to MagicQ To transfer a new show to MagicQ first erase the show in MagicQ and then select Auto Patch Send Patch in WYSIWYG MagicQ identifies the fixtures in WYSIWYG and maps the names to the MagicQ fixtures using a mapping table If MagicQ can not identify a fixture it will not be able to auto patch a fixture The mapping between MagicQ personality and WYSIWYG fixture is specified in the MagicQ personality Not all the different fixture modes are supported by both WYSIWYG and MagicQ When performing an Auto Patch MagicQ will report any fixtures that it can not match To fix a personality edit the head in the Head Editor setting the correct WYSIWYG name If the WYSIWYG name is empty then pressing ENTER will fill in with the name received from WYSIWYG for the last mismatch 41 6 5 Auto Focus MagicQ supports the WYSIWYG Auto Focus protocol If you turn Auto Focus on for the ChamSys port in the Device Manager on WYSIWYG then changes made in WYSIWYG design mode will
272. eld on the next Cue is set then the Cue Stack waits for Go to be pressed before starting the next Cue otherwise it executes the next Cue using its Fade and Delay time The picture below shows 3 Cues each set to follow the previous Cue but with Halt set to Yes CUE STACK C935 Wait Times Status Cueid Cuetex Wait Hat Delay Fade Cue Next cue Timing Track Zeroold HTP Zen Front spots Follow eh If the Wait time on the next Cue is set to Follow then the Cue Stack will wait until the first Cue has completely finished fading i e all channels have reached their final values before starting the next Cue If the Wait time on the next Cue is set to a time then the Cue Stack waits that time before executing the next Cue This time is completely independent of the first cue the first cue may still be in Delay or Fade and will continue until the Fade completes If you enter a wait time in the Wait field MagicQ automatically changes the Halt field to No so that the Cue executes after the specified Wait time The picture below shows Cues 2 00 and 3 00 automatically running 1 second and 2 seconds after Cue 1 00 CUE STACK C935 E Status Cueid Cue text Wait Halt ned Fade Cue Next cue Tiina Track Zero old HTP Zen 1 00 Front spots Follow 1 00s 320 Front spots Next a e m pue Fr aw r ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 13 3 2 The Halt field This field determines whether Magic
273. elds in spread sheets This is different to some other consoles which primarily use the keypad for selection of heads On MagicQ it is possible to select heads directly form the keypad at any time by entering the head numbers terminated by 7 3 1 Selecting Heads on the keypad using To select heads 1 to 4 key in 1 THRU 4 To select heads 1 to 4 and heads 8 to 11 key in 1 THRU 4 8 THRU 11 To select heads 1 through 12 but not head 7 key in 1 THRU 12 7 To select all heads of a certain type without specifying the entire range use MagicQ User Manual 73 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 1 THRU This selects all heads of the same type as head 1 starting at head no 1 in ascending head order until it reaches a head that is not of the same type At any time you can select all of the heads of a particular type regardless of head no by selecting one of the heads and then using SHIFT ALL 1 SHIFT ALL Note that on MagicQ PC you can use gt to indicate THRU 0 deselects all heads To sub select an element of a multi element head use the dot operator for example head 1 element 2 1 290 7 3 2 Selecting heads on the keypad without It is also possible to set the Setup Option Keypad always select head In this mode entering numbers on the keypad always selects heads however to perform other operations like editing fields in the spread sheet views you need to press the SET button f
274. ell in the grid cells can be blank This enables the lights to be positioned in the grid in a corresponding way to how the heads are positioned on the rig To remove a head number from a cell press REMOVE and select the cell Move and Copy can also be used to quickly move or copy one or more cells MagicQ User Manual 110 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Now press View Colours to view the outputs of your rig When a head has a level greater than 0 the box starts to get filled until at 100 it is completely filled The colour of the lamp is also indicated Pressing SHIFT VIEW HD INT shows both the head number and the current intensity 11 5 2 X Selection of heads in Outputs Plan View Heads can be selected from the plan view and then their parameters changed by pressing and holding the Group Position Colour or Beam buttons When the programmer setting Highlight defaults beam and colour is enabled any heads selected will have their dimmer set to 100 in open white When the Outputs Plan view is used as a stage plan it is possible to select multiple heads in a row or column by clicking on blank spaces in the grid Clicking on a blank space at the top edge of the grid will select deselect heads in the whole column depending on the current selection state of the heads Clicking on a blank space on the left edge of the grid will select deselect heads in the whole row depending on the current selection stat
275. els Ranges can be set up at any time regardless of whether heads of the type have been patched and the range data becomes immediately available If the head has been patched then you can capture the minimum and maximum value fields from the programmer Ranges can be added using the Insert soft button and deleted using the Remove Button press twice to Remove The range type field is used to specify the function of this range to MagicQ so that it can recognise the features of the head The range types are particularly used in visualisation For each Range you specify the channel number starting at 1 a name for the range e g Blue and the minimum and maximum DMX values for the range The minimum and maximum values can be the same value if required The Auto Palette field indicates whether the range can be used to build Palettes When a Head has no Palettes specified for a particular channel then it can try and generate them from the range information Up to 20 Auto Palettes are supported per channel Set this value to 1 for a specific channel function such as a Cone Gobo on a gobo wheel or a larger value for a graded parameter such as the rotate speed on a Gobo Rotate channel The sum of all the Auto Palette fields for a particular channel should not exceed 20 The Icon field is the icon displayed in the relevant Windows and soft buttons The Dep Chan and Dep Val fields enable ranges to depend on other ranges This enables ranges to be defin
276. en This enables the console to continue to be used should there be a problem with the on board screen Monitor output 1 always duplicates the on board screen Monitor output 2 can be used for showing extra windows To enable windows to be moved onto Monitor output 2 enable it in Setup View System View Monitors by setting the resolution on Monitor 2 to 1024x768 or 800x600 Before turning on the 2 monitor output ensure that the monitor card upgrade has been carried out this requires the fitting of a monitor card inside the rear panel Note that the presence of the 2 VGA connector does NOT indicate that that the monitor card has been fitted It is recommended to turn off the 2 monitor output when a monitor is not connected as this will improve performance slightly Monitor 3 and Monitor 4 are not used 19 5 3 Monitor settings on MagicQ PC When using multiple monitors on a PC first enable the monitors in Windows by putting the Windows desktop onto all the monitors Then start MagicQ PC and in Setup View System View Monitors press the RELOAD MULTIW soft button MagicQ should detect all the monitors attached up to a total of 4 In Setup View Settings Network set MultiWindows to MultiWindows same PC On PC systems touch monitors are set up under Windows not under MagicQ 19 5 4 Monitor Settings prior to v1 4 3 0 Prior to v1 4 3 0 the External monitor settings for Pro systems were configured in Setup View Settings Ports This includ
277. en amp Encoders eeceeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseecsaecaaecsaeceseessecsseeseesseeseeeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaaeenaes 31 3 7 2 bL T 32 3 7 3 lupini 33 3 7 4 Editor Buttons iiir ertet pe Ebr HEP CHE ede eI ER HL EE PLE EP REESE eed 34 3 7 5 Pay ACK qe C 34 3 8 Keyboard Keypad Select amp Confirm Windows eese ene 35 3 9 Commoti ACEORS esee eese ee cites pensa etu edens isin FUSE RE PPM eO EPA EEUU CHR EE PE FREU PEE UR OAE RUE S rian eee Po ad UNES 35 3 9 ure T 35 3 9 2 Setting the value of items iret iniecit oed tr rege E Prae Ue eL e Ee eoe LEER PL de EU pel ed 35 3 9 3 Naming OMS E M a 36 3 9 4 UO SUITE e a E a EE E se desstegalesbi nueawebes 36 3 9 5 Copying eS Tm 36 3 9 6 REMO VINE LEMS m 36 3 9 7 Recordina TSTMS qe 37 3 9 8 Actions on Playbacks aeui ten eei rere csveuseateravensineons FER e i e Poe eta Deco 37 A ueni 38 4 1 Startins up the Console onto hc oe DRE eer essei ed Eae be POE ee co cb apo dep fea tees 38 4 2 Calibrating the Touch Screen esee nennen rennen rennen eren entente nenne 38 4 3 Starine a NEW SHOW D 39 4 4 Enabling Console Outputs tete eret ee ai eee an E aR K aE k 40 4 4 1 Using Direct DMX Outputs doniteticeete Ite t eL Geri aiaia aaia 40 4 4 2 Using ArtNet and ArtNet to DMX interfaces eene nennen 41 4 5 Connecting a MagicQ
278. en then the window is opened The Macro Window allows the user to record and playback keyboard macros thus enabling them to customise buttons to perform actions unique to their own style of operation The Macro Window is currently under testing and is therefore not available It will be made available in one of the next software releases Pressing and holding the Macro button causes the Macro Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Help This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Help Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Help Window enables the manual to be viewed on line on the console The Help Window supports hyperlinks searching and quick links Hyperlinks are shown underlined press the text on the touch screen to jump to the hyperlink To find information on a particular button on the console press and hold down the Help button and then press the button you wish to get help on On the MagicQ PC version press the BUTTON HELP soft button and then press the required button Pressing and holding the Help button causes the Help Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Page MagicQ User Manual 340 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sua www chamsys co uk This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Page Window the active window If the window was not open then the w
279. en nennen nennen rennen 183 19 9 13 Force Window on External Monitor 2 eene enne 183 19 9 14 Platt Intensity type coitu se t terere e Re EE ete n REP OG EU EUCH REGERE En 183 19 9 15 Message uno d 184 1910 Cue Storage Settm ps 2 05 oes feast ieee tet eerte esas eterni Lara gen e PU Porra e eve RUIT Fa stu eei eva AiR 184 19 10 1 Delete Cues when delete Cue Stacks eeseeeeeeeenen rennen 184 19 10 2 Delete Cue Stacks on remove Playbacks eere 184 19 10 3 Use first free Cues Stacks Palettes sse 184 19 10 4 Copy mode linked unlinked eese eene nen rennen 184 19 10 5 Derive settings from previous Cue essere enne enemies 184 19 10 6 Hide Cue Store Ids Qids esses eee 185 19 10 7 Expand palettes to same head type sese ene ener 185 19 10 8 Heads moved aside are unpatched eese rennen 185 19 11 Playback Setuim SS E 185 19 11 1 Grand Master PUnCt 0s EUER 185 19 11 2 NUM ERIS dieto 185 19 11 3 Manual Cross Eade Master eire etit ette set ei Leo nigrae nEs SiR RE 186 19 11 4 Split Cross fade PBO PB 10 prie ntepetites teet epe seisein cet lupis a oed ux caa 186 19 11 5 Crossfade always controls PB1 eee neee nei ece rnt erbe ke derent 186 19 11 6 Stomp Play Backs se o inc nere tute P ee is e T e oa i EE RR E EAE E na 186 19 11 7 Intensity HTP F
280. ensity buttons and pressing LOCATE Only attributes of that type are located and placed in the Programmer 7 7 Modifying Attributes Intelligent heads have several different attributes typically including pan and tilt colour gobo and iris When the MagicQ lighting console patches an intelligent head it maps the head parameters to standard attributes to enable easy access of the features of the head The MagicQ lighting console supports two ways to modify attributes either using attribute types or using attribute banks Both methods can be used interchangeably to program a show 7 7 1 Using Attribute Types Attribute types is a powerful way of categorising attributes Attributes are categorised into four types Intensity Position Colour and Beam On the MagicQ there is a window for each of these attribute types Select the required heads then open the required window MagicQ User Manual 75 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The window enables the control of all the attributes of that attribute type using the eight rotary encoders In the Beam Window there are more than eight attributes to be controlled these are accessed using multiple pages of encoders by pressing the PAGE 1 PAGE 2 PAGE 3 or PAGE 4 soft buttons or pressing the BEAM button again For indexed attributes such as colour wheels and gobo wheels the button associated with each encoder can be used to bump the attribute value to the next ra
281. er should be raised to 10046 before activating or releasing When the fader is at 10096 then the Cue Stack has no effect As the fader is lowered then all the channels under control have their intensity reduced From software version 1 4 4 4 it is possible to have multiple Intensity Masters that control the same channel which work proportionately MagicQ User Manual 141 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Normally when this setting is set to Yes the settings Cue Stack is a Size Master and Cue stack is a Speed Master should be set to No When this setting is set to No then the Cue Stack behaves normally 16 3 2 Cue Stack is a Size Master When this setting is set to Yes then the Cue Stack behaves as an FX Size Master The Cue Stack normal Cue execution behaviour is disabled The channels stored in the first Cue are used to determine which channels are under control of the Intensity Master The actual levels of the channels in the first Cue is not important only that the Channels have some level in the Cue In order for the Intensity Master to be activated the Go button must be pressed To release the Intensity Master the Playback must be selected and the REL button pressed The Button settings Flash activates Stack and Flash releases Stack are ignored In order to avoid sudden changes in output level the fader should be raised to 10046 before activating or releasing When the fader is at 100 then FX size
282. er can make changes during playback just like when they were programming the show In Safe mode making changes is not allowed and backups are turned off to any possible interference with the running of the show 19 3 Output Settings The console supports up to 32 universes in and out which can be configured to use different protocols Outputs must be configured and enabled before the console will output data To set up outputs open the Setup Window and select the VIEW DMX I O view MagicQ User Manual 164 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sua www chamsys co uk MagicQ software originally supported only 6 universes A processor upgrade in MagicQ consoles enabled support for 12 universes then 18 and most recently 32 To change between 6 12 18 and 32 universe operation please see Configuring number of universes 19 3 1 Configuring Output Universes For each of the 18 universes the output and input protocol can be selected in the Out Type and In Type fields respectively Press ENTER or double click to change to the next protocol type SETUP show demo shw Universe Status Out Type Out Uni In Type In Uni Visualiser Hot takeover 1 Art 0 ArtNet Eo C ant ime i EN ETT 1 Mie able adl Kiana Mz D The possible protocols are None No protocol Art Net Art Net and Art Net II protocol over Ethernet Pathport Pathport protocol over Ethernet Show Net Show net protocol over Ethernet ACN Streaming DMX over Etherne
283. er is treated as a different head on MagicQ with a different head number To patch a media server each of the layers must be patched in turn on asscending DMX addresses On MagicQ it is possible to patch the media server in one go by using the Choose DIM MEDIA soft button This gives a choice of the media servers in their most common configurations Patching using this method patches all the required layers of different types and configures the media server settings for one media server all in one action If your media server is not in the list of media servers then you will need to patch the layers individually as you would for a moving light MagicQ includes demo show files for each of the most common media servers try loading these demo shows to see examples of the patch required Each media server should have uniqure head numbers 26 3 Configuring a Media Server In the Setup Window Media View configure the media server parameters If you have patched using the Choose Media Server method above then the parameters should mostly be set up correctly for you It is only neccesary to enter the IP address of the media server MagicQ User Manual 243 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk IP address Version Lihdno Numlayers Live preview 2 9 200 76 0 1 1 8 zaez orewsx n s s enses nung Nene o po oo fa hono fe oo fo oo fea ano Nee Jo 5 o Dabs _ Mx o o o peses Mae o pese
284. ere is not a master password To reset the password on a console or MagicQ PC system that is locked please contact your local dealer Protection can be added so that users cannot operate any Execute buttons until they enter a password A Key Lock Special Function button can be placed in the Execute Window When pressed the Execute Window is locked and can only be unlocked by entering the password If no password has been set then entering a blank password will unlock the window 22 3 Faders The Execute Window now supports faders as well as buttons Cue Stacks and Cues can be represented as faders To set a Cue Stack or Cue as a fader move the cursor to the item and press SOFT button E to toggle between button and fader A F appears in the corner of the item when it is set to be a fader Faders are only shown in Execute View not in Design View Faders can be twice as tall as buttons When setting faders in the Execute Window leave the box below the fader free The fader will automatically be adjusted in the Excute View to fill the two boxes 22 4 Buttons By default buttons in the Execute Window are set to toggle their function on and off each time the button is pressed It is possible to set a button in the Execute Window that is controlling a Cue or a Cue Stack to momentary rather than toggling Move the cursor to the required item and use Soft button E to set the item type Button FI Buttons can also be set as solo buttons
285. erses MagicQ supports some simple options for testing complete output universes including sending all 0 s sending all 1 s and several additional test patterns Tests can be performed on individual universes using by selecting the test in the Test field of the Setup Window DMX I O view When any of the universes are in test mode a warning flashes in the Status Display MagicQ User Manual 168 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 3 14 Copying Output Universes MagicQ supports copying of entire universes to multiple outputs this may be useful where you wish to duplicate an output universe onto different outputs of an Art Net box or you want to set MagicQ wing outputs to be the same as Ethernet outputs Select the universe you wish to copy in the Copy field of the Setup Window DMX I O View Select the Universe to copy e g Uni 1 for the first Universe You can enter the universe number Enter 0 to turn off copying 19 4 Wing Settings ChamSys manufacture the following wings that connect to PCs or consoles via USB Product No of Playback nos No of No of wings supported Playbacks DMX per PC console Mini Wing 10 Main 1 10 1 1 PC Wing 10 Main 1 10 2 1 Maxi Wing 10 Main 1 10 4 1 Extra Wing 24 1 Wing Playbacks None 8 Playback Wing 24 1 Wing Playbacks None 8 Execute Wing 48 2 Wing Playbacks None 4 Note that the Mini Wing PC Wing and Maxi Wing c
286. ersonality in the Head Editor e To restart the look in the programmer press BLIND twice e f you find yourself constantly changing Windows to perform an action try sizing the required Windows and recording it as a View e After you have cleared the programmer you can reselect the heads that were selected when you pressed CLEAR by pressing the ALL button e To remove attributes from an entire Cue Stack e g position information activate those attributes in the programmer and use the RECORD REMOVE option e To add attributes into an entire Cue Stack e g position information activate those attributes in the programmer and use the RECORD MERGE option e To Record Merge the current contents of the programmer into the current Cue on a Cue Stack press and hold the Select button of the playback and press RECORD e Use the Lamp On All and Lamp Off All soft buttons in the Macro Window to make turning on off an entire lighting rig easier e On the MagicQ PC use F1 to F10 to toggle Playbacks PB1 to PB10 on off Use ESC to turn all Playbacks off MagicQ User Manual 331 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Lay 44 MagicQ Short Cuts e Saving Loading New show Save show Load show Save settings Load settings Save partial show Merge in show Load archived backup Export patch list Reset console e Patching Select head for patching Patch 1 head next free address Patch 5 heads next free address Patch 1 head at un
287. es Stack modes this determines whether the test is latching or momentary In Playback mode the upper 3 rows of playbacks control playbacks in the usual way Note that as they do not have a fader the value the attributes that would normally be controlled by the fader generally Intensity values will automatically default to 100 The Playbacks can still have times in the normal way so that Intensity values can be faded in and out 19 4 4 Connecting MagicQ consoles together It is possible to connect multiple MagicQ consoles together in order to control a larger number of Universes The master MagicQ console then outputs some channels which act like playbacks for the slave consoles On the slave consoles one of the wings is configured as DMX In and select a range of channels for it to respond to Note that the universe that contains these channels must have input enabled in the View DMX I O view This causes the playbacks on the wing to be controlled by up to 24 DMX channels received into the console The level of the playback is determined from the received channel 19 4 5 Using an external DMX console for extra playbacks It is possible to use an external DMX console to gain extra playback controls when using MagicQ consoles This is not a replacement for a MagicQ Playback wing with its legending and Cue Stack controls however it may be useful in certain circumstances On MagicQ PC this option is only available to control Playbacks P
288. es should be preloaded before the next Cue is executed If the Position Beam or Colour values are different from the current values then the new values are crossfaded with a time of 3 seconds This option is similar to putting a Mark Cue before every Cue in a Cue Stack 16 5 6 Recalculate state on jumps This option specifies how MagicQ calculates the Cue State when playing back a Cue Stack When set to Yes MagicQ recalculates the Cue State whenever a jump is made in the Cue Stack The Output of a particular Cue always appears the same regardless of which Cue was executed preciously MagicQ recalculates the Output as if the Cue Stack had been played back from the first Cue to this Cue by pressing the GO button When set to No MagicQ calculates the Cue State based on the Cues that it has actually executed when jumping to a new Cue only the Cues that have been previously executed will make up the Output In tracking modes this setting defaults to Yes In non tracking modes this setting defaults to No 16 5 7 Stomp other playbacks MagicQ User Manual 145 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Stomping enables Playbacks that have been completely overridden by other Playbacks to be automatically released This option is only relevant when the Setup Playback setting Stomp playbacks is set When Stomp Playbacks is set to No then this setting is ignored When this setting is set to Yes then this Playback is
289. esponds to attribute group with the biggest combined delay and fade time 16 8 Audio 16 8 1 Audio controls fader level When set to Yes the level of the playback is controlled by the received audio level on the chosen The level of the real fader is ignored The effect on the Playback is determined by the Cue Stack Fader settings The Cue Stack must be active for the audio to take effect When this setting is set to Yes the settings Audio Bumps Go and Audio sets BPM should be set to No The setting can be used in conjunction with the setting Audio jumps to Cue Step MagicQ User Manual 147 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The audio level audio parameter 1 and audio parameter 2 settings can be used to fine tune how the received audio affects the fader level 16 8 2 Audio bumps Go When set to Yes the Cue Stack bumps to the next step every time a peak in the audio is detected on the specified channel This enables a Cue Stack to follow the beat of the music This is best used with the Cue Stack set to Cue Timing instead of Chase Timing The Cue Stack must be active for the audio to take effect When this setting is set to Yes the settings Audio controls fader level Audio sets BPM and Audio jumps to Cue Step should be set to No Audio parameter 1 is used as a divider set it between 2 and 16 to divide the received beat frequency by a value between 2 and 16 times A
290. ettings Set the option for Send to Applications on this PC to YES With the loopback IP and Send to Applications set correctly you should be able to control your mredia server and use the live previews and thumbnails 26 7 2 Using Microsoft Loopback Adapter If you still experience problems using the loopback IP address method described above you will need to install the Microsoft Loopback Adapter For more information on installing the Microsoft Loopback Adapter view their Knowledge Base article at http support microsoft com kb 839013 26 8 Troubleshooting If you do not have control of the Media Server at all check e The MagicQ is connected to Media server via LAN or network crossover cable MagicQ User Manual 247 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk There are no firewalls on this will restrict access between the Media Server and MagicQ MagicQ is enabled to output Art Net Setup View DMX I O The media server is configured to the correct DMX universe and address MagicQ is patched with the correct Catalyst personalities at the correct addresses 26 9 Notes for specific Media Severs 26 9 1 Using MagicQ with Arkaos There are several personalities in MagicQ to choose from for Arkaos For ArKaos 3 5 use the arkaos vj35 personality For ArKaos 3 6 you have four to choose from To use ArKaos in standard mode either use arkaos vj36 or arkaos vj36hw if you are using hardware accelerated graphics To use ArKaos
291. etwork as Art Net timecode When this option is set to LTC or MIDI then timecode in type should be set to None 19 14 6 MIDI In Type MIDI In Channel MagicQ User Manual 193 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The options are None Any Channel or Requested Channel When set to Any Channel MagicQ will process MIDI notes received on any MIDI channel When set to Requested Channel then MagicQ will only process MIDI notes recived on the MIDI In Channel that is set This option can be used at the same time as timecode in timecode generation 19 14 7 MIDI Out Type Midi Out Channel The options are None Any Channel or Requested Channel When set to Any Channel MagicQ will send MIDI notes on the channel specified in the macro field in the Cue Stack When set to Requested Channel then MagicQ will always send the MIDI notes on the MIDI Out Channel that is set reagardless of the channel specified in macro field in the Cue Stack This option can be used at the same time as timecode in timecode generation 19 14 8 MIDI Show Control Type The options are Normal Cue Stack 1 Playback 1 This determines which Cue Stack is triggered when MIDI Show Control MSC commands are received In normal mode MSC commands with two parameters Q number Q list will trigger Cue Stacks in the Cue Stack Store MSC commands with one parameters Q number will trigger Cues in the Cue Store 19 15 Multiple Console Settings See multiple
292. ew Geter alleys Em 222 ESPRIT 223 24 5 Palette EX aisi erae dee E e eo te gedp eee Pe hg ethe PUT eb n c speaker A ee Ede euo 223 Controlling LED fixtures using MagicQ sss rennen nennen nennen nenne 224 25 1 Patching LED on Ma gicQ eo tete tetra pe re o fase rt eere Ore Pto EUR doe ee ER 224 25 2 Using the Grid view in the Outputs Window eese ener rennen 224 25 2 1 Using standard groups and FX on the grid essere 226 PSRUMECIBuEucGKC E et 227 25 3 1 Using Bitmaps Movies Text and FX on Grids essere 227 25 3 2 Media PEOEIL ir ciae eon RD d eu ten Te Pe hepa EU E EUER ke Reda 228 25 3 3 Inbuilt Bitmaps iere tenete eade ete Deben elena o te te aee Le Dae Eee ep ede ae Lee EE 229 25 3 44 serPicture Suppott i aree reete ttem eiii ehe erea eoe e ee Peers e en aaee peaa iaiia 229 25 53 Gobo Colour Libraries i eerte ett trino ieu eerte eig e etc eel ave es Leve depo de Lag osa 229 25 3 0 Movie SUpDpOtt i n GERE g e era dived etae De pu LEE Eae aee pa Ce UR PHAR EUER EET a 229 25 3 7 Lave deed Support lesen miei eere ete ie rater eue Te obe bead doe Rte eese 230 233 8 BI paro eeu ee E 232 25 5 9 Textdisplay modes sie ttete tese te RUE eara trie severe sess SE E eR d TGE SE E AEEA i 232 25 3 10 Manipulating bitmaps and text seen rennen 233 25 3 11 MagicQ Pixel Mapping FX Be
293. ew name Please note that over use of the auto increment feature will lead to high disk usage It is important to clear out old versions once the show is finished To delete all old revisions of the current show file go to File Manager and press SHIFT and REMOVE OLD REVS This will remove all revisions of the current show file that have a lower revision number It will not remove the current show file 18 4 Backing up to an external system Itis a good idea to back up your show to an external system This ensures that should the unexpected happen you can transfer your show to another console In a touring environment where the console is being moved every day we recommend you back up your show to an external system before moving the console You can either backup by transferring files over ethernet or via USB memory stick To backup to USB memory stick first insert a USB memory stick into the USB slot in the front or the back of the console then press the BACKUP TO USB soft button in the Setup Window The USB memory stick should be formatted for a standard Windows file system VFAT they generally come like this This enables the memory stick to be used in both the console and standard PCs running Windows 18 5 Loading Shows You can load a show that you have previously saved using the LOAD SHOW soft button in the Setup Window If you load a new show it will erase any existing programming The console will prompt you for confirmation
294. f software the Pixel Mapping FX engine was not supported and therefore older shows may have been patched with the Generic Bitmap or Generic Bitmapfx rather than the Generic Bitmap FX2 personality Itis possible to morph the old shows to the new personality 25 3 12 Mixing between pixel mapping layers The interaction of the different pixel mapping layers can be controlled using the Col Mix attribute in the colour page The types are Add Subtract Max Min Exclusive Or EOR Priority higher layer numbers have priority Priority gt 0 priority if level greater than 0 Masking Mask invert Blue key Green key Multiply No base Max with base When a layer is set to green key then any green pixels in that layer pass through the media from the lower layers Non green pixels play back the media on that layer The mask must be pure green When a layer is set to blue key then any blue pixels in that layer pass through the media from the lower layers Non blue pixels play back the media on that layer The mask must be pure blue When any active Pixel Map layer is active dimmer above 0 then setting no base on that layer will make the Pixel Map effect ignore any base level for the controlled channels instead of adding to the base level When any active Pixel Map layer is active dimmer above 0 then setting max with base on that layer will make MagicQ perform a maximum of the Pixel Map effect and any
295. f the Programmer Window the Programmer Info Window can be opened for displaying on an external monitor Press CTRL Prog to open the Programmer Info Window 10 2 Clearing the programmer To clear the Programmer press CLEAR All channels will be deactivated and all HTP channels will be set to zero It is possible to force all LTP channels to zero by using CTRL CLEAR Programmer cleared E MagicQ User Manual 99 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Pressing SHIFT CLEAR clears the heads that you have currently selected Use this to clear one or more heads without clearing all heads from the programmer To clear the programmer over a period of time type a number before pressing CLEAR e g Press 5 CLEAR to clear the programmer over 5 seconds 10 3 Activation by Channel or by Head After CLEAR has been pressed the programmer is empty i e there are no channels active in the programmer When the level of a dimmer channel or an attribute of an intelligent head is changed for the first time then it becomes active in the programmer For heads with multiple channels there is a choice here as to how the other attributes of a head are affected by the activation of 1 of the head attributes By default if one attribute of a head is changed then only that attribute is activated this is referred to as Activation by Chan This can be modified in the Setup Window in the Activate chans head option When set to he
296. f the Setup Window This enables the Pixel Mapper to be accessed immediately from the Media Window without further set up 25 3 1 Using Bitmaps Movies Text and FX on Grids MagicQ User Manual 227 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChawSys www chamsys co uk The bitmaps and text are controlled using bitmap layers each layer is controlled like a normal moving light i e it is patched as a virtual personality There are three virtual personalities the original generic bitmap hed generic bitmapfx2 hed with more FX and the latest generic bitmapfx2 hed with movie support The personality has channels to select the bitmap or text channels for X Y position and size rotate and master levels for red green and blue Multiple layers can be used to mix between the layers using add subtract min max or invert colour mix modes Each bitmap layer uses 40 channels from the output channels When you patch the Pixel Mapper from the Grid View MagicQ chooses free channels for the layers These channels are then reserved for the pixel mapper layers and can not be used for controlling real lights It is best to patch generic bitmap layers to unused universes The Bitmapfx2 is patched to the encoders as follows Intensity Page Intensity Position Page Position size rotation of the Bitmap Text FX Colour Page Colour mixing between layers of the Bitmap Text FX Media Page Beam 1 Control of Movies Bitmaps internal user and gobo icon library Live
297. f whether you have adjusted them in the programmer When recording palette entries changes are only made for selected heads The modifications are merged with the existing palette entries To ensure that all heads that have been changed are updated press CTRL ALL to select all heads in the programmer before re recording the palette entry 9 2 1 Recording individual attributes into a Palette You may wish only to record only certain attributes into a palette entry e g only the shutter attribute into the beam palette You can modify the way the console records palettes using masking in the Record Options window Open the Record Options Window when recording by holding SHIFT and pressing RECORD Alternatively press the REC OPTIONS soft button in the Programmer Window Press the REC INT REC POS REC COL REC BEAM soft buttons to apply masking based on attribute type Select attributes in the window to apply masking based on individual attributes For instance to store only the shutter attribute press the SHUTTER attribute In some circumstances you may wish to record other attributes into a palette e g intensity into a beam palette Simply press the appropriate buttons in the Record Options Window The Palette entry shows I P C B to indicate which attributes are stored in the Palette Once the Palette entry is recorded the masking options are returned to their defaults You can lock the mask so that it is not returned to the defaults
298. faders in either the Programmer View or the Presets View Channels added in the Programmer View are added into the programmer in the usual way If the programmer is cleared then they are cleared Channels added using the Presets View are not affected by operations on the programmer they act like preset faders Channels added in both views are affected by the Grand Master and by the pressing of SWAP buttons 17 2 Over ride take over The MagicQ architecture intrinsically supports the combined use of the programmer playbacks and preset faders so that there is no need to constantly swap between modes losing your overridden effects This makes the console ideal for busking shows ADD and SWAP buttons work regardless of whether you are programming or playing back Similarly the programmer works as an over ride regardless of what you are doing By default the console makes no distinction between programming and run modes Some operators may wish to restrict what is allowed in run mode this can be configured in the Setup Window You can choose to disable programming or to disable modification of programmed Cues Cue Stacks 17 3 Viewing Cues and Cue Stacks The Cue and Cue Stack Windows are used to monitor and adjust the execution of Cues and Cue Stacks respectively To open both windows on the screen sized appropriately you can use the predefined Cue Stacks view press CTRL and select the Cue Stacks soft button Both windows monitor the
299. ferent personalities are required one for the general element and one for the repeated element The personality for the general element is used for patching and it references the repeated element to enable it to be patched automatically It is possible to set the Multiple Heads Type field to sepecify whether the repeated elements are patched before or after the general element In the Patch Window View Heads personalities only the head general element is shown however testing moving copying and setting the head no affects all the elements in the personality The View Chans view continues to show the individual channels Heads with multiple elements can be inserted into the grid in one go The Width Height and Order fields in the personality specify how the repeated elements are arranged for example the picture below shows Color Web 125 inserted into a grid Color Web 125 has a strange DMX order with individual elements having a L shape rather than a square or rectangular shape dd us ERERREFEEER as as a7 fis 194 183 253 fee Tass fase aor PRISES 196 197 198 362 361 360 259 358 M3 4 amp jas as Jaz 201 200 199 363 364 365 3ee 367 E2 5t fso io ian 202 203 204 e i pecs se 57 s6 pio 2 foro za aia pve arr are 30 sot 5x js je fet 219 218 217 216 215 379 380 381 ERR lsa e3 621220 221 1222 223 1224 224 383 382 540 541 l5 es le fer du jn 227 226 1225 Enel cu e es
300. file selection on start up To enable this you must put an empty text file selectprofile txt into the main MagicQ folder MagicQ PC on MagicQ PC On start up the console will then request which profile you wish to use before it loads the show and enables the outputs This is useful in a studio environment where MagicQ can control any one of several studios over Art Net When you start up the console you choose which studio to control 18 16 Changing MagicQ Console Software On MagicQ consoles the software upgrade utility can be entered on start up by pressing a key when prompted on the screen From software version 1 3 4 9 it is possible to change software without powering the console down In the Setup Window select View System View Status and select CHANGE SOFTWARE The software upgrade utility can also be entered on start up as before To load new software onto the system copy the cde file using networking into the main MagicQ folder and select the file in File Manager Alternatively insert a USB stick and select the file in File Manager Note that this new upgrade functionality is only available once v1 3 4 9 software or above is loaded on the system To get v1 3 4 9 on the system you will need to use the original method by powering the console down and entering the software utility on startup 18 17 Resetting a MagicQ console to factory defaults The console software upgrade utility has 2 other functions reset to factory defa
301. fitted this ensures that if there is a temporary interruption to the console power supply the console continues to function The battery will last for a specified time usually 15 minutes before the power should be restored or the console shut down Beam An attribute type attributes of an intelligent head that modify the make up of the beam are categorised as beam attributes Examples are the shutter iris gobo wheels and prism wheels Calibration A process of adjustment Used on the MagicQ to adjust the touch screen so that touching the screen in a particular position gives an accurate result Channel The basic unit of control on the console Each Universe has 512 channels Chase A sequence of steps to modify channel values over time On the MagicQ a chase is made up of a sequence of Cues in a Cue Stack Colour An attribute type attributes of an intelligent head that modify the colour of the beam are categorised as colour attributes Examples are colour wheels and colour mixing attributes Contrast See Crossfade Crossfade Crossfade of a chase or an FX refers to how changes are made to the output channels when moving from step to step of a chase or FX Crossfade of 100 indicates a smooth fade from one value to the next Crossfade of 0 indicates a snap from one value to the next The Contrast for the wing LCD screens enables the viewing angle of the screens to be modified Cue The basic unit of storage on
302. fore cannot be set 3 9 3 Naming items Press the SET button Press the touch screen click ENTER over the item to name Enter the name on the external or on screen keyboards When working in spreadsheets style windows with an external keyboard it is not necessary to press the SET button in the above sequence you can edit the spreadsheet like any other just by moving to the appropriate box and entering text on the keyboard To name multiple items highlight it is often easier to highlight the items before pressing SET If you press SET immediately after highlighting multiple items then the console will assume that these are the items you wish to set You can also press SET instead of pressing ENTER in the above sequences 3 9 4 Moving items Press the MOVE button Press the touch screen click ENTER over the source item Press the touch screen click ENTER over the destination item To move multiple items highlight it is often easier to highlight the items before pressing MOVE If you press MOVE immediately after highlighting multiple items then the console will assume that these are the source items and will only prompt for the destination You can also move multiple items by pressing and holding MOVE then selecting the multiple items releasing MOVE and then selecting the destination You can also press MOVE instead of pressing ENTER in the above sequences 3 9 5 Copying items Press the COPY button Press the touch screen
303. from Select Heads in Col Beam Pos This setting enables you to select Heads and Palettes from the keypad and various other advanced keypad functions Select heads by typing the head selection and then pressing the appropriate Colour Beam or Position Window button 1 THRU 4 COL selects heads 1 through 4 and opens the Colour Window 1 THRU 4 COL 5 selects heads 1 through 4 and selects Colour Palette 5 It also enables selecting on Color Beam and Position palettes direct from the keypad 19 8 4 Select heads on include This setting determines whether when you include Cues and Palette entries into the programmer the console automatically selects the heads If set to Yes the console selects all heads that have levels in the Cue or Palette entry MagicQ User Manual 177 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 8 5 Keypad always selects heads When this setting is set to Yes entering head numbers on the keypad followed by the ENTER key always selects the heads When set to Yes some of the advanced features of MagicQ are not available directly from the keypad When editing numeric fields in the spreadsheet style windows in this mode the operator must use the SET button rather than editing the field directly This setting has a Strict Mode option In this mode it is not possible to toggle or choose items simply using the ENTER key You must use SET first This should help keypad fanatics to avoid setting optio
304. fter the playback is released 17 5 Modifying FX parameters To modify the parameters of a FX that is programmed in a Cue press the SELECT button for the playback and then adjust the encoders in the Cue Window FX size shape spread and speed are all adjustable Modifications are retained even after the playback is released 17 6 Stop Starting Cue Stacks Cue Stacks can be started and stopped using the GO and STOP buttons associated with the playback For wing playbacks make the playback the current playback and then press the GO STOP buttons in the manual control section 17 7 Jumping to a Cue in a Cue Stack There are several ways to jump to a specific Cue in a Cue Stack Press the S button of the Playback enter a Cue Id on the keypad and press the manual GO button In the Cue Stack window use the cursor keys or press the touch screen to move the cursor to the required Cue Press the GOTO CUE soft button to jump directly to the Cue Alternatively key in the Cue ID within the Cue Stack of the Cue you wish to jump to and press GOTO CUE Pressing the PRELOAD CUE button rather than the GOTO CUE button selects the Cue that will be executed when the GO button for the Cue Stack is next pressed This enables the next Cue to be selected in advance of the Cue being required Pressing ENTER in the first column of the Cue Stack also jumps to the specified Cue 17 8 Over riding using the programmer When playing back a show you can
305. g MagicQ over Ethernet ener enne nennen 283 32 1 ChamSys Remote Ethernet Protocol eesseeseeeseeeseeeee eene rennen nennen nennen 284 32 2 Writing to the Ethernet port eese tnnt iaa eterne nennen nnne 284 32 3 Reading from the Bthernet sees enne tne ennr a sn trennen 286 32 4 Sample code fragments e 286 33 Controlling MagicQ using the serial port seen nre 289 33 1 Enabling the serial port nen eee tio ete ope e PE o ike p age age eee ee 289 33 2 Writing to the seriall port edo Gone fe te buteh i a se i op eo ni eb ie Ee ENEA 289 33 3 Reading from the serial port sessi enne nre nennen 290 34 Using MIDUSMPTE on MAaglcQ rere pos eo entere td usera s iien vad iN aA TENE NEE ERSA ste 291 34 1 MIDI SUPPO Em 291 34 1 MIDI Transmit E 291 S MAE bie Ers oana E E nea E E 293 34 1 3 Advanced MIDI mapping eeeeseeeeeseeeeseesesrrsrssresesressesressrsrissenstestentesressestesesrissreseeseese 293 34 1 4 Default miditable txt file rciscssssercerirrcrisrincsisrrinessrerunisiriuriserrinissieriesrrreni irinin 294 34 1 Remot cornmands oce eet er icta cos n Eere eNe EEES S pue gleba pu fever 296 341 6 MIDI problems sited REGI tereti Ele ra Ee EE dire dbieieis bese died devas 296 34 1 7 MIDI Show GConttol rettet eriter tcrra teer te erae et reped rep HE ed
306. g external monitors for how to setup the monitors 42 1 1 Moving Windows to the External Monitor Press EXT to move a Window to the External Monitor The window that is currently in focus is transferred to the external monitor Press EXT to return the window to the main monitor MagicQ includes an option to force a single window to the external monitor output The Window will remain on the external monitor except when a SHIFT CLOSE is performed This option is set in the Setup Window View Settings Windows Force Window on External Monitor 2 42 2 Additional Cue Stack Output and Programmer Windows MagicQ supports three additional windows the Cue Stack Info Outputs Info and Programmer Info windows These windows are very similar to the Cue Stack Outputs and Programmer windows but are designed to allow additional information to be shown For instance by using both the Outputs and the Outputs Info windows you can view both the plan view and the data values simultaneously Similarly the Cue Stack Info window is designed as a master window to keep track of the Cue Stack on the currently selected playback The columns have been rearranged so that the comment field is shown as one of the first columns This is ideal for theatre playback where the operator wishes to see notes about the Cues during playback you could for instance put a comment on a Cue Call spots when actor enters stage right These windows can be accessed from the Con
307. g of Cues and Palettes without first Including the Cues and Palettes This is useful when making modifications to a pre programmed show When you press Update when not in Include Mode a list of all the Palettes and Cues that have been over riden is shown You can then choose which of the Palettes and Cues to update by selecting from the select box One you have finished your selection press the Done button You can press Cancel at any point to cancel the Update When using a tracking Cue Stack MagicQ will show all the Cues that have been overriden in the Stack hence you can make an update even if the attributes were used in a previous Cue on that Cue Stack Pressing SHIFT UPDATE forces an update using the above method even if a Cue was previously included 12 6 Direct Modification of Intensities on Cue To add or change the intensity of heads or dimmer channels recorded into a Cue on a Playback without using the programmer press and hold the SELECT button of the Playback with the Cue to be modified Then use the keypad to adjust the intensity channels e g typing 1 THRU 4 FULL will add channels 1 to 4 at FULL into the current Cue on the Playback The change is immediate and permanent The programmer is not affected To remove a level from the current Cue on a Cue Stack hold the S button and set the channel at the special level e g hold S and type 1 9 ENTER MagicQ User Manual 114 Version 1 5 7 5
308. g option The console has been designed to be as flexible as possible so that it can be used equally well for pre programmed shows tours or for busking festivals Significant attention has been given to ensuring that all key parameters can be changed during run for example it is possible to change any FX parameter at the touch of a button Ease of use and speed of programming have been at the forefront of the design process ensuring that the lighting designer can patch and program a show in the minimum amount of time without complex button sequences and multi level menus The first few chapters of this guide describe an overview of the console and how scenes chases fx and environments work If you wish to dive straight into programming a show then turn to the Quick Start section 1 1 Which console model The MagicQ lighting console is available in several different models all utilising the powerful MagicQ operating environment The MagicQ operating environment provides an easy to use operating environment for both programming and playback of shows A show can be programmed on one model and then played back on a different model The MagicQ operating environment supports 202 playbacks in total which can be all be accessed either through physical playbacks or through the touch screen The different models in the MagicQ have different numbers of physical playbacks and buttons which enables the size of console to be matched to the show
309. ge detest teed 108 11 3 DMX channels View ersinnen aneia evene ette buste oe Medi De ee ri epe ie ee Eta Glade 109 P14 Moyement VieW M 109 11S VE RAI ole 110 11 5 1 Creatine rig plans eerte tr Heer be pene Pe i eisoes 110 11 5 2 Selection of heads in Outputs Plan View eese rennen 111 12 PGI CUS EM 112 12 1 Including Cues into the Programmetr esee ener neret nnne 112 12 1 4 Including Cues at a specified level eeeeeeeeereeereeenen nennen enne 112 IZLE CIE DE m 112 12 2 Editing using Include and Update method eee 113 12 3 Updating a Cue with the contents of the programmer Record Merge 113 12 4 Making changes to multiple Cues sse 113 12 4 1 Changes to multiple Cues using keypad eene 113 12 4 2 Changes to multiple Cues using Cue Stack window eee 113 MagicQ User Manual 7 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 125 Editing using Update eae siii esa e Ee t ere sa e Ephes pha sed po dE Feet dines ea 114 12 6 Direct Modification of Intensities on Cue sese eene nennen nennen 114 13 CUE Stack OC H 115 I3 1 Cue Stack Window unosi eet rer tesi Cetera epe Ee Po eR rev tie eo PH de Le ee dL e 115 132 Chase Tm
310. gement nc i deeded e p cernes aee pea pee ESTE e ede Robe E TOR ed p ee dee e LRL ed Eve nha 156 MEME Cnr eed E E tected 156 18 2 Shutting DO Wii sis caneiro naea a lipase buste oe Medi De eei nb e Ebo Ea Golde 156 18 3 Saving SHOWS sce 156 18 3 1 Show file name auto increment nennen rennen eren enne nenne 156 18 4 Backing up to an external system eere renes eren nennen 157 18 5 BREITER 157 18 6 MASI eao tots veoh estar opo e oi deinen in PO otis o n eae Er Roe DERE er dua 158 18 7 Import and Export of Show Data and Show Merging eene nennen 158 18 7 1 Exporting SHOWS sesto noe eter er teen re sena get eee neve e E HUC Dese pe eR Ee Pero Td 158 18 7 2 Merging Importing ShOWS ecseri atien ennaii eniin rs anes entente 158 18 7 3 Merging different versions of the same show sess enne 159 18 74 USIET ASCI file rmpoOtt icuceeit inerte rt eerie eed eb ete rere reae ee teet ete e 159 18 8 Saving and Loading Settings seeessssesseeseeeeeeeeeee een eene rennen eren eren snnt nnne 159 18 9 Fil Manage ues oreet ete ene EAE AA Pase ege Ce la tacves ee ERU p ea Rp EOE aid DEREN Ee 159 18 10 Transferring files over Bthernet sessessessesseeeseeeeeeee enne nennen eren nnne 160 MagicQ User Manual 10 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sua www chamsys co uk 18 11
311. gicQ In the View Settings view in the Setup Window page down to the Port Settings Set up the remote trigger type and remote trigger action The remote trigger type can be set to NONE MAKE or BREAK depending on whether your external switch is a push to make or a push to break switch When using an external signal setting the type to make will cause a trigger when the voltage differential is positive The remote trigger action determines what action is taken by MagicQ when the remote input signal is detected The options are NONE CURRENT PLAYBACK GO CURRENT PLAYBACK FLASH ADD SW AP SWAP DBO WINGI PB1 GO WINGI PB1 FLASH WINGI PB12 GO WINGI PB12 FLASH PB10 GO PB10 FLASH When set to NONE there is no special action associated with pressing the remote input However the remote input can still be used in Cue Stacks to trigger specific cues by setting the Halt Field in the Cue Stack to REMOTE The Cue will then wait till the remote trigger is detected before starting to execute the Cue When set to SWAP playbacks are set to SWAP mode whenever the remote signal is detected this can therefore be used with a foot switch to temporarily engage SWAP mode WINGI PB1 GO and WINGI PB1 FLASH are provided as an alternative to the current playback GO and FLASH This allows for example a smoke machine to be set up on WINGI PB1 trigger by the remote input MagicQ User Manual 307 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys
312. gicQ PC The MagicQ Media Centre reads the MagicQ show file to determine the layout of the grid and hence to know how to simulate the matrix display The show file can be grabbed automatically from the console or copied manually 25 6 1 Automatic grabbing of show file First enable remote access on the MagicQ console Setup View Settings Multi Console Enable Remote Access Then in MagicQ Media Cente select Matrix Scan Network This should present a list of all the MagicQ consoles on the network Select the required network and press APPLY If no consoles are found then check the remote access settings on the console or use the manual copy below 25 6 2 Manual copy Copy the show file with the grid that you are using into the c Program Files Chamsys Ltd MagicQ PC show folder Then after starting the MagicQ Media Centre select Matrix Open Show File and select the show file MagicQ Media Centre reads the grid data from the show file and sets up the Viewer to the same size as the grid Note that the MagicQ Media Centre assumes the default ArtNet configuration on the MagicQ console MagicQ PC i e MagicQ Universe 1 outputs on ArtNet Universe 0 MagicQ Universe 2 outputs on ArtNet Universe 1 If you are using custom IP addresses and Universes then you will need to configure the settings in MagicQ Media Centre MagicQ User Manual 239 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk The above example show file bigmatrix shw
313. go Cog FUE Eoo ET 63 5 21 JE xportime heads rette Ero edere tivi o a Noua don eoe eat Gib Eres cone ides i rage etas 63 5 22 VL5 type channels split personalities eeseeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeene enne enne nere 63 5 23 Mersine with DM X input erint neat se Lenoir deeds sae gere o D Te da Se cp RSEN i 64 5 24 Customising Locate values and Default values essen rene rene nen 64 5 25 Dheatre Patch syntax iesu sie Con Ee eeicri tee nde ORE HL ERSTE ELE TERR EE Ee ee o eR e Eye EE Crap HER TED ed 65 5 26 LED virtual dimmer channels eeeeseeseeseeeeeeeee eene rennen enne 65 5 26 1 Quickly adding Virtual Dimmers to patched heads eene 66 Seting Dimmer LE vel Me X 67 6 1 Using the Om screen faders oic inienn ENE REEE ea EEE EE ETRS EREDE SAR 67 6 22 Using the encoders unen ete aE AEE EEE EA 67 6 3 Using the keypad vives ciere i be nieder en Erie eu r HER voe tee uL HERE eR e Doe pe eot e co 68 6 3 1 Setting fade times from the keypad sss nennen nenne 68 6 4 Using Selected Heads elei terrere eene aon esrb aee CEPR pha sb e HUE Ub e bd ea ii 69 6 5 Utilising gel colours in the Intensity Window eese 69 MagicQ User Manual 5 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 9 6 5 1 Programming of Dimmers using gel colours esee 70 6 6 Setting levels whilst running a S
314. gs Multi Console configure the Show sync type option to Archive When set to Archive MagicQ periodically checks for other consoles on the network and grabs the show files that are running on those consoles The show files are stored in the normal show folder When this feature is used to back up multiple consoles it is important that different show file names are used on each of the other consoles otherwise files from different consoles will overwrite each other on the back up console Note that files will only be copied from consoles that have the auto backup option set to yes or on changes Files will not be copied from consoles that do not have this set e g when the playback mode is set to Safe This avoids any performance impact from copying of files from live consoles When set to Show Sync MagicQ copies the files as above It will then load one of the shows that it has copied If there are multiple consoles on the network then it will always run the show file from the same console This feature can be used to back up show files from PCs running MagicQ PC as well as from consoles these PCs must have the drive where MagicQ is installed shared on the network e g share C as C 28 8 Zoning MagicQ supports Zones for controlling multiple rooms areas in a venue Each Universe can be allocated to a Zone and then all the Universes in a Zone can be controlled together e g for enabling
315. h consoles to Equal operates a Master Slave mode whereby both Consoles have the same precedence The first console to start becomes the Master Take Control and Release Control can be used to swap which console is the Master All Universes are treated the same enabling disabling together For systems which require hot takeover to operate independently on different Universes the Split mode should be used If the network cable between the consoles is broken then neither console will see the other console and both will become Master If one of the consoles is still connected to the lighting rig then it will have control both consoles will not be connected to the lighting rig otherwise the consoles would see each other When the network between the consoles is reconnected then both consoles will detect the other consoles at the same instance The console with the lower IP address will become the Master All required universes on both consoles should be set to Hot Takeover Split Mode MagicQ User Manual 260 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk This mode makes the consoles operate as in previous version of software Set Hot Takeover in Setup View DMX I O for the required Universes To make a single system a backup for another system set the universes to Hot Takeover only on the slave console For a Master Slave system with equal precedence set the universes to Hot Takeover on both systems 28 4 2 Configuring H
316. hamSys www chamsys co uk ChamSys Ltd The features and functions of the MagicQ intelligent lighting console and the ideas contained therein are the property of ChamSys Ltd The console is intended for the control of lighting systems No warranties are expressed or implied regarding the use of the MagicQ intelligent lighting console No liabilities are accepted for the accuracy of the information contained within this manual The MagicQ lighting console products are supplied designed and manufactured by ChamSys Ltd Products containing ChamSys Ltd software and firmware embody proprietary information and are licensed not sold and may not be duplicated in any way ChamSys Ltd does not guarantee the accuracy adequacy suitability or completeness of any information or products and is not responsible for any errors or omissions or the results obtained from use of such information or products ChamSys Ltd does not accept responsibility for the consequences of misuse or abuse of its equipment The equipment is designed to meet all current regulation requirements in the UK for electrical products None of the equipment or software supplied by ChamSys Ltd may be used in any life critical or potentially life endangering situations or in situations where personal injury may result ChamSys Ltd reserves the right to make any changes and or improvements or to discontinue any and all of their product s or service s without prior notice and advises cust
317. hannel Wireless channel to use when using a USB to Wireless interface with the MagicQ Pro 2010 console For connection to an iPhone or iPod Touch try channel 5 19 12 15 Wireless SSID Wireless SSID identifier of the Wireless network to use when using a USB to Wireless interface with the MagicQ Pro 2010 console For connection to an iPhone or iPod Touch enter a name for your network e g mynetwork 19 12 16 Wireless encryption Wireless encryption type when using a USB to Wireless interface with the MagicQ Pro 2010 console The options are None WEP WPA or MQ WEP and WPA are secure wireless encryption methods Set the key in the Wireless Key field When set to MQ the wireless is kept open but the application requires users to enter a password to connect to the console The password should be set in the Wireless Key field When this option is selected the iPhone remote will be passworded regardless of whether the connection is made through a USB to Wireless interface or an access point external to the MagicQ system 19 12 17 Wireless key Wireless encryption type when using a USB to Wireless interface with the MagicQ Pro 2010 console Used when Wireless encryption is set to WEP or WPA When Wireless Encryption is set to MQ then the Wireless key is used to specify to a password that must be entered on the iPhone Application 19 13 Port Settings 19 13 1 MagicQ USB Wings and Interfaces This setting enables MagicQ Wings and Cham
318. has a tick by it e If you have enabled password protection by setting Setup View Settings Network Wireless Encyption MQ then you will need to set the password in the Con tab on the remote device The MagicQ consoles will not show until the password is correct If you have not set encryption Setup View Settings Network Wireless Encyption None then the password should be blank no characters MagicQ User Manual 275 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk e You should now have control Change to the Key tab iPhone or Focus tab iPad and try selecting a Group e g GROUP 1 ENTER 30 3 2 2 Modifying palettes with the remote app It is easy to modify palettes with the remote application In the Focus tab Key tab on iPad select your heads e g GROUP 1 ENTER then select the position palette e g POS 5 ENTER If you cannot remember the numbers then change to the Windows tab and select the Pos Colour or Beam Windows In the Focus tab use the enoder wheels to modify the look on stage On the iPhone use the Bank button to change the attributes controlled by the wheel On the iPad you can press the Pos Colour Beam buttons When you are happy with you look then record over the palette e g REC POS 5 ENTER MagicQ will ask for a confirmation Press 1 to confirm yes Press 0 to cancel 30 3 2 3 Using the Execute Winow We recommend you use the Execute Window on the remote app for shortcuts group selections
319. he Programmer Window Select the item s with the cursor that you wish to remove from the programmer and then press the REMOVE soft button For example to remove the iris attributes for all heads in the programmer Select VIEW LEVELS in the Prog View MagicQ User Manual 105 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Select the entire Iris column move to the top hold SHIFT and press END Press the REMOVE ATTR soft button To remove all of the attributes of MAC500 head numbers 2 and 3 from the programmer Select VIEW LEVELS in the Prog View Move the cursor to the Head Name column Select MAC500s 2 and 3 move to the row for number 2 hold SHIFT move to row for number 3 Press the REMOVE HEAD soft button To remove the FX for head number 2 Select VIEW LEVELS in the Prog View Select ADV VIEW Move the cursor to the Head Name column for Mac number 2 Press the REMOVE HEAD FX soft button 10 11 Copy between heads You can copy between heads using the keypad To copy the head data select some heads from the keypad press COPY and then enter the destination heads For example to copy from heads 1 to 2 to heads 5 to 8 1 THRU 2 COPY 5 THRU 8 ENTER Selected attributes can be copied rather than the entire head by using SHIFT COPY instead of COPY and setting the attribute mask Both levels and FX are copied between the heads It is not necessary to have the same number of source heads as destination heads Ea
320. he Setup View Settings Windows Start Mode option to Choose Demo show 20 1 Simple Generic Console Choosing Simple Generic Console opens MagicQ in Simple View and loads a Simple 48 Channel Generic Console show file PROGRAMMER 377157157 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 14 15 16 7 18 19 20 2 2 23 24 Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer pesu 000 000 25 26 27 28 23 30 31 32 33 E 35 36 7 8 39 0 41 42 43 44 45 46 7 48 Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer Dimmer PLAYBACKS Ehow 48chandesk sbk Page 1 E E PBI PBA PB7 PBS PBS PB10 TEST r p www chamsys co uk A D T rrr TT T ce ns 8 8 8 8 B a 3a s a u 1 E OUTPUTS 3100 41 00 3200 4200 33 00 43 00 3400 44 00 35 00 45 00 36 00 46 00 3700 4700 38 00 48 00 39 00 40 00 Be E al Ai EE EEI A i TOES LR Jn s CT HG ILLE GN Hereby bA EREA bi PERETII GRAND SUB F di i Asen 5 6 8 ga iE ropa GE In this mode the console simply operates as a 48 channel traditional theatre console with 48 dimmers patched on Universe 1 at channels 1 through 48 MagicQ User Manual 199 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk If a MagicQ Wing MagicQ Twin DMX Interface or MagicDMX interface is connected to MagicQ then
321. he Wing you wish to change the contrast on 19 21 Console lamp brightness To modify the brightness of the console lamps press CTRL and adjust the top right encoder To turn all console lamps on or off press CTRL and the button associated with the top right encoder 19 22 LED brightness To modify the brightness of the LEDs press CTRL and adjust the bottom left encoder Note that the brightness of the LEDs can only be adjusted from full to dim they can not be turned off completely This ensures that there is always an indication that the console is powered 19 23 Controlling console lamp from the programmed show The console lamp brightness display brightness and LED brightness can now be controlled as a fixture within the programming of the show Patch one Generic MQlamps at any free address The fixture can be unpatched to ensure that it does not affect any real channel outputs The fixture has the following attributes activate set to 255 to take control of the console brightness master master level for brightness white lamp blue lamp MagicQ User Manual 197 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk main display brightness of display 0 is off wing display led brightness of the LEDs Note that the screensaver will still blank the display 19 24 Locking the console The console supports a simple locking mode to avoid accidental button presses affecting the output or programmed data Press CTRL and th
322. he cursor keys Then press the CLONE soft button There are several options when cloning heads It is possible to choose whether both Palettes and Cues are cloned or just Palettes It is also possible to specify that FX are split when the heads are cloned so that the new heads are part of a different FX from the original FX This function should be used with care when cloning multiple heads in order to avoid fragmenting the F X too much MagicQ User Manual 61 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 5 18 1 Copy Head Programming If you patch new heads into a show without cloning it is still possible to then copy programming from other heads to the new heads To copy programmed data from one head to another press the SHIFT COPY HEAD PRG soft button in the HEAD VIEW then select the source head followed by the destination head All the Cues Cue Stacks Groups and Palettes that contain the source head will be updated to include the destination head 5 18 2 Patch Channel Copy Another way to expand existing shows is to patch the new heads and dimmers but then in the Patch window to set a real time channel copy from another already programmed channel The value of the channel will always be that of the already programmed channel Any programming of the newly patched channel will be ignored To set up real time copies edit the Merge and From Chan columns in the View Chans view of the Patch Window Press ENTER in the Merge column
323. he data can then be stored into a Palette in the usual way using RECORD You can grab all attributes of a moving head by changing to the Group window pressing CTRL and INCLUDE then ENTER 9 12 Using Palettes with times Palettes can be applied with a time by simply typing in a number of seconds before selecting the Palette this is very useful for quickly setting fade times when recording Cues or for busking in effects In addition you can use FAN mode to quickly spread different times across a number of heads For example typing in 3 before selecting a position will cause a fade to the position over 3 seconds Typing 0 THRU 3 before selecting a position causes the heads to move to the position with a spread of 3 seconds i e the first head moves immediately whilst the last head takes 3 seconds To fan delays rather than fade times type delay fade e g for 1 second fade but delayed from 0 to 3 seconds type 0 THRU 3 1 before selecting the palette A short cut can be used to perform fanned delay fades type a time followed by before selecting the Palette to fan the fade across the currently selected heads Applying Palettes with times and fanned times can be applied to all Palette types including Beam and Colour For example to perform a gradual fade from one colour to the next over all your colour mixing heads select the heads 0 THRU 5 before selecting a colour palette entry You can modify the order that a fan is applie
324. he first head in your show MagicQ will prompt you whether you wish to auto insert heads into the visualiser CONFIRM Patching first head Auto insert heads into visualiser YES CANCEL Once a head has been patched into your show MagicQ will not prompt you again If you wish to change the setting then you can enable or disable auto insertion in Setup View Settings Mode Visualiser When you patch heads in View Heads MagicQ patches the head in the View Heads view but also generates a visualiser object in View Vis Visualiser heads are separate from MagicQ heads for instance you can have multiple visualiser heads associated with one patched head You might want to do this if you had two par cans on a single dimmer channel you would have one Generic Dimmer patched in MagicQ and two visualiser heads By default when you patch heads MagicQ creates one visualiser head per MagicQ head You can add extra visualiser objects for a head using INSERT 40 2 2 MagicQ View Vis view The Patch Window in addition to View Heads View Chans and View DMX now supports a View Vis view The View Vis view manages the data for the visualiser There are several different tabs including Selected Heads Vis Heads and Attach Objects MagicQ User Manual 313 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk GB Magic PC Demo Mode Touch Simple Maxi bit 3 timeline media 20 koos pos pswios Noel Fonts
325. he track in the playlist If you select a value which is larger than the number of items in the playlist then the last item will be played instead Reserved There are two channels reserved for future use and should not be used 36 2 Separate PC running Winamp MagicQ Media Centre has a tab for control of up to 4 instances of Winamp In addition MagicQ Media Centre supports sending the Winamp track time from one instance of Winamp to MagicQ as an external timecode input To open up the configuration settings in MagicQ Media Centre go to Devices gt Winamp Control The window enables configuration of the four instances and allows you to configure which Art Net universe and address they are patched to If you installed winamp to the default location on your PC C Program Files Winamp winamp exe then enabling an instance using the check box will execute an instance of winamp for you If you wish to start the instances of winamp separately then you must pass a CLASS parameter on startup to allow MagicQ Media Centre to find them The classnames can be set as follows winamp exe CLASS MMC_Winamp_0 winamp exe CLASS MMC_Winamp_1 winamp exe CLASS MMC_Winamp_2 winamp exe CLASS MMC_Winamp_3 for each of the four instances 36 3 MagicQ and Winamp on the same PC When running MagicQ and Winamp on the same PC it is not necessary to run MacicQ Media Centre however you must have a MagicQ Wing or Interface not MagicDMX attached S
326. heads were selected from the Group window using the All LED3chan group and then a RGB FX was played back on them You can test the head selected in the grid using the test mode to the Grid selected via soft button C In test mode the head under the cursor is tested located This enables the grid layout to be easily checked 25 2 1 Using standard groups and FX on the grid Press the Auto Group button to automatically generate groups based on the grid size This generates groups using the entire grid but with different orders of selection e g from centre to outside from the edges and vice versa This makes it easy to quickly generate different FX 400 G2 1 G 400 All SEDES All Bitmap Grid horiz Using the auto groups it is then possible to use standard FX such as RGB sine waves pulses to generate FX on your grid aaoo nnn MagicQ User Manual 226 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 25 3 Pixel Mapper MagicQ software contains an in built pixel mapper that appears as a media server just like an external media server The Pixel Mapper can be used to play back images movies text and FX on a grid of LED dimmers or moving lights If the heads in the grid have colour mixing then the pixelmapping will operate on the RGB or CMY If they have no colour mix then the pixelmapping will operate on the Colour Wheel or if there is no colour wheel then on the intensity The pixelmapper can be set to always
327. hen pressing the RELEASE button The Cue Stack can also be configured so that it does not reset to the first step when it is released A Cue Stack can be set so that pressing the FLASH button activates and releases the playback on alternate presses Set the Flash Button toggles option A release time can be set for the Cue Stack in the Cue Stack options so that when released the levels fade out over a specified time At any time a playback can be released with time by pressing the SELECT button of the playback typing a time and pressing the RELEASE button Pressing SHIFT RELEASE releases all playbacks simultaneously It is also possible to enter a time before doing SHIFT RELEASE Holding a single SELECT button and pressing SHIFT RELEASE releases all the playbacks except the one for which the SELECT is held MagicQ User Manual 125 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Holding multiple Select buttons and pressing RELEASE releases all the selected playbacks 14 3 Fader control By default the playback fader controls the level of any HTP channels recorded into the current Cue on the Cue Stack If the Fader controls HTP chans option is set to No then the fader will no longer control the HTP channels the Playback will automatically be always set to 100 level The Cue Stack options can be configured so that the fader also controls LTP channels using the Fader controls LTP IPCB option This is useful f
328. hin a matter of minutes 2 8 Window layouts The console provides a means of storing the positions and sizes of Windows as a Window layout to enable easy recall of useful Windows This allows for example a Window configuration consisting of the Group Position Colour and Beam Windows to be stored and recalled at a button press The system supports several standard views including several oriented towards programming and several oriented towards playback on aa MGE iis EXSESESESPESESES ES Window layouts are recalled by pressing CTRL and selecting one of the top soft buttons The three spare buttons in the Windows section default to Layout 1 Palettes Layout 2 and Layout 3 2 9 Shift Functions The MagicQ lighting console uses SHIFT and CTRL buttons to enable access to advanced features There is a SHIFT button and a CTRL button adjacent to the top corners of the touch screen in addition to the keys on the keyboard The SHIFT button is used with the cursor keys to enable selection of multiple items in Windows 2 10 The Programmer All recording of show data is carried out using the Programmer The Programmer takes priority over all playbacks and channels It can also be used during live running to override the outputs for example for changing the colour or gobo of intelligent heads The Programmer can be considered to be a table of channel level and active flags for each of the channels patched onto the console Initiall
329. hortcut to select Entire State The Status Display indicates when any masking is active Masking is cleared once a Cue is recorded this can be prevented by pressing the LOCK MASK soft button in the Record Options Window The Record Option Window displays individual attribute names based on the currently selected head so that it is easy to recognise the attributes to select If no heads are currently selected then it uses the first active head in the programmer Masking can be selected quickly by holding Intensity Position Beam or Colour and pressing RECORD for recording only the selected attributes 10 8 8 Options MagicQ User Manual 104 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The console supports several additional options for recording Cues These include recording all the channels from heads regardless of whether they are active in the programmer and recording only heads that are currently selected Press the REC OPTIONS soft button and select an option Record options return to the defaults once a Cue is recorded 10 9 Active MagicQ has an Active function for loading attributes into the programmer at their current value This can be used to ensure that the programmer contains all the attributes of the selected heads or to add in individual attributes to the programmer To make individual attributes active in the programmer hold SET and press the soft button associated with the attribute in the Intensity Positi
330. hows When you select SHIFT IMPORT SHOW MagicQ now gives you simpler menu options of Entire Show Palettes or Advanced Entire Show loads the entire show as separate fixtures i e adding the show This is an in previous versions if you selected all the Import options Palettes allows just palettes to be loaded from the imported show file There are further options for choosing just some head types and whether to load Positions Colours and Beams Advanced provides the user with options include choosing whether Settings Patch Palettes Cues Cue Stacks and Playback assignments are loaded from the imported show file Additionally you can choose MagicQ User Manual 158 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk whether Palettes Cues and Pages are merged together or whether new Palettes Cues and Pages are generated It is also possible to load the data for only selected head types from the imported show file If the Merge Heads option is selected then MagicQ merges programmed data from the new file into the heads that match in the original show If the Merge Heads is not selected then MagicQ adds the channels to the new show Channels from the imported show keep their DMX address unless they clash with channels in the original show in which case they are moved to the first free location If the Merge Pages option is selected then Playback assignments are kept on the same Page as they were in the imported show
331. i 1 address 1 Patch 5 heads at uni 2 address 1 Patch 5 heads with offset 20 Patch after uni 3 address 50 Reselect head Edit patched head e Select Heads Select head 1 Select heads 1 to 4 Select heads 1 to 10 not 5 Deselect all heads Reselect last heads after CLEAR Select Group 1 Select Groups 1 to 4 Sub select 1 head SETUP View Settings New Show SETUP View Settings Save Show SETUP View Settings Load Show SETUP View Settings Save Setting SETUP View Settings Import Settings SETUP View Settings SHIFT Export Show SETUP View Settings lt SHIFT Import Show SETUP View Settings lt SHIFT Load Backup PATCH View Chans gt Export Patch SETUP lt SHIFT QUIT PATCH Choose Head Patch It 5 Patch It 1 1 1 Patch It 1 2 1 Patch It 5 20 Patch It 5 3 50 Patch It Cursor to head lt SHIFT Choose Head Cursor to head lt SHIFT Edit Head eo 1 THRU 4 1 THRU 10 5 0 eoe ALL 1 I THRU 4 1 NEXT HEAD Sub select 1 and 2 head in group 1 2 NEXT HEAD Sub select 3 4 and 5 head Select all heads using palette Select heads active in Playback 3 THRU 5 NEXT HEAD ALL Palette entry ALL S Select heads above 20 intensity 20 ALL INT e Lamp On Lamp Off Reset Lamp On entire rig Lamp Off entire rig Lamp On selected heads Lamp Off selected heads Reset selected heads
332. icQ interfaces to the WYSIWYG visualiser using a special Wysiwyg driver file Download the MagicQ WYSIWYG driver file from ChamSys download site and install it on the WYSIWYG PC 41 5 1 Running MagicQ PC Start up MagicQ PC you should see the initial screen requesting whether you wish to continue you the existing show load a new show or want help Click load a new show When asked whether you want to erase the existing show from memory select yes Select the show wysiwyg shw This will load a demonstration show designed to work with the WYSIWYG demonstration show Note if you have already closed the initial screen then you can load a new show at any time by clicking the Setup button and selecting Load Show MagicQ User Manual 324 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 41 6 Enabling MagicQ to output WYSIWYG data Now you need to configure the outputs Go to the Setup View DMX I O window You will see a list of the 32 universes and their current configuration Move to the Visualiser row and select WYSIWYG for the first universe There is no need to change the Status column to enabled WYSIWYG is automatically enabled when you select WYSIWYG as the visualiser VIEW VIEW RESET QUIT SETTINGS WINGS VISUAL Play Mode SETUP show ThuNov032019392005 sbk Normal Universe Status Out Type Out Uni In Type In Uni Visualiser Hot takeover Disabled ArtNet Art 0 ArtNet Art O Wysiwyg remote No Mates awe ant ___ arner_
333. icq php The firmware has the filename firmware 334a 0102 where the first number is the procduct code 334a is the product code of the 4 Universe Interface and the second number is the version number Copy the firmware into a folder called firmware underneath the show folder on MagicQ In Net Manager type the version number and press SHIFT and LOAD FIRMWARE Put the cursor on the device to be upgraded and press UPGRADE DEVICE Do not power off the interface whilst the firmware is being upgraded MagicQ User Manual 256 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 28 Networking of MagicQ Consoles It is possible to have many different MagicQ consoles and MagicQ PC systems on a single network either to allow control of many different devices remote control or to provide master slave configurations MagicQ supports synchronisation tracking of playback between consoles to enable one or more consoles to follow the playback state of the master console MagicQ supports automated copying of shows between consoles for example to automatically keep a slave console updated with the same show that is running on the master console This function can also be used as an archiving system to enable a PC to automatically grab the shows from the consoles on the network for back up purposes MagicQ supports synchronising of show file data between consoles so that one console on the network acts as a master console with the master sho
334. ied by the user on the PC by dragging the window to the required size In order to enable the Multi Windows application to connect to the MagicQ application set the Multi Windows option in the Setup window on the console to Remote MultiWindow 42 4 Multiple Windows on MagicQ PC systems MagicQ PC v 1 3 2 0 and above supports a Multi Windows mode which enables MagicQ PC to use multiple windows on one PC with multiple monitors without starting up the separate Multi Window application To use this mode first set the Multi Windows option in the Interface settings in the Setup Window to Multi Windows same PC Then select View System View Remote A list of the monitors attached to the PC will be show together with their position and size Press the RELOAD MULTI W soft button to update the list Enable all the monitors that you wish to use for Multi Windows Note that the Monitor that is running the main MagicQ Window must always be enabled Now it is possible to move Windows from the Main Window onto the other monitors Press EXT to move a Window between the different monitors Sizing of Windows on the other monitors occurs just like in the Main Window you can select full windows half windows and quarter windows The entire space on the other monitors is used for MagicQ Windows When a Window is moved to another monitor the size is kept the same for example if it was a quarter window on the Main MagicQ Window it will be a quarter w
335. ies rather than absolute values FX EDITOR twopos NENNEN Headno Attribute Step 1 Curve Step2 Curve 001 Pan P1 0 P2 0 mE mp e p Each step in the Waveform FX can use any of the first 256 Palettes When applying a Palette FX if a Palette does not contain the specified attribute for a selected head then it will use the attribute from the first head in the Palette with that attribute MagicQ User Manual 223 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 25 Controlling LED fixtures using MagicQ MagicQ utilises a powerful Cue engine which enables it to easily handle large numbers of LED heads in the form of panels battens and moving lights MagicQ s ability to handle large numbers of heads independently ensures that Lighting Designers get to make the most of their LED arrays without being limited by the console With MagicQ you can generate complete rainbow washes across all LED fixtures at the touch of a button with immediate live control during playback through encoders and buttons MagicQ includes a powerful Media engine Pixel Mapper designed for use with arrays of LED fixtures You can design a grid structure based on the layout of the fixtures on the stage and then play back movies bitmaps and text messages on that grid The grid can have spaces in it where there are no fixtures allocated to the position in the grid thus allowing the fixtures to be spread over the grid as they appear on the stage G MagicQ Matr
336. ime code Enable disable time code gen Set current time code gen Activate Playback 18 on wing 1 Go on Playbacks 3 to 5 Set the level of Playback 6 to 60 MagicQ User Manual www chamsys co uk ChamSy 1 OUT 20UT 30UT 2 PROG 2 CUE STACK lt POS lt S gt gt COLOR lt S gt gt lt BEAM lt S gt gt POS 4 ENTER COLOR 5 ENTER POS 4 5 ENTER POS 4 5 ENTER lt ALL LOCATE gt lt ALL SET gt lt ALL REMOVE gt Start button on rear SETUP lt QUIT gt SETUP lt SHIFT QUIT gt SETUP lt View Settings gt lt Cal Touch gt Hold rear reset button 5 seconds Hold rear reset button 15 seconds lt CTRL SOFT button Encoder A gt lt CTRL SOFT button Encoder B gt lt SHIFT SHIFT gt A lt Playback no gt B lt Macro no gt R lt Playback no gt T lt Playback no gt U lt Playback no gt G lt Playback no gt S lt Playback no gt C Playback no K Level L Level M Level J Cue Id E Qid from Stack Store F Qid from Stack Store P Page no 0 is next V View no O Time code W Enable 1 enable 0 dis Q Time code A1 18 G3THRUS5 C6L60 335 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk MagicQ User Manual 336 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 45 Troubleshooting 45 1 No outputs Check whether the console is operating correctly by opening the Outputs Window and looking at the channel data
337. imes lets you enter times for specific heads and for specific attributes ADV LOCATE ADD CHANGE REC SNAP CLEAR VIEW FX FX OPTIONS SHOT ALL Fade Type VIEW LEVELS If you select some heads selected then the Individual Times will show you the times for those heads otherwise it will show times for all heads in the Cue If heads have different then the lowest and highest times are shown You can set split times in the Individual Times by selecting some heads and entering the shortest time followed by THRU and then the longest time For instance if you enter 4 THRU 8 in the fade field then it will set a fade times from 4 seconds to 8 seconds across the selected heads The order is determined by the current order within the selected heads you can change the selection order from the Group Window Using the Next Head Prev Head displays the times for individual heads so you can step through each of the heads in turn to see their times Use All to get back to the summary for all selected heads It is possible to set individual times on a per attribute view but you must have some heads selected for this to work Use Remove to remove delay and fade times from heads the times will be removed and MagicQ will use the General Times for these heads 10 5 2 View Advanced In the View Advanced you can set delay and fade times on a per head and per attribute basis one at a time It is also possible to set multiple heads and multip
338. imple start MagicQ and Winamp MagicQ will automatically detect Winamp If you wish to use more than one instance of Winamp then you must start Winamp with the parameters specified above 36 4 Winamp Programming To program Winamp into a cuestack you can mix and match manual cue triggers timed triggers as well as ones from Winamp E g you can have one cuestack which starts a track when you press the GO button and then timecode will continue the rest Take care to generate a mark cue in the same fashion as you would with a moving head but to set the control channel to Stop Currently if you release a cuestack when a track is playing the track will continue to play Control channel will stay as Play because it is LTP but muted It is best to have a cue at the end of your cuestack which stops the track cleanly Timecode will still be generated even if the volume is muted MagicQ User Manual 303 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 36 5 Winamp Settings There are various preferences you can set in Winamp to best match your application Particular attention should be paid to the preferences regarding playback control such as repeating a track once finished and manual playlist advance MagicQ will only send Play Pause Stop Change track Change position commands to Winamp so it is up to the user to configure Winamp to work best for their requirements For example for some sound effects you may wish to loop them in which
339. in maxi mode either use arkaos vj36max or arkaos vj36maxhw if you are using hardware accelerated graphics The table below shows an example of how to patch three ArKaos 3 6 servers in standard mode without hardware acceleration ArKaos Personality Universe Address 1 arkaos vj36 1 1 1 arkaos vj36 1 44 1 arkaos vj36 1 87 1 arkaos vj36 1 130 1 arkaos vj36 1 173 1 arkaos vj36 1 216 1 arkaos vj36 1 259 1 arkaos vj36 1 302 2 arkaos vj36 2 1 2 arkaos vj36 2 44 2 arkaos vj36 2 87 2 arkaos vj36 2 130 2 arkaos vj36 2 173 2 arkaos vj36 2 216 2 arkaos vj36 2 259 2 arkaos vj36 2 302 3 arkaos vj36 3 1 3 arkaos vj36 3 44 3 arkaos vj36 3 87 3 arkaos vj36 3 130 3 arkaos vj36 3 173 3 arkaos vj36 3 216 3 arkaos vj36 3 259 3 arkaos vj36 3 302 Two pre patched shows are included with the MagicQ and can be downloaded from our website containing 8 layers and several cues to demonstrate the software arkaosdemo shw is for use without hardware accelerated graphics and arkaosdemohw shw is for use with hardware accelerated graphics 26 9 2 Using MagicQ with Catalyst MagicQ supports Catalyst V1 V4 each version having a different head The personality files can be found under the high end folder Patch the required number of heads for the layers for example 6x cat4 heads if you are using Catalyst V4 6 layers Make sure the DMX addresses correspond to the D
340. in the programmer and are recorded into Cues Faders changed in the Preset View are like traditional one per channel preset faders on older lighting consoles this enables levels on channels to be set without affecting programming This is equivalent to Parking on other consoles The SQUARE OFF soft button enables fast programming of intensities Using the touch panel select the channels you wish to have at full and at zero but don t bother being exactly accurate with the level of the selection Pressing SQUARE OFF finishes the job by setting all channels that are less than 50 to 0 whilst setting channels above 50 to full Use the ALL TO FULL and ALL TO ZERO buttons to change the level of all the channels Press the CLEAR soft button to clear the programmer SELECT ACTIVE REMOVE CURSOR PROG Head Type All Next head Finger L R312 o Finger M R312 o Finger R Finger L R53 e Finger M R53 Finger R Scroll Window Gel All Nest gel Head Name All No col w o Pacific Next name 10050 0 MagicQ User Manual 47 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Cham www chamsys co uk 4 12 Locating Heads The first action you are likely to want to do is to locate the heads i e to put them into a starting position Select the required heads and then press the LOCATE button Locating a head brings all the at
341. indow is opened The Page Window is used to select which page of Playbacks is currently in use Selecting of Pages can also be done using the Page Select buttons The Page Window also provides a means for naming Pages Pressing and holding the Page button causes the Page Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Playbacks This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Playbacks Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Playbacks Window is used to manage the allocation of Cue Stacks to Playbacks Cue Stacks can be recorded named removed moved and copied between Playbacks Pressing and holding the Playbacks button causes the Playbacks Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Cue This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Cue Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Cue Window is used to view and modify the contents of a Cue Also see Recording a Cue Pressing and holding the Cue button causes the Cue Window to be temporarily made the active window until the button is released Cue Stack This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Cue Stack Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Cue Stack Window is used to manage the steps in a Cue Stack Steps can be recorded named
342. indow on the other Window You can change the size on the other windows just like on the Main MagicQ Window using the SIZE button 42 5 Monitors on Linux PC systems MagicQ PC for Linux systems currently supports only 1 window It is possible to reduce the size of this window so that all of MagicQ fits on the screen this is particularly useful on Linux tablet PCs such as he EEPC and Acer Aspire One In Setup View System View Remote set the first window to the required size The window should be set to disabled MagicQ User Manual 330 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 43 Handy Hints e Use SHIFT and the cursor keys to carry out actions on multiple items in a Window e When recording items type in a name for the item on the external keyboard before pressing the REC button e To force a minimum look on stage e g during a changeover whilst allowing full programming capability set the minimum value of one or more channels in the Patch Window to a non zero value e When using encoders to bump to the next range value e g next colour press the button associated with the encoder To bump back hold SHIFT and press the button e To modify a playback press and hold the SELECT button associated with the playback and then use the encoders or key in new values e If your CMY colours are coming out inverted i e red is cyan green is purple blue is yellow then you need to set the CMY Invert option for that p
343. ing ALL in Single Mode Highlight Mode or Odd Even Mode exits the mode See All Odd Even Used to enter Odd Even Mode Odd Even mode gives control to the odd or even heads from the currently selected heads Select Used to select a playback as the current playback Provides a means of selecting playbacks when slaving other consoles to the MagicQ where the other console does not have separate flash and select buttons Also used to select playbacks that have been activated through the Playbacks Window as the current playback Release The Release button is used to Release a playback i e to make it inactive By default Cue Stacks are configured so that they release automatically when the fader is brought back to zero However Cue Stacks can be configured to require a manual release See activating and releasing playbacks Blind Used to enter Blind Mode Blind mode stops the contents of the programmer from affecting the output channels of the console Clear Used to clear the programmer Backspace Used to remove the last character from the input If there is no input then it cancels any outstanding actions such as recording naming removing moving or copying Set An action button for setting show data Used to name playbacks and other items Also used to set the values of items such as parameters MagicQ User Manual 344 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Record An action but
344. ing individual Heads ettet ertt b ee Ele eerie rb ee trata eR dg 78 TALL Sinse MOG T EE 78 PAL Qe OGG VC mtm 78 MANS SAI uei ter dece Et tede bibet ibo eta tea Heel batel bb Hatte Hebdos 79 7 11 4 Changing Overall Selection order eese nennen 79 7 11 5 Sub selection of heads from Groups Overall Selection eee 79 T Hag HW SHU Mode in ee Ih eet Esc scores Rei iai eed reti Ere ete eei eadeni 80 1 13 bowhght function dien eis etie Eee EP Re e a ERE Hn ee Linee O EAEE 80 7 14 Reselecting heads using Palettes and Intensities Active Palette and Intensity 80 KE abu CC 81 KNIE nO 81 EX uii HC eve sucdapasscsatng nndebabiesd vuoi E E E EE E mete E E 83 8 1 Addingin EX eroice reure aaia E a e N eas 83 8 1 1 EX Speed Ge SIZE C eE O EE a eE E E E AOE EEE E EE eii A 84 8 1 2 EX Dase Values cet iret oen Petite EES E EEEE EE R IEEE EEN 84 8 1 3 FX ehh E a i ai aa 84 8 1 4 FX Spread offsets over heads eee tete iie peteret pe etae eol reine ei iias 85 8 1 5 EX Pariscocinostedeednte nei ietiesc nidi nde tainen ite inni es 85 8 1 6 EX SeSmentsz E N iicet enim ee SEU Si dest vase T HEURE Ved eder Uer ERE cand p uut et eR ES AE 86 8 1 7 EX Direction amp Inversion eiie eterne te eren eerte edet erae sivesadhedabetessdieverdusbsdancussenseces 86 8 1 8 IRA
345. iret rege o eti ebbe du EL ed igo bud 206 21 4 3 Recording Playback fadets eee erectae eren c sre beber dob eig eroe ee nha 206 2144 Tn Dutt Macros iere etre eret eter eere ae re heit E RED pra gig etie E ee REG 206 21 5 MagicQ Automation Window eesseeseeeseeeeeeenene neret enne i 206 PAUSE STUNDE 207 21 5 2 SernmalPortevents c eene lovedegesceces a enge ie pestes esu resi Lesson EREE evo paar dg oil 208 22 Execute WINGO ee 208 PANE pud T 208 22 2 FullScreen VAeW oie neri ee ae i n dere d e ete n e Ee OG E eri e e d 209 22 3 FadeTS TL 209 22 4 BUttOnS eere erri ghana spa cestin sta T E Dues u Re ee oe tutes s esp t emu tegeret Eu adn ufa 209 22 5 Button appeatati6e uerunt DR pintor eth tridente ipd up tet eode tenga ec edo eee pese Dvd poet apes 210 PPAVEEA Cllr 210 22 7 Modifying items in the Execute Window eese nennen rennen 210 22 8 Pon Eire EDEEES 210 23 Head UOT RT 211 23 1 How Heads are stored in MagicQ essent nennen enne rene 211 23 2 General VIC m 212 PS EE Pv Ec 212 23 22 JP raiiss cenis endorse ien supe faye rise rcetua E at esee RE deed 212 23 2 3 JODLUOlS 5 decides ede tiupte tette eios oe au e ebat re e UR RExs op desd rebote gira aaah Ue dec ER 212 SNP EET E 213
346. irst An alternative to using is to use ENTER This is only supported if the Select heads on intensity set option is set This method works by detecting in the keyboard input and instead of passing the input to the active Window it attempts to parse the input as setting intensities for selecting heads When selecting Colour Beam or Positions the can be replaced by COL BEAM or POSITION if you set the Select Heads and Palettes from keypad option For example 1 gt 4COL 5 ENTER Selects heads 1 to 4 and applies Colour Palette 5 7 3 3 Remove Dimmer Rem Dim Function The keypad now supports functionality to enable selecting of individual selections of heads and automatically setting all other heads to zero intensity this is similar to the Rem Dim function found in some other theatre consoles After selecting heads or setting intensities for heads type For example 1 THRU 4 FULL will set heads 1 to 4 at full intensity and all other heads in the programmer will have their intensity set to zero 4 THRU 8 will bring heads 4 to 8 at full intensity into the programmer whilst all other heads in the programmer will be set to zero intensity 7 4 Selecting heads using the rig plan view Heads can be selected from a plan of the rig in the View Plan view of the Outputs window See creating rig plans MagicQ User Manual 74 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 7 5 Head Macros The c
347. is Gobo Gobo GlSp GiSp Focu Zoom Efe ES d f a 000 000 4255 Cont lamp or open oo ooo oss wide gt open aopen o 000__ gobo infooo 128 effect cleffect i i lamp or 000 ooo 255 open wde openo epeno o00 _ fooboinfooo 128 effect cleffecti lamp or 000 ooo 255 open wide openg openo o00 soboin ono 128 effect cleffect i lamp or 000 open gi 000 You can choose what information is shown for the heads using the VIEW VALS VIEW RAW and VIEW PLAYBACK and VIEW CUE IDS soft buttons VIEW VALS shows the values including range and palette names VIEW RAW shows the numeric values VIEW PLAYBACKS shows which Playback is controlling the attribute and VIEW CUE IDS shows which Cue ID in a Playback is controlling the attribute The following colours are used Red Attributes that are in the Programmer White Attributes under control of a Playback Blue Attributes controlled by the currently selected Playback Grey Attributes not under control of Playbacks or Programmer 11 2 Intensity View The Intensity View shows just intensity information for the patched heads enabling a large number of heads to be shown within the window Press the VIEW CHANS and VIEW INT soft buttons Intensity level is shown as a percentage MagicQ User Manual 108 Version 1 5 7 5 OUTPUTS Hd name No dnt Hdname No Int Hdname No Int Hdname No dnt Hdname No nt Use the VIEW HORIZ soft button to change whether heads
348. is as programmed As the fader is lowered then the FX size is reduced until it reaches zero size at 0 A particular channel can only be controlled from one FX Size Master Normally when this setting is set to Yes the setting Cue Stack is an Intensity Master should be set to No It is possible to have a Cue Stack set to both a Size Master and a Speed Master When this setting is set to No then the Cue Stack behaves normally 16 3 3 Cue Stack is a Speed Master When this setting is set to Yes then the Cue Stack behaves as an FX Speed Master The Cue Stack normal Cue execution behaviour is disabled The channels stored in the first Cue are used to determine which channels are under control of the Intensity Master The actual levels of the channels in the first Cue is not important only that the Channels have some level in the Cue In order for the Intensity Master to be activated the Go button must be pressed To release the Intensity Master the Playback must be selected and the REL button pressed The Button settings Flash activates Stack and Flash releases Stack are ignored In order to avoid sudden changes in output level the fader should be raised to 10046 before activating or releasing When the fader is at 100 then FX size is as programmed As the fader is lowered then the FX size is reduced until it reaches zero size at 0 A particular channel can only be controlled from one FX Speed Master Normally when this setting i
349. is function takes the Cues running on all active playbacks and includes them into the programmer based on the level of the fader Both channel information and FX information is included into the programmer To snapshot the current output open the Programmer Window and press the Snapshot soft button There is a shortcut for recording a complete snapshot hold THRU and press REC MagicQ User Manual 112 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 12 2 Editing using Include and Update method Cues can be edited using INCLUDE and UPDATE This includes the Cue data into the programmer where it can then be changed before it is saved back to the Cue using Update First clear the Programmer then include the required Cue back into the Programmer Modify the required values in the Programmer and then use Update to re record the Cue You can include multiple Cues into the programmer When you press UPDATE the last Cue that you included will be modified The Status Display shows which Cue was the last one to be Included 12 3 Updating a Cue with the contents of the programmer Record Merge You can quickly and easily merge the contents of the programmer into the current Cue on a Playback by holding the S button for the playback and pressing REC The programmer is merged into the current Cue on the Playback To merge into a specific Cue on a Playback hold and REC to select Record Merge and then type the Cue ID on the keypad befor
350. is more reliable on heavily loaded networks Thus consoles can be set to track the playback exactly or just to honour DBO and Swap status This means that for example when using two consoles one for generic lights and one intelligent lights pressing a Swap button on one console will affect both consoles It is possible to synchronise with other non MagicQ consoles or external computers that support ChamSys Remote Ethernet Protocol 28 5 2 Configuration MagicQ software v1 3 6 3 and before On the master unit set Remote Ethernet Protocol to Chamsys Rem tx and on the slave units set Remote Ethernet Protocol to Chamsys Rem rx For individual playbacks set the Cue Stack option Send playback state to other consoles For all main playbacks set the Setup option Send playback state to other consoles 28 5 3 Configuring which consoles Playback sync to which consoles When there are multiple consoles on a network it may be that consoles are controlling different ArtNet universes and therefore there may be more than one master console sending synchronisation information on the network It is possible to set a MagicQ console to only accept synchronisation information from a particular console In Multiple Console Settings Playback Sync IP enter the IP address of the console to accept synchronisation from A value of 0 0 0 0 indicates that it will accept synchronisation from any console on the network MagicQ User Manual 26
351. is used for each song in a show The current page is selected through the NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE buttons on the main playback section or by selecting a page in the Page Window The 24 Playbacks on each wing are divided up into two rows of 12 Playbacks Each of the rows has separate NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE buttons This enables the Page used by these Playbacks to be set differently to the main Playbacks This provides significant flexibility to how shows are played back for example one section of a wing can be used to control par lamps whilst another could be used to control intelligent heads Changing the Page of the par lamps would not change the Page of the heads 2 7 FX The console contains a powerful engine for creating special effects FX FX can be applied to a group of heads at the touch of a button there is no need to program lots of different Cues to create the effect Special MagicQ User Manual 24 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk eed and size of the FX to be modified to match effects can be easily modified live ena the mood of the show The console supports an extensive library of standard FX such as circles squares pan and tilt saws lifts zig zags etc In addition the console supports FX on colour beam and intensity attributes The console supports programming and storing of new custom FX which can then be re used in shows as required The FX engine enables complete shows to be programmed wit
352. ish to temporarily add in a tilt saw Select the MAC500s from the Group Window In the Prog Window select the ADD FX soft button Select the TILT SAW FX Adjust the encoder wheels as appropriate If you wish to set the speed size of the FX before you make it live on stage then go into BLIND mode before you ADD in the FX Then you can adjust the chase without affecting the stage output Use the Move View in the Outputs Window to get a 2D picture of how your FX will look Then when you are happy go out of BLIND mode and the FX will appear on stage Alternatively use the ADD FX ZERO SIZE soft button this adds an FX into the programmer exactly as when using the ADD FX soft button except that the Zero Size option is set You can then select the size you want using the SIZE encoder before pressing the ZERO SIZE soft button to clear the Zero Size option Use the CHANGE FX soft button to change the waveform of the FX live Pressing and releasing BLIND will enable you to busk the FX in and out e g in the chorus verse transitions 17 10 Applying palettes with time Palettes can be applied with a time by simple entering a time in seconds before selecting the palette entry to apply For example to apply a 4 5 second movement from the current position to your programmed centre vocals position simply type 4 5 and select the vocals position in the Position Window The fades are carried out in the programmer you don t need any play
353. it also confirms that the command has been accepted and shows any error messages when a command is not possible Selected GROUP 5 3 7 3 Head Control The area around the two large rotary encoders is referred to as the head control area Itis used to alter the parameters of individual heads and apply effects such as fans over groups of heads The NEXT HEAD and PREV HEAD buttons are used to select an individual head to modify The other buttons control the selection mode LOCATE HIGHLIGHT FAN SINGLE ODD EVEN and ALL MagicQ User Manual 33 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 3 7 4 Editor Buttons The Editor buttons are used to modify program data The 8 buttons on the right hand side are the action buttons which are used to modify show data The action buttons are UNDO REMOVE MOVE COPY SET INCLUDE UPDATE RECORD The buttons on the left BLIND and CLEAR affect the programmer REL and SELECT affect playbacks SHIFT selects alternate functions lt undoes keyboard input and clears actions 3 7 5 Playback The Playback area is situated directly below the touch screen and consists of 10 playbacks each with a fader and four buttons FLASH GO STOP SELECT The area above each of the playbacks on the touch screen is used to provide information about the status of the playback ORANO MASTER The playback area also contains a Grand Master a Sub Master Page Select buttons and a Manual Play
354. iting windows such as the Patch Window GROUP Mac500 63 64 65 66 G1 45 82 5 G3 4 G4 8 lE EG 4G 3 G8 3 68 12 G1 6 All Dimmer All Mac250 All CF7HE Al TH All StgScan Al DimNocol DimR27 DimR59 SBeamPC CF1200HE G11 12 812 G13 12 G14 12 815 12 G15 4 G17 1 G18 4 G19 35 Dim R312 Dim A356 All Finger L All Finger M All Finger A All Pacific Al S4 All Spots All Ledion Hdno Name Pliny Tin Swap Merge From 1 001 000000001 001 Ber 1003 00000011 ooa Spos Onos Nom ERM 1 004 000000100 004 Spots ONocol omy EN 1 005 000000101 005 Finer eR5Smdoo Nmf ERM 1 007 000000111 007 FigerL R356 Middle Lavende Nom Beneric Dimmer 1 008 000001000 AR27MedumRed Nom Generic Dimmer 1 009 rmonon1on no3 fringe O R32 Cana tT o A window is displayed by pressing the appropriate window button Changing window does not affect programming or playback Multiple windows can be displayed at one time by sizing the windows appropriately In addition a complete configuration of windows i e a complete view can be selected using CTRL and the top soft buttons For example to select the Palettes view Groups Positions Colours and Beams press CTRL and the first top soft button ui Sail inm ee e es go When a window button is pressed that window becomes the active window
355. iverse 1 on the first ArtNet Universe Art 0 If you are using Ethernet to DMX512 conversion boxes then you will need to configure the boxes to respond to the correct ArtNet sub net and ArtNet universe With ChamSys 3 Universe Ethernet to DMX boxes you need to set up the two rotary switches to the correct values the left one for ArtNet sub net and the right one for ArtNet universe The interface will then decode the three ArtNet universes starting from that ArtNet subnet and universe In most networks the ArtNet sub net is set to 0 you can change this on MagicQ in the DMX I O View of The Setup Window by paging right The ArtNet universe is the same as the Universe set in Out Uni and In Uni DMX I O above if you are using only one Ethernet to DMX512 interface then you can use Universe 0 If you are using multiple Ethernet Interfaces then you will need to set each Ethernet Interface to a different Art Net Universe for example when using two ChamSys 3 Universe Ethernet Interfaces set the first Interface to ArtNet Universe 0 and the second one to ArtNet Universe 3 MagicQ Media Centre includes a DMX viewer for monitoring ArtNet on the Network select Devices DMX View The data on the network is shown in pictorial form Universes that are active are shown in white whilst universes that that are inactive are shown in grey 45 Connecting a MagicQ Playback Wing To connect a MagicQ Playback Wing simply connect the Wing to the
356. ix Viewer MagicQ enables LED fixtures to be used in their high resolution mode enabling individual control of each LED pixel rather than the restricted modes where Lighting Designers are reliant on the same old in built effects that everyone has seen many times Spee Mar SpE m m m tn Fi a m mmm eee m lll mmm m EJEJEE3EHEOET el EE TE I m m m EJEJEEOGEGEE TE E TE 7E 3I p C CI I da 25 1 Patching LED on MagicQ MagicQ is designed so that it can handle different makes of LED fixture independently Thus the RGB colours of the fixture are patched as generic RGB fixtures whilst any extra in built fixture FX are patched separately It is still possible to patch LED fixtures in their low resolution modes just choose the correct personality and the fixture will appear like any other fixture However if you wish to achieve more then we recommend taking the time to patch in the higher resolution mode The generic led3chan and generic led4chan can be used with most LED fixtures If MagicQ does not have the required personality in its library then you can easily build your own personality using the in built Personality Editor 25 2 Using the Grid view in the Outputs Window MagicQ User Manual 224 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Cham www chamsys co uk To make the most of your LED fixture you ca
357. k Window page right using the N macro command It is possible to over ride the channel specified in the MIDI commands using the MIDI Out Channel in the Setup Window CUE STACK CSi Midi loop test Track Zeroold HTP ZerooldFX Reloldchans Macro Comment n144 38 127 MIDI note commands are 3 bytes long consisting of the command note on note off byte followed by the note and then the velocity note on off note velocity For example to send a note for middle C set the macro field to the following N144 60 127 Note 60 on velocity 127 N128 60 0 Note 60 off MagicQ accepts both N and n to specify MIDI commands MagicQ User Manual 292 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 34 1 2 MIDI receive To receive MIDI commands first set the MIDI In Type in the Setup Window You can choose between None Any chan and Requested Chan When set to Requested Chan the requested channel is configured in the MIDI IN Chan field When using the MagicQ MIDI SMPTE interface for MIDI only the Timecode options can be set to none and then the last received MIDI command will be shown in the Status Display MagicQ uses a text mapping file miditable txt in the MagicQ folder to convert from MIDI commands to MagicQ serial commands An example file miditable txt is included which maps midi notes to the playbacks PB1 to PB34 Each line in the file specifies a received MIDI command a
358. l connection to MagicQ either directly via network cable or via a wireless router The IP address of the PC Pocket PC or mobile phone must be set to be on the same network as the MagicQ this is generally the ArtNet IP addressing scheme so the device must have an IP address starting with 2 e g 2 0 0 2 and a subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 The Execute page is very similar to the Execute Windows on the console but accessible through any PC with a browser on the network it enables users to remote manage the console via the Execute window The Windows pages enable users to view all the windows on the console remotely within a browser This is useful for checking the status of a remote console or for easy printing of console show data MagicQ User Manual 278 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Mozilla Firefox www chamsys co uk File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help MT a e ai a E http 2 9 200 78 8080 patch htmi Change window oues NN oe PATCH WINDOW Head type DMX 256 1 Hd no Name Gel P Inv T Inv Swap Merge From Generic Dimmer 1 001 000000001 001 Spots No col Norm Generic Dimmer 1 002 000000010 002 Spots No col Norm Generic Dimmer 1 003 000000011 003 Spots No col Norm Generic Dimmer 1 004 000000100 004 Spots No col Norm Generic Dimmer 1 005 000000101 005
359. l need to configure the access point with a SSID IP address subnet mask and if required encryption Most access points have an inbuilt web server that enables configuration from a PC or Mac using a web browser The web server generally has a username and password you will need to consult the instruction manual for your particular access point Access points usually default to a standard IP addess such as 192 168 1 1 and subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Most acess points have DHCP support i e the access point will attempt to give out IP MagicQ User Manual 273 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChawSys www chamsys co uk addresses to other computers on the network DHCP may be enable or disabled by default depending on the type of access point Consult the manual for your access point to determine how to configure it In order for the wireless access point to work correctly with MagicQ the access point should be in the same IP address range as the MagicQ console MagicQ PC Mac For example if the console is set to IP address 2 9 200 5 then the access point should have an IP address on the 2 9 200 x network e g 2 9 200 1 Note that many access points only support subnet masks of 255 255 255 0 instead of the normal ArtNet subnet mask 255 0 0 0 This can be overcome by simply making sure that all your devices are on the same subnet i e all devices have a 2 9 200 x address The remote device iPhone iPod iPad Android should also have
360. l net subnet address eee escceseeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeaeesaeecaaecsaecsaeceaeenseeeeeeeeeeseeeses 189 9 12 11 Wireless Mode nette teet tete aE cabgceannaceuvedead dedvevtdeesedeedgate PU LR eve 189 19 12 12 Wireless IP address sssessesesssseseseseeeees eene enne idaroki Tio nir ERS tnnt SE enne 189 19 12 13 Wareless subnet address eese perterritis ere Fede dn entere ce een ede pria apr bad 189 19 12 14 W reless channel eicere eet tre Ire etre enun tbe cor e EIER letta Eee ERU IRR en 190 19 12 15 Wareless SSID ici hee ido e n pene ain ERI eor irt ce E eo ap EROR E EE EE E Ra 190 19 12 16 Wireless encryption eeeseeeseeeeeeenenenen ener nnne enr ener en eren eren te entente 190 I9 12 T7 Wireless Key ie sente etr to teer eter trei Desa dee e EUM Widens e E EE Iusto E Pew Cedo etd 190 19 13 IMouENIJMDPIM Mr 190 19 13 1 MagicQ USB Wings and Interfaces eese nennen rennen 190 19 13 2 MagicDMX mode eene eer ette rit eie eee eT obe brad edo RA aR 190 19 13 3 Serial COM Port ES 191 19 13 4 NISUEIBDENR BITE 191 19 13 5 Seral parity ANE 191 19 13 6 Serial data DIts 22 beetle Le t tede an aea ir ea ER EEEREN 191 19 13 7 Serial stop Dits esenciou 191 19 13 8 Serial remote protocol nio teen i siege ite ete LEE ee ote age age tege e eee Eo ERR d 191 19 13 9 Serial touch monitor tn oe cc fecto bath ei obe i op feo i eb e Ea Ea Sie 191 19 13 10 Remote trigger type eee r
361. l of the playbacks In addition the Sub Master can be configured to control the level of the FLASH buttons Both the Grand Master and the Sub Master have FLASH buttons which respectively bump the overall HTP output level and the HTP output level of the playbacks to full LTP channels are not affected by the master faders MagicQ User Manual 126 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 14 4 2 Dead Black Out DBO Above the Grand Master there is a DBO button Pressing this button causes all HTP values to be set to zero thus generating a black out Releasing the button causes the original HTP levels to be restored LTP channels are not affected by the DBO button 14 4 3 Add Swap Above the Grand Master there is an ADD SWAP button which controls the function of the playback FLASH buttons When set to ADD pressing a FLASH button causes the playback to be added to the output When set to SWAP pressing a FLASH button again causes the playback to be added to the output but all other playbacks are removed from the output Each FLASH button has an LED which is lit green for ADD and red for SWAP The ADD SWAP functionality only affects HTP channels on the playbacks LTP channels are not affected by the FLASH buttons The level of the playback is determined by the master faders see configuring the masters Cue Stacks can be set to always swap Open the Cue Stack window and press the SELECT button with the playback
362. layback 1 in MagicQ You should see the fingers of PAR cans start to chase If you don t ensure you are using the correct executable file for the way you have set up MagicQ MagicQ is set up correctly and that you have connectivity between the MagicQ PC or console and the PC running Capture 41 4 2 Receiving Patch Data from Capture It is possible for patch data to be transmitted from Capture to MagicQ when connected via CITP protocol Start a new show on MagicQ and then in the Patch Window press the Visualiser Patch soft button This will download the Patch information from Capture to MagicQ MagicQ uses a fields in the personality to specify the Capture manufacturer name Make and Capture moving light name 41 4 8 Troubleshooting Problem Capture does not receive any data Solution Check that you have set up MagicQ correctly with correct IP address and enabled outputs and there is connectivity between PCs Problem When I raise faders some lights come on but not what I expect Solution Check that you have set up MagicQ s outputs correctly Problem Using ArtNet but the lights do weird things Solution Check there are not two pieces of equipment outputting ArtNet Problem Using CITP on a LAN but it doesn t receive data Solution Check there are no other copies of Capture running MagicQ can only connect to one copy of Capture MagicQ User Manual 323 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 41 5 WYSIWYG Mag
363. le attributes by highlighting multiple items using SHIFT and the cursor keys Fan also works in this view but note that the order of fanning is fixed to the order used in the Patch Window To fan in alternate orders use the View Simple view 10 6 Fade Type It is possible to specify the fade type in both the Programmer Window and Cue Window in the View Times View Simple view MagicQ User Manual 102 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Default fades according to Instant attribute in Personality Fade always fades Snap at start always snaps at beginning of fade Snap at end always snaps at end of fade Note that on software versions before v1 3 4 4 when programming advanced times MagicQ always performed a fade time regardless of the Instant attribute in the Personality In v1 3 4 4 and above MagicQ defaults to fading according to the Instant attribute Shows recorded with software prior to v1 3 4 3 will play back on v1 3 4 4 the same as they would on previous software i e all the advanced times will be set to Fade 10 7 Recording to a specific Cue Id To Record to a specific Cue Id in a Cue Stack enter the Cue Id number on the keypad before you press RECORD and select the Playback S button It is also possible when the Setup option Select Heads and Palettes from keypad is set to record Cues using only the keypad Press Record Enter to record directly to the cur
364. le enter the console name followed by the port number e g for chamsys176 enter the URL in your browser Note that by default most browsers use port 80 so you must explicitly specify port 8080 in the URL or it will not work chamsys176 8080 or you can use the IP address of the MagicQ e g 2 9 200 5 2 9 200 5 8080 This URL will get you to the home page on the MagicQ console a general system overview and a main menu of items including Remote Execute Windows and Network On some browsers PDAs you may need to enter the full http line http chamsys176 8080 index html or http 2 9 200 5 8080 index html Be Ee Ve ety Domen tots ep S S YD GF D nuro2 7 00 MagicQ Chris PC Time Thu Jul 10 19 22 39 2008 Version 1 3 64 IP Address 2 9 200 78 Show show capture sbk REMOTE KEYPAD EXECUTE WINDOW MAGICQ WINDOWS MAGICO NETWORK MagicQ User Manual 277 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChawSys www chamsys co uk The Remote page is a simple remote focus for setting channel levels It can also be accessed by adding remote to the URL This is useful for Pocket PC and mobile phones to go directly to the remote control page chamsys176 8080 remote MagicQ Remote Mozilla Firefox File Edit View History Bookmarks Tools Help m u e c3 a L http 2 9 200 78 8080 remote html In order to set up a PC Pocket PC or mobile phone to connect to MagicQ you must ensure that there is a physica
365. le into the show heads folder and copy the icons all file into the show icons folder Then restart MagicQ SHIFT RESET in Setup Window To load a single personality into MagicQ simply copy the personality file mypersonality hed into the heads folder The console generates an index of personalities whenever it is restarted if new personalities have been added To force the index file to be regenerated go to File Manager and press SHIFT RECREATE INDEX New personalities should then appear in Patch 23 11 Modifying existing fixtures Existing fixtures can be modified by simply making changes and pressing SAVE Note however that these changes will be lost if you change software version as this loads the latest personality libraries If there are genuine errors in the personality then please let us know so that we can update our libraries The Personalities in the ChamSys library are protected to avoid accidental changes to them MagicQ prompts the user before allowing changes to the personalities In the Head Editor original ChamSys personalities are indicated by an LO in the tile bar If the personality has been edited it will only show er If you wish to modify an existing personality then you should save it as a new type or new mode The easiest way to make a new personality is to use SAVE AS to save as a new name The new name used will automatically update the Manufacturer Name Short Name and Mode fields Orignally pers
366. le simply enable the MagicQ Wings and Interfaces option 19 4 2 Connecting Playback Wings and Extra Wings To configure Playback Wings and Extra Wings open the Setup Window and choose View System View Wings view In the Type field choose Playback Extra Wing When the console has detected the Playback wing it will show as Fitted in the status field If you wish to connect more than one Playback or Extra Wing then enable the required number of Wings Make sure you enable enough the same number of wings as you connect to MagicQ Connecting more Wings to MagicQ than you enable will cause unpredictable results 19 4 3 Connecting an Execute Wing The MagicQ Execute Wing is fully supported in software version v1 3 8 1 The Execute Wing has 48 playbacks arranged as 12 fader playbacks and 36 button only playbacks The Execute Wing can be configured simply to control Playbacks or it can be set in a mode whereby the 36 button only playbacks become a 72 button matrix for use selecting heads palettes groups media and execute buttons To configure the MagicQ Execute Wing it must be set up as two consecutive wings in the Setup View System View Wings The first wing must be configured as Execute and the second wing as Execute Top This corresponds to the 48 playbacks whereas with standard Playback Wings there are only 24 playbacks The Execute Wing has a mode button called MENU When this is pressed and held then the 2 row of butt
367. le that was recorded at the start of Friday Archive files are overwritten every 24 hours except for the daily files which are overwritten every 7 days 18 14 Using shows on different MagicQ products and show versions In general MagicQ show files are backwards and forwards compatible Thus you can load any show into any version of software Loading shows created and modified on newer software versions into older software versions may result in some features not being supported or not working exactly as expected In March 2006 new MagicQ consoles were changed from 6 universes to 12 universes MagicQ software version v1 2 5 4 and above supports 12 universes In December 2007 ChamSys launched the Pro range of consoles with software version v1 3 4 3 which supports 18 universes In May 2010 new MagicQ Pro 2010 consoles support 32 universes MagicQ Pro consoles support 18 whilst MagicQ Expert support 6 MagicQ PC Mac and Linux software supports 32 this enables backup from a PC Mac system 18 14 1 Configuring number of Universes To enable 12 18 or 32 universes go to Setup Window and VIEW DMX I O and select SET NUM UNIVERSES soft button It is necessary to restart MagicQ before the changes take effect Show files are compatible except that it is not possible to load a show using more universes than the console is set to So if a show has channels patched to universes 7 to 12 it will not be loaded into a console set to support 6 uni
368. lear the programmer 6 2 Using the encoders MagicQ User Manual 67 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk A single fader or multiple faders can be controlled using the top right rotary encoder in the Intensity Window The encoder controls the fader which the cursor is over Selecting a block of faders by pressing the cursor keys whilst holding the SHIFT button down enables multiple faders to be selected 6 3 Using the keypad The level of dimmers and the intensity channel of heads can be set from the keypad Head numbers are used to reference the required dimmers and heads If you intend to use this method for setting intensities then you should set up the head numbers when patching It is easy to do the console can automatically renumber them or they can be set to be the same as the DMX start address of the dimmer head See the section on patching Keypad setting of intensities is supported regardless of which Window is currently active To set heads 1 to 4 to 40 key in 1 THRU 4 40 To set heads 1 to 4 and heads 8 to 11 to 100 key in 1 THRU 4 8 THRU 11 FULL To set heads 1 through 12 but not head 7 to 10 more than their current value key in 1 THRU 12 7 10 The console supports theatre style key entry so you can set head 1 to 40 by typing 1 4 ENTER and you can set head 1 to 4 by typing 1 4 ENTER or 1 04 Note that if the Auto enter on keypad intensity set option is set you do not need
369. les another channel on the console to control the level of the output of the channel this is useful with RGB LED fixtures where you wish to make another channel control the overall level of the RGB The Mul In option multiplies the received input with the console value for the channel MagicQ can therefore be used as a DMX modifier to modify the level of individual or groups of channels It is possible to set multiple channels all to copy or multiply by one channel Use SHIFT and the cursor keys to select all the required channels and enter chan 0 5 24 Customising Locate values and Default values MagicQ allows the user to define the Locate and Default values for each attribute of each patched heads The Locate values are the values that are used when the Locate button is pressed The Default values are the values that are output when a channel is not in the programmer and no playback is controlling a channel Note that the Setup Window option Chans default to Locate vals must be enabled for this mode of operation By default the Locate values and Default values are taken from the personality of the patched head these typically put the position to centre beam open colour white and intensity at full These values can be re programmed by creating a Cue that represents the desired Locate Values and or a Cue that represents the desired Default Values Simply record a Cue into the Cue Store and then press the SET LOC CUE or SET
370. les can be generated in a spreadsheet e g Microsoft Excel and saved as csv format X Microsoft Excel dimmercurveuseri csv 8 File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Du Eg ey sm arial 10 B I u 1 0 sb 1 ea 2 4l 3 5 4 6 5 EA 6 8 T User dimmer curves are not stored into the show or settings files Each console that uses user dimmer curves must have the curves stored in the show heads folder In the CSV file the line after the last line of data the 259 line can hold a name for the curve which is then displayed in MagicQ The name has a maximum of 15 characters 5 13 Changing the DMX channels of dimmers and heads Dimmers and Heads can be moved to different channels as required When they are moved all the programming and palettes associated with them also moves to the new channels MagicQ User Manual 59 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk In VIEW HEADS simply edit the DMX field with a new address In VIEW CHANS press the MOVE button then select the channel field of the Dimmer you wish to move Then select the channel field of the destination Heads are moved in the same way as Dimmers for the source channel select any of the channels of the Head If you try and move to a location where there are already channels patched then the console will prompt whether you wish to continue and move the already patched channels aside If you confirm YES the al
371. llows up to 4 different tracks to be played simultaneously 36 1 Winamp personality The winamp personality file for MagicQ has 6 channels with 2 reserved for future use on the current version It provides the basic control of volume pan and track control for the currently selected playlist in Winamp There isn t a nice interface exposed in winamp to select folders or several playlists so it is restricted to the current playlist The channels are as follows Volume 0 Mute 255 100 Setting the volume to 0 will not pause playback Pan 0 Left 128 Center 255 Right Control The control channel has four different ranges Stop 0 15 Stops the playback in winamp Pause 16 31 Pauses the playback in winamp Play 32 47 Sets the track and position in the track and then starts playback Continue 48 63 Continues playback after it has been paused or stopped previously Continue from Stop starts the track from the beginning whereas continuing from Paused will resume playback from where it was paused Position 16 bit MagicQ User Manual 302 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk This is the track position in the number of frames from the start of the track at 25fps A large step on the high res encoder will be about 10 seconds This updates the track instantly if changed allowing you to scrub through the track if necessary If you scrub off the end of the track it will restart Track The number of t
372. llpaper using the SET WALLPAPER soft button The wallpaper should be a bmp or jpeg of the size set by the WIN SIZE button For MagicQ consoles the internal touch screen is 800x600 resolution Use SHIFT CLR WALLPAPER to remove the wallpaper 22 7 Modifying items in the Execute Window It is now possible to view directly an item in the Execute Window using the View Item soft button This makes it easy to change FX and Chase speed quickly 22 8 Automated Start MagicQ includes several options for automated start of Playbacks and Executes These options are available on MagicQ consoles and on MagicQ PC systems when connected to a MagicQ USB Wing or Interface See Setup View Settings Playback Activate Playbacks On Start MagicQ User Manual 210 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 23 Head Editor The Head Editor is accessed from the Edit Head soft button in the Patch Window Making changes modifies the personality files stored on the MaqicQ disc and used for all new shows The Head Editor consists of 5 views for modifying data General Channels Ranges Palettes Macros In each of the views new values can be entered using the keypad or keyboard New entries can be added to the lists by pressing the Insert soft button The top right encoder wheel can be used to modify the item where the cursor is placed The Head Editor will start up with the chosen head i e the last head you chose for patching If you have not yet
373. lose all windows press SHIFT and CLOSE Press SETUP to open the Setup Window M VIEW VIEW FILE SAVE BACKUP SAVE IMPORT LOAD NEW CAL QUIT imeem SYSTEM DMXI O MANAGER SHOW TOUSE SETTINGS SETTINGS SHOW SHOW TOUCH Play Mode SETUP show capture shw Normal Mode Keypad Windows Cue MIDI Multi Storage Timecode Console Safe Normal Parameter Setting Product type j ok Prog Mode Scroll ox en Disable modifications CO 1 Disable test mode No Disable macros Set Mode Pinto backup E Keep a backup archive Show fle path defaults show stow CS iggleLapxP SatJan 19 19 43 06 2008 Ver 1 3 4 6 Page 1 Add gt 4 2 Calibrating the Touch Screen If the touch screen does not seem to be responding to your touch correctly then you may need to calibrate the touch screen Press the SETUP button to open the Setup Window Press the CAL TOUCH soft button When asked for confirmation press on the keypad or press the CAL TOUCH soft button again Calibration works by finding the bottom left and top right corners of the screen First press the bottom left of the touch screen and then the top right You may wish to use a fine but blunt object MagicQ User Manual 38 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 43 Starting a New Show To start a new show go to the Setup Window and press the NEW SHOW soft button This will clear the current show from memory shows that have been previously saved to disc will not be
374. lternatively scroll around the Window using the cursor keys and press ENTER when the cursor is over the correct head FILE MANAGER hard drive show heads abstract ac Birstar alkalite American Amptown apollo lighting DJ T T mines lacia Chromlech cio city Clay cls coef coemar colours columbus q theat Paky effect elite ETC eurocolour2 eurolite eurotech eurotech co c34 euro fly futurelight G Lites generic geni gip griven high end hippo hq hubbell hungaroflas ipi irideon ib JB power h systems labscan lampo lanzini laserage le licht light light lighting maitre technik curtain sky inov Once you have chosen a head you will be returned to the Patch Window Press the PATCH IT soft button to patch the head You will be prompted for the number you wish to prompt and the address where you wish to patch the heads Use to patch at a specific address expolite fal compulite constella coolux cxi dtek desisti dha discotech diversitron DTS dmg ic it evl MagicQ User Manual 43 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk Enter number uni chan offset e g 5 2 1 20 gt 592 1 For example to patch 5 Mac250 mode 4 to Universe 2 channel enter 5 2 1 If you wish to patch multiple channels at fixed offsets e g five Martin Mac250s at DMX channels 1 21 41 61 81 then enter 5 2 1 20 PATCH Martin Mac250m4 Hdno Name Pliny Tiny Swap Merge From Marin IS 2027 nor ors ec owes ro e no m
375. lues from the Palette for the currently selected heads Other attributes can be added using Record Merge If a Cue Stack already exists on the Playback then the extra Cues are appended to the end of the Cue Stack Copying a Group to a Playback makes a Cue with Intensity at 100 for all the channels in the Group Selecting multiple groups using the cursor SHIFT cursor keys and then copying to a Playback creates a multi step Cue Stack of intensities one Cue step for each group This is an easy way to create for example an intensity chase of your different moving light groups or your different par can colour groups 9 14 Selecting Palettes from the keypad You can select palettes from the keypad Set the Setup Option Select channels in Beam Col Pos to yes default in theatre mode To select a palette use COL 5 ENTER BEAM 3 ENTER Timed fades can be entered at the same time e g to apply colour palette 5 with a time of 4 seconds spread across all the selected heads COL 5 4 ENTER It is possible to record include and remove Palettes from the keypad RECORD GROUP group number ENTER RECORD POS palette entry ENTER RECORD COL palette entry ENTER RECORD BEAM palette entry ENTER MagicQ User Manual 98 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 10 Programmer The programmer is the function of the console where show data is configured for recording The programmer takes priority over all
376. lux playerstdgraphv4 hed 108 coolux playerstdcamv4 hed 129 coolux playerstdvidv4 hed 146 coolux playerstdvidv4 hed 168 coolux playerstdgraphv4 hed 190 MagicQ User Manual 249 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk 211 coolux playerstdgraphv4 hed coolux playerstdgraphv4 hed coolux playerstdgraphv4 hed coolux playerstdcamv4 hed Mediaplayer Pro Personality coolux playerprovidv4 hed Adress coolux Pay pavia is 2 E 1 1 ss aan Lei penises 1 26 9 3 2 Coolux Mediaserver Ther are 3 types of Mediaserver in v4 1 e Mediaserver LT 4 video layers 8 graphic layers and 2 camera layers who controls the 2 outputs e Mediaserver STD with 8 video layers 16 graphic layers and 2 camera layers which control the 2 outputs e Mediaserver PRO with 16 video layers 32 graphic layers and 2 camera layers which control the 2 outputs 3 owe eenesi Red d 1 cot seer vidya 1 8 coolux server vid v4 hed coolux server vid v4 hed D coolux server graphv4hed 1 M9 MagicQ User Manual 250 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd coolux server_graph_v4 hed coolux server_graph_v4 hed coolux server_graph_v4 hed coolux server_graph_v4 hed www chamsys co uk coolux server_graph_v4 hed coolux server_graph_v4 hed coolux server_graph_v4 hed coolux server_out se_v4 hed 26 9 3 3 Thumbnails on Coolux Pandoras Box V4 5 To get thumbnails on a Coolux Pand
377. ly be recorded The Group Window has two views VIEW GROUPS enables selection of heads using groups whilst VIEW HEADS enables individual selection of heads In VIEW GROUPS pressing the touch screen for a particular group selects all the heads associated with that group All other heads are deselected In VIEW HEADS individual heads are selected by pressing the touch screen All other heads are deselected Use PG UP and PG DN to scroll through the heads To select multiple heads hold SHIFT and press a head The head will be toggled in and out of selection 7 2 Using Groups Once a group has been recorded then pressing the touch screen for the group will make all the heads in the group selected All other heads will be deselected To select multiple groups press SHIFT and a group to toggle the group in and out of selection Note that you can change an option in the Setup Window to enable multiple groups to be selected without pressing SHIFT GROUP When in the VIEW GROUPS view you can also use the keypad to select a group simply enter the group number You can use and to select multiple groups Pressing before a group is selected adds the group to previously selected heads i e the heads in the group are all selected as before but other heads are not deselected For example to select groups 1 and 3 press 1 3 ENTER MagicQ User Manual 72 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Chany www chamsys co uk To deselect group 4 from the
378. m the Intensity Window To name a Dimmer in the Intensity Window either a Type in the name on the external keyboard and then press the SET NAME soft button b Press SET then type in the name on the screen keyboard Then press the SET NAME soft button MagicQ User Manual 69 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk To set a Gel Colour in the Intensity Window either a Type in the colour number on the keypad Press the SET GEL soft button Note that colour numbers are assumed to be Lee proceed the colour with a dot for Rosco colours b Typein the colour name or part of it on the external keyboard and then press the SET NAME soft button c Press SET then type in the colour name or part of it on the screen keyboard Then press the SET NAME soft button Note you should not press ENTER in any of the above operations as this will try and use the text or number you have entered to set the level for the fader which the cursor is over 6 5 1 Programming of Dimmers using gel colours In the Intensity Window you can filter out faders based on gel colour head type and head name thus providing a view of only the data you are interested in at the time Use the top three left rotary encoders soft buttons to page through head types and gel types The display will show only the heads and colours that match the selection At any time press the VIEW ALL soft button to revert to viewing all faders regardless of head type
379. make a Playback into a Programmer Master Record an empty Cue onto a Playback and then set the Cue Stack option Function Programmer Master When the Playback is activated by pressing the GO button then the fader level becomes the Programmer level Releasing the fader level causes the Programmer level to go back to 100 When the fader is less set to less than 100 the FLASH button can be used to bump in the Programmer at 100 The GO button and BACK buttons are used to swap Palette values in the Programmer when the Programmer has mixed palette values For instance if some heads are set to use the RED palette in the programmer and others using the GREEN palette then pressing GO will swap all the heads using RED palette to use GREEN and all the heads using GREEN palette to use RED If there are more than 2 colour Palettes in use in the Programmer then the colours rotate around all the different Palettes Odd Even can be used to easily set up an initial look of 2 or more colour palettes Currently only one Programmer Master can be active at a time MagicQ User Manual 155 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 18 System Management 18 1 Starting Up First of all power the console up If power is good then an introductory window is displayed on the screen You are prompted to continue the current show to start a new show or to follow a Help Tutorial If you choose to continue the current show or start a new show y
380. make the playback the current playback This enables the Cue Stack on the Playback to be viewed in the Cue Stack Window and the current Cue in that Cue Stack to be viewed in the Cue Window Pressing and holding a Sel button causes the Cue Stack Window Cue Window to be temporarily made active until the button is released The Cue Stack Cue Window shows data for the playback associated with the Sel button This enables easy modifications of Cue and Cue Stack parameters such as FX size and chase speed Also used when programming for determining which playback to record a Cue onto Flash Used to temporarily activate playbacks by adding or swapping in the Cue Stack from the playback to the outputs Grand Flash Used to temporarily flash the Grand Master has the same effect as putting the Grand Master to full Exact behaviour will depend on the configuration of the masters Sub Flash Used to temporarily flash the Sub Master has the same effect as putting the Sub Master to full Exact behaviour will depend on the configuration of the masters Next Page Used to select the page of playbacks See the page select overview for how pages work Prev Page Used to select the page of playbacks See the page select overview for how pages work Manual Go This Go button is part of the manual control section and controls the current playback It has the same functionality as the Go button associated with a playb
381. me profiles using faders in the Presets View which would not be affected by effects that you are busking on some moving heads Faders in both the Programmer and Presets Views are affected by the level of the Grand Master They are also affected when a SWAP button is pressed any HTP channels in the Programmer or the Presets View will be reduced to zero MagicQ User Manual 70 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 6 7 Viewing Intensities in the Outputs Window The Outputs Window includes a View for showing the intensities of all patched channels in a theatrical manner with channels and percentages Open the Outputs Window by pressing the Out button and select the View Chans soft button MagicQ User Manual 71 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 7 Controlling intelligent heads The MagicQ supports many different ways of modifying the values of attributes for moving heads using encoders using buttons and using the touch screen In order to control intelligent heads it is necessary to be able to select which heads to use The MagicQ console keeps track of the currently selected heads to enable it to determine which heads to apply changes to The operator can select heads individually or can use groups to recall configurations of heads that are used frequently 7 1 Selecting Heads The console automatically generates a group for all the heads of a particular head type In addition new groups can easi
382. mmand in the inverted comments 144 36 1 10 Jump to Cue Id 10 on Playback 1 MagicQ User Manual 203 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk From MagicQ Software version 1 3 6 5 it is also possible to map the note or velocity directly into the remote command using the 01 for the note and 02 for the velocity So the following command would look for Note On Note 36 and then use the Velocity to jump to a specific step on the Playback 144 36 1 9002j 144 36 82 0002H The 9602 is replaced with the velocity received so that if MagicQ receives 144 36 50 then it will execute the remote command 1 50j Which jumps to Cue Id 50 on Playback 1 34 1 4 Default miditable txt file 44 36 1t 28 36 1u 44 38 2t 28 38 2u 44 40 3t 28 40 3u 44 41 4t 28 41 4u 44 43 5t 28 43 5u 44 45 6t 28 45 6u 44 47 7t 28 47 7u 44 48 8t 28 48 8u 44 50 9t 28 50 9u 44 52 10t 28 52 10u 44 53 11t 28 53 11u 44 54 12t 28 54 12u 44 55 13t 28 55 13u 44 56 14 28 56 14u 44 57 15t 28 57 15u 44 58 16t 28 58 16u 44 59 17t 28 59 17u 44 60 18t 28 60 18u 44 61 19t 28 61 19u 44 62 20t 28 62 20u 44 63 21t 28 63 21u 44 64 22t 28 64 22u 44 65 23t 28 65 23u 44 66 24t MagicQ User Manual 294 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 28 66 24u 44 67 25t 28 67 25u 44 68 26t 28 68 26 44 69 27 28 69 27 44 70 28 28 70 28
383. monitor output ensure that the monitor card upgrade has been carried out this requires the fitting of a monitor card inside the rear panel Note that the presence of the 2 VGA connector does NOT indicate that that the monitor card has been fitted It is recommended to turn off the 2 monitor output when a monitor is not connected as this will improve performance slightly On Pro systems prior to v1 4 3 0 the 2 monitor and serial touch are configured in Setup View Settings Ports The 2 monitor output can be a touch monitor To connect a serial touch monitor simply connect the serial cable to the serial port on MagicQ Then select the appropriate protocol in Setup View Settings Ports Serial remote protocol and set Serial touch monitor to Monitor 2 MagicQ Pro series consoles running the Pro non Pro 2010 operating system only support a very limited number of USB touch screens We recommend using a serial touch screen or upgrading to Pro 2010 operating system 4 7 Patching Open the Patch Window by pressing the PATCH button The Patch Window has three views VIEW HEADS VIEW CHANS and VIEW DMX In this section we describe patching in VIEW HEADS CHOOSE CHOOSE PATCH RENUM AUTO COPY MORPH SORT DIMMER HEAD IT HEAD NOS GROUPS HEAD PRG HEAD Choose the head you wish to patch by pressing the CHOOSE HEAD soft button The Window will change to give you a list of manufacturers and heads Select a head by pressing the touch screen A
384. mote ether fwd 0 wordl6 remote ether bkwd 0 int remote ether init void struct sockaddr_in name char opts 100 socklen_t optlen 100 int flags int 35 For Windows OS we need to start winsocket fifndef LINUX WSAData ws int code code WSAStartup MAKEWORD 1 1 amp ws endif if remote ether sock return TRUE remote ether sock socket PF INET SOCK DGRAM 0 MagicQ User Manual 286 Version 1 5 7 5 Cham ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk getsockopt remote ether sock SOL SOCKET SO REUSEADDR opts amp optlen opts 0 1 setsockopt remote ether sock SOL SOCKET SO REUSEADDR opts optlen Give the socket a name name sin family AF INET name sin port htons REMOTE ETHER PORT name sin addr s addr htonl INADDR ANY if bind remote ether sock struct sockaddr amp name sizeof name lt 0 closesocket remote_ether_sock return FALSE getsockopt remote ether sock SOL SOCKET SO BROADCAST opts amp optlen opts 0 1 setsockopt remote ether sock SOL SOCKET SO BROADCAST opts optlen u_long block block 1 ioctlsocket remote_ether_sock FIONBIO amp block return TRUE int remote_ether_rx char data wordl6 size char message MAX CREP MSG int nbytes remote_ether_message_t rem remote_ether_message_t mes
385. move the Cue from To remove an entire Cue Stack from a Playback press REMOVE and hit the S button of the Playback Press S button again to confirm Note that the Cue Storage Setting in the Setup options determine whether the Cue and Cue Stack are removed from the Cue Store and Cue Stack Store as well 13 12 Cue Stack Defaults The default operation of Cue Stacks can be modified in the Defaults view of the Cue Stack Window Defaults can be configured for all of the Cue Stack options including operation of the faders and buttons chase defaults and the defaults for each Cue Stack step Changing the Defaults does not change Cue Stacks and Cues which have already been recorded it only changes the options for when new Cue Stacks and Cues are recorded When inserting and adding Cues to a Cue Stack it is possible to determine whether MagicQ uses the default settings or derives the settings from the previous Cue in the Cue Stack The option is set in Setup Cue Storage Settings Derive settings from previous Cue This option determines the settings when a new Cue is recorded on a Cue Stack Prior to v1 3 6 4 and by default in the new software new Cues derive their step settings from the previous step If this option is set to No then all new recorded Cues will use the default step settings 13 13 Cue Stack Macros Cue Stack macros enable control over other Cue Stacks from within Cue Stacks such as activation release go stop
386. mputer thus ensuring that the MagicQ console continues to run at full performance In order to render the beams MagicVis uses the graphics card in your PC Mac the better the performance of your graphics card then the better performance of the visualiser PCs and Macs with shared graphics memory will perform slowly and will only be able to render small lighting rigs A Nvidia or Radeon graphics card costing 100 120 160 will make all the difference to your system ChamSys will continue to optimise the visualiser to improve the performance MagicQ User Manual 310 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 40 1 Starting MagicVis 40 1 1 Using MagicQ inc Vis combined Visualiser app In Windows click on Programmes and select ChamSys MagicVis and the MagicQ inc vis item On a Mac click on Applications MagicQ and MagicQincVis Press the VIS button top right to open a Vis window The default position and size of the Vis window can be configured on MagicQ in Setup View System View Monitors configure and enable Monitor 2 ipi xi GW eem Keep a backup archive es how file path defaults show sho Siow fe femat o LEEEELLL GN l I As the Visualiser is integrated with the MagicQ app it is not necessary to set up IP addresses or enable configure universes 40 1 2 Connecting MagicVis app to a console Configure the IP addresses of the both the console and the laptop to be within the same IP address
387. n a Cue is unblocked it removes any hard values in the Cue therefore it enables values to track through from where they were first used Unblocking and blocking Cues in a Cue Stack does not affect the appearance of the Cues and Cues Stacks when the Cue Stack is played back it simply affects where the data is stored and what effect an edit will have on a Cue Multiple Cues can be blocked unblocked in the Cue Stack Window by selecting a range using SHIFT and the cursor keys 13 5 Cue Only The Cue Only function in the Cue Stack Window can be used to mark a Cue as a temporary change to the lighting state before continuing the tracked state from the following Cue The Cue Only field is on the right hand side of the Cue Stack Window page right and is only relevant when using tracking mode MagicQ enables one or more Cues to be marked as Cue Only when MagicQ moves on to the next Cue which is not set to Cue Only then it reverts to tracking the Cue Stack from before the Cue Only cues Note that sequential Cues marked Cue Only will each be based on the state previous to the first Cue Only Cue with the additions of the specific Cue To track changes through a sequence of Cue Only Cues record each Cue using Entire State to capture the entire programmer contents in to each Cue Only Cue 13 6 Mark Cues Mark Cues are special cues that are used to pre load LTP values before the following Cue i
388. n and tilt channels of moving heads and also swap the pan and tilt channels Pressing ENTER in the appropriate field changes the field value Individual channels can also be inverted in VIEW CHANS if required 5 10 Pan and Tilt Offsets To add a Pan or Tilt offset then enter the offset in degrees in the Pan offset or Tilt offset in the Patch Window The offset affects all programmed values 5 11 Minimum and maximum levels You can set minimum and maximum levels for each patched channel from the VIEW CHANS view This is useful for setting pre heat on dimmers or for limiting output values of certain lamps where power is tight The minimum and maximum levels have absolute over ride over all other playback and programming on the console Master faders and the DBO button do not affect the minimum and maximum levels Minimum levels can be useful to force a minimum light level on a stage for example during a changeover 5 11 1 Limits and Offset It is possible to set limits and offsets on channels using the Limit and Offset dimmer curves Limit enables a maximum level to be set for the channel whilst retaining the normal linear dimming curve When dimmer curve is set to Limit the channel has a linear curve up to the maximum value rather than using the normal linear curve and then stopping at the maximum value Offset enables an offset value to be applied to a channel this can be useful if a moving light is not calibrated correctly or it h
389. n create a grid containing the LED fixtures and then each fixture becomes a pixel in the grid The MagicQ Pixel Mapping Engine can then be used to play back movies bitmaps and text on the grid After patching your LED fixtures you should set up the head numbers for each fixture in the Patch Window By default MagicQ numbers heads in the order they are patched starting at 0 Simply edit the head number field in the Patch Window to change the head numbers Use SHIFT and the cursors keys to set multiple head numbers In the example above we patched a 20 by 20 matrix of RGB pixels total 400 pixels on Universes 4 5 and 6 Then in the Outputs Window Plan View create a grid First set up the grid size by pressing the GRID SIZE soft button Enter the horizontal size followed by the vertical size e g 20 20 In the Plan View there are three different views Head Names Colours and Head Numbers Press Head Numbers and View Grid to see the grid Then you can enter the head numbers in the grid according to the layout of the LED fixtures within the matrix stage Use SHIFT and the cursor keys to set multiple head numbers in one go VIEW Vi INSERT PATCH HEADS gt HD NAMES COLOURS HEADSH BITMAP o OULUI eee eee j2__ 22 82 102 122 142 162 222 242 282 322 342 382 FEEECFEEEREEREEEFREEREE 44 104 124 144 EL 205 225 245 265 285 305 325 345 365 385 ea 186 206 226 246 265 286 306 326 s4e 365 306
390. n request MagicQ User Manual 299 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk There is support for setting the internal timecode from within a Cue Stack using the macro command T To reset the internal timecode for a Cue Stack to 0 0 0 0 use the macro IO To set a specific time e g 10 seconds use the macro I10 35 1 2 Using External timecode Cue Stacks must be active before external timecode will take effect on the Cue Stack In some cases it may be useful to have a master Cue Stack controlled by timecode that is always active which then activates other Cue Stacks for each song When timecode values jump for example when changing tracks MagicQ checks for each active Cue Stack whether the external timecode received is within the range of the first timecode value in the Cue Stack and the last timecode value in the Cue Stack MagicQ will only execute a change of Cue if the new value is within the range controlled by that Cue Stack This helps to avoid the erroneous execution of an entire Cue Stack 35 1 3 Timecode Simulator MagicQ includes a powerful timecode simulator for simulating external timecode when an external timecode source is not available In the Setup Window the simulator is turned on using soft button Y When the simulator is on then any received external timecode is ignored The timecode start value can be set by entering a timecode value and pressing the X soft button The X soft button is also used to sta
391. n when that Playback is activated as the last touched playback then all channels controlled by that Playback are considered to be LTP Thus that Playback will exclusively control the levels of all channels used by the Cue Stack 15 3 HTP always active Use HTP option By default HTP channels programmed in a Playback only affect output when the Playback is active It is possible to make a Playback so that the activation of the Playback is separated from the operation of the HTP channels using the HTP always active Use HTP in Cue Stack options Activate Release When this option is set then HTP channels on the playback will be output whenever the fader is above the activation point defaults 0 regardless of the other activate options on the Cue Stack They will only be released when the fader is taken back down to 0 They are not affected by pressing the RELEASE or the SHIFT RELEASE buttons If a Playback is set to HTP Always Active then raising the fader or pressing the FLASH button will not use any specified Intensity delay or fade times If the Cue Stack has multiple steps then delay and fade times will still be used when changing steps i e pressing the GO or BACK buttons The HTP always active Use HTP has priority over the All chans controlled LTP option therefore HTP channels on playbacks will be output regardless of any other higher priority faders with All chans controlled LTP MagicQ User Manual 1
392. nality up to a maximum of 5 channels For normal personalities these fields are used to specify multiple fixtures patched to one head 5 17 Editing Head personality You can modify the personality of a Head or create a new personality in the Head Editor Choose the head you wish to edit and then press the EDIT HEAD soft button To quickly choose a head that you have already patched without having to go back into the Choose Head window move the cursor to the head in the Patch Window hold SHIFT and press CHOOSE HEAD To quickly edit a head that you have already patched without having to go back into the Choose Head window move the cursor to the head in the Patch Window hold SHIFT and press EDIT HEAD 5 18 Cloning Adding extra heads dimmers to a programmed show Cloning enables a show programmed with a certain number of heads to be expanded to use more of the same head type without having to reprogram all of the show For example if you have a show programmed with 4 MAC500s and you want to add 4 more MAC500s then you can clone the 4 programmed MACS00s All the Cues Cue Stacks Groups and Palettes that have the original 4 MAC500s will now have the additional 4 MAC500s as well By cloning heads in this way you have a quick and easy approach to expanding your show You can then programme some new Cues and Cue Stacks that use the new and old heads individually In the Patch Window select the heads you wish to clone using SHIFT and t
393. name Thus if you have named some of your Mac500s front and some of them back it will generate a Mac500 front group and a Mac500 back group 5 8 Multi Element Heads For heads that have multiple attributes of one type e g more than one dimmer or more than one red green or blue channel MagicQ uses multi element heads Multi element heads are patched in exactly the same way as normal heads but MagicQ shows a next to the DMX address to indicate that it is a multi element head Multi element heads have a separate head number for each element in the head therefore when patching several of these heads the head numbers will increase by more than one per head MagicQ recognises three kinds of multi element heads those which simply have a repeated element those that have a main element followed by a repeated element and those that have repeated elements followed by a main element When multi element heads are patched MagicQ generates the All group which contains both the main and repeated elements MagicQ will also generate separate groups for the main Mn part and the repeated Ele part The separate elements of the head can also be sub selected using the dor operator from the keypad for example for head 2 you can select 2 4 to sub select the 4 element MagicQ User Manual 57 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 5 9 Inverting and Swapping In VIEW HEADS you can invert the pa
394. nd set intensities using the DMX channel numbers Selecting HEADS ALL START 1 sets the head numbers so that for each head the numbers start from this is the default option Selecting BY NAME sets the head numbers so that they use head name gel and type to order the heads 5 6 Gel name and number For dimmers you may wish to configure the gel name or number This makes programming easier enabling the console to auto program cues for you The gel field uses gel numbers For Lee colours enter the gel number directly e g 181 for Lee 181 For Rosco colours enter the gel number preceded by dot e g 14 for Rosco 14 For no colour enter O If you would prefer to use colour names rather than gel numbers then simply enter the colour name The console knows about most standard colours 5 7 Generating auto groups The console automatically generates groups for each of the different heads patched onto the console e g All Dimmers All Mac500 The console is also capable of generating groups based on gel colours and head names Press the AUTO GROUPS soft button in the VIEW HEADS view of the Patch Window and then select Dimmers and or Heads When Dimmers are selected the console will examine all dimmers patched and generate a group for each different gel colour and a group for each different head name When Heads is selected the console will generate a group for each different head type that has heads with a distinct head
395. nd then the mapping to the serial command in inverted ee comments For example the first to lines in the default file are 144 36 1t 128 36 1u MagicQ checks the received MIDI note byes to see whether they match the values So if the MIDI message matches 144 36 then it executes the remote command 1t Test Playback 1 Similarly if it matches 128 36 then executes the remote command 1u UnTest Playback 1 Note that Test and Untest are like Activate and Release except they force the Playback level to be 10096 and 0 respectively Note that for security reasons MagicQ limits the number of playbacks that can be controlled using MIDI and the remote protocols On MagicQ consoles PB1 to PB34 can be controlled On MagicQ PC playbacks PB1 to PB10 can be controlled Users may use their own MIDI conversion file usermidimap txt rather than the in built miditable txt This avoids user midi tables being overwritten when new software versions are loaded since only the miditable txt is updated on software updates 34 1 3 Advanced MIDI mapping Itis possible to match all 3 MIDI message bytes including the velocity So for example 144 36 100 1t 144 36 101 1u This would execute the Test Playback 1 when Note On for note 36 at velocity 100 was received and Untest Playback 1 when Note On for note 36 at velocity 101 was received To jump within a Cue Stack instead of testing untesting a Playback just change the remote co
396. nels are handled depends on the following settings on each Cue in the Cue Stack there are three options which are shown in the Track field H Track HTP Defaults Yes in tracking mode L Track LTP Defaults Yes 1n all modes F Track FX Defaults Yes in tracking mode MagicQ User Manual 118 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk So to get a Cue Stack recorded in tracking mode to track all channel state during playback ensure that all the Cue Stack steps have HLF set in the Track field In older versions of software these options correspond to the following options but inverted H Track HTP Zero old HTP inverted L Track LTP Rel unused chans inverted F Track FX Zero old FX inverted If Track LTP is not set then LTP channels that were used in previous steps in the Cue Stack but not in the current step are released with the release time of the Cue Stack If Track HTP is not set then HTP channels that were used in previous steps in the Cue Stack but not in the current step are faded out using the Intensity fade out time of that Cue step In addition there is an option on the Cue Stack that affects how tracking works for jumps and going backwards up the Cue Stack If recalculate state on jumps used to be called maintain state on jumps is set then the console recalculates the entire state of the Cue Stack when you jump to a new Cue using Goto Cue or if you press the Pause button to go backwards up the Cue
397. nels from other Playbacks MagicQ User Manual 144 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 16 5 3 Masters affect level When set to Yes then the levels of HTP channels generally Intensity are affected by the grand master and sub master faders Channels also are affected by DBO and can be released by SHIFT RELEASE When set to No then the levels of HTP channels are not affected by the grand master and sub master faders They are also not affected by DBO or by SHIFT RELEASE Note that Group Masters are not affected by this setting Therefore even with Masters affect level set to No channels will still be affected by Group Masters 16 5 4 Playback priority The Playback priority can be set to NORMAL HIGH and ABOVE PROGRAMMER When all Playbacks are set to priority NORMAL then the latest Playback to be activated reasserted will control the channels Playbacks set to HIGH priority always have higher priority than Playbacks set to NoMAL priority Playbacks set to ABOVE PROGRAMMER have higher priority than the Programmer in order to edit the Cues in the Programmer and see the changes on the Output it is best to release the Cue Stack 16 5 5 Move when dark When set to Yes then MagicQ checks after each Cue is executed whether it should perform a move when dark Any heads that are used in the next Cue but which have 0 intensity in the current cue are checked to see whether the Position Beam and Colour attribut
398. ner enne 167 19 3 7 MQ Consoles Direct Outputs esesseeseeseeeeeeeneen nennen eene rennen rennen entente 167 19 3 8 MQ PRO Consoles Direct Outputs ener emeret rennen 167 19 3 9 ChamSys Twin DMX Interfaces eesseeseeesseeeeeeeeeeeenne eee enren eren sinia 167 19 3 10 ChamSys MagicDMX Interfaces sees eene rennen 167 19 3 11 Using the MagicQ wing DMX512 outputs eee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeecaaeceaeseaeenaeens 168 19 3 12 Hot take Ovet irene nter eb e emt te plug exierit e bears users cul EEE iae es Ue EE 168 19 3 13 Testing Output Unitverses 1 1 1 8 2 1 seene o an A E Lob iro br rige oL let bL edu EE Hd Ro taa 168 19 3 14 Copying Output Univetses iiie eres eire Herde FEL e e cespeasbeuborndencasbsiacedsebese 169 19 4 B UP ASISTE ELEM 169 19 4 1 Connecting a Mini Wing PC Wing or Maxi Wing 169 19 4 2 Connecting Playback Wings and Extra Wings esee nnne 170 19 4 3 Connecting an Execute Wing eese nennen renes eren nenne 170 19 4 4 Connecting MagicQ consoles together eene rennen 171 19 4 5 Using an external DMX console for extra playbacks eese 171 19 5 Monitor Setting S oerte rt i eter Ra e eto OE E doe Fist einen EX RR ee EE na 171 19 5 1 Pro 2010 ProX Operating System enne enemies 171 19 5 2 Pro non Pro 2010 Operating System nennen nennen nene 172 19 5 3 Monitor settings on MagicQ PC eene renes 172 19 5 4 Monitor Settings pri
399. ng channels in this universe All personality files for the Mbox EXtreme can be found under the Mbox section in the personality library If you do not have the personality files you will need to upgrade the personality library to a library dated 2 May 2007 or later To download the latest personality library and instructions on how to upgrade it view the downloads section of our website A pre patched show containing 5 layers and several cues to demonstrate the Mbox EXtreme can be found on the documents section of our website This should be placed in the show folder in MagicQ and can then be opened in the Load Show window titled mboxdemoshow shw MagicQ User Manual 254 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 27 Network Manager MagicQ supports a Window for managing ChamSys Ethernet Interfaces The Network Manager Setup View DMX I O Net Manager can be used for monitoring and configuring ChamSys 4 Universe Ethernet Interfaces CLOSE INSERT CONFIG WINDOW DEVICE ChamSys 4 Universe Ethernet interfaces can be configured in different ways depending on the settings of the 4 way DIP switch on the front of the interface When the DIP Switch is set to MagicQ Mode MQ Net the configuration of the interface is completely controlled from MagicQ software consoles In any other mode the configuration of the interface is controlled from the rotary switches on the interface 27 1 MQ Mode MQ Net In MQ Mode each ChamSys 4 U
400. nge Pressing SHIFT and the button bumps back to the previous range In addition the window enables selection of palette values for the attribute type using the touch screen When heads are recorded the system automatically generates palettes for each attribute type You can record new palette entries or modify existing ones as you see fit GROUP Mac250 1 2 3 4 5 POSITION Mac250 1 2 3 4 5 61 5 Eam eE M m All Mac250 centre far left far right far up far down m a s Z HP left right down COLOUR Mac250 1 2 3 4 5 BEAM Mac250 1 2 3 4 5 ci 3 Peje NE co cs C ece cs Bg ice he 1 Peje fe jes Milece es Egjece es B ice White Red Amber Yellow Green open gobo cone bar fan hat triple Cyan Blue Pink uy Magenta dec beam md holes pys cir mag pys cir blue shake Edid ecd md holes fibroid dec beam triple shake fan hat shake shake shake shake C16 C17 C18 C13 Bic PB B17 fe B18 PB B19 PCE bar shake cone shake gobo scil gt gt gobo scrl lt lt In the Colour Window there is a COL MIX soft button which gives access to libraries of pre programmed colours Pressing the COL MIX soft button toggles between the normal palette view and the colour mixing view In the colour mixing view you can select a colour using the touch screen The COL TYPE soft button enables the user to choose between the default colour library the Lee colour library or the Rosco colour library To modify a 16bit parameter in high i e 16 bit resol
401. niverse Ethernet interface on the network is considered to be a different interface with a different ID The ID is set from the rotary switches on the interface selecting an ID in the range 0 to 99 All interfaces should have different IDs When the interface starts up it will recognise that it is in MQ Mode and then will search on the network to find a MagicQ system that can give it a configuration The interface will not output or input DMX data until it has received configuration from a MagicQ system The MagicQ system stores the configuration information for all the boxes on the network as console settings In View Ports press the INSERT DEVICE button to add a new interface MagicQ will present a list of default profiles for configuring the interface SELECT Select DMX profile ACN Art Net ACN Art Net ACN Out Same Art Net Out Match Console Out Out In In Uni Same Uni Outputs The profiles act as a starting point once a starting profile has been chosen the detailed configuration can all be set individually for each port by changing to the VIEW PORTS view VIEW CLOSE INSERT CONFIG DEVICES WINDOW DEVICE DEVICE ID Dev Name Pot Pot Name Cons Uni Config Protocol Uni Length Rate Frame MAB Break Status EE 5 Gch fees ie S 512 EX Fos fas es DN on BARE pes fais ies 00s ele a The rate frame MAB and Break timing can be set for each interface the timings affect all ports
402. nment to a button can be removed using the De assign Macro soft button You can view the data in each step of a Macro in the View Data view in the Macro window Macro steps can be deleted using the REMOVE key Note when a button is pressed there is a press and a release both should be removed otherwise the button state will become confused It is possible to move steps in the Macro View Data view press MOVE and then select the source followed by the destination Multiple steps can be moved using SHIFT and the cursor keys The macro data can be reordered if the times have been changed out of sequence using the REORDER soft button Macros can be inhibited from the Setup Window using the Inhibit Macros option 21 4 1 Quick Macro Toolbar MagicQ User Manual 205 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The Quick Macro Tool Bar is accessed by pressing the screen in the Status Display the area of the screen above Playbacks PB1 to PB5 with the Clock The Macro Tool Bar can be closed by pressing in the Status Display again The Macro Tool Bar shows the Key Macros 1 to 10 21 4 2 Keyboard Macro Timing Playback of keyboard macros can use the times that the macro was recorded with or using external time code sources By default macros are played back using Immediate timing Use the SET TIMING soft button to change the timing to Real time or Time code The timing type can be changed after
403. ns in Windows accidentally 19 8 6 Keypad Syntax Theatre Patch This setting swaps around the syntax used for patching Heads The normal syntax for patching Theatre Path is se to No is lt number of heads gt lt dmx address gt When set to Yes the syntax for patching is lt head number gt lt dmx address gt Thatre Patch supports patching multiple multiple DMX addresses to one head when using Theatre Patch syntax For example to patch Head no 10 at DMX addresses 1 2 and 3 enter 10 14 2 3 As with the Patch View DMX there is a maximum of 6 DMX addresses per Head In Thatre Patch it is possible to repatch dimmer channels If the head is already unpatched then just enter the new address e g to repatch head number 20 to DMX channel 25 20 25 It is possible to repatch to multiple DMX addreses e g to repatch head number 20 to DMX channel 25 and 26 20 25 26 If the head number is already patched then MagicQ will request confirmation whether to Repatch the exiting Head with the specified Head No or to patch another Head with the same number 19 8 7 Encoder Mode By default MagicQ sets the encoder wheels according to the currently active Window so for example when you change to Colour Window the encoder wheels control colour and when you change to Group the encoder wheels control Group settings When encoder mode is set to Maintain Pos Col Beam the Position Colour and Beam buttons will act like
404. nterfaces 165 166 Enttec Pro Interface 165 Execute Wing 169 170 Extra Wing 169 170 FX Adding FX 134 333 Creating FX from chases 90 333 Waveform FX 83 90 91 222 223 352 Waveform FX based on Palettes 91 223 FX Editor 91 222 223 FX Window 83 89 91 92 222 Groups 32 61 62 72 78 79 170 176 208 218 238 241 332 345 Head Editor 22 61 133 160 161 211 217 218 227 331 Highlight 80 111 164 175 176 215 343 344 Include 95 97 112 113 114 282 345 351 Locate 64 65 78 215 282 343 Maxi Wing 165 169 170 MagicQ User Manual Cham 353 www chamsys co uk Media Servers 1 242 246 MIDI 157 163 193 291 292 293 296 298 299 301 Mini Wing 165 169 Morph 19 62 220 Morphing Heads 19 62 220 Open USB Interface 165 Outputs 40 65 71 74 85 108 110 111 119 154 164 167 180 224 225 227 329 337 339 Outputs Window 71 85 108 110 119 154 224 225 227 337 339 Palettes 2 32 39 48 53 61 62 65 74 77 78 80 91 93 94 95 96 97 98 101 103 114 154 158 164 176 177 179 185 208 211 216 217 223 334 345 Parking 47 106 107 Patch 32 35 43 44 54 55 56 57 59 60 61 62 63 65 69 96 102 115 158 160 180 211 219 220 225 248 251 277 323 327 331 332 340 352 Patch Window 32 43 44 54 55 56 57 59 60 61 62 69 96 102 115 160 211 219 225 323 331 340 352 Pathport
405. nual 89 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk speed size crossfade and offset encoders These encoders apply changes to the FX of the currently selected heads Note they affect all FX running on those heads so if the head has a circle and a CMY colour FX then both will be changed To change FX individually use the encoders in the Programmer Window FX View 8 1 15 Changing FX It is possible to change the type of FX running on a selection of heads from within the Programmer Window using the CHANGE FX soft button This enables a different FX to be selected but with the speed size and offsets remaining the same The FX can only be changed into compatible FX i e a circle can be changed into a square or diamond but not into a RGB effect 8 1 16 FX Reordering It is possible to reorder the heads in a FX without having to recreate the FX Press the REORDER FX button in the Programmer View FX View MagicQ prompts for the order Normal Reverse Into Centre Centre Out Random Normal will always return them to head number order Note that if the current selection order is different to the one in the Cue then it will automatically use this as the new order rather than prompting for an order 8 1 17 Blocking FX When the Setup option Programmer overrides FX is set then the Programmer automatically includes a Block FX option this means that whenever a channel is in the programmer it has an implicit zero FX
406. o both external internal and timed events MagicQ can trigger on external events such as MIDI notes DMX input serial input timecode and the remote contact input MagicQ can also trigger on internal events such as system startup system shutdown and system powerfail In addition MagicQ can trigger on timed scheduled events MagicQ supports an Automation Window for managing all of the automated events The Automation Window supports multiple events with each event being subject to specified parameters Each event then triggers a particular MagicQ function this can be a function on a Playback a Cue Stack a Cue a Page a Macro or a Layout MagicQ User Manual 206 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk MagicQ can take a parameter from the event trigger and pass it to the function for example it could take the velocity from a MIDI note event and tigger a Playback level using that velocity Events Each event can have up to 3 paramters P1 P2 P3 to filter the event further Scheduled P1 is the time P2 string is the date mask MIDI note P1 is the mode on off or both P2 is the note P3 is the channel 0 for all MIDI sysex Timecode P1 and P2 specify a range of timecode to trigger the event Remote P1 is the mode on off or both DMxX input P1 is the level P2 is the channel Serial port Startup Shutdown Power fail Functions Each Function can have up to 3 function parameters F1 F2 F3 For Playb
407. ock other Playbacks MagicQ User Manual 134 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 15 6 Playback Priority By default all playbacks have the same priority It is possible to set a playback to maximum priority using the Cue Stack option Highest Playback priority The options are e Normal same priority as other playbacks last activated has control e High highest priority of all playbacks but lower priority than the programmer e Above Programmer higher than playbacks and the programmer When the Cue Stack has highest priority LTP channels under control of the playback are not affected by other playbacks HTP channels continue to operate as normal 15 7 Playbacks ignore masters levels Sometimes it is necessary to program playbacks that are not affected by the Grand Master or Sub Master Use the Masters do not affect level option to prevent the Cue Stack being affected by the master faders this is useful for controlling channels that must stay up e g house lights smoke machines etc Cue Stacks set with this option are not affected by grand master sub master DBO button Cue Stacks with this option set are not released by pressing SHIFT RELEASE to release all playbacks 15 8 Playback Stomping There is a Playback Stomping option in the Setup Window View Settings With this option enabled playbacks that have been fully overridden by other playbacks will be automatically released stomped
408. ode determines the default for how the FX is added to the base values the choices are NORMAL PLUS MINUS or ABS When set to ABS playbacks will ignore any base values for the channels and treat the FX values as absolute values this is useful for generating FX based on absolute positions or on specific colours on a colour wheel MagicQ User Manual 222 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 24 2 View Chans Each step in the FX consists of a value between 0 and 255 and a curve The curve specifies how the level changes from one step to the next The valid curves are 0 proportional fade 1 sine fade 2 cosine fade 3 snap The waveform for the complete FX is shown at the top Moving up and down with the cursor to a different attribute or head shows the waveform for that attribute head VIEW RELOAD oi Attribute Step 1 Curve Step2 Curve Step3 Curve Step 4 Curve CHOOSE NEW SAVE SAVE FX EDITOR Grcle Head no 001 Pan 000 1 128 2 255 1 128 2 or e p 2 E T FX that have been recorded in a show but that have not been stored onto the console can be extracted from the show by including the Cue that uses the FX This will bring the FX into the FX Editor and it can then be saved on the console 24 3 Palette FX In the FX Editor in View General set up Use Palettes to be either Pos Col or Beam Then in View Chans the values become Palette entr
409. ode generation 1 for enable 0 for disable Q time code Set current time code also enables time code generation For example to set timecode to 0 0 10 0 Q0 0 10 0 35 4 Timecode re transmit The LTC or MIDI timecode received from a ChamSys MIDI SMPTE interface can be retransmitted over the network as Art Net timecode MagicQ User Manual 301 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 36 Synchronisation with Audio playback Winamp MagicQ supports the ability to control a PC running Winamp in order to synchronise audio and video playback with lighting MagicQ can control the Winamp instance by patching a virtual Winamp personality which is then used to select the track position and to start and stop the track MagicQ can also accept timecode from Winamp and trigger Cues In this case Winamp is the master of the system Winamp can be running on a separate PC to the MagicQ system in this case you need to run Winamp and MagicQ Media Centre on the PC The MagicQ console then sends Art Net information to MagicQ Media Centre which in turn triggers Winamp Alternatively both Winamp and MagicQ can be run on the same PC In this case MagicQ interfaces directly to Winamp and it is not necessary to run MagicQ Media Centre Support for direct interfacing is only enabled when connected to a MagicQ Wing or MagicQ Interface not 3 part interfaces or MagicDMX Up to 4 different instances of Winamp are supported which a
410. of 2 seconds and an out fade of 3 seconds Only intensities times are affected Beam Colour and Position times remain at their current values When executing Cues MagicQ will primarily use the specific delay and fade times entered in the Advanced View of the Cue Window If no times are specified then the general times used in the Simple View will be used Times can be added in the Advanced View using the keypad and can be removed using the REMOVE button In the Advanced View the times shown are fade times except where delay times have been set up then times are shown as delay fade Times can also be set up for the selected heads in the Simple View In the Cue Stack and Cue Windows delay and fade times with a gt symbol after indicate when there are advanced times set for the Cue 13 4 Tracking By default the MagicQ works in a similar way to most traditional lighting consoles in that what is in the programmer is recorded into the Cue This is a no nonsense mode where you get what you expect recorded into your Cues If you program just a FX chase on pan and tilt into a Cue then that is what you get If you program a complete look for a head including all the attributes then that is what you get Looking at a Cue in the Cue Window gives you the full picture In a Cue Stack you can choose for each Cue whether the Playback continues to control HTP and LTP channels used earlier in the Cue Stack but not stored in the current
411. og Window Use the encoders to modify the parameters of the FX such as the speed size and spread between heads By default FX size goes up to 255 Hold SHIFT use the encoder to get sizes above 255 The Prog Window provides a Simple and an Advanced View The Simple View enables modifications of the FX as applied to all heads The Advanced View enables the parameters of the FX to be modified for each different head this for example enables different sizes to be set for different heads MagicQ User Manual 83 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk REC SNAP CLEAR OPTIONS SHOT ALL VIEW LEVELS VIEW TIMES LOCATE REMOVE ALL FX PROG Mac250 46 47 48 49 50 FX ge Spread Head name Head type Hd No Attrib Speed Xade Size Stop OSize Dir Spread Parts Segment Add Fade in Fade a n NS Normal Defaut Det 100 even 5 Mac250 46 Normal Defaut Def P pe P E E TUN CN MN E E o p on m q w m HW 128 No No Fwd Jed s 1j FX Segments None FX Direction Fwd 100 fwd bkwd tapto time FX Size 128 size no size start stop hris PC Thu Nov 20 02 21 51 2008 Ver 1 3 8 3 dded FX Page 1 Add Master 5 FX can be added and removed from the Programmer window 8 1 1 FX Speed amp Size The FX Speed can be modified on encoder X The soft button stops starts the FX allowing it to be temporarily stopped The FX Crossfade can b
412. ol seri Estee e Deb rH have es pde ERE dese 323 41 4 2 Receiving Patch Data from Capture sssesssesseeeeeeeeeeee nennen een rennen rennen 323 41 4 3 Troubleshooting eie tiene race pertenencia fe Fede nee Ea goce ea SiE a EE 323 41 5 AIRE as 324 415 l Running MasicQ PC eer he to ree Eee n Te Ere QD EUR e EUER HE Doa 324 41 6 Enabling MagicQ to output WYSIWYG data essent eene rennen 325 41 6 1 Running WYSIWYG eerie rere rette teen pet co Peers r bog iai ea e Eie 326 41 6 2 Running the Show ret aedes deoa ee erp n i eed pee bee Lue qase de bag reas 326 41 6 3 Using MagicQ PC and WYSIWYG on the same PC esee 327 41 6 4 Ato iro 327 ALG AUTO FOCUS e 327 41 6 0 TroubleshoOtmg ined eere eden tet pesanti a GV petant eed eere Dp meson ege optus vie 328 AIF DOM M 328 MagicQ User Manual 17 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 42 Multiple Monitors on MagicQ eceeescesecssecsseceseceseeeseeeeeeeeneecseeeeeesaecsaecaecaecssecsaeeseeseeesseeeseeeees 329 42 1 MagicQ Pro and Pro 2010 consoles eese eene rennen rennen 329 42 1 1 Moving Windows to the External Monitor seeseeseeeeeeeeeneen eene ren ren een 329 42 2 Additional Cue Stack Output and Programmer Windows eese 329 42 3 Additional external screens Multi
413. omers to obtain the latest version of relevant information to verify before placing orders that information being relied on is current and complete All products are sold subject to the terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgement including those pertaining to warranty patent infringement and limitation of liability Some of the available functions of products may be altered over the life of the product The ChamSys Ltd range of products meet EU directives where applicable for example the EMC and LVD directives as laid down by the European Community and ChamSys Ltd has a policy of regularly testing samples to ensure that production units continue to meet these specifications ChamSys Ltd will not accept goods back for repair if the serial number sticker is removed or defaced so that it is illegible This also applies to warranty repairs See terms and conditions of sale for full details All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without the prior written permission of ChamSys Ltd Copyright 2012 by ChamSys Ltd All rights reserved www chamsys co uk MagicQ User Manual 3 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk TABLE OF CONTENTS M UO CHO ENS
414. on Colour Beam windows It is also possible to make active entire Intensity Position Colour or Beam attributes by holding Position Colour or Beam or Intensity and pressing SET To make all the attributes of a group of heads active first select the heads you want to control then hold and press SET Alternatively in the Programmer Window press SHIFT and select ACTIVE 10 10 Removing channels from the Programmer 10 10 1 Removing channels using the REMOVE button To remove items from the programmer Q Select the heads you wish to remove attributes from If no heads are selected then all active heads in the programmer are affected Then choose one of the following methods Q Hold REMOVE and press All Position Colour Beam This removes all attributes of these of Intensity Position Colour or Beam Q Hold REMOVE and turn an encoder wheel or press the soft button in the Beam Colour Position or Group windows the specified attribute will be removed Q Hold All Position Colour or Beam and press REMOVE This removes all attributes of these of Intensity Position Colour or Beam Q Hold a soft button in the Beam Colour Position or Group windows and press REMOVE The specified attribute will be removed Q Hold and press REMOVE to remove all attributes of the selected heads 10 10 2 Removing channels using the Programmer Window It is also possible to remove attributes from the programmer by editing the spread sheet view in t
415. on The channel will be set to the level of the Grand Master fader Pressing TEST SELECT CHANS soft button again returns the channel to zero You can test multiple channels by using SHIFT and the cursor keys to select multiple channels and then pressing the TEST SELECT CHANS soft button Channels that are in test mode are highlighted in red Pressing the NEXT UNI or PREV UNI soft buttons moves you up or down the window to the first channel of the next or previous universe MagicQ User Manual 54 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 5 4 Patching a head or dimmer The console supports a large library of heads The console treats dimmers just like any other head they just happen to have a single channel Dimmers use the Generic Dimmer personality Choose the head you wish to patch by pressing the CHOOSE HEAD soft button The Window will change to give you a list of heads Select a head by pressing the touch screen Alternatively scroll around the Window using the cursor keys and press ENTER when the cursor is over the correct head VIEW CHOOSE CHOOSE EDIT PATCH RENUM AUTO CLONE MORPH CHANS DIMMER HEAD HEAD IT HEAD NOS GROUPS HEAD HEAD PATCH Martin Mac250 Mac 250 Mode 4 Martin Mac250md4 hed free 1 001 Once you have chosen a head you will be returned to the Patch Window Press the PATCH IT soft button to patch the head and you will be prompted for an address to patch the head to Press ENTER to patch
416. on selects the next window in the open window list Windows appear in the windows section of the screen Prev Win This function of this button has changed It is now renamed EXT and is used to move windows to from external monitors when using Multi Windows MagicQ User Manual 338 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk In older software its function was to select the previous window The order of window selection is fixed so that windows appear in a memorable sequence regardless of the order the windows were opened Each press of the Prev Win button selects the previous window in the open window list Windows appear in the windows section of the screen Size This button is used to modify the size and position of the active window on the screen Windows appear in the windows section of the screen There are 9 possible combinations of window size and position The initial size is the maximised size i e the window takes up the whole of the window display area There are four possible half screen positions and 4 possible quarter screen positions Each press of the size button modifies the window to the next combination After the final combination the window reverts to the first maximised size Prog This is a Window select button Pressing this button makes the Programmer Window the active window If the window was not open then the window is opened The Programmer Window is used to view and modify th
417. on the interface MagicQ User Manual 255 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk When configured as Outputs the ports can be configured to output the same or different Art Net ACN universes The Cons Uni field shows the console universe on MagicQ that is outputting the data that the port is trying to read If no console universe is set to output on that port then the field is blank At any time you can revert back to a standard profile by pressing the CONFIG DEVICE soft button will will show the list of DMX profiles An interface can be removed by putting the cursor on the line of the interface and pressing REMOVE If there are multiple MagicQ consoles on the network then only the master one as per Hot Takeover will provide configuration information to the interfaces 27 2 Non MQ Mode Art Net ACN Buffer If the ChamSys 4 Universe Interface is set in a mode other than MQ Mode such as Art Net ACN or buffer then it is not possible to configure the interface from Net Manager However the device will still appear in Net Manager and it is possible to view its configuration CLOSE INSERT CONFIG WINDOW DEVICE DEVICE Net Manager currently only supports ChamSys 4 Universe Interfaces 27 3 Upgrading ChamSys 4 Universe Interfaces The ChamSys 4 Universe Interface can be firmware upgraded from MagicQ software Download the latest firmware the ChamSys download site http download magicq co uk download mag
418. on will always be red 16 2 4 Flash acts as Go Back When set to Yes pressing the Flash button acts as if the Go button had been pressed and pressing Shift the Flash button acts as if the BACK button had been pressed When set this way the button does Not act as a bump button When set to No the Flash button acts as a bump button in the Normal way Holding Shift and pressing Flash will perform Back instead of Go When set to Yes the settings Flash activates Stack Flash releases Stack and Flash toggles are ignored 16 2 5 Flash acts as Flash Go When set to Yes the Flash button acts as both a Flash button and a Go button Pressing the Flash button performs the Go function this will active the Cue Stack or if the Cue Stack is already active it will Go to the next step At the same time the Flash button will operate in the Normal way setting the Playback level to 100 Releasing the Flash button will set the Playback level back to 0 or if the fader is raised to the leve of the fader Holding SHIFT and pressing the Flash button will perform Flash Back Normally when Flash acts as Flash Go is set Yes then the setting Flash Releases Stack should be set to No If the option Flash Releases Stack is set to Yes then releasing the Flash button will also release the Playback unless the fader is raised When set to Yes the setting Flash acts as Go Back is igNored 16 2 6 Flash toggles
419. onal When a Cue has Individual Times then these override the General Times Cues can have Individual Times set for only certain heads or attributes in this case Individual Times will be used for those heads and attributes whilst the General Times will be used for all other heads and attributes Timing information for the fade in and out of FX is configured in the FX view 10 448 FX The Cue stores FX information for each of the FX that is in the programmer 10 5 Split Cue Times It is possible to add Split Cue times different times to different heads both before a Cue is programmed in the Programmer Window and afterwards in the Cue Window Split times can be added by playing back Palettes with time or by directly editing the Times in the Programmer or Cue Windows In both the Programmer and the Cue Window the View Times has two views View Simple and View Advanced View Simple is used for simple changes to times including entering split times across the selected heads View Advanced is used for editing attribute times for a particular head one by one 10 5 1 View Simple MagicQ User Manual 101 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The View Simple shows both General Times and Individual Times The General Times are the times that are applied by default to attributes in the Cue i e if you do not specify any Individual Time for an attribute on a head then the General Times will be used The Individual T
420. onalities had the filename format manufacturer shortname mode hed From MagicQ 1 4 9 8 the personalities have been renamed so that all the personalities now use the format manufacturer name mode hed So for example to make a modification to the Martin Mac500 Mode 1 personality choose the personality then press SAVE AS and enter the new name Martin Mac500 mymode 23 11 1 Removing old personalities It is possible to remove all old personalities and all user created personalities by pressing SHIFT and REMOVE HEADS in the File Manager This removes all old heads and extracts the heads again from MagicQ User Manual 220 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk heads all Make sure all your user created heads are backed up to USB or to another system before removing all old personalities MagicQ User Manual 221 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 24 FX Editor MagicQ includes a FX editor added to enable users to create their own waveform FX and to edit existing waveform FX The FX editor edits the core MagicQ waveform FX stored on the console distinct from the combination FX stored in the FX Window Waveform FX are not specific to a particular personality type they can be used on any Head with the required attributes RELOAD CHOOSE NEW SAVE SAVE FX FX FX FX AS Changes made in the FX editor have immediate effect on all Cues that use the FX for example changing the standard circle FX
421. ons becomes a mode selection page The mode button affects the top 3 rows of playbacks it does not affect the bottom row of 12 playbacks they are always configured as normal Playbacks The mode options are Playbacks 3 rows of 12 playbacks each with separate GO BACK default Exec Access to the Execute Window enabling complete user configuration of the buttons Use PG UP and PG DN to select the Exec Page Heads Selecting heads Use PG UP PG DN to scroll pages of heads Palet The buttons are automatically split into 24 Groups 16 position palettes 16 colour palettes and 16 beam palettes Media Access to the Media Window Shows media page options servers layers and images as in the Media Window Use the 2 down PG UP PG DN buttons to change the Media Bank Use the 3 down PG UP PG DN buttons to change the Media Image Cues Testing of Cues Use PG UP PG DN to scroll pages of cues MagicQ User Manual 170 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Cue Stack Testing of Cue Stacks Use PG UP PG DN to scroll pages of Cue Stacks DMX Test Tests individual DMX channels Use PG UP PG DN to scroll pages of channels Head Test Tests locates individual heads Use PG UP PG DN to scroll pages of heads When selecting the mode you can choose to press the SELECT button or the FLASH button associated with the mode In some of the modes this will alter the behaviour For example in the Heads Test DMX Test Cues and Cu
422. onsole loads macros for the head from the personality file Typical macros are Lamp On Lamp Off and Reset however they are very head dependent The Lamp On Lamp Off and Reset macros can be run at any time by using the following short cuts SHIFT LOCATE Lamp on selected heads CTRL LOCATE Reset selected heads CTRL SHIFT LOCATE Lamp off selected heads Other head macros can be accessed in the Macro Window press the HEAD MACRO soft button A list of the available macros is displayed Select the macro you wish to run Progress of the macro is shown in the Input Display It is also possible to lamp on or off all fixtures from the MACRO window VIEW VIEW MACROS DATA START MACRO END MACRO ASSIGN MACRO DEASSIGN MACRO LAMP ON ALL LAMP OFF ALL HEAD MACROS 7 6 Locating Heads The first action you are likely to want to do is to locate the heads i e to put them into a starting position Select the required heads and then press the LOCATE button Pressing LOCATE locates all the selected heads LOCATE places all the attributes of the head into the Programmer at their default values The personality data for each head specifies what happens to a head when it is located Typically the shutter is opened the dimmer is set to 100 and pan and tilt are set to the centre position You can locate individual attribute types by holding one of the Pos Col Beam or Int
423. onto a console which does not have your chosen personalities installed If you load an old show into MagicQ then the personalities in use on the show will be the ones recorded into the show file not the personalities in the show heads folder on the MagicQ console From the Patch Window if you choose the personality again edit the personality or patch new heads of the same personality type it will always use the personality stored in the show file this ensures consistency You can update a personality stored in a show file with the one stored in show heads using the Reload Head soft button In the Head Editor press the Reload Head soft button The personality will be MagicQ User Manual 211 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk reloaded from disc and all the patched heads in the show will use the updated personality Note that it is not possible to reload a head where the number of channels in the personality has been changed 23 2 General View The General View contains a fixed number of parameters Note that as these parameters fundamentally affect the programming of the head they can not be modified once a head of the type has been patched REGEN RELOAD CHOOSE NEW SAVE PALETTES MACROS PALETTES HEAD HEAD HEAD HEAD HEAD EDITOR Generic_Dimmer hed LO i a ii l Of 23 2 1 Names The Manufacturer Name Short Name and Mode are used to identify the head to the system These fiel
424. operate on the intensity regardless of head type When the internal Pixel Mapper is patched for a grid then MagicQ sets up the media settings automatically so that the Pixel Mapper appears in the Media Window Once a grid has been designed in the Plan View of the Outputs Window then pressing the PATCH PIXMAP soft button automatically patches the internal pixel mapper personality generic bitmapfx2 PREVIEW PREVIEW DIM LTP DIM LOCATE ADD ACTIVE CLEAR CLEAR LOAD OUTPUT LAYER ZERO LOCATE FULL FX SELECTED ALL PICTURE Grid number Layer 1 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 SS m i 100 Server2 Server3 Server4 Server5 ServerS Server Server8 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Layer 7 Layer 8 Movie speed Media page Media d y type Apply ty 022 hris PC Wed Aug 26 19 30 13 2009 Ver 1 4 2 6 Build 112 Page 1 Add MagicQ asks the user to specify the number of layers required and will patch that number of layers generic bitmapfx2 heads The layers will be named according to the grid that is selected in the Outputs Window MagicQ uses head numbers above the other patched fixtures When operating on a layer within the pixel mapper it will default to operating on the grid that was selected when it was patched MagicQ now overrides the default value for Grid Number specified in the Head Editor for generic bitmapfx2 MagicQ automatically adds the settings for the Pixel Mapper to the Media View o
425. or above an intensity level hold ALL and type the level Then release ALL or press ENTER Hold ALL 50 ENTER To reselect all heads at a specific intensity level hold ALL and type followed by the level Then release ALL or press ENTER Hold ALL 60 ENTER MagicQ User Manual 80 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 7 15 Fan Mode The FAN button enables a different mode of operation of the encoders whereby instead of encoder changes being applied to each selected head in a linear fashion changes are applied in a fan Positive changes fan the heads apart whilst negative changes fan the heads together Fan mode cannot be used when Single mode is are active since fanning only makes sense when more than one head is under control Pressing and holding the FAN button enters FAN mode temporarily Releasing the FAN button returns to the normal mode When you press and hold FAN you get a toolbar on the screen that gives you direct access to fanning options On MagicQ PC you can press SHIFT FAN to bring up the FAN toolbar FAN type Asym Sym End Al 2 There are 3 types of FAN Asymmetric default as in previous s w fans from centre asymmetric Symmetric fans from the centre symmetric End fans from the end It is possible to use Parts for fanning parts so that the fan is replicated across the selected heads For 2 s 3 s select the 2 Parts or 3 parts For higher number of pa
426. or example to set up a fader to perform a fly away at the end of a song As the fader is moved up the LTP channels are changed from their current values to the values recorded in the Cue MagicQ supports an additional option All chans controlled LTP This options allows the Playback when it is the last activated to consider all channels to be LTP The value of HTP channels controlled by the Playback is the value output regardless of the HTP level of other Playbacks This allows soloing of Intensities The Cue Stack can also be configured so that the fader controls the size and or speed of any FX recorded in the current Cue Thus for example you can set up one fader to control a pan swing and another to control a tilt swing Moving the faders to half gets a small circle whilst moving to full gets a big circle Varying the faders enables generation of ellipses 14 4 Playback Buttons Each of the buttons illuminates to indicate its current state FLASH Green Add Red Swap Green flash Add playback held over Red flash Swap playback held over GO Green Cue Stack is running STOP Red Cue Stack is halted SELECT Blue Playback is selected When a Cue Stack is halted pressing STOP fades backwards through the stack 14 4 1 Grand Master amp Sub Master To the left of the 10 playbacks are two master faders a Grand Master which controls the overall HTP output level of the console and a Sub Master which controls the HTP output leve
427. or the FTDI USB interfaces the VCP virtual COM port driver and the FTDxxxx direct driver MagicQ uses the FTDxxxx driver By default Windows will install the VCP driver the dongle will then appear as a serial port under ports in Device Manager and will not work with MagicQ The MagicQ PC installation includes the drivers in the folder c Program Files ChamSys Ltd Magicq MagicQ Wing Drivers Alternatively download the FTDxxxx driver from the ChamSys web site marked MagicQ PC Wing drivers zip Extract this file onto your PC Then in Device Manager Control Panel Settings System go to USB devices and click on the device indicated USB to Serial convertor Click Properties and Reinstall Driver When Windows asks whether to search for a driver then click no and select the downloaded driver manually If you continue to have problems loading the correct driver then try disabling any network ports on the PC and then reinstall the drivers Windows sometimes searches automatically for drivers on the network MagicQ User Manual 166 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 3 4 Installing USB drivers for Mac and Linux Please refer to the installation instructions for Mac and Linux which can be downloaded from our web site www chamsys co uk 19 3 5 ChamSys Ethernet Interface To use a ChamSys Ethernet interface box set Universes 1 to 3 to an Out Type of Art Net an In Type of Art Net and enable them Set the Out Uni an
428. or to v1 4 3 0 oo eeceeceseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeaeecsaecaecsaecsaeesseeseeeeseesseeees 172 19 6 Mode amp Security Settings iunt tetro otra teer epa eee Ee Po pe Rr eV theo a PEE de Lee e edet ke 173 19 6 1 Product Lype etit n i eer ete eene detinet epe eco cote y ege d Roscio icula 173 IP EMEN Grot olia TRE 173 19 6 3 Dime ZoNe lt uicit E E AE Do Epub EU Fee House Lese tue odi bte eire td 173 IDE MEN nncuc 173 19 6 5 Foul scesecci cd sgedadcateciei Lesteust e eak a EE EERE eai aaia 173 19 6 6 Disable Programming entered n e trei ope LS e PR EE EEEE E 173 19 6 7 Disable Modifications iin iecit tete Hi ste i op ese i etie a Ee Rete a rebua 174 19 6 8 Disable Test Mode eee n eee rer Eee Erae Er lp h EL E e H Deben Era etsi dae PE dixere 174 19 6 9 Disable JETV qo ERR e M 174 19 6 10 Auto Backup titre ted atieirar e bereit te ie ai aree ege Dus veste en Py athe rere Ee Tei 174 19 6 11 Keep a backup archives ici uitis ee rne tiere toe o PLE EE Ce P Ee ERE ERE REDE E DOR EG 174 19 6 12 Show dle paths 5 iere iiid e n pene Uu ea Eo ee rb T e TE re oa E 174 19 7 Programming settings eese reete entente tha tbe trae Pr kd beh teeth o eb e betae e eda bote eo bea 174 19 7 1 Activate Chans Heads esessssesseseeeeeeee enne enne ener enen enne trennen nenne 174 IIT EFackin ono eec retten est Etre tetto E EEE vestes tae reru desve E NEOS 175 19 7 3 Unused Chans return to defa
429. or you can copy an existing head The console stores copies of the head data for all patched heads and all heads that you have edited in memory until the show is erased MagicQ User Manual 160 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Changes that you make in the Head Editor immediately affect the heads patched on the console and any new heads of that type you patch into the current show However you need to save the changes permanently to disk if you wish the changes to continue to take effect after you erase the show 18 13 Backup Archives By default the console stores an archive of the show files for every quarter of an hour of the day and for every day of the week This enables the user to revert to a previous copy of their show Archive files are only made when the console auto saves so if auto saves are disabled then no archive files will be generated If the console is set to auto save on changes then archive files will only be stored when changes are made To revert to an archived file press SHIFT and LOAD SHOW in the Setup Window Archive files are stored in a special directory that should not be modified by the user When the user re loads an archived backup file the backup file is restored into the standard show directory Archive files have the name backup0530 sbk to indicate the show file that was recorded just before 5 30am Daily files are also stored backupfri sbk indicates the show fi
430. oras Box you need at least v4 5 which is planned for the beginning of 2009 26 9 4 Using MagicQ with Hippotizers There are several different personalities for Hippotizer depending on the version personalities can be found under the Green Hippo folder Each Hippotizer consists of 1 master and 4 16 layers dependent on the configuration of the Hippotizer For v2 you need v214master hed and v214layer hed For v3 select v3011master hed and v3011 1layer hed 26 9 4 1 Hippotizer V2 The following table shows how two Hippotizer Stages can be patched in single output mode Hippotizer Personality Universe Address 1 v2master 1 1 1 v2layer 1 56 1 v2layer 1 106 1 v2layer 1 156 1 v2layer 1 206 1 v2layer 1 256 1 v2layer 1 306 1 v2layer 1 356 1 v2layer 1 406 2 v2master 2 1 2 v2layer 2 56 2 v2layer 2 106 2 v2layer 2 156 2 v2layer 2 206 2 v2layer 2 256 2 v2layer 2 306 2 v2layer 2 356 2 v2layer 2 406 For dual output mode 2 master layers are required Patch 1 master 4 layers then 1 master and 4 more layers MagicQ User Manual 251 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The head numbers of the layers should always be sequential 26 9 4 2 Thumbnails and live previews on a Hippotizer V2 To get thumbnails on a Hippotizer ensure that the Hippotizer is configured with a user account vj with password vj The media folders on the Hippotizer must be
431. ort USB keyboards and mice 3 3 DMX Connections The MagicQ Pro and Pro 2010 series of consoles have 4 direct DMX outputs on the rear of the panel so you can connect your DMX cables direct to the console Alternatively you can use Ethernet and an external Ethernet to DMX converter box such as the ChamSys 3 Universe Ethernet to DMX converter Connect the DMX converter to the console Network port via the network cable provided When making a direct connection in this way an inverted network cable must be used To connect multiple Ethernet to DMX converters to the console use a network hub or network router using standard network cables MagicQ User Manual 28 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 3 4 Powering Up To power up the console press the power switch on the back panel On the MQ50 press the red button in the top right of the front panel The blue LEDs on the ten S buttons will light up in turn After a few seconds the screen will come to life and you will see the operating system quickly performing self tests Once the self tests are completed the MagicQ application is started 3 5 Powering Down To power down the console it is necessary to quit the MagicQ application The console operating system then performs an automatic shutdown and turns itself off when complete To quit the MagicQ application press the SETUP button and then the QUIT soft button When asked for confirmation press the YES VIEW VIEW FILE B
432. ot activate the Cue Stack The overall level of HTP channels is also affected by the Grand Master and Sub Master and any active Group Masters The Sub Master can be configured in Setup to be an Add Swap Master 16 2 2 Flash releases stack When set to Yes releasing the Flash button releases the Cue Stack and sets the level of the Playback to 0 When set to No pressing the Flash button sets the level of the Playback to 0 but does not release the Cue Stack Note that if the option Fader Activates Stack is set to Yes then releasing of the Playback is also dependent on the fader If the Playback was activated by raising the fader then pressing the Flash button will not release the Playback In this case the Playback will only be released by lowering the fader to 0 or by pressing the Rel button This allows the Flash button to be used both to bump in a Cue which was not activated by fader and to also bump a Cue to 100 which was activated by the fader at a lower level 16 2 3 Flash always swaps When set to Yes pressing the Flash button will always act as a Swap rather than an Add regardless of the state of the Add Swap button When the button is pressed the Intensity of all other active Playbacks will be set to 0 When the button is released the other Playbacks will be restored to their previous level MagicQ User Manual 139 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk When this option is set Yes then the LED in the Flash butt
433. ot take over prior to v1 4 4 5 Set up the universes to be controlled by hot take over in the View DMX I O view of the Setup Window For Multiple mode where all consoles will have equal priority the universes will be configured as Hot Takeover on all consoles on the network For Single mode only the Backup console will be configured with Hot Takeover universes When a universe is set as Hot Takeover the MagicQ console takes over the control of the status of the Universe enabling and disabling it according to the ArtNet data received in from the Network Universes that are set to Hot take over monitor the network for ArtNet traffic on that universe If no ArtNet traffic is detected for longer than the Hot take over detect time then the universe will be automatically enabled When ArtNet traffic is again detected on the network from another console the universe is automatically disabled immediately 28 4 3 Hot take over type The hot take over type can be set to manual or automatic When set to manual the operator has output is effectively frozen until the operator decides what new look to change to In automatic a gradual fade is made to the look set on the Playbacks in this mode an operator will often put up a safe state on the standby console which can be used if the main console has a problem SETUP oe orn E sbk Mode Keypad Windows Cue Network Ports MIDI Hardware Encoders Storage ids Tim
434. ou can revert to the Help Window by pressing the HELP button at any time Note that as the console utilises a hard disk system it is necessary to shut the console down before removing power to it Removing power to the console when it is running may cause problems with the file system Normally this will only result in a subsequent slow start up whilst the system repairs the disk however in certain circumstances the file system may become corrupted If you always follow the instructions for shutting down you will have no problems When the console starts up it loads the last show file that was saved either a file explicitly saved by you or the last backup file it automatically saved 18 2 Shutting Down To shut the console down press the QUIT soft button in the Setup Window When asked for confirmation select yes The console powers down automatically when it has completed its shutdown sequence 18 3 Saving Shows The MagicQ utilises a large hard disk to enable storage of a virtually infinite number of shows When you are programming a show the show is stored in memory In order to store your show on the disk you need to press the SAVE SHOW soft button in the Setup Window Whilst programming you should regularly save your show so that if the unexpected happens and the power fails your show data is not lost You can chose any filename The console will automatically set the file extension to shw By default the console periodicall
435. ouch screen If the current step in the Cue Stack is set to Chase Timing then the Chase speed will be modified If the step is set to Cue Timing then the FX speed of any FX in the current Cue will be modified MagicQ User Manual 129 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk If a Cue Stack is set to Chase Timing then the GO button can also be used to tap the time Note that this only works on chases when the option Go Jumps Out of Loop is set to No It is also possible to configure the S buttons or the GO buttons to perform Tap to Time Setup View Settings Playbacks Tap to time buttons 14 5 Playbacks Window The Playbacks Window enables management of all 202 playbacks regardless of how many physical wings are attached This ensures that shows that will be run on consoles with wings can be programmed on a PC with no wings It also provides an ideal way of expanding your show control by using virtual playbacks The Playbacks Window displays a button for each of the 202 playbacks starting with the 10 main playbacks and then with 8 wings each with 24 playbacks The top right encoder is used to select which Page of playbacks is displayed This is completely separate from the Page used for the physical playbacks Thus you can have the physical playbacks set to one page whilst you view and modify playbacks on a different page Cues can be recorded onto any of the playbacks in the same way as they are recorded onto
436. ow which shows the output of the media server or the output of each of the layers This is transferred is real time from the media server so that you can see exactly what the media server is playing This is particularly useful in situations with many media servers or media servers that are remote from the control position 26 1 Connect the Media Server over LAN Connect the Media servers to the MagicQ via Ethernet and enable the required Art Net universes outputs on the MagicQ Setup View DMX I O MagicQ User Manual 242 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Configure the Media servers and the MagicQ so that they are on the same IP subnet i e 2 x x x To check the IP settings you can try and ping the MagicQ from the Media Server From the Windows menu select run and type in ping 2 x x x where 2 x x x is the IP address of the MagicQ The ping should show a Reply from 2 x x x If you do not get a reply then check the physical connection check the configuration of the network port on the media server and check there is no firewall software blocking on the media server It is also possible to ping from MagicQ simply type ping followed by the IP address at the command line From the numeric keypad type followed by the IP address 26 2 Patching the Media Server on MagicQ Media servers generally consist of a number of layers of one or more types Each type of layer has a different personality Each lay
437. ow as per removing of any Windows item 14 5 5 Playback Rate It is possible to set the playback rate of a Playback using Encoder X in the Playback Window Press the S button of the required playback to choose which playback to change By default the playback rate is locked to 100 Press the X soft button to enable changes to playback rates The playback rate is shown for each of the main playbacks when the is other than 100 The playback rate is stored in the show file so that the rate will persist over resets and power downs Global playback rate can be set using the Y soft button in a similar way 14 6 Wing Playbacks Pages Each wing supports 24 playbacks divided into two rows of 12 playbacks Each row of playbacks has separate NEXT PAGE and PREV PAGE buttons This is a very powerful feature as it allows the playbacks to be split into separate sections without forcing all the playbacks to be on the same page This provides significant flexibility to how shows are played back for example one section of a wing can be used to control par lamps whilst another could be used to control intelligent heads Changing the Page of the par lamps would not change the Page of the heads By default the page buttons on the main section affect all playbacks whilst the buttons on each wing row only affect that row If you plan to operate a wing section separately then you can avoid the main page buttons affecting that wing section In the Setup
438. p window SHIFT ACTIVE MagicQ User Manual 107 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 11 Outputs Windows On MagicQ you can view the Outputs in many different ways MagicQ supports up to 4 different Output Windows This allows four different output views to be viewed simultaneously Press the Out button to open the main Output Window Press 2 and then Out to open the second Output Window 3 Out for Output Window 3 and 4 Out for Output Window 4 The 2 Output Window the Output Info Window can also be opened by pressing CTRL OUT In the Outputs Window just as in the Programmer Window and Palette View Window there is auto ordering of heads MagicQ orders the heads according to the selection order When no heads are selected the order is the normal head order Auto ordering can be turned off in the Setup Window under Windows Auto Row ordering The Outputs Window has many different views press the soft buttons on the top left hand side to change the views 11 1 Heads View The Heads View shows information for all of the heads patched in the show press the VIEW HEADS soft button You can request only information for certain heads to be shown by using the PROG ONLY SEL ONLY and SEL PB soft buttons These show respectively heads that are active in the programmer selected heads and heads in the current cue on the selected playback OUTPUTS Hdname Hd type No Dim Pan Tit Col1 Cyan Mage Yell Shut h
439. palette entry is moved programming follows the palette entry i e if you have a Cue which uses a Colour palette entry then moving that Colour palette entry will cause the Cue to be updated to continue to reference the palette entry 9 6 Removing attributes from Palettes You can delete an entire palette entry by using REMOVE as with any window item To remove specific attributes from a palette entry you can use the REC REMOVE record option This works in a similar way to the normal record mode except that where items in the programmer are normally merged into the palette entry they are now removed The MASK IPCB and MASK ATTRIB record options enable selection of which options are deleted as for normal recording of palette entries For example to remove the shutter attribute from a previously recorded beam palette entry clear the programmer select the heads and modify the shutter attribute only Then press SHIFT and RECORD and select the REC REMOVE and MASK ATTRIB Shutter record options Then select the palette entry 9 7 Linked Palettes If you select a Palette and then record it as another Palette without changing any of the attributes then all the values in the new Palette will be linked to the first Palette Changing any of the attributes in the first Palette will change the attributes in the new Palette This is a linked Palette MagicQ shows a L in the Palette entry to indicate a linked Palette When you change attributes u
440. patched and to name and number them as you wish In the Patch Window all the light coloured fields can be configured To modify a field first move the cursor to the field then input the new value using the keypad and keyboard and finally press ENTER Multiple head names and numbers can be set at the same time by using SHIFT and the cursor keys to select multiple items Turning on test mode using the TEST HEAD soft button makes it easy to view each head dimmer in turn By default the VIEW HEADS view is sorted by head number If you are setting head numbers by entering each head number individually then you may find it easier if the view is sorted by DMX Press the SORT soft button and select BY DMX Note that the sort also affects the order in the Intensities Window the Programmer Window and the Group Window 5 5 1 Head Names Head names are used to identify the Dimmer or Head We recommend that you set the head name based on its location e g front wash back truss SL It is not necessary to name intelligent heads according to their product name e g Mac500 as this is already stored in the console from the personality Hdno Name Piny Tiny Swap Merge From Generne Dimmer 1 001 000000001 1001 Generic Dimmer 1 002 000000010 jenetic Dimmer 1 003 000000011 F 5 FSS 1 004 000000100 004 Spots ONoco Genetic Dimmer 1 005 000000101 005 FingerL R59Indoo ESCM 1 006 000000110 D06 Fimgert
441. pecific DNS Suffix IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway command line and type enter The IP address of the network card s will then be displayed Optionally set up a name for the media server This may help you to distinguish the different media servers Select the type of media server and the version Set the number of layers you have patched this is the number of media layers and does not include master layers soft edge or camera layers Set the head number of the first media layer This tells MagicQ which patched layer is the first media layer on the media server MagicQ expects layers to be sequential head numbers e g set you head numbers for your layers to 1 to 8 Arkaos For Arkaos 3 6 and above and Media Master choose MSEX Arkaos For Arkaos 3 5 select Arkaos Set the version number to 0 Arkaos supports 8 layers Catalyst Select Catalyst and set the version number to 0 Coolux Select Coolux and set the version number to 0 The number of layers should be set to the total number of layers patched Hippotizer For Hippotizer choose either Hippo Stage or Hippo Express depending on which type you are using For Hippo HD use Hippos Stage Set the version field according to the version 2 for Hippo v2 3 for Hippo v3 Maxedia For Maxedia choose MSEX and set the version number to 0 Mbox For Mbox choose Mbox and set the version number to 0 MagicQ User Manual 245 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys
442. playback press GO or raise the fader and now it acts as an Intensity Master Press RELEASE to stop the master having any effect 15 10 3 FX Size and FX Speed Master To make a FX Size or FX Speed Master you record a single Cue onto a Playback that contains the attributes that you wish to control To make a FX size master for pan movement record a cue with only the pan attribute in the programmer for the heads you wish to control Then set the Cue Stack option Fader is a Size Master Activate the playback and now it acts as a FX Size Master for pan movement You can set up multiple FX Size and FX Speed Masters however you should only have one Master of each type to control each head otherwise there is a conflict 15 11 Advanced activate and release options The FLASH button can be set to release the Cue Stack using the Flash releases stack option This option works in a slightly different way depending on the Fader releases stack When Fader releases stack no Theatre Hog II Warp modes pressing and then releasing the FLASH button will always release the stack regardless of the fader level When Fader releases stack yes Normal mode pressing and releasing the FLASH button will only release the Cue Stack if the fader is at 0 MagicQ User Manual 136 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk The Cue Stack can be configured in different ways to affect whether the Cue Stack reset
443. playbacks and channels It can also be used during live running to override the outputs for example for changing the colour or gobo of intelligent heads The console outputs any channels that are active in the programmer at highest priority i e they over ride all other playbacks 10 1 What is in the programmer The Prog Window enables you to determine exactly what is in the programmer and how it is configured Press PROG to open the window The programmer stores three types of data Channel Levels Channel Times Channel FX In the Prog Window there are three views corresponding to the three types of data View Levels View Times and View FX Use the three top left soft buttons to select the view VIEW W ADV LOCATE HE REC SNAP CLEAR REMOVE TIMES VIEW OPTIONS SHOT ALL HEAD PROG Mac250 46 47 48 49 50 Head name Head type Hdno Dim i Colour Shutter Gobo Rotate Fr rH m In the Channel Times and Channel View windows you have a choice of a Simple View or an Advanced View The Simple View is sufficient for most programming it enables modifications of fade times on a per attribute type basis and modifications of each programmed FX The Advanced View enables fade times and FX parameters to be set up on a per channel basis In Levels View select Advanced View to view the raw values rather than the palette range names The LED on the CLEAR button is illuminated when there is data in the programmer A second copy o
444. possible to sub select heads from within the main selection using the keypad and referring to heads using the index of that head within the overall selection order for instance selecting the 1 and 3 head within the selection or selecting heads 1 THRU 4 in that selection The numbers used are the index into the selection order not the head numbers To use this method select a group of heads then type the index number followed by NEXT HEAD or PREV HEAD So to select the 1 and 2 heads in the current selection 1 2 NEXT HEAD Or to the 3 4 and 5 3 THRU 5 NEXT HEAD You can select multiple groups as your main selection so if you have a line of 4 spots and 4 washes you can make a group with of all 8 heads and then access them using the numbers 1 to 8 regardless of their head number MagicQ User Manual 79 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Chany www chamsys co uk Using NEXT HEAD and PREV HEAD without entering a number operates as normal selecting the next or previous head within the overall selection 7 12 Highlight Mode Highlight mode is used in conjunction with Single mode and Odd Even mode There are four possible modes of operation depending on the setting in the Setup Window of the Highlight Mode Normal Advanced highlights lowlight Advanced Highlight only and Advanced no reset In Normal mode the intensities of the selected heads are reduced except for the one or ones in Odd Even mode that ar
445. possible to use And Only together with the operator to set levels directly GROUP 1 3 FULL ENTER Note that if the option Select heads and palettes from keypad is set to No then the operator must be used to select groups from the keypad 2 1 THRU 4 5 THRU 8 1 3 FULL ENTER MagicQ User Manual 82 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 8 FX Engine 8 1 Adding in FX To apply a FX to some heads select the heads then from the FX Window Group Window or Prog Window press the ADD FX soft button MagicQ lists all of the stored Waveform FX Choose the FX to apply You can apply multiple FX to a head provided that the FX uses different attributes e g you can mix a Pan Sine with a Tilt Sine Some of the FX are not specific to particular attributes of the head these are marked with a e g Ramp Sine and Cosine When one of these is selected you are prompted for which attribute you wish to apply the FX to For instance you could program a circle using a Sine on the Pan attribute and a Cosine on the Tilt attribute Alternatively you could just use the circle FX FILE MANAGER hard drive show fx a bounce 4steps wve 4 heads 1 channels 6 steps Any attribute cosine diamond T H m follow Mi ii ledpulse4 M M er n E m E E HM L D e pulse pulse 3steps steps rabchris VN sine solo spider square Once you have chosen a FX you are returned to the Pr
446. programmed level MagicQ User Manual 66 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Cham www chamsys co uk 6 Setting Dimmer levels The levels of Dimmers are controlled from the Intensity Window Press the INT button to open the window 6 1 Using the on screen faders This window displays a fader for each dimmer and head patched onto the console Pressing the slider part of the fader sets the appropriate level When a fader is moved from 0 the channel in the programmer is activated and the fader will turn red PROG VIEW PRESETS SELECT ACTIVE REMOVE CURSOR Head Type All Next head Scroll All Window Next gel Head Name All N ext name No col H44 o H48 o No selected Heads Pacific M250 iggleLapXP Sat Jan 19 20 07 15 2008 Ver 1 3 4 6 Show loaded m Page 1 Add gt 100 50 0 The SQUARE OFF soft button enables fast programming of intensities Using the touch screen select the channels you wish to have at full and at zero but don t bother being exactly accurate with the level of the selection Pressing SQUARE OFF finishes the job by setting all channels that are less than 50 to 0 whilst setting channels above 50 to full Use the ALL TO FULL and ALL TO ZERO buttons to change the level of all the channels Press SHIFT and SQUARE OFF to invert the faders all channels less than 50 go to 100 whilst all channels above 50 go to 0 Press the CLEAR soft button to c
447. put and Input universes and type set correctly SETUP show capture sbk Ni Uni Status Out Type Out Uni In Type In Uni Visualiser Hottakeover Test m Enabled AnNet ArtNet At 0 None Yes Ese pena pe ena 1 a e a e e Destiei ea na atv a None e No io Deer aa es ena Jes ure Je C LI Niasklad Aehl 2s A C Ae lat A C Mana When you set a universe to Hot Takeover you must ensure that Input is enabled on that Universe and that it is set to the correct type and universe number generally the Input should be set up the same as the Output When using Hot take over on MagicQ PC ensure that the IP address of MagicQ PC set up in Setup Window View Settings is set to the valid IP address of the network you are using If this setting is incorrect then Hot Takeover will not work correctly Preferred Mode Setting one console to Preferred Master and the other to Preferred Slave operates a Master Slave mode whereby one console will always be the Master with the other console only taking control when that Preferred Master console is not available shutdown reset disconnected from the network As soon as the Preferred Master restarts or is connected back on the network then it will take control and the Preferred Slave will stop outputting All required universes on both consoles should be set to Hot Takeover Equal Mode Setting bot
448. r 3 changes the width of the line and changes the mode to bounce instead of normal in the third image Vert random Horiz random enable random movement of elements across the grid Modify the mode to change thickness of the elements and offset to change the frequency With this FX it is possible to generate snow and rain type FX umm Spot random enable random spots on the grid Modify mode to determine whether the defaults is white spots on black background or black spots on white background Version 1 5 7 5 MagicQ User Manual m M I J H HsH HH HHSHG IL LITT ITI LT EEE mm EEE oo __ __ nl usi uud c pemB E EEE z CEC OTT m m m T mm um H HHHHHH DN O N E H HH A E A a OT T LL OL OL OL OL T m E m ChamSys Ltd Cham www chamsys co uk Vert Rainbow Horiz Rainbow enable rainbow patterns across the grid Modify offset to multiply the rainbow across the grid D L E GS NN UR AE cs TmT L mA LIL E ml um um m EENNEN U EEUU ERI uA L EPET e Sw n 3 r mmm Em mw nw s mmm um mms BE DE L _ TPE _ MME SES _ PM _ NNUS NN UN i r3
449. r channel Virtual Dimmers take effect at the Patch level rather than at the Programmer level This means that the Output Window View Heads will show the virtual levels on the RGB channels i e the RGB levels before the virtual dimmer is applied The Outputs Window View Chans View DMX will show the actual levels output to the RGB channels i e the level after the virtual dimmer is applied The full head can be selected using the head number The title bar of the Group Pos Colour Beam windows will show v for each head with a virtual dimmer MagicQ User Manual 65 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 5 26 1 Quickly adding Virtual Dimmers to patched heads It is possible to add virtual dimmers to a head in the Patch View Heads view using a single action Place the cursor on the head you wish to add a virtual dimmer for and then press SHIFT and ADD VDIM You can use SHIFT the cursor keys to select multiple heads Virtual dimmers can only be added to heads that do not have an intensity channel For heads with multiple RGB elements a virtual dimmer will be made for each RGB element Virtual dimmers added in this way will appear unpatched Note that the virtual dimmers take up channels from the total channel count Note that if you set channels up with virtual dimmers and then load your show into a version of software prior to 1 3 8 1 then the virtual dimmer will not work the channels will always be at full
450. r keys and then pressing ENTER 4 9 Naming a Group When recording a group if you key in a name before pressing the touch screen or pressing ENTER then the group will be named at the same time as it is recorded You can name a group at any time by keying in the name pressing SET and pressing the touch screen If you do not have a keyboard then press SET and select the group to name by pressing the touch screen or using cursor keys and ENTER A keyboard window will be displayed for you to enter the name on screen MagicQ User Manual 46 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Clam www chamsys co uk 4 10 Recalling a Group Once a group has been recorded then pressing the touch screen for the group will make all the heads in the group selected All other heads will be deselected Use SHIFT to select multiple groups There is a Setup option to allow the user to default to selecting multiple groups 4 11 Setting Levels for Dimmers From the keypad you can enter commands such as 1 50 ENTER 1 THRU 4 FULL ENTER It is also possible to use the Intensity Window by pressing the INT button This window displays a fader for each dimmer and head patched onto the console Pressing the slider part of the fader sets the appropriate level When a fader is moved from 0 the channel in the programmer is activated and the fader will turn red The Window has 2 views View Prog and View Preset faders changed in the Prog View affect the intensity levels
451. r the network can be configured generally this should be set to the same size as the grid being used on the MagicQ consoles MagicQ PC systems The position and size of screen capture on the MagicQ Media Centre PC can be remote controlled from a MagicQ system using ArtNet This allows different capture areas for the sources to be recorded into the Cues on MagicQ In MagicQ Media Centre select Devices DMX Devices and select the Type as Live Feed Position Select the ArtNet Universe and Channel to respond to Note that ArtNet Universes start at 0 so if you are using Universe lon a MagicQ Console you will most likely need to select ArtNet Universe 0 Channel 1 MagicQ Media Centre maps 50 consecutive DMX channels for controlling Live Feeds each Live Feed consisting of a simple 10 channel personality On MagicQ patch the number of live feeds required using the Generic Live Feed personality The channels are Chan Description Default MagicQ User Manual 230 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd 1 Control 0 2 X coarse 1 3 X fine 0 4 Y coarse 1 5 Y fine 0 6 Width coarse 0 7 Width fine 1 8 Height coarse 0 9 Height fine 1 10 Spare 0 The values for control are 0 No changes 1 Change Position 128 Change Position and Size ChamSy www chamsys co uk The width and height controlled via remote are the width and height of the capture area for the live feed The resolution for the feed pixel width and pixel height is configured
452. re is only one step it behaves as though it is just the Cue on the Playback To view a recorded Cue press the SELECT button for the Playback and then press CUE to open the Cue Window To configure options when recording press SHIFT RECORD and a toolbar of record options will be displayed Choose the options you require then press the SELECT button of the Playback as above REC REC SELECTED ENTIRE MULTI REC REC REC REC REC CLOSE MERGE REMOVE ONLY STATE STEP TYPE INT POS COL BEAM OPTIONS MagicQ User Manual 51 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 4 17 Recording a Cue Stack Chase or Theatre Stack Recording a Cue Stack is the same as recording a Cue you simply record multiple Cues onto a Playback and you end up with a Cue Stack So for example to record a stack of two looks the first yellow dots the second blue triangles Generate the yellow dots look Press RECORD and press the SELECT button of the playback Generate the blue triangles look Press RECORD and press the SELECT button of the playback To test the Cue clear the programmer by pressing CLEAR then raise the Playback fader or press the Playback flash button View the Cue Stack by selecting the Playback and pressing CUE STACK to open the Cue Stack Window When you record more than one Cue onto a Playback the Cue Stack controls the transition from one Cue to another In Normal mode by default the Cue Stack operates like a chase i e each Cu
453. ready patched channels will be moved to the next free locations If you confirm NO then no move will be performed Multiple Dimmers and Heads can be moved at a time using SHIFT and the cursor keys When making a change to multiple heads the change defaults to an absolute change thus the first head will be moved to the specified address and the next heads to the addresses immediately following To make a relative change enter a after the new address i e to move 4 heads from 1 1 to 2 1 but keeping the relative DMX offsets between the heads enter 2 1 You can also specify an explicit offset to use just like when patching e g 2 1 20 5 14 Patching a head to multiple DMX addresses The View DMX view in the Patch Window enables multiple DMX channels to be easily assigned to one head Up to 5 additional DMX channels can be set up for each Head in addition to the main DMX address Remove additional channels by pressing REMOVE and selecting the additional channel fields or by typing u unpatch instead of a DMX address EDIT PATCH RENUM AUTO CLONE MORPH HEAD IT HEAD NOS GROUPS HEAD HEAD Hd type Hdno Name Gel DMX DMX DMX DMX DMX DMX generic Di 001 Dimmer 1 004 1 005 1 006 ooz__ OmnerJONocaror_ _ p pe pea pe a a el a Nimmar Na onl 1 0na CHOOSE DIMMER CHOOSE HEAD 5 15 Unpatching a head from a DMX address It is possible to unpatch a head i e to remove the association
454. rent Cue on Playback REC 0 ENTER Record Merge into Current Cue on Playback REC UPDATE Record Merge into Current Cue on Playback Hold and press REC Record Merge then choose where to merge Hold and press REC Recod Remove then choose where to record Record Cue Only Hold and press REC Record cue only then choose where to record Record selected heads only Hold and press REC Record selected heads only Hold and and press REC Record merge selected heads only Hold and and press REC Record remove selected heads only 10 8 2 Masking The console supports comprehensive masking facilities to enable the operator to select which attributes are recorded from the programmer into Cues By default there is no masking applied all channels in the programmer are recorded into Cues Two types of masking can be applied masking by attribute type and masking by attribute Masking by attribute type enables the operator to select which of the intensity position colour and beam attribute types is recorded Press the REC INT REC POS REC COL and REC BEAM soft buttons to select the attribute types to be recorded Select attributes in the Record Options Window to select to record individual attributes into the Cue Select Entire State to record all the values in the Programmer regardless of whether they have been changed since the last Cue was record this forces a blocking Cue to be recorded with hard values Use ALL RECORD as a s
455. rently selected Playback You can record to a specific Cue Id on the currently selected playback by entering a number and pressing Record Enter You can record to a specific Cue Id and Playback by entering the Playback number followed by followed by the Cue Id and pressing Record Enter For example 6 2 0 ENTER records to Playback 6 Cue Id 2 0 10 8 Record Options Record options can be accessed when recording by pressing SHIFT and RECORD or at any time using the REC OPTIONS soft button in the Programmer Window SELECTED ENTIRE MULTI REC REC ONLY STATE STEP TYPE CLOSE OPTIONS RECORD OPTIONS Recording default Mri Dim mode is Pan Tilt Colt Col2 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 G1SpinFine Focus Zoom Effect Ef Spin Cyan Magenta Yellow Col mix Scroll 022 023 024 027 028 029 030 Window Cont2 Macro1 Macro2 Col3 Col4 Gobo3 Gobo4 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 Rotate4 Frosti Frost2 Lens FX4 FX5 FXG FX7 FX8 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Cont4 Cont5 Cont amp Cont7 Cont8 Post Pos2 Pos3 Pos4 052 053 057 O60 PosG Mask Unlocked Lock Unick Chris PC Fri Nov 21 00 53 43 2008 Ver 1 3 8 6 Record select playback or window item Page 1 Add gt MagicQ User Manual 103 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 10 8 1 Record Short cuts There are many short cuts keys for recording is a keypad shortcut for Record Merge Hold S and press REC Record Merge into Cur
456. required item For multiple items in a Window move the cursor to the first item Then press and hold the SHIFT button whilst moving the cursor to the last item All the items will be highlighted In spreadsheet style Windows e g Patch pressing the touch screen or left clicking on the item with the mouse moves the cursor to the item You can highlight multiple Window items by pressing the touch screen and moving the touch across multiple items In boxes style Windows e g Group pressing the touch screen or left clicking performs the function associated with the item e g recalls that Group In these Windows use SHIFT or CTRL and the cursor keys to highlight multiple boxes 3 9 2 Setting the value of items To set the value of one or more items in a spreadsheet style window Move the cursor over the item s Enter a value on the keypad and press ENTER OR Type in the value on the keypad Press the touch screen click ENTER over the item For items that have a simple value of yes or no if you do not enter a value on the keypad then the value will toggle For items that have multiple values double click on the field for a list of values On the touch MagicQ User Manual 35 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk screen select the field and then press anywhere in the Input Display right side area underneath the main window to bring up the list of values Items that are coloured orange are read only and there
457. rmal playbacks 19 11 5 Crossfade always controls PB1 This option enables the user to lock the manual playback section of MagicQ to Playback Fader 1 regardless of the currently selected Playback This is designed for theatrical use where Playback Fader 1 always contains the master Cue Stack 19 11 6 Stomp Playbacks When the Playback Stomping option is enabled playbacks that have been fully overridden by other playbacks will be automatically released stomped 19 11 7 Intensity HTP FX can subtract This option determines whether one Playback intensity level can subtract from another Playback s level When set to yes an FX on one Playback can subtract from the level on another Playback When set to no MagicQ performs pure HTP i e the highest level including FX from all the Playbacks is output 19 11 8 Go reasserts channels This setting determines which channels are reasserted when the Go button of a Playback is pressed The options are All inc tracked non tracked and All no fade When set to All inc tracked then pressing GO on the Playback will reassert channels that are tracking through the Cue Stack even if they were being controlled by another Playback When set to non tracked only channels that are recorded as hard values in the current Cue will be reasserted All no fade forces an immediate change of the channel values controlled by the Playback MagicQ User Manual 186 Ver
458. roups in different directions on the group and from the centre outwards In the Plan View use SHIFT MAKE GROUP to make a group from the currently selected heads If no text is entered before pressing MAKE GROUP the group is automatically named based on the first and last head numbers in the group To get a colour rainbow to roll seamlessly across a line of led battens you may need to reverse the selection of the individual groups it depends which way you numbered your LED fixtures 25 9 Making new LED personalities on MagicQ MagicQ has an in built personality editor so it is easy to create new personalities New personalities can be based on other personalities or created from a blank personality For simple LED fixtures you may be able to use one of the generic LED personalities either generic LED 3 chan or generic LED 4 chan When creating a personality allocate the red green and blue channels to the cyan magenta and Introduction MagicQ User Manual 241 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 26 Controlling Media Servers with MagicQ MagicQ is ideally suited to controlling media servers through its powerful Cue Engine and its large colour touch screen The eight encoder wheels enable quick and easy access to the large numbers of control parameters MagicQ has extremely powerful support for media servers It is possible to connect to up to 50 different media servers or intelligent media yokes each with differen
459. rt and stop the timecode running Entering a new timecode value whilst the timecode simulator is running will jump directly to the new value and continue running Typing before pressing the X button will restart from the last entered timecode 35 2 Learn Timing It is possible for the console to learn the timing live Set the steps in the Cue Stack to time code Then release the Cue Stack and in the Cue Stack window press SHIFT and RECORD TC Now press the GO button for the Cue Stack MagicQ starts the time code running at 0 0 0 and each time you press GO it moves to the next Cue whilst recording the current time code into the Wait fields At the end of the Cue Stack press RELEASE to exit the time code record mode Time code values can be edited individually and can be set in the format 0 0 0 00 The and operators can be used to add or subtract times to the time code times for one or more cues This is useful for changing the absolute times of a Cue Stack whilst maintaining the relative times between Cues Use SHIFT or CTRL and the cursor keys to select multiple times and offset their values using or MagicQ User Manual 300 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 35 3 Timecode generation MagicQ can also master time code In Setup choose between SMPTE timecode and MIDI timecode There are special macro field commands to enable time code mastering and to set the time code W enable Enable disable time c
460. rts use the N parts option and entering a number on the keypad In FAN mode the current FAN type and parts is shown in the status display window Fan A Fan S Fan E It is possible to use Segments for fanning segments adjacent heads do the same fanning It is possible to use Groups for fanning When fanning by groups the fan is performed on each group in turn as if the group contained the only selected heads This enables a fan to be simultaneously applied to groups of different sizes Fanning by segments overrides fanning by parts Fanning by groups overrides fanning by parts or segments The following short cuts also work Hold FAN press LOCATE Returns to default FAN type asymmetric Hold FAN press NEXT HEAD Chooses next FAN type Hold FAN press PREV HEAD Chooses previous FAN type 7 16 And Only The AND ONLY function enables selecting of the common heads between groups It can be used on pairs of groups or on ranges of groups When selecting a number of groups then the operator can be used to specify that only the heads that are in both groups are selected MagicQ User Manual 81 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk GROUP 1 2 ENTER This selects heads which are in both groups 1 and 2 And Only can be used with the THRU and operators GROUP 1 THRU 4 5 THRU 8 ENTER This select heads which are in one of the groups 1 to 4 and also in one of the groups 5 to 8 It is
461. s last released When the setting Release resets to first step is set to Yes this setting has no effect 16 4 5 Release time This is the time for channels to release when the Cue Stack is released using the REL button or via fader flash button The exact behaviour depends upon whether channels are active on other Playbacks Intensity channels not used by other channels will fade out using the release time The release time also affects channels that are released from Cue steps within a Cue Stack step i e when the Cue Stack step option Rel old chans yes tracking is not set to LTP This setting can also be set in the End field in View Cue in the Cue Stack Window MagicQ User Manual 143 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 16 4 6 Activate on page change When set to Yes then this Cue Stack is activated when the page is changed to the page that this Cue Stack is assigned to If there is an active Cue Stack on this Playback then the new Cue Stack will only be activated if the old Cue Stack is set to release on page change 16 4 7 Release on page change When set to Yes then this Cue Stack is released when the page is changed to any page other than the page that this Cue Stack is assigned to 16 4 8 HTP always active Use HTP When set to Yes then the fader always controls the Intensity HTP channels from the Cue Stack regardless of whether the Cue Stack is activated Whenever the fader is raise
462. s 128 and then add a Ramp Up to the X pos Use the Colour attributes to determine the layers of red green and blue in the bitmap text For LED matrix you may find it is better to use only one colour at a time for instance set Red to 255 and Blue and Green to 0 An iris and a strobe function are also included under the Beam attributes It is also possible to use playbacks set as LTP faders in order to control individual parameters of the bitmap from faders MagicQ User Manual 233 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 25 3 11 MagicQ Pixel Mapping FX Beam Page 3 The FX channels enable FX to be applied to the grid The FX type selects the FX that is applied Some of the FX are stand alone e g lines and rainbows Others like move and audio FX are applied on top of the selected bitmap or text The FX parameters depend upon the FX type selected but generally FX parameter 1 is the speed FX parameter 2 is the offset between row or column items in the grid and FX parameter 3 selects the mode forward reverse bounce or twin The currently supported FX are Vert lines Horiz lines enables lines to be moved across the grid Modify the mode to change thickness of the lines Change offset to make patterns rather than lines The first image below shows vertical lines with parameter 2 and parameter 3 set to 0 Adjusting parameter 2 gives an offset on the line as shown in the second image Adjusting paramete
463. s Window This enables the Cue Stack from the virtual playback to be controlled including the modification of Cues and Cue Stack parameters In the Playback Window there is a soft button to release all test Cues Cue Stacks and Playbacks This does not release Playbacks that have been activated been real faders or buttons This function is also available on the short cut CTRL RELEASE 14 5 2 Naming playbacks Playbacks can be named in the Playbacks Window as per naming of any Windows item MagicQ User Manual 130 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 14 5 8 Copying and moving playbacks Playbacks can be moved and copied in the Playbacks Window just like any Window item You can also change the Playback Window page between selecting the source and destination so that you can copy or move between pages When a Playback is copied to another Playback the Cue Stack on the source playback is copied i e a new Cue Stack is generated to the destination Playback By default the Cues that make up the Cue Stack are not copied both Cue Stacks reference the same Cues This means for example that you can generate several copies of a chase each with the same Cues but with different chase speeds You can force an unlinked copy of Cue Stacks by holding SHIFT down when you press the COPY button This forces both the Cue Stack and its Cues to be copied 14 5 4 Removing playbacks Playbacks can be removed in the Playbacks Wind
464. s executed thus ensuring that for instance moving heads are in the correct position before the Cue executes Note that Mark Cues only take effect if the corresponding head has intensity set to 0 otherwise the change would be noticeable The Mark Cue only affects LTP values for heads controlled by the Cue Stack which are currently at zero intensity If these heads are used in the next Cue then their value will be faded to the value of the next Cue By default the fade is set to 3 seconds but this can be modified as required Note that attributes that are specified as Instant in the personality file will snap to the new value The Mark Cue executes as soon as the previous Cue has completed execution MagicQ User Manual 120 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk In the Cue Stack Window press the Mark Cue soft button insert a Mark Cue before the Cue which the cursor is currently on Alternatively enter a Cue Id and press Mark Cue to insert a mark before the specified Cue Id An entire Cue Stack can be configured to automatically perform the function of marking all Cues set the Move When Dark option in View Options in the Cue Stack Options The behaviour of Marking and Move When Dark was simplified in v1 3 4 6 so that attributes of moving lights will be marked even if they have not been previously used in the Cue Stack The result of this simplification is that when a Mark Cue is executed in a Cue Stack MagicQ will take
465. s of the console support an internal battery which is designed to protect the system against short term power losses on troublesome power supplies The internal battery is not designed to support the running of the console for long periods of time If the power is lost then the console will prompt the user to fix the problem or to shut down the console The battery when fully charged will support the console for between 5 and 15 minutes If your version of the console does not have an internal battery then we recommend the use of a UPS Un interruptible Power Supply MagicQ User Manual 198 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 20 Using MagicQ on PCs and Macs MagicQ software runs on PCs and Macs and can be downloaded free from the ChamSys web site www chamsys co uk The MagicQ software for PCs and Macs has exactly the same features as the MagicQ console software with support for 32 Universes All 32 Universes are enabled and can be used A wide range of 3 party USB interfaces are supported on Universe 1 When MagicQ PC or Mac is installed for the first time it will show a window with choices of demo shows SELECT Welcome to MagicQ select type of show EUER Technician Lighting Pixel Mapping Continue last Hide options console test fixture demo demo show next time CANCEL This window can be hidden on subsequent starts by pressing the Hide Options Next Time button It can be reactivated by setting t
466. s set to Yes the setting Cue Stack is an Intensity Master should be set to No It is possible to have a Cue Stack set to both a Size Master and a Speed Master When this setting is set to No then the Cue Stack behaves normally MagicQ User Manual 142 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 16 3 4 Group ID This setting is used when the setting Cue Stack is an Intensity Master is set to Yes It specifies the group to use as an Intensity Master This setting has no effect on FX Size Masters and FX Speed Masters 16 3 5 Cue stack is a Programmer Master The Playback with this Cue Stack operates as a Programmer Master 16 4 Activate Release 16 4 1 Halt at last step When set to Yes the Cue Stack halts at the last step in the Cue Stack When set to No then the Cue Stack will return to the first step after the last step 16 4 2 Release after last step When set to Yes the Cue Stack automatically releases after the last step in the Cue Stack has completed fading When set to No the Cue Stack must be released manually 16 4 3 Release resets to first step When set to Yes the Cue Stack always starts from the first step when the Cue Stack is activated The setting Release steps 1 step is ignored When set to No the Cue Stack activates at the step it was on when it was last released 16 4 4 Release steps 1 step When set to Yes the Cue Stack activates at the step following the step the Cue Stack was on when it wa
467. s the name of the Cue Stack that is loaded on the playback the current Cue and the next Cue The status of the Cue is shown as a percentage along with an indication of whether the Cue is running or halted The LCD screen above each of the Playbacks on the expansion Playback Wings and Execute Wings displays the name of the Cue Stack The name can be up to 12 characters When a Cue Stack is assigned to Wing Playbacks that has multiple steps then the name of the Cue Stack is displayed on the first line of the Wing Playback and the second line shows the current step If no name is set for the Cue Stack then the first line shows the current step and the second line shows the next step 14 2 Activating and Releasing Playbacks Playbacks are activated and released by pressing the associated buttons and raising the associated faders depending on the options of the Cue Stack Once a playback is activated it affects the output of the console until it is released By default the Cue Stack on a playback is activated when the fader is raised above zero and released when it is returned to zero Similarly it is activated when a flash button is pressed and then deactivated when the button is released However the Cue Stack options can be configured so that the flash buttons or the faders do not affect activation or deactivation In this case the playback can be activated by pressing the GO button It can be released by making the playback the current playback and t
468. s to the first step on release whether it stays at the current step or whether it moves on one step 15 12 Playback mode MagicQ PC supports a Playback Mode which enables MagicQ to be run in a pure Playback mode This mode is selected by clicking on the new Playback mode Icon on the desktop or in the Programs ChamSys MagicQ PC menu Playback mode is only supported when connected to a MagicQ Wing or MagicQ USB interface The MagicQ interface must be connected and powered on before MagicQ is started in Playback mode In Playback mode MagicQ it is not possible to record or make changes to the show data MagicQ will not save the show files status files Changes e g change of chase speed will be lost when the application is stopped and restarted Playback Mode shows a much reduced set of buttons on the screen only buttons required for show playback are shown In Playback Mode only pages of playbacks that have been programmed are shown pressing NEXT PAGE will automatically change to the next programmed page and will cycle around all programmed pages 16 Cue Stack Settings The Cue Stack Window has three Views View Cue Stack View Options and View Defaults The View Options view shows the settings for the Cue Stack on the current Playback Changing these settings immediately affects the currently selected Cue Stack The View Defaults view shows the settings thatwill be used when new Cues and Cue Stacks are recorded
469. s to the values you wish to record Then press RECORD and select the palette entry you wish to record By default only selected heads get recorded into a palette this can be changed by pressing SHIFT RECORD and choosing Record options REC REC SELECTED ENTIRE MULTI REC REC REC REC REC CLOSE MERGE REMOVE ONLY STATE STEP TYPE INT POS COL BEAM OPTIONS To name the palette key in the name on the external keyboard then press SET and select the palette entry you wish to name To use the on screen keyboard first move the cursor over the palette entry then press SET and key in the name followed by ENTER 4 15 Adding in FX To add a FX to some heads select the heads then from the Group Window or the Prog Window press the ADD FX soft button Choose the FX to add Once you have chosen a FX you are returned to the Prog Window Use the encoders to modify the parameters of the FX such as the speed size and spread between heads You can add multiple FX to a head provided that the FX uses different attributes e g you can mix a Pan Sine with a Tilt Sine 4 16 Recording a Cue To record a look onto a Cue first set up the look then press RECORD and press the SELECT button of the Playback to record the Cue onto To test the Cue first clear the programmer by pressing CLEAR then raise the Playback fader or press the Playback flash button Note that recording a Cue onto a Playback generates a Cue Stack with a single Cue However as the
470. s www chamsys co uk 25 3 3 Inbuilt Bitmaps The Pixelmapper contains a library of standard bitmap patterns on Bitmap Page 0 These patterns are automatically sized to the size of your grid Select the Pixelmapper Layer 1 and press LOCATE to set the layer to its defaults L L L L LL After a Locate the Media parameters will default to the white cross Use the touch screen or encoders to select different Bitmaps 25 3 4 User Picture Support MagicQ supports picture files in bmp or jpeg format and can be loaded using the LOAD PICTURE soft button In addition the user can add their own bitmaps in bmp or jpg format manually into the Pics Pages 1 to 4 Copy the bitmaps into the bitmaps folder underneath the show folder The bitmaps should be named bitmap001 001 bmp bitmap001 002 jpg etc The first 3 digits are the bitmap page and the second 3 digits the bitmap within the page Bitmap page 0 is reserved for standard internally generated bitmap patterns Itis best to make user bitmaps the same size as the output grid By default User bitmaps and icons from the internal library are applied to the grid using their normal size It is possible to make MagicQ scale the user bitmaps and internal icons to the size of the grid use the Apply Type Scale to Grid to resize a bitmap to the full grid size 25 3 5 Gobo Colour Libraries Media pages 128 to 255 select the icons from the gobo colour library The icons
471. saes 194 19 16 2 Hysterisis on fader encoder moves sese rennen 194 19 16 3 Encoder DEW o 194 19 16 4 BEOTUUNIUISSIESESOTCLOODILIDTEDIDNETEE EET 194 19 16 5 J S 11 016 Le m EE 195 19 16 6 Baulty Me SCREEN 195 19 16 7 Power Pail Detection RTT TNT m 195 19 16 8 DCCC SAVE ME 195 19 16 9 Reduced rat Output 3 2 Gite nero iei a ii 195 19 16 10 Movie Buffer frames eiie Peer eeae tede pet rete rra HE dee eo eden a 196 19 10 11 Standard Logging o ei eet ene inet eoe ct ote ee d Heer ba 196 19 16 12 Extended Logging ederent irent te fth reitera e ba eap Eee rine red 196 19 17 General Set ngs eese iiir nberere tete rie tras eae Do be bra e toes o FL ee bed eL Se sue eda Ede E Ade ied 196 MagicQ User Manual 13 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 17 1 Splashscreen BUE T SERRE THREE 196 19 18 Individual Playback Settings eese eene nne nennen rennen rennen 196 19 19 Re calibrating the touch screen iei rere trennen e tie enii 196 19 20 Displays brightness and contrast eesesssesseeseeeseeeeneeenn enne enne 197 19 21 Console lamp brightness nece eere etd ar HE e E ear EE E EE reet eiua 197 1922 LED Di SHU SS os ssc says eerie peri ir erre tete Epl ato eth le cess Pria Eg eau pesa ela aix Eo red 197 19 23 Controlling console lamp from the programmed show
472. sage struct sockaddr_in name int name len sizeof name if remote ether sock return 0 nbytes recvfrom remote ether sock message MAX CREP MSG 0 struct Sockaddr amp name amp name len if nbytes 0 if rem gt chamsys C 24 R 16 E 8 P int len wswap rem length remote_ether_bkwd rem seq fwd if len lt MAX_CREP_MSG sizeof remote_ether_message_t 1 if len gt size len size memcpy data amp rem gt data len return len return 0 char remote ether tx char data wordl6 size Format the message MagicQ User Manual 287 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Cham www chamsys co uk byte message MAX_CREP_MSG remote_ether_message_t rem remote_ether_message_t message int nbytes struct sockaddr_in name if remote_ether_sock return FALSE if size MAX CREP MSG sizeof remote ether message t 1 Er Size MAX CREP MSG sizeof remote ether message t 1 rem chamsys C 24 R 16 E 8 P rem version wswap 0 rem seq fwd remote ether fwgQ rem seq bkwd remote ether bkwd rem length wswap size memcpy amp rem data data size my broadcast address s addr ip address subnet address name sin family AF INET name sin port htons REMOTE ETHER PORT name sin addr s addr dwswap my broadcast address s addr
473. sday etc So for an event every Monday and Tuesday enter ZABZ For an event on the first day of every month enter ZZ 21 1 2 Sunrise Sunset astronomical MagicQ has the capability to trigger events based on the sunrise and sunset at the particular location In order for sunrise and sunset events to occur correctly MagicQ must be configured with the correct longitude latitude and time zones These parameters are configured in Setup View Settings Mode The sunrise and sunset times for the current location can be checked in Setup View System View Status MagicQ User Manual 203 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk To set a scheduled event based on sunrise or sunset first set the Halt field in the Cue Stack to Scheduled double click to change it Then enter in the Wait field either R for sunrise or S for sunset It is possible to set offsets on the sunrise and sunset times so the event is triggered a certain time before or after the sunrise or sunset For example to trigger 20 minutes after sunrise enter R 0 20 0 To trigger 30 minutes before sunset enter S 0 30 0 21 2 Automated Start of Playbacks Executes MagicQ includes several options for automated start of Playbacks and Executes These options are available on MagicQ consoles and on MagicQ PC systems when connected to a MagicQ USB Wing or Interface See Setup View Settings Playback Activate Playbacks On Start 21 3 ChamSys Audio Interface
474. se contact your dealer distributor for more info MagicQ User Manual 296 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 34 1 8 MIDI Show Control Command Format For more details on MIDI Show Control protocols see http en wikipedia org wiki MIDI_Show_Control MIDI Show Control Commands are of the format FO 7F lt device_ID gt 02 lt command_format gt lt command gt lt data gt F7 device ID is 7F for all call ID for system wide broadcasts command format is 01 for Lighting MagicQ supports the following commands in the command 01 GO 02 STOP 03 RESUME 04 TIMED GO For example FO 7F 7F 02 01 0131 F7 Go Cue 1 in the Cue Store FO 7F 7F 02 01 01 32 30 F7 Go Cue 20 in the Cue Store FO 7F 7F 02 01 0231 F7 Stop Cue 1 in the Cue Store FO 7F 7F 02 01 01 00 31 30 F7 Go Cue Stack 10 in the Stack Store FO 7F 7F 02 01 01 32 00 31 30 F7 Go Cue 2 on Cue Stack 10 in the Stack Store It is possible to test how MagicQ responds to Midi Show Control messages by typing in the Midi message on the keyboard This is only supported when connected to a MagicQ Wing or Interface For example to test the command FO 7F 7F 02 01 0131 F7 Type testsysex followed by the message on the keyboard without the initial FO and with no spaces between the MIDI values testsysex 7F7F02010137F7 MagicQ User Manual 297 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 35 Timecode Support MagicQ supports both tim
475. shared along with the root directory Share the root of the C drive as C If you are using the Stage version of the Hippotizer then you must also share the root of the D drive as D To get live previews on a Hippotizer ensure the TCP IP service is running 26 9 4 3 Hippotizer V3 Single mode Hippotizer Personality Universe Address Suggested Head No 1 v301 1 master 1 1 9 1 v301 llayer 1 46 1 1 v3011layer 1 96 2 1 v301 llayer 1 146 3 1 v301 llayer 1 196 4 1 v3011layer 1 246 5 1 v301 llayer 1 296 6 1 v301 llayer 1 346 7 1 v3011layer 1 396 8 Dual mode Hippotizer Personality Universe Address Suggested Head No 1 v301 1 master 1 1 9 1 v301 llayer 1 46 1 1 v3011layer 1 96 2 1 v3011layer 1 146 3 1 v301 llayer 1 196 4 1 v3011master 1 246 10 1 v301 llayer 1 291 5 1 v301 llayer 1 341 6 1 v301 llayer 1 391 7 1 v301 llayer 1 441 8 Pan mode Hippotizer Personality Universe Address Suggested Head No 1 v3011master 1 1 9 1 v3011m2pan 1 46 10 1 v301 llayer 1 76 1 1 v301 llayer 1 126 2 1 v3011layer 1 176 3 1 v301 llayer 1 226 4 1 v301 llayer 1 276 5 1 v3011layer 1 326 6 1 v3011layer 1 376 7 MagicQ User Manual 252 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk 1 v3011layer 1 426 8 In order for the layers to appear sequential in the Media Window the s
476. sing SHIFT to unlink all the Palettes of that type Position Colour or Beam Unlinking removes links within the Palettes to other Palettes it does not affect the links within Cues It is possible to step through the different Palettes using the Next Palette and Previous Palette buttons 9 9 Merging of Palettes from another show It is possible to merge Palettes from any previous show you can select the palettes from a specific head or all the heads that match with your current show It is possible to select Position Beam or Colour palettes or combinations of the three attribute banks To import the Palettes press the LOAD PALETTES soft button in the View Palette window Alternatively from the Setup Window press the SHIFT IMPORT SHOW soft button and select Palettes 9 10 Modifying Palettes in the personality When palettes are recorded they become part of the show data and can be used during programming of the show In the normal mode of operation recording palettes does not affect the personality file This ensures that changes you make for the purposes of the show do not affect future shows However it is sometimes necessary to update the personality file either because the data in the personality file is incorrect or to add extra palettes entries to the personality Pressing SHIFT when you select the palette entry to record causes the changes to be copied through into the personality When recording through into the person
477. sing the encoder wheels or soft buttons then the Palette will contain hard values instead of links It is possible to unlink a Palette from the View Palette Window Put the cursor on the Palette Entry you wish to unlink press VIEW PALETTE and then UNLINK Only one level of linking is allowed a Palette can link to another Palette but it is not possible to link to further Palettes 9 8 Viewing Editing Palette contents You can view the contents of a palette entry at any time by pressing the VIEW PALETTE soft button in the Colour Beam and Position windows This opens the Palette View window and shows the contents of the palette entry that the cursor was on in the Colour Beam or Position Window MagicQ User Manual 95 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk CLOSE WINDOW PALETTE VIEW 84 fan hat Head type Head name Hd no Note that the View Palette window shows the entire contents of the palette entry regardless of which heads are currently selected You can modify the contents of the palette entry by editing the values in the spread sheet You can remove values entire heads or entire attributes from the palette entry using the REMOVE button The View Palette View Used window can be used to determine how many times Palettes have been used within a show The View Palettes window shows whether Palettes are linked to other Palettes highlighted in Red There is a button to unlink the specific Palettes or u
478. sion byte seq fwd byte seq bkwd word16 length byte data where long32 is 4 bytes word16 is 2 bytes and byte is 1 byte ChamSys is 4 characters C R E P Note that on MagicQ this is stored as little endian so that on the network it will appear as PER C The version is initially O and allows for future expansion of the protocol The fwd sequence number is an incrementing sequence number It enables the receiving end to determine if packets are missed In addition the receiving end should sends back the last sequence number it received in the backward sequence number Length is the length of the data field It does not include the length of the ChamSys header 32 2 Writing to the Ethernet port Commands are transmitted from the Ethernet port by placing the command in the Macro field of the Cue Stack window use Page Right to find the Macro field In the View Settings view of the Setup Window set the Ethernet Remote Protocol to ChamSys Rem tx The format of Ethernet commands is Y followed by the data To send Ethernet data the Y command must be the only macro command in the macro field The Y command is followed by ASCII data contained within or or by decimal values separated by commas For example to send Hello World followed by a carriage return Y Hello World 10 13 To send the hexadecimal data stream 00 01 02 03 04 Y0 1 2 3 4 MagicQ User Manual 284 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk
479. sion 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 11 9 Fader off zero reasserts channels This setting is used to reassert channels using the fader This setting is useful when using Cue Stacks with the Fader Releases set to No and Flash releases set to No When set to Yes faders reassert the Playback when the level leaves zero The setting Go reasserts channels specifies how the channels are reasserted 19 11 10 Next Page changes to next used This setting enables page changes using the Next Page and Prev Page buttons to only access programmed pages rather than changing through all pages Any page can be accessed through the Page Window 19 11 11 Current Playback follows last touched This setting makes the Current Playback follow the last Playback fader to be raised If set to No then the Current Playback is not changed when faders are raised it is only changed when SELECT buttons are pressed 19 11 12 Wing Playbacks SEL GO BACK This setting changes the function of SEL GO on Playback Wings By default SEL GO reasserts the Playback This option enables SL GO to be changed to be a BACK function on Wing Playbacks This is useful on Wing Playbacks that do not have physical BACK buttons 19 11 13 Activate playback on start This option enables one or more playbacks to be activated on start up The options include None PB1 Last Active Wing 1 PB 1 Cue Stack 1 Macro 1 Lamp On All When set to Activat
480. sole using the CTRL key Press CTRL and OUT for the Outputs Info window CTRL and CUE STACKS for the Cue Stack Info window and CTRL and Prog for the Programmer Info Window 42 3 Additional external screens MultiWindows on consoles The MagicQ Pro 2010 supports 2 external monitors directly from the rear panel whilst the MagicQ Pro supports 1 external monitor directly from the rear panel It is possible to connect more monitors up to a total of 4 using the MagicQ Multi Window application running on a PC The MagicQ MultiWindow application comes as part of the MagicQ PC installation This can be used to display windows from remote MagicQ systems These additional monitors can be touch screens if the PC supports them In order to enable Multi Windows connection on the MagicQ set the Multi Windows option in the Setup Window View Settings Network to Remote MultiWindow MagicQ MultiWindows itself has two modes of operation automatic window sizing and user window sizing MagicQ User Manual 329 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Automatic window sizing divides each of the selected screens into quarters just like the touch screen on MagicQ Windows can be moved from the console to the PC using the EXT button or SHIFT SIZE The SIZE button enables the window to be sized on the PC just as it would on the console User sizing forces MultiWindows to ignore the size of the window on the console and use a size specif
481. solution as your grid size on MagicQ Click the auto install feature to automatically install the converted media file into the movies folder naming it with the next free movie ID The speed of movie playback can be controlled by the movie speed encoder In order to play back movies patch the Generic BitmapFX2 instead of the Generic BitmapFX2 This contains 4 more channels including movie speed It is possible to morph from Generic BitmapFX to Generic BitmapFX2 so old shows that used the media engine can be upgraded to use the new features 25 3 7 Live feed support The MagicQ Pixel mapper includes a Live feed option for capturing live feed video signals and playing them back on the grids This enables any movie animation or live camera input that can be displayed on a PC to be captured and pixel mapped onto the Grids in MagicQ MagicQ supports up to 5 different live feed sources Live feed sources are captured from the screen of a PC running MagicQ Media centre MagicQ Media centre then sends the live feed information over the network making it available to all consoles on the network On MagicQ select the Pixel Mapper layer and then set the Live Feed Media Page value 127 and select 1 to 5 for the 5 live feeds In MagicQ Media Centre select Devices Live Feeds to configure the live feeds For each live feed the user can set the position and size of the capture area on the PC screen In addition the resolution of the live feed sent ove
482. sys co uk To edit FX you can include an FX into the programmer and then use Update Note that FX are actually stored as Cues you can see them in the Cue Store however there is no need to access them other than through the FX window When you program new Cues using a FX selected from the FX window a copy of the FX is made so that you can make individual changes in the programmed Cue Editing the FX in the FX window will not affect your programmed Cues only new Cues programmed using the FX 8 7 Importing and Exporting the FX Library The FX in the FX Window can be stored to a FX library file so that the FX can be reloaded and reused in any MagicQ show Use the SAVE FX LIB to make a FX library file all the FX in the FX window are stored to the file The FX are saved as generic FX i e they can be played back on any type of head as long as it has the same attributes Reload a FX library using the LOAD FX LIB MagicQ User Manual 92 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Cham www chamsys co uk 9 Palettes The MagicQ supports a comprehensive palette system for easy access to your favourite looks When intelligent heads are patched the console automatically generates palettes for the patched heads There are three types of palettes corresponding to Colour Beam and Position Each palette supports up to 1000 different entries 9 1 Using Palettes To use a palette select the heads you wish to apply the change to Then open the requir
483. t MQ Direct Direct DMX outputs from MagicQ Pro and Expert consoles MQ Wing DMX outputs on MagicQ PC wing Mini Wing or Maxi Wing Cham USB ChamSys DMX option modules and ChamSys USB to DMX modules MagicDMX ChamSys MagicDMX USB interface Art Par Artistic License parallel port dongle Open USB Open USB dongle e g Enttec Open USB Enttec Pro Enttec Pro dongle Dig Enlight Digital Enlightenment dongles Peperoni Peperoni dongles and devices DMXAALL DMXAALL devices USBDMX USBDMxX devices Velleman Velleman devices Nicholaudie Nicholaudie Sunlight devices ChamSys supports 3 party DMX dongles but cannot guarantee their performance these devices are supported on Universe 1 only Note that some of these devices rely on the PC to do the DMX framing and therefore results may be unpredictable on some systems Many of these devices are unable to transmit full DMX frames at the full DMX refresh rate MagicQ User Manual 165 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk ChamSys USB to DMX modules ChamSys MagicDMX interfaces and ChamSys Ethernet to DMX Interfaces utilise their own internal processor to ensure correct DMX framing at high DMX refresh rates For Ethernet based protocols such as Art Net and Pathport it is necessary to set up the Out Uni and In Uni fields these determine which the ID of the Universe when carried over Ethernet These need to be set up to match the Ids configured on the Ethernet Interface boxes Where
484. t truss or pipe object If for example you patch 6 spots after inserting a truss object then they will be spread out along the length of the truss When you create reports then as well as overall plots a plot is created for each attach object enabling the lighting rig to be broken down into separate pipes and trusses 40 2 5 Attaching heads to Attach Objects Heads can be attached to trusses or pipes at any time Select the fixtures you wish to attach using groups or the keypad Change to Patch View Vis Selected Heads tab and press the FIT TO OBJECT soft button Alternatively in the Vis Heads tab double click on the Attach field MagicQ will prompt you with a list of all the attach objects to choose from Heads that are attached to objects move with that object so for example repositioning that object in the Attach Objects tab will move the object and all the attached heads MagicQ User Manual 316 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk 40 2 6 Removing visualiser heads and objects To remove a visualiser head or attach object got to Patch View Vis and put the cursor on the item Press REMOVE Use SHIFT CTRL and the cursor keys to cursor select multiple visualiser heads objects for removal When heads are removed from the visualiser they are not removed from MagicQ patch Removing heads from the MagicQ patch will remove any associated visualiser heads 40 2 7 Changing the size of the room It is possible
485. t META NAME MobileOptimized CONTENT 240 gt lt title gt MagicQ User HTML Page lt title gt lt head gt lt body gt lt User forms must start with the name user e g userl user2 gt Remote commands can be found in the MagicQ manual gt lt FORM ACTION user html name user METHOD GET gt Remote commands are sent using input types gt MagicQ User Manual 279 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Cham www chamsys co uk Place the command in the value and set the name to cmd gt lt input type submit value 1T name cmd gt lt input type submit value 1U name cmd gt lt p gt Or as button types gt Note for Internet Explorer to work the value feature below is not used and you must put the remote command in the name after cmd button type submit name cmd1T value 1T gt PB1 act lt button gt button type submit name cmd1U value 1U gt PB1 rel lt button gt MagicQ User Manual 280 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 31 ChamSys Remote Protocol Commands ChamSys remote protocol consists of simple commands consisting of a list parameter values separated by commas and ending in a character A to Z or a to z Commands can contain spaces tabs and carriage returns they are all ignored The remote protocol is split into remote playback commands and remote programming commands 31 1 Remote Playb
486. t media content MagicQ downloads thumbnail previews for the media content from each media server independently MagicQ supports a special window solely for controlling media servers the Media Window This window makes it much easier to control media servers You can select media server media layer attributes and media content all from the same window You can also see what content is selected on each of the layers of the selected media server Open the Media Window by using the 5 Spare button above the Macro button masala PREVIEW CLEAR RELOAD OUTPUT LAYER SELECTED THUMBS Loop start Rotate2 Layer Layer2 Layer3 Layer4 LayerS Layer6 Layer Layer8 100 0 U ESY 0 oz oz 0 oz Media Server 2 Server 3 Server 4 Server5 Server6 Server Server 8 Loop end Loop mode Layer Layer2 Layer 3 Layer5 Layer amp Layer Layer 8 EUUNOLI DEN ARENT mem m HERO SI E N de DEC Visual 023 Movie mode Lie a dirir ChamSysMedia Mon Oct 09 14 32 31 2006 Ver 1 3 0 1 Initialisation complete Page 1 Add gt PBI ACT E PBS 1 PB4 1 PB5 5 PBB 1 PB 2 PB8 1 PB3 1 PB10 i Layer 1 fx Layer 2 mov Layer 2 f Layer 1 dim Layer 1 size buildings split words plane clouds tunnel streets plane2 5 Layer 1 moy Layer 1 fig8 Layer 2 dim rot hw only col hw only In addition there is a Live Preview wind
487. t used in other Playbacks This option defaults to No 19 10 3 Use first free Cues Stacks Palettes By default MagicQ uses the lowest free Cue when recording new Cues It also uses the lowest free Cue Stack when recording new Cue Stacks and lowest free Palette when automatically recording Palettes Setting this setting to No forces MagicQ to record items after the place the last items were recorded enabling the user to control where new items are recorded 19 10 4 Copy mode linked unlinked By default when you copy a Cue Stack MagicQ creates a new Cue Stack but retains links to the old Cues i e no new Cues are made Using SHIFT COPY you can specify an unlinked copy whereby new Cues are made This setting allows the default Copy behaviour to be changed so that the copy is always unlinked unless SHIFT COPY is pressed The options are linked unlinked and unlinked no state The unlinked no state option specifies that when Cues are copied within a Cue Stack only the delta values are copied not the state of the Cue at that step 19 10 5 Derive settings from previous Cue This setting specifies how MagicQ sets the Cue settings for new Cues recorded on a Cue Stack MagicQ User Manual 184 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk When this setting is set to No MagicQ uses the default Cue settings specified in the Step and Step Times tabs in the Cue Stack View Defaults view When
488. tandard layers not the master or pan master layers should be sequential We recommend setting the head numbers for the layers to a different range of numbers to the master and pan layers MagicQ User Manual 253 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 26 9 5 Using Mbox EXtreme with MagicQ Several personality files are used to patch the Mbox EXtreme on MagicQ The personalities should be patched according to the diagram below DMx 255 1 Hdno Name Pin Tiny Swap Merge From mbox ambientlight 1 001 000000001 011 sm eon e foe TEEN 1 053 000110101 017 shuter OM amp SEM 1 073 001001001 018 keystone ONoco Norm CM 1 095 001011111 foot tet JO Min toro no Nom TTT 1 157 010011101 Joos ftewt2 JOMi toro fno Nom TSN 1 187 010111011 004 ob2 ONoco nono fno Nom TLC 1 219 01101011 O05 tet FO Mix to n fno Nom SN 1 311 0010111 oos obi ONocol nono n Nom TMM 1 343 101010111 Joos ftes JO Mix to fno fno Nom Note that the head numbers for the text and object layers are allocated lower numbers than the ancillary layers such as the ambient spots camera shutter and keystone This ensures that the text and object layers appear before the ancillary layers in the Media Window Only one Mbox EXtreme can be patched per universe however other fixtures can also be parched on the remaini
489. tching in the next Cue Stack then it will remain at the current Cue It is possible to have several Playbacks synced to one master Playback by setting the option Sync next playback to this one on the master and each adjacent Cue Stack except for the last one in the chain MagicQ tries to match the Cue Id within each Cue Stack to the master Cue Stack 14 9 Set lists It is possible to save and load set lists in the Page Window Set lists are simply text files with a list of page names When the set list is loaded MagicQ rearranges the pages so that they are in the order specified in the set list Pages that are not specified in the set list for example songs not being used today are moved after all the pages specified in the set list file To use set lists first name all the pages in the Page Window according to the song name or section name You can then save this as a set list by pressing the Save Set List soft button the file is saved into the show folder with a txt file extension You can edit this file with a text editor e g Windows Notepad to rearrange the songs Load the set list back into MagicQ using the Load Set List soft button MagicQ User Manual 132 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 15 Advanced Playback Cue Stack Options 15 1 Interaction of HTP and LTP channels between Playbacks Channels are set as either HTP Highest Takes Priority or LTP Latest Takes Priority in their personality file
490. tely from 0 to 100 through the length of the fader If the Cue includes FX on HTP channels then the size of the FX is also reduced proportionately according to the fader level When this setting is set to Yes then the other Fader controls settings should generally be set to No The overall intensity level of HTP channels is also affected by the Grand Master and the Sub Master and any active Group Masters 16 1 4 Fader controls LTP IPCB chans When set to Yes the fader will control the value of all channels that are patched as LTP channels generally this is everything apart from Intensity When the fader is at 0 the LTP channels are not controlled by this Cue Stack When the fader is raised above 0 then MagicQ crossfades the LTP channels to the values stored in the Cue under control of the fader When the fader is at 100 then the LTP channels are exactly as stored in the Cue MagicQ crossfades the LTP channels from the values that they were at before the fader was raised above 0 i e the current value of these channels This will either be the values from other Cue Stacks or if No other Cue Stacks are controlling these channels the LTP or default values When set to Yes then the other Fader controls settings should generally be set to No 16 1 5 Fader controls FX size When this setting is set to Yes the fader controls the size of any FX that are running in the Cue Stack this includes FX from the current Cu
491. tes can be imported from a csv format file using the Import Ranges button The data should be organised in the csv file in the same column order as the fields in MagicQ palette type gt lt name gt lt num of chans gt lt icon gt lt chan 1 gt lt val 1 gt lt chan 2 val2 23 5 2 Capturing Palettes To capture the palette value fields from the programmer you must first insert a new palette and configure the channel numbers you are interested in Then using the Group Focus Colour Beam windows in the usual way set up the palette values Back in the Palettes View press the Capture Palette soft button 23 5 3 Attribute Test The Attr test mode enables the palette to be tested on any patched heads of this type In this mode moving up down outputs the Palette to all patched heads of this type 23 6 Macros View This view defines the macros that are available to control special features of the head such as turning the lamp on and off and resetting motor channels Every personality should have a macro named Lamp On Reset and Lamp Off MagicQ uses these macros in short cut keys for these functions INSERT IMPORT CHOOSE NEW MACROS HEAD HEAD C6 C7 VIEW GENERAL VIEW PALETTES HEAD EDITOR Martin Mac250m4 hed Chans Ci C2 C3 Name C4 C5 C9 C10 zm D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 oor fi fe oe fro T 1 1 1 no dp TT p jsepssjo n j j ChamSys Ltd Qon S
492. the thumbnails to be updated for the media server which the cursor is on To force a reload of all the media from the media server move the cursor to the required media server in the Media View of the Setup Window and press the ERASE CACHE soft button Then press the GET THUMBS soft button to retrieve the new thumbs Individual pages of thumbs can be reloaded in the Media Window using the RELOAD THUMBS soft button Press SHIFT and RELOAD ALL THUMBS to reload all pages 26 4 2 Automated retrieval of thumbnails This method is not normally recommended as it may cause unnecessary network traffic In the Setup Window Media View if Autothumbs is set to Yes the thumbnails will reload every time a page is loaded MagicQ retrieves thumbnails when a media bank is selected for the first time or when the media has been changed by the media server MagicQ caches the thumbnails on its hard drive You may need to change to a bank a few times before all the thumbnails for that bank have been downloaded 26 5 Live Previews MagicQ User Manual 246 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk MagicQ can connect to a media server to retrieve a live preview of the master output or of the individual layers This is very useful where the media server is remote to the console or in a multiple media server configuration Live Preview support is available when using Arkaos and Hippotizer and any other media server that supports the live preview p
493. the button associated with each encoder can be used to bump the attribute value to the next range Pressing SHIFT and the button bumps back to the previous range To make Palettes in the Attributes Window use the Create Palettes soft button 7 8 Using a mouse or track ball to control pan and tilt It is possible to use the mouse or trackball for pan tilt control Enable the Enable Mouse to control pan tilt option in Setup Window View Settings Press the Right mouse button to enter pan tilt mode In this mode the mouse or trackball can be used to control pan and tilt of any selected heads Press again to return to normal mode Support for this function is only available on MagicQ consoles and when connected to a MagicQ PC Wing or MagicQ MaxiWing It is not available when connected to MagicQ MiniWing or MagicQ USB interface as these products do not have X and Y encoders MagicQ consoles support serial mice and track balls 7 9 Flip Flip modifies the pan and tilt parameters of a moving head so that the beam is positioned in the same place but from the other end of its movement ranges Select the fixtures and then press the FLIP soft button in the Position Window or the Attr Window Use SHIFT INV PAN to only invert the Pan attribute and not the tilt attribute 7 10 Setting attribute values using the keypad MagicQ User Manual TI Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk You can set attribute values directly
494. the default mode whereby all heads in the current selection are controlled Pressing ALL when there are no heads selected causes the selected heads that were active when CLEAR was last pressed to be reselected Pressing SHIFT and ALL selects all the heads of the type last selected Pressing CTRL ALL or FAN ALL selects all the heads active in the programmer Pressing Next Head and Prev Head reselects all heads in the current selection like pressing ALL 7 11 4 Changing Overall Selection order The order of the overall selection can be changed using the A Soft Button in the Group Window the options are Normal Reverse Into Centre and Centre Out It is also possible to randomise the overall selection order by holding SHIFT and pressing RANDOM SELECT The overall selection order can be randomised multiple times to get different random orders Note that once the order is randomised it can not be returned to the normal order to do this you must reselect the overall selection Hold the ALL button to bring up a toolbar showing the above options 7 11 5 Sub selection of heads from Groups Overall Selection When you select heads using Groups or the keypad MagicQ then enables the operation on a sub selection of the main selection using the Next Head Prev Head Odd Even and All buttons This enables the user to select a group of heads and work on heads individually without reselecting the heads It is
495. then a level of 096 will execute step 1 10 will execute step 2 whilst a level of 100 will execute step 10 This is very useful if you wish to program different Cues onto LED or media servers 21 4 Keyboard macros Keyboard macros enable you to record sequences of key presses and to replay the sequence at the press of a single button Keyboard macros can be assigned to any button on the console including to a SHIFT button and CTRL button or to buttons on an external keyboard The first 10 keyboard macros are available on the Quick Macro Tool Bar To record a keyboard macro go to the Macro Window press RECORD and select a macro to record The console then records all of the following key sequences until you press the Macro Window button and the End Macro soft button To assign a macro to a button press the Assign Macro soft button and press a key to assign it to e g one of the 6 spare keys Keyboard macros can also be assigned to a combination of keys for example if you hold one key and press another key Keyboard macros are saved into show files and also when you Save Settings so that it is possible to personalise your console If you accidentally assign a keyboard macro to the wrong button then you can easily change the assignment Open the Macro Window move the cursor to the macro you want to change the assignment for and press the Assign Macro button Now press the button that really wanted to assign it to A macro assig
496. those heads is over ridden 8 1 3 FX add modes MagicQ User Manual 84 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk It is possible to change the way that FX are added to the base values In the FX View of the Prog Window and Cue Window there is an add mode field Page right to see this option This determines how the FX in a Cue is added to the base values There are three choices Normal Plus and Minus Q Normal is as default i e a FX will apply both plus and minus of the base a Plus adds the FX onto the top of the current base i e the level will never be less than the base Q Minus subtracts the FX from the current base i e the level will never be greater than the base Q Abs absolute MagicQ ignores the base value for the FX and simply outputs the FX value This is useful for absolute position FX and for colour change FX 8 1 4 FX Spread offsets over heads When a FX is applied to a group of heads the spread determines how the FX is played back over all the heads By default the spread is even 100 i e the same FX is applied to each head but offset so that each of the heads is at a different point in the FX cycle With even spread the heads are spread evenly round the cycle Setting the Spread to None 0 causes all of the heads to start at the same point in the cycle i e they all do exactly the same thing Choosing values between 0 and 100 enables different looks to be generated The
497. tings Multi Console Settings Hardware Settings Both show settings and console settings are stored in MagicQ show files but by default only show settings are loaded when a MagicQ show is loaded To force consoles settings to be loaded as well use SHIFT and LOAD SHOW CON 19 1 Programming mode The MagicQ console allows the programming mode and playback mode to be configured in the Setup Window The modes control several of the different settings of the console All of the settings can be configured individually however the modes make it easy to change between the most frequently used settings The programming mode determines how the console is programmed The options are Normal Theatre non track Theatre tracking and Hog II Warp Most users will choose Normal Changing mode during programming does not change Cue Stacks that have already been programmed it only affects the programming of new Cue Stacks The setting affected by changing mode are Setting Normal Theatre non Theatre Hog II warp live track tracking Setup Prog Programmer Tracking No No Yes Yes MagicQ User Manual 163 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Chany www chamsys co uk Unused Chans return to defaults No Yes Yes Yes Programmer overrides FX No No No Yes Highlight mode Normal Advanced Advanced Advanced Fan mode Normal Normal Normal
498. tion forward or backward of any Cue Steps in the Cue Stack set to Chase Timing This setting can also be controlled via encoder C in the Cue Stack view MagicQ User Manual 146 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 16 6 5 Repeat type The options are Normal Bounce and Random Bounce executes the Chase alternating backward and forward direction This setting can also be controlled via encoder D in the Cue Stack view 16 6 6 Number of repeats This setting specifies how many repeats of the Chase should take place When set to 0 then the Chase will continue until the chase is exited manually 16 6 7 Running This setting specifies whether Chases start running or halted 16 7 Chase Times 16 7 1 HTP in fade HTP out fade Position fade Colour fade Beam fade The fade times for any Cue Steps in the Cue Stack set to Chase Timing These times generally match the Chase speed These times can also be controlled via encoder C in the Cue Stack view Setting one or more attribute group fade times to 0 causes that attribute group to snap rather than fade The overall Chase speed corresponds to attribute group with the biggest combined delay and fade time 16 7 2 HTP in delay HTP out delay Position delay Colour delay Beam delay The delay times for any Cue Steps in the Cue Stack set to Chase Timing These times can be used to make one or more attribute groups snap at end The overall Chase speed corr
499. tion in the Setup Window and also the defaults for tracking Track Zero old HTP Zero old FX Rel old chans on the Cues Stack options The Programmer Tracking option by itself determines how Cues are recorded it does not affect how they are played back When programmer tracking mode is off then the entire contents of the programmer is recorded into Cues regardless of whether attributes have been change since the last Cue was recorded When programmer tracking mode is on then only attributes that have been modified since the Cue was recorded are stored into the new Cue Attributes are determined as modified if their value had been changed using an encoder using keypad entry using a range button using a palette or by a locate fixture Note that modifying an attribute to a new value and then returning it to its old value counts as modified Whilst in programmer tracking mode it is possible to force a record of the whole of the programmer by selecting the ENTIRE STATE record option Record options are configured by pressing SHIFT and RECORD whereupon the Record Options window is opened Pressing any Window select button hides the display option and returns to the appropriate Window t Timing Track Zeroold HTP Zeroold FX Relold chans Block FX Cue Only Macro ue L es Yes No As a Cue Stack is executed it keeps track of channels that have been used in previous Cues but are not used in the current Cue How these chan
500. to change the size of the room by adding a room object By default MagicQ uses a room 20 x 20 x 20 metres If you add a room object then MagicQ will use the dimensions of the room object instead In View Attach pres INSERT Change the object type to Room and enter the length width and height Note there is a bug in 1 5 7 1 whereby it is not possible to change the height and the height parameter actually changes the width Fixed in 1 5 7 2 40 2 8 Converting an existing MagicQ show file Old MagicQ show files can be loaded into MagicQincVis but they will not have any visualiser heads defined It is easy to take heads from an existing show file and create a visualisation Select the heads using groups or the keypad Then go to Patch View Vis Selected Heads Press the INSERT SELECTED soft button This creates a visualiser head for each of the selected heads If you wish you can attach the heads to an object using the FIT TO OBJECT soft button It is also possible to insert all the patched heads in your show file into the visualiser in one step Make sure no heads are selected then go to Patch View Vis Vis Heads and press the INSERT PATCHED soft button This creates a visualiser head for each head in the patch The heads will be positioned in a grid format 40 2 9 Converting a MagicQ grid into a visualisation It is possible to convert a grid from the MagicQ Plan View into a visualisation In the Output Window View Plan press SHFIT
501. to specify the level of detail shown for each head and encoder B to choose specific attribute masks Encoder D is used to modify the horizontal scale to choose how many Cue Steps are shown in the window Use encoders X and Y to scroll around the timeline By default all of the heads in the Cue Stack on the selected Playback are shown use the SEL HDS ONLY soft button to make it only show the currently selected heads from that Playback View Vals and View Raw can be used to view the data values rather than the timeline Note that the Timeline is still under development and testing we recommend that it is used during programming rather than show playback MagicQ User Manual 124 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 14 Playback The console supports 10 main playbacks situated immediately below the touch screen In addition the console supports up to 192 additional playbacks available on up to 8 expansion wings All playbacks have a fader a FLASH button and a SELECT button The 10 main playbacks also have GO and STOP buttons for control of Cue Stacks Note that the lower bank of playbacks on each expansion wing have GO buttons only Cue Stacks on Playbacks without GO or STOP buttons can be controlled using the GO and STOP buttons in the manual section 14 1 Playback Display The area above each of the main playbacks on the touch screen is used to provide information about the status of the playback This include
502. to turn back ups off especially if you have a very large show as the back up process may occasionally affect the response of the console We recommend you keep them on On Changes for programming 19 6 11 Keep a backup archive With this setting enabled the MagicQ console keeps an archive of back ups It will only archive back ups created using Auto Backup above therefore if you turn auto backup off then you will not have an archive 19 6 12 Show file path The path where all show files will be stored This path defaults to show It is possible to change this path for example in an education environment where it is necessary to have different accounts for different users 19 7 Programming settings Programming settings are automatically changed when you select the mode Normal Theatre non tracking Theatre Tracking or Hog II Warp 19 7 1 Activate Chans Heads This setting determines how channels are activated in the Programmer If set to Chans then when an attribute of a head is modified only that channel is affected If set to Heads then when an attribute of a head is modified all the channels of that head are activated in the programmer The channels are activated using the value that they were at before they were last cleared from the programmer MagicQ User Manual 174 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk Selecting Activate Heads ensures that all the channels of a head are always present when recording a
503. tocol is used on the serial port If set to none then any data received is ignored Data can be transmitted from the Macro field of Cue steps in the Cue Stack The other protocols are ChamSys Rem rx ChamSys Rem tx amp rx ChamSys Rem tx Ideal Touch Al Touch Elo Touch The Touch protocols are for the use of external touch screens with the MQ50 MQ100 MQ200 and MQ300 consoles Refer to the instruction manual of your touch screen for other serial settings See Serial Communications and Multiple Consoles for more details 19 13 9 Serial touch monitor Determines which monitor on the MagicQ system has a touch screen connected to the serial port On a Pro console with a serial touch screen connected to the 2 Monitor port select Monitor 2 For a duplicate monitor for the on board screen select Monitor 1 duplicate On a MQ50 select Monitor 1 MagicQ User Manual 191 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 19 13 10 Remote trigger type This setting specifies how the remote input port on MagicQ consoles MagicQ PC Wings and MagicQ Maxi Wings works It can be set to None Make Break or Make Break 19 13 11 Remote trigger action This setting specifies specific global actions to be taken on a remote trigger input The options are The options are NONE CURRENT PLAYBACK GO CURRENT PLAYBACK FLASH ADD SWAP SWAP DBO WINGI PB1 GO WINGI PB1 FLASH WINGI PB12 GO WINGI PB12 FLAS
504. ton for recording show data Used to record Cues onto playbacks and to record Groups and to record Palettes See also Recording a Cue Remove An action button for removing show data Used to remove Cue Stacks from Playbacks and to remove other items Undo was Assign The Undo button allows the last few changes in the programmer to be undone Press SHIFT and Undo to redo a change The Undo functionality is enable in the Setup Window Settings View The Assign button is no longer supported the function is instead provided by the Move and Copy buttons see assign Cues or Cue Stacks to playbacks Include An action button for including previously programmed show data back into the programmer Used to edit Cues See Including Cues Update Used as part of the edit process to update a Cue that has been included into the programmer See Including Cues Copy An action button for copying show data Used to copy Cue Stacks between Playbacks and to copy other items Move An action button for moving show data Used to move Cue Stacks between Playbacks and to move other items Go Used to activate a playback Also used to start the next step in a Cue Stack when the step has been programmed to halt or after the user has pressed the Pause button Pause Used to pause the execution of a Cue Stack Sel MagicQ User Manual 345 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk Used to
505. tributes for that head into the programmer If the heads enable DMX control of the striking of the lamp then you may need to Lamp On the head in order to see the beam Select the heads and then press SHIFT LOCATE This runs the Lamp On macro 4 13 Modifying Attributes Intelligent heads have several different attributes typically including pan and tilt colour gobo and iris When the MagicQ lighting console patches an intelligent head it maps the head parameters to standard attributes to enable easy access of the features of the head Attributes are categorised into four types Intensity Position Colour and Beam On the MagicQ there is a window for each of these attribute types Select the required heads then open the required window You can quickly open all the Palette Windows by holding CTRL and pressing the top soft button marked Palettes this opens the windows in the layout below 7 inm bn ee eee S GROUP Mac250 1 2 3 4 5 POSITION me 1 iZi 34 5 P Bej A Ec c HN NM centre far left far right far up far down cH vm relies left tight up down CIRCE aia COLOUR Mac250 1 2 3 4 5 BEAM Mac250 1 2 3 4 5 c Pejcz B scs Eu ielcs C Tece cs pg cene O refe 3 Micele Egjrce es B ice White Red Amber Yellow Green open gobo cone bar fan hat triple ce D Pec a ce icelco E Pe cio ice ee 7 Pe Pcejes Billece es Gatece B1087 ice Cyan Blue Pink uv Magenta dec beam md holes pys cir mag pys cir blue
506. ttributes to the alternate settings FX FX is short for EFFECTS The FX generator enables complex variations to be applied to parameters over time For example a circle FX applied to the position attributes of a moving head causes it to move in a circle Gel Coloured film that is placed in front of lights to modify the colour of the beam The MagicQ stores a Gel colour for each dimmer which makes identification and programming easy Generic A generic dimmer channel A head with a single channel which controls a dimmer from 0 to 100 Grand Master The master fader which controls HTP levels for the entire console Gobo A patterned object placed in front of a light source to modify the shape of the beam Intelligent heads typically contain one or more wheels of gobos Head An intelligent head Include Loading a Cue into the Programmer Intensity An attribute type the attribute of an intelligent head that controls the intensity of the mean Often referred to as the dimmer Keyboard The console includes an external keyboard which connects into a socket on the back panel marked keyboard Keypad The numerical keypad situation to the bottom left of the console The layout of the keypad is similar to that found on standard PC keyboards with the addition of THRU and FULL buttons for quick control of lamp intensities LAN Local Area Network MagicQ PC The PC version of the MagicQ console enables editing and running of shows from PCs Mark C
507. u need to set up the ports in Device Manager Select ChamSys MagicQ and then Connect Make sure you have installed the MagicQ WYSIWYG driver on the WYSIWYG PC MagicQ will not connect to WYSIWYG without it Device Manager EE Device Manager Name Connect on load New ChamSus ChamSus anic Canne Ves niy ChamSys Magi EhamSys Magic Connected e 3 Properties erties RWD UDP Te RWD UDP Test Not Connected P Delete Disconnect Select All Unbind AutoFocus Connect on load The universes in WYSIWYG must be bound to the ChamSys MagicQ device in order for communication to occur with MagicQ View Options A Universe Display Show Details Name PORT Mac500s Source Console ChamSys Magic Pott 01 41 6 2 Running the show Once you have set up the connection in WYSIWYG then you should be able to run the demo show On MagicQ PC use the playback faders to control the Mac500 and Mac600 lamps in the demo show The playback faders are set up to control dimmer colour gobo and position on the different faders MagicQ User Manual 326 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 41 6 3 Using MagicQ PC and WYSIWYG on the same PC When using MagicQ PC and WYSIWYG on the same PC you may find that you constantly have to change between the two windows Try sizing WYSIWYG to the top half of the screen then select the reduced view in MagicQ PC you get a reduced pan
508. ua www chamsys co uk Each macro has a name and a number of channels Up to 10 channels can be controlled by each macro The macro data consists of fields to specify which channels are used C1 to C10 and then the macro step data The macro step data consists of the number of steps followed by data fields The number of steps indicates how many steps are required in the macro normally there are just two steps the initial step to set the correct levels and hold them for a time e g 5 seconds and then a step that returns the channels to their default values The step data is specified in the fields D1 Dx For each step there is a time for the step followed by the values for each of the channels used for the step 23 7 Icons MagicQ supports icons for all programmed items Icons can be turned on in the Window Settings in the Setup Window On MagicQ PC the icon library is automatically included when you upgrade to this version On MagicQ consoles it is necessary to copy the icons all file from the ChamSys web site to the show icons folder on the MagicQ console Icons can be used on Groups Colours Beams Positions Cues Cue Stacks and in the Execute Window To set an icon for a Window item e g a Palette Entry press SHIFT SET This will open the Icon library The Icon library is split into different types of Icons for colours positions and different types of gobos ChamSys is updating the personality libraries to automaticall
509. udio Input must be set to ChamSys Audio Interface The Audio Level defaults to 0 which indicates a full audio range signal is expected To boost the audio signal set the audio level to the maximum value expected between 1 and 255 Parameter 2 select the channels to respond to When set to 0 it uses all 14 audio input channels From 1 to 14 it selects one channel to respond to Value 15 selects the left channels value 16 the right channels The mode determines from which grid edge the audio takes effect The image below shows an audio effect on the internal green yellow red bitmap ne mm um um mm m m Bm m a m um IE m il mm m m mm m am Ramp Horiz and Ramp Vert these perform a ramp across the entire grid in the horizontal or vertical directions FX P1 parameter controls the speed FX P2 controls the crossfade and FX P3 controls the width Wipe Horiz and Wipe Vert these perform a wipe of a colour across the entire grid in the horizontal or vertical directions The colour wiped across the grid is determined by the red green blue colour attributes of the Pixel Map layer It is possible to wipe multiple colours across a grid simultaneously by choosing different colours in sequence When these FX are in use the red green blue attributes do not affect the overall colour of the layer as they would normally MagicQ User Manual 236 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sa www chamsys co uk Not that in older versions o
510. udio parameter 2 should be set to 0 16 8 3 Audio sets BPM When set to Yes then the chase speed of the Cue Stack is set to the timing of the peaks on the specified audio channel The Cue Stack should be set to Chase Timing The Cue Stack must be active for the audio to take effect When this setting is set to Yes the settings Audio controls fader level Audio bumps Go and Audio jumps to Cue Step should be set to No Audio level audio parameter 1 and audio parameter 2 should be set to 0 16 8 4 X Audio jumps to Cue Step Audio jumps Cue Stack enables the level of the specified audio channel to determine which step in the Cue Stack is executed for example if you have a Cue Stack with 10 steps then a level of 096 will execute step 1 10 will execute step 2 whilst a level of 100 will execute step 10 This is very useful if you wish to program different Cues onto LED or media servers The Cue Stack must be active for the audio to take effect When this setting is set to Yes the settings Audio bumps Go and Audio jumps to Cue Step should be set to No If the setting Audio Controls fader level is set to YES then audio level audio parameter 1 and audio parameter 2 will affect the level of the Playback and hence the Cue step chosen 16 8 5 Audio channel This setting specifies the audio channel that the Playback will respond to The ChamSys audio interface supports 7 different frequency bands on two
511. ue A special Cue for preloading LTP values prior to the following Cue Master The Playback Master can be configured to control the HTP level of the Playbacks or the HTP level of Add Swap buttons Merge A method of combining input and output channels The console supports output of any input channels on any output channels Mouse Pointing device used to select items on a screen The MagicQ supports an optional mouse for users who do not wish to use the touch screen Move When Dark A Cue Stack Option that enables automatic pre loading of LTP values for following Cues when heads are at zero intensity Multi Windows MagicQ allows any of the Windows to be moved onto a remote PC using the MagicQ User Manual 351 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qaor Sua www chamsys co uk MagicQ Multi Window PC application Page The MagicQ supports multiple pages of Playbacks The page can be selected through buttons or through the Page Window The MagicQ also supports multiple pages of attributes in the Attr Window and the Beam Window Parameter A value of a function that can be changed Typically used to describe the parameters of an EX such as size and speed Patch The way of setting up the console so that it knows what lights are connected to it The MagicQ supports a complete Window the Patch Window for controlling patching PathPort A protocol for transporting DMX over Ethernet LAN Palette The console s
512. ults essen ener nennen nennen 175 19 7 4 Programmer overrides HTP values seesseeseeeeeeeee ener eene nennen 175 19 75 Programmer overrides EX onte endete epe ct ote y ego i d Heec pro N 175 19 5 6 Highlight mode eee eterne rie ese ee ce Pola po insit eerta p ea tape ed Eee ro ire ved 175 19 737 Pan MOG ss oiia i a AE AEE O REE 176 MagicQ User Manual 11 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 19 7 8 Select Multiple Groups esent ener en erstens nennen nenne 176 19 7 9 Recording to Palettes seecae reta ed erbe pneter t e riget tushupsvaesed tines 176 19 7 10 Record merge does not override times esesseeeeeseeeeeeenre nennen 176 19 7 11 Update Clears Programmer eene riot tice eret ertet eerie do Peace dlc nnn 176 19 8 Keypad Encoder Settings ener iei herd rette pe ctt roti epe E o i dee E EE etre aba 177 19 8 1 Auto enter on keypad intensity set sesssesseesseeseeeeeee enne enne nre entente 177 19 8 2 Select heads on keypad intensity set rennen nennen 177 19 8 3 Select Heads and Palettes from keypad sese 177 19 8 4 Select heads on include cie eterne ecditd ee e do p er eere LRL ed RT ia 177 19 8 5 Keypad always selects heads rene ren rennen nenns 178 19 8 6 Keypad Syntax Theatre Patch een rennen nenn 178 19 5 7 Encoder Mode eniti n ee re thee aeter EL vale enticed eine 178
513. ults and erase console Reset to factory defaults changes settings back to factory settings but does not erase any user data It is recommended that the current show is saved to a known file name before carrying out a factory reset As a consequence of the reset to factory defaults the console will reload the default show Erase console erases all user data and reloads the newest software on the system All show data custom personalities and settings will be erased Ensure all user data is saved before carrying out this action It is now no longer necessary to recalibrate the touch screen after a factory reset MagicQ User Manual 162 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 19 Settings MagicQ supports a large number of options and settings that the user is free to change These settings are divided into two categories show settings and console settings Show settings are settings that the user may wish to change on a show by show basis whereas console settings are associated with the specific console and its connectivity to external devices Show Settings Mode Settings not Product amp Country Keypad amp Encoder Settings Windows Settings Programming Settings Playback Settings Cue Stack Settings Cue Storage Settings Media Server Settings Console Settings DMX I O Settings Wing Settings Monitor Settings Mode Settings Product and Country Network Settings MIDI SMPTE Settings Port Set
514. um fields in which case the actual minimum or maximum value is output 23 5 Palettes View MagicQ User Manual 216 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk This view defines the default palettes that are loaded when the head is patched Palettes can be set up at any time regardless of whether heads of the type have been patched The palette data is immediately available for patching new heads When you have changed Palettes in the Head Editor you can regenerate palettes for heads that are already patched by using the Regen Palettes soft button INSERT IMPORT PALETTES VIEW GENERAL VIEW RANGES CAPTURE CHOOSE NEW PALETTE HEAD HEAD HEAD EDITOR Martin Mac250md4 hed Type Name Chans r Chan 1 Level 1 Chan2 Level2 Chan 3 Level 3 Chan 4 White 003 Colour E 1 M 55 H H 1 L 331 We p E jon pes J 95y e p E een es 7 _ __ be p E en Te 7 L 1 L 1 101 For each Palettes you specify the type press Enter to swap between the types the name and the number of channels that make up the Palette Then for each channel you specify the channel number and the level for that channel Palettes can be added using the Insert soft button and deleted using the Remove Button press twice to Remove The Icon field is the icon displayed in the relevant Windows and soft buttons 23 5 1 Importing Palettes Palet
515. upported when connected to a MagicQ Wing with encoders iPhone iPad Android Remote Audio control and playback synchronisation with Winamp Note that the MagicDMX interface does not lift these restrictions as this is a low cost interface intended for learning how to program the system MagicQ User Manual 202 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 21 Automation 21 1 Scheduled Events MagicQ now timed events for trigger Cues at specific times of the day or days of the week Any Cue ina Cue Stack can be set to trigger based on a scheduled event rather than following on from the previous Cue This enables time of day and date based events to be run automatically Scheduled events are supported on MagicQ consoles and on MagicQ PC when connected to a MagicQ Wing To use this feature set the Halt field in the Cue Stack Window to Sched Double click to change the field Then enter the time in the Wait field You can enter a full time 19 30 5 for 19 hours 30 minutes and 5 seconds Or 10 0 to have the event occur every hour at 10 minutes past the hour Or 0 for every minute 21 1 1 Dates and days of the week It is also possible to set dates Dates are entered into the macro field starting with Z and ending with Z For example to have an event on the 24 December 2005 enter Z24 12 2005Z You can also specify particular days of the week using the characters A to G where A is Monday B is Tuesday C is Wedne
516. upports Position Colour and Beam palettes Entries in each palette can be used to quickly store and recall your favourite looks Playback A fader or button which activates a Cue Stack The console supports physical playbacks faders and buttons and also virtual playbacks through the Playbacks window Position An attribute type attributes of an intelligent head that modify the position of the beam are categorised as position attributes Pan and Tilt are Pan Lo and Tilt Lo are normally the only attributes of this type Programmer The functional area of the MagicQ where show data is set up before it is recorded into Cues Record Record button is used to record items into memory Record Merge A method of merging the Programmer contents into an existing Cue Record Remove A method of removing the Programmer contents into an existing Cue Snapshot Loading the current outputs into the Programmer Spread Offset between heads in an FX Stack Short for Cue Stack Stack Store Short for Cue Stack Store Touch Screen The display supports a touch screen enabling functions of the console to be accessed by simply pressing the screen in the appropriate place Universe A collection of 512 DMX channels USB Universal Serial Bus a serial bus available on all new PCs and lap tops since around 1996 USB stick A USB device for storing show data and for transferring data to or from PCs Views The console support several views for
517. ution hold SHIFT and turn the appropriate encoder 7 7 2 Using Attribute Banks Attribute Banks is a traditional way to categorise attributes The attributes are divided up into banks of two attributes each and then can be accessed using two rotary encoders Select the required heads and then press CTRL and the FX was ATTR button to open the Attribute Window On the MagicQ console the attribute banks are supported through the Attribute Window In this Window the top soft buttons are used to select the attribute bank The leftmost soft button toggles between the two possible pages of attribute banks Page Bank Attribute 1 Attribute 2 Attribute Type MagicQ User Manual 76 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk 1 1 Dimmer Intensity 1 2 Shutter Tris Beam 1 3 Pan Tilt Position 1 4 Colour 1 Colour 2 Colour 1 5 Focus Zoom Beam 1 6 Gobo 1 Gobo 2 Beam 1 7 Rotate 1 Rotate 2 Beam 1 8 Fx 1 Fx 2 Beam 1 9 Cyan Magenta Colour 1 10 Yellow Col Mix Colour 2 1 Control 1 Control 2 Beam 2 2 Control 3 Control 4 Beam 2 3 Position 2 4 Colour 3 Colour 4 Colour 2 5 Frost 1 Frost 2 Beam 2 6 Gobo 3 Gobo 4 Beam 2 7 Rotate 3 Rotate 4 Beam 2 8 Fx 3 Fx 4 Beam 2 9 Fx 5 Fx 6 Beam 2 20 Fx 7 Fx 8 Beam The two large rotary encoders are then used to modify attribute 1 and attribute 2 respectively Alternatively use the touch screen to select a range value for the attribute For indexed attributes such as colour wheels and gobo wheels
518. verses Shows that only use universes 1 to 6 can to be loaded into consoles set to either 6 12 18 or 32 universes MagicQ MQ100 MQ200 MQ300 consoles purchased before March 2006 require a hardware upgrade to safely run 12 universes this increases the processor power to guarantee performance MagicQ MQ50 supports only 6 universes MagicQ Pro consoles support 18 Universes MagicQ Pro 2010 consoles support 32 Universes ChamSys does not guarantee performance if consoles are set to support higher numbers of universes than the hardware supports MagicQ User Manual 161 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk MagicQ PC can support 32 universes performance will depend upon the specification of the PC Latest PCs can easily support 32 universes fully loaded 18 15 MagicQ profiles MagicQ supports different profiles a profile is the entire set up of the console including the console specific settings like IP address media settings etc and the show file This enables the console to be used to control different venues with easy swapping between venues Profiles are loaded and saved from the Setup Window in View Settings press SHIFT and LOAD PROFILE or SAVE PROFILE Profiles are saved to mpr files in the show folder note that profile does not contain the show data it only references it so if you are backing up you need to store both shw files and mpr files It is possible to set the console to request pro
519. w chamsys co uk Wireless Network Connection Properties fx General wireless Networks Advanced Connect using HE NETGEAR MA111 802 11b Wireless USB Adapter This connection uses the following items El Client for Microsoft Networks Ir File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks vi Bl QoS Packet Scheduler Internet Protocol TCP IP Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected A dialog box should appear with the title Internet Protocol TCP IP properties MagicQ User Manual Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server 320 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk You will be presented with a radio button choice between Obtain an IP address automatically and Use the following IP address Choose Use the following IP address Enter the IP address e g 192 9 200
520. w chamsys co uk P lt Page no gt Change page page no of 0 means next page V View no Open view window layout W Enable Enable disable time code generation 1 for enable 0 for disable Q Time code Set current time code used for time code generation Playbacks can be the master playbacks 1 to 10 or the wing playbacks 1 1 to 1 24 2 1 to 2 24 etc Playbacks can be playbacks with faders or virtual playbacks playbacks on non fitted wings Multiple playbacks can be selected using and THRU For example to activate playback 18 on wing 1 A1 18 To press GO on playbacks 3 to 5 G3THRUS Multiple commands can be put in a Cue Stack macro e g to set the level of playback 6 to 6096 C6L60 When setting Cues to Timecode for the first time the initial Timecode value is set to the last Timecode value in the Cue Stack 1 second Added new Cue Stack macro syntax for releasing the playback that is running the macro the R macro now supports the parameter O to release itself i e RO The G macro optionally supports two parameters separated by a The first parameter is the playback the second is the Cue ID to GO For example G5 6 will GO Cue Id 6 on Playback 5 13 14 Timeline MagicQ supports a timeline facility for viewing the contents of Cues in a Cue Stack in a timeline format Open the Timeline Window using the Timeline Button on consoles this is the 4 spare button next to the Media button Use encoders A
521. w file whilst slave consoles synchronise to that show data Programming changes can be made on any of the consoles with the show file on the master being updated and then all other systems synchronised to the master MagicQ enables multiple consoles to be used on a network and shows on the separate consoles to be merged together and split up again Zoning of universes enables consoles to be working on different universes all within the same network MagicQ does not currently support programming by multiple users on a single console MagicQ does now support programming of a single show file from multiple consoles 28 1 Network addresses and host names Each MagicQ console and MagicQ PC system should be configured with a different IP address and a different host name On MagicQ consoles the IP address and host name are set up in the Setup Window on MagicQ PC systems the IP address and host name are set up in Windows For example a typical MagicQ network might look like this Ethernet Switch IP address 2 0 0 1 IP address 2 0 0 2 Subnet mask 255 0 0 0 ArtNet gt DMX Subnet mask 255 0 0 0 IP address auto assigned MagicQ User Manual 257 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Q aor Sua www chamsys co uk 28 2 Checking IP addresses Ping Test MagicQ includes a ping test for resolving network problems At the command line type ping followed by the IP address e g to test network connection to IP address 2 0 0 3 ping 2 0 0 3 There is a short
522. when values are tracking through a Cue Stack the Outputs Window will show the Cue that originated that value 13 4 8 Copying Cues in tracking mode When in tracking mode performing an unlinked copy of a Cue in a Cue Stack now copies the entire state of the Cue not just the specific cue values When copying multiple Cues from one Cue Stack to another Cue Stack the first Cue will be copied entire state with the following cues being just the changes If Cues are copied linked in tracking mode then they will always be just the change values not the entire state MagicQ User Manual 119 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk When using Theatre Tracking mode Hog II Warp mode and Film mode MagicQ defaults the Cue Storage option Copy mode unlinked linked to unlinked 13 4 4 Blocking Unblocking Cues In tracking mode it is possible to block and unblock Cues from the Cue Stack Window and from the Cue Window through soft buttons Blocking a Cue has the effect of adding to that Cue all the state information that would track through into that Cue if the Cue Stack was executed up to and including that Cue When a Cue is blocked it becomes a hard Cue i e if edits are made to previous Cues then the edits will not affect the blocked Cue Unblocking a Cue has the effect of removing from the Cue all the state information that would track through into that Cue if the Cue Stack was executed up to and including that Cue Whe
523. www chamsys co uk 4 4 Enabling Console Outputs To enable output of channel data select the DMX IO VIEW in the Setup Window This windows enables modification of the inputs and outputs for the 18 universes The MagicQ Pro consoles support DMX directly from the console or via an external ArtNet to DMX convertor VIEW SETTINGS VIEW SET RELEASE V RESET SYSTEM V 1 0 UNIVERSES CONTROL CONTROL VISUAL Play Mode SETUP show capture sbk Uni Status Out Type Out Uni In Type In Uni Visualiser Hot takeover Test Copy ArtNet Art D ArtNet Arto None No No No sed ume ant aera cated _ ame an2 Aer A7 Prog Mods ifo Aer ars e Js Custom a Disabled AmNet At5 AmNet At5 osse ume e Ae 7 Oeste wwe jas Aa ts Pests wwe Jas Ma Ms Josse nme A10 Jie Jo ore Emma ume Jani ama jur Ne jENossnes ume Janta ami a Emotes ue arta fme ns Nee 5 Emm Jame CNN C7 NN TCR NN I NN CNN me a mo Ama puo None Ns Ns Ne Esser ua mz awe ez Ne No Je No Normal Safe Ni ormal T l z 5 e PT i b o o axis one Set Mode 4 4 1 Using Direct DMX Outputs The MagicQ Pro consoles and MagicQ Xpert consoles have DMX outputs directly on the rear panel Older MagicQ consoles can be upgraded to have DMX on the rear panel via
524. y and after the Programmer has been cleared all the channel levels are set to zero and all the channels are flagged as inactive When a channel is changed to be non zero the channel level for that entry in the table is set to the new level and the channel is flagged as active The console outputs any channels that are marked as active in the Programmer at highest priority 1 e they over ride all other playbacks To clear the Programmer press CLEAR All channels will be deactivated and all HTP channels will be set to zero It is possible to force all LTP channels to zero by using CTRL CLEAR The programmer can be set into a Blind mode using the BLIND button so that the contents of the programmer do not affect the output of the console This allows programming adjustments to be made during a live show and special effects to be busked in MagicQ User Manual 25 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk 2 11 Help The Help Window enables the operating manual to be viewed on line Press the HELP button at any time to open the Help Window To close the window press the CLOSE button Use the scroll encoder the cursor keys and the hyperlinks to navigate through the manual You can go directly to a particular section using the top soft buttons e g CONTENTS or QUICK START You can search through the manual by typing some text and pressing SEARCH To search for the same words again press SEARCH AGAIN MagicQ User Manual
525. y back in a theatre style using the GO STOP buttons by pressing the CUE TIMING and CHASE TIMING soft buttons in the Cue Stack View Options Window to modify the timing mode 13 3 Cue Timing When using Cue Timing the timing of each cue is determined by individual Wait Delay and Fade times for each Cue in the Cue Stack The MagicQ can execute multiple Cues at one time for example a Cue Stack could have one Cue that fades in MAC500s in green whilst another Cue fades in HPEs in red The Wait time affects when execution of the Cue is started The Delay and Fade times affect how each individual Cue is executed The Wait time can be set to Follow in this case the Cue is executed when the last Cue finishes i e Cues are executed sequentially Each Cue has a Next Cue by default this is set up to be the following Cue in the Cue Stack You can change the Next Cue to be any of the Cues in the Cue Stack This enables loops and sequences to be set up The Next Cue for the last Cue in the Cue Stack defaults to being the first Cue in the Cue Stack 13 3 1 Cue Timing Example To illustrate the above Cue Timing consider a Cue Stack with three Cues When the Cue Stack starts executing it executes the first Cue using its Delay and Fade times As soon as the first Cue has been started regardless of whether the first Cue is in a Delay Fade or Complete stage the next Cue in the Cue Stack will be examined to determined its Wait time If the Halt fi
526. y become the last active playback until the button is released The type of channel used by the console is determined by the personality used to patch the dimmer or intelligent head Playbacks can be set so that all channels controlled by the Playback act in a LTP way thus allowing Intensity channels to be overridden by a single Playback 2 3 Cues The console stores lighting states as Cues each Cue stores e Level information e Timing information e FX information The Cue stores level information for each of the channels recorded into it If the channel level was set using a Palette then a reference to the Palette is also stored so that the Cue can keep track of changes to the Palette ADV VIEW CHOOSE PREV NEXT CLOSE VIEW TRACKING CUE CUE CUE WINDOW OPTIONS FX Senmente The Cue stores timing information for the channels that have been recorded into it Two types of timing information are stored General Times Stored for each type of attribute Int In Int Out Position Colour Beam Individual Times Stored on an individual channel basis The Cue stores FX information for each of the FX that has been recorded into the Cue The FX information includes the type of FX the heads that the FX is applied to and the FX parameters for each head MagicQ User Manual 23 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd Qon Sua www chamsys co uk Each Cue has a number e g Q1 and an optional name 2 4 Cue Stacks Cue Stacks
527. y include icons however this process will take some time The most popular heads will be updated first Users can update personalities themselves in the Head Editor by selecting icons from the icon library 23 8 User Icons It is possible to load user icons from bitmap and jpeg files In file manager click on the jpg or bmp files you wish to make into icons The icons will appear under the User icons icon class At this time user icons are not stored in the show file so when changing MagicQ systems it will be necessary to load the user icons onto each MagicQ console MagicQ PC system We would be pleased to add any user icons to the main icon library please send them to support chamsys co uk 23 9 Personalities with multiple elements MagicQ includes support for personalities with multiple elements e g RGB pixels so that they can be patched in one action rather than patching the individual elements separately When these fixtures are patched they continue to be controlled as separate heads with all the associated benefits The personality simple contains a count of the number of elements MagicQ User Manual 218 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd www chamsys co uk REGEN RELOAD CHOOSE NEW SAVE SAVE HEAD HEAD EDITOR James Thomas Eng PL1044 EX61 hed LO inn HE Parameter Value Personalities that consist of a single general element in addition to a repeated element are also supported In these cases two dif
528. y saves a backup of your show to disk you will see it show AutoS in the Status Display It uses the same show name but with the file extension sbk It is a good idea to save your show to different file names so that you have various points you can back track to if things go wrong For example save the show as myshow patch shw after you have patched and then as myshow final shw after you have finished programming When you shut down the console through the QUIT soft button in the Setup Window the console automatically saves a backup copy of your show with a sbk extension When you subsequently restart the console this file will be re loaded This ensures that the console starts up as it was when the QUIT soft button was pressed The Setup Window indicates when the show has not been saved or autosaved for over 10 minutes 18 3 1 Show file name auto increment MagicQ User Manual 156 Version 1 5 7 5 ChamSys Ltd ChamSys www chamsys co uk MagicQ supports auto incrementing show file names To start an auto incrementing show file save a show file with the last part of the name set as 001 When you next press SAVE SHOW MagicQ will suggest saving to _002 Press ENTER to accept or edit the name to save to a different name Note that in order to avoid accidentally saving to incrementing files all 3 digits must be present _1 or _10 is not supported When the number _999 is reached MagicQ will not auto increment and will request a n

ChamSys Ltd

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents